Home

CNC 8055 T

1. b c d e f 97 98 99 100 10 102 g h i j k 1 103 05 106 10 108 m n n o p q 109 Ji 110 164 111 011 113 r 5 t u 114 115 16JC117 C11 119 E j o ES ES 614 o o a 232 X Rs Ca e 64512 64513 64514 4515 64516 64517 64518 47 52 53 54 NC 61452 33 34 44 SS 42 49 50 51 x BN 62 60 59 58 NS 43 45 48 46 N 4 N N 6544 5 65456 65455 65454 65460 65458 65462 wx _ SPINDLE SPEED CX Es 13 LOGIC OUTPUTS FOR KEY CODE STATUS FAGOR R562 R562 R562 R562 R562 R562
2. 8 Angle arid one cartesian coordinat 11 Rotary m 12 boron 13 Defiipor al The 7 13 Ding wo COS 14 4 REFERENCE SYSTEMS 4 1 4 2 4 3 4 4 4 4 1 4 4 2 4 5 I1 12 SANE 1 Machine reference Or P4 as 2 Programming with respect to machine zero G53 sese 3 Presetting of coordinates and zero Offsels eerte b ct teca 4 Coordinate preset and limitation of the S value 692 6 1 Y Polacongin 93 Lus 9 iii 5 PROGRAMMING BY ISO CODE al Preparatory bap top usa Aa 2 3 2 Foodie T 4 Sc Feedrate in mm min or inches min G94 eee ipte kar Reine 4 3522 ac eS Te POIDS us oos nuc Gr OE RS Un QU ER dU 3 3 3 Spindle speed and spindle orientation S aei re ar tit rebar ES pe 6 5 3 1 Constant Sr ace Speed Lice been RE MINER MR NE ARM IR NER UIS 7 S32 Sp
3. MWe SPINDLE FEED B13 14 R562 R562 SPEED B22 R562 B29 B30 R562 R562 14 A KEYS INHIBITING CODES FAGOR E BO R502 R502 R502 EUER R502 R502 R502 R502 SPINDLI Wx B13 B14 R502 R502 SPEED B22 R502 B29 B30 R502 R502 15 PROGRAMMING ASSISTANCE SYSTEM PAGES These pages can be displayed by means of the high level mnemonic They all belong to the CNC system and are used as help pages for their respective functions 2 GLOSSARY HELP Page 1000 Preparatory functions 00 09 Page 1001 Preparatory functions G10 G19 Page 1002 Preparatory functions G20 G44 Page 1003 Preparatory functions G53 G59 Page 1004 Preparatory functions G60 G69 Page 1005 Preparatory functions G70 079 Page 1006 Preparatory functions G80 G89 Page 1007 Preparatory functions G90 G99 Page 1008 Miscellaneous auxiliary functions M Page 1009 Miscellaneous M functions with the symbol for next page Page 1010 Coincides with 250 of the directory if it exists Page 1011 Coincides with 251 of the directory
4. NNNS ue Eod dg ol ls uu 7 SS M WOd Y AN AAN TPO9MO1 Defines the X coordinate of the initial point of the groove It must be programmed in absolute values and in the active units radius or diameter Defines the Z coordinate of the initial point of the groove It must be programmed in absolute values Defines the X coordinate of the final point of the groove It must be programmed in absolute and in radius or diameter depending on the active units Defines the Z coordinate of the final point of the groove Defines the grooving pass in radius Ifnot programmed the CNC will assume the width of the cuttter NOSEW of the active tool and if programmed with a zero value the CNC will issue the corresponding error message Defines the safety distance and it must have a positive value in radius If not programmed a value of 0 will be assumed Defines the dwell in hundredths of a second after each penetration until the withdrawal begins If not programmed a value of 0 is assumed Page 56 Chapter 9 Section CANNEDCYCLES GROOVING ALONG Z AXIS G89 Basic operation The whole grooving operation is done with the same pass being this equal to or smaller than C Each grooving pass is carried out in the following manner The penetration is done at programmed feedrate F The withdra
5. aceon 8 220 FParnpiopam MOJE 9 324 display SROUE es er redes ba 9 225 Following orror display mode uu uoi p Re DAE GE 12 32b Lserdisplay csse RUP ERES ERE ERIS CRURA EAR IR ERR UR 12 524 Ex cution ume dI oy Mode iiec 13 3 3 jp eee 15 3 4 Tool LE 16 3 5 rin MMC 18 19 252 DRPIAy Rer 22 22522 23 354 MEC acini 24 33 3 Clear 26 3506 Deactivate ts 26 257 27 3 6 qu 28 iii 4 EDIT 4 1 4 1 1 4 1 2 4 1 3 4 1 4 4 1 4 1 4 1 4 2 4 1 4 3 4 1 4 4 4 1 4 5 4 1 4 6 4 1 4 7 4 1 4 8 4 2 4 3 4 4 4 5 4 6 4 7 4 8 4 9 4 10 4 10 1 4 10 2 5 JOG 3 1 5 1 1 3 1 4 34 3 31 3 3 1 3 2 3 1 5 3 3 2 iso mS 2 im CNC T 2 Teach Igi mE m 3 Interactive ento Lease pedes dL be de V 4 Prone editor E 5 O
6. 150 650 G01 G90 X800 Z650 F150 The programmed feedrate F may vary between 0 and 120 viathe switch located on the Control Panel of the CNC or by selecting between 0 and 255 from the PLC or via the DNC or the program Nevertheless the CNC has general machine parameter MAXFOVR to limit maximum variation of the feedrate Itis possible to program several positioning only axes ina linear interpolation block The CNC will calculate the feedrate for these positioning only axes so they reach the target coordinate at the same time as the interpolating axes Function 01 is modal and incompatible with G00 G02 603 G33 and G75 Function G01 can be programmed as Gl On power up after executing M02 M30 or after EMERGENCY or RESET the CNC assumes code or G01 depending on how general machine parameter IMOVE has been set Chapter 6 Section Page PATHCONTROL LINEARINTERPOLATION 3 G01 6 3 CIRCULAR INTERPOLATION 602 603 There two ways of carrying out circular interpolation G02 Clockwise circular interpolation G03 Counter clockwise circular interpolation Movements programmed after G02 and G03 are executed in the form of a circular path and at the programmed feedrate Clockwise G02 and counter clockwise G03 definitions are established according to the system of coordinates shown below This system of coordinates refers to the movement of the
7. Chapter 3 Section Page PROGRAMMING OF 7 AXES AND COORDINATESYSTEMS COORDINATES 3 5 2 POLAR COORDINATES In the event of the presence of circular elements or angular dimensions the coordinates of the different points on the plane 2 axes at the same time it may be easier to express them in polar coordinates The reference point is called Polar Origin and this will be the origin of the Polar Coordinate System A point on this system would be defined by The RADIUS R the distance between the polar origin and the point The ANGLE Q formed by the abscissa axis and the line which joins the polar origin with the point in degrees The values R and Q are absolute or incremental depending on whether you are working with G90 or G91 and their programming format will be 5 5 Q 5 5 No negative values can be given to the radius it must always be positive The programming of negative R values is permitted when programming in incremental coordinates but always provided that the resulting value assigned to the radius is positive If a Q value over 3600 is programmed the module will be taken after dividing it by 360 Thus Q420 is the same a Q60 and Q 240 is the same as Q 60 Page Chapter 3 Section 8 AXESANDCOORDINATESYSTEMS PROGRAMMINGOF COORDINATES Programming example assuming that the Polar Origin is located at the Coordinate Origin a Absolute coo
8. 15 Manual control of the pU SUBARU 16 6 TABLES 6 1 52 6 3 6 4 6 5 6 5 1 6 6 6 7 Va incur dri de 2 E E A E T 3 Tool N E R 4 u E a T O E E TE T 6 Tool corn cidem mp 10 How to edit the tool geometry table e eta PIRE sede eta aded 13 Global and local parameter tables iui arbeit deb biete 14 m cT 15 7 UTILITIES burn 1 Lurectorn orte exta deviees 3 7 2 COPY e ai 4 11 3 4 74 Dig 5 7 3 6 7 6 Change date 7 8 DNC 8 1 Serene Hom errr rr erent tr 1 8 2 jo v HH 2 9 PLC 9 1 re E O A DEC E E ceu 2 9 2 E E A EE 9 9 3 I NR TT T 10 9 3 1 Monitoring with the PLC in operation and with the PLC stopped 17 9 4 MANENTE D ES 19 95 Peau quo cii oer D Tc 19 9 6 Env auum TC 19 9 7 Restore PrO MEET 20 9 8 A coa p dte cr N S O E E E 20 9
9. 67 10 PROBING 10 1 Probe M 1 10 2 lu gupav wn ljads Dl 2 10 3 Tool calibrahpn canned yell orreen iruinarri aodio 3 10 4 Probe ealibranon canned eyele uiu ee dui 9 10 5 Part measuring and tool offset correction canned cycle along X axis 13 10 6 Part measuring and tool offset correction canned cycle along Z axis 16 11 PROGRAMMING IN HIGH LEVEL LANGUAGE 11 1 Lozica wai t m LU TI TITIUS 1 Hg eser aa aod iste Ds eee 2 11 123 IN mnenc3 CODSDIDDS UAE 3 UNE 3 11 2 p ub IM dU MEL uL I M 4 11 2 1 Generalpurpose parameters or vartables iiie reete caia et nbn Re EY aU bI aas 6 112 3 Variables associated with tools FREIE aa a 8 112 3 associated with Zoro ias vk HR VF S eU VE E 10 11 2 4 Variables associated with machine parameters 12 112 3 Variables associated with Work ZONES Lisa Pe RES REPRE PRU ERES VETE TS 13 11 2 6 Variables associated with Ieedrates iiis re rtr 14 12 7 Variables associated with coordinates Ue RET db Rie ua 16 11
10. There is no subroutine associated with G74 There is no tool of the same family to replace it This command can only be executed in the user channel This or M function must be alone Tool not defined in tool table Tool not defined Tool offset does not exist Tool TO does not exist The radius has not been programmed for G15 30 The Spindle cannot be referenced homed 39 The tool is not in the tool magazine 30 The tracing module has no voltage 47 Program subroutine number 1 thru 9999 si Program windows 0 thru 25 16 Program G16 axis axis 4 Program G22 K 1 2 3 4 5 0 1 2 4 Program G52 axis 5 5 26 Program G72 55 5 or axes 4 Program G77 axes 2 thru 6 Program 399 sd iuuenes ue Program work zone K1 K2 or K4 4 H Radius comp not possible when positioning rotary axis 37 Range rrr sire rne a39 Read only variable EN Repeated information TT Repeated subroutine di Repositioning not allowed 25 RET not associated to a subroutine
11. The G16 G17 G18 and G19 functions are modal and incompatible among themselves The G16 function should be programmed on its own within a block LESS On power up after executing M02 M30 or after EMERGENCY or RESET the CNC will assume that the plane defined by the general machine parameter as IPLANE is the work plane TPO34 Page Chapter 3 Section 4 AXESANDCOORDINATESYSTEMS PLANESELECTION G16 G17 G18 G19 3 3 DIMENSIONING PART MILLIMETERS G71 INCHES G70 The CNC allows you to enter units of measurement with the programming either in millimeters or inches It has a general machine parameter INCHES to define the unit of measurement of the CNC However these units of measurement can be changed at any time in the program Two functions are supplied for this purpose G70 Programming in inches G71 Programming in millimeters Depending on whether G70 or G71 has been programmed the CNC assumes the corresponding set of units for all the blocks programmed from that moment on The G70 and G71 functions are modal and are incompatible The CNC allows the programming of figures from 0 0001 to 99999 9999 with or without sign when it works in millimeters G71 This is called format 5 4 or from 0 00001 to 3937 00787 with or without sign if it is programmed in inches G70 This is called format 4 5 However and to simplify the instructions we can say that the CN
12. T a NA Chapter 8 Section Page TOOLCOMPENSATION TOOLRADIUS 9 COMPENSATIONSECTIONS Page Chapter 8 Section TOOLRADIUS 10 TOOLCOMPENSATION COMPENSATIONSECTIONS 8 4 CANCELLING TOOL RADIUS COMPENSATION Tool radius compensation is cancelled by using function G40 It should be remembered that cancelling radius compensation G40 can only be done in a block in which a straight line movement is programmed G00 or G01 If G40 is programmed while functions G02 or G03 are active the CNC displays the corresponding error message The following pages show different cases of cancelling tool radius compensation in which the programmed path is represented by a solid line and the compensated path with a dotted line Chapter 8 Section Page TOOLCOMPENSATION CANCELLING TOOLRADIUS 11 COMPENSATION STRAIGHT STRAIGHT path 087 0 1 Page Chapter 8 Section 12 TOOL COMPENSATION CANCELLING TOOL RADIUS COMPENSATION CURVED STRAIGHT path 0 1 Chapter 8 Section Page TOOLCOMPENSATION RADIUSCOMPENSATION 13 G40 G41 G42 8 5 TEMPORARY TOOL RADIUS CANCELLATION WITH G00 Whenever the CNC detects a transition from G01 G02 G03 or G33 to 600 it temporarily cancels tool radius compensation in such a way that the tool will not exceed the line perpendicu
13. If the first line does not exist The CNC will display it with an empty comment and with the modifiable M and executable X attributes When the format of the first line is wrong the CNC does not modify it but it displays it with the comment 9 The file can be modified or deleted from the CNC or from the PC Itis the wrong format when the comment has more than 20 characters acomma is missing for separating the attributes the attributes have a strange character Chapter 1 Section Page OVERVIEW 5 12 CONNECTION The CNC offers as optional feature the possibility of working in DNC Distributed Numerical Control enabling communication between the CNC and a computer to carry out the following functions Directory and delete commands Transfer of programs and tables between the CNC and a computer Remote control of the machine The ability to supervise the status of advanced DNC systems 1 3 COMMUNICATION PROTOCOL VIA DNC OR PERIPHERAL DEVICE This type of communication enables program and table transfer commands plus the organization of CNC directories such as the Computer Directory for copying deleting programs etc to be done either from the CNC or the computer When you want to transfer files it is necessary to follow this protocol The symbol will be used to start the file followed by the program comment optional o
14. Warning The Key variable at the CNC may be written only via the user channel 77 X C HIGH LEVEL PROGRAMMING XL DISPLAY STATEMENTS Section 12 2 ERROR whole number error text Stops execution of program and displays indicated error MSG message Displays indicated message DGWZ expression 1 expression 4 Define the graphics display area ENABLING DISABLING STATEMENTS Section 12 3 ESBLK and DSBLK The CNC executes all the blocks which are found between ESBLK and DSBLK as if they were a single block ESTOP and DSTOP Enable ESTOP and disable DSTOP of the Stop key and the external Stop signal PLC EFHOLDandDFHOLD Enable EFHOLD and disable DFHOLD of the Feed Hold input PLC FLOW CONTROLLING STATEMENTS Section 12 4 N expression Causes a jump within the same program to the block defined by label N expression RPT N expression N expression Repeats the execution of the part of a program existing between two blocks defined by means of labels N expression IF condition lt action1 gt ELSE lt action2 gt Analyzes the given condition which must be a comparative expression If the condition is true result equals 1 lt action1 gt will be executed otherwise result equals 0 lt action2 gt will be executed SUBROU
15. 3 Nn 9 3 S S i X x NANN SE 2 BS Y 5 o as c X c om gt SS gt B e o 3 Sa S 24 95 g gt Ew E 2 o 5 50 SHR Fo gt 2 SG i lt 5 5 ans a g C SD EE A A Se Og 46 of 5 o gt 3 ao 5 gt gt gt L Go exo s 4 poo See ee as Oe 52 5 ae nw mA or o OC dc ao m E 209 so ug EE ae yar Oa o a S AS 60 50 Ss 5 Os So dud i d g g B c a0 A arr o9 o Raw SE SE 5 Try 98 g5 9835 EF 9 v KWo oO lt B Sb B Bb B 92 cm KW Www e e66 5 5 oO o gt ABE lt 2 A pou 4 wn in 4i N N N A Page 17 Section STOCKREMOVALCANNED CYCLEALONGZ AXIS G69 9 CANNEDCYCLES Chapter L 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 When programming D witha value other than 0 the cutter withdraws at a 45 angle up to the safety distance left drawing When programming D with a value the exit path is the same as the entry path This may be interesting for grooving complex profiles to use these cycles on cylindrical grinders etc When not programming D th
16. PERIODIC MODULE This section shows the time maximum minimum and average that it takes to execute the periodic module of the PLC Italsoshowsthe period assigned to this module by means of the directive instruction PE t This period indicates how frequently the periodic module will be executed every t milliseconds Italso showsthe watchdog time for this module selected by the PLC machine parameter WDGPER STATUS Provides information on the PLC program status indicating whether it is compiled or not and whether it is stopped or in execution When the PLC does not have its own CPU integrated into CPU CNC it will also indicate the time that the CNC s CPU dedicates to the PLC This value Will defined by the PLC machine parameter CPUTIME RAM MEMORY This section indicates the system s RAM memory available for the exclusive use of the PLC installed and it also indicates how much free memory there is Theobject program executable is obtained when compiling the source program and is the one executed by the PLC This section shows the date when it was generated and the RAM memory space it occupies size MEMORY CARD A This section also shows the date the PLC program PLC PRG was saved into the Memkey Card and its size SOURCE PROGRAM This section indicates the date when it was last edited and its size The PLC source program is stored in the CNC s RAM memory Page Chapter 9 Secti
17. 9 9 STATISTICS This option shows the PLC memory distribution the execution time of the various PLC modules the PLC program status and the date when it was edited PLC IN EXECUTION 11 50 14 GENERAL CYCLE TIME ms RAM MEMORY bytes Minimum Cycle 1 Installed 65536 Maximum cle 32 Free 60528 Average Cycle 19 Object program Date 29 09 1988 Watchdog 65535 D Size PERIODIC MODULE TIME ms Minimum Cycle MEMORY CARD A Maximum Cycle DOM Program Saved iro ue ux ane 03 0888 Watchdog TIRE STATUS Execution IN PROGRESS SOURCE PROGRAM Compiled SI Date 20 09 1998 Integrated into CPU CNC 1 32 Size 3893 CAP INS MM Ee C e C re 7 GENERAL CYCLE This section shows the time maximum minimum and average it takes the PLC to execute a program cycle This cycle includes Updating the resources with the values of the physical inputs and internal CNC variables Executing both the main cycle PRG and the periodic module Updating the internal CNC variables and the physical outputs with the resource variables Copying the resources into their corresponding images This section also shows the watchdog time selected by the PLC machine parameter WDGPRG Chapter 9 Section Page PLC STATISTICS 21
18. DETECTED During execution CAUSE The upper limits G21 of the work zone defined are equal to or less than its lower limits G20 SOLUTION The upper limits G21 of the work zone must always be greater than its lower limits G20 1099 Do not program a slaved axis DETECTED During execution CAUSE While working with polar coordinates a movement has been programmed which implies moving an axis which is slaved to another one SOLUTION movements in polar coordinates are carried out on the main axes of the work plane Therefore the axes defining a plane cannot be slaved to each other or to a third axis To free the axes program G78 1100 Spindle travel limit overrun DETECTED During execution CAUSE An attempt has been made to exceed the physical travel limits of the spindle Consequently the PLC activates the spindle marks LIMIT S or LIMIT S LIMIT S2 or LIMIT S2 when working with the second spindle 1101 Spindle locked DETECTED During execution CAUSE The CNC tries to output the analog voltage to the drive while the spindle input SERVOSON is still low The error may come up due to an error in the PLC program where this signal is treated wrong or maybe the value of the spindle parameter DWELL P17 is too low ERROR TROUBLESHOOTING MANUAL 41 8055T CNC ERGO 3 1102 Spindle following error limit overrun DETECTED During execution CAUSE While the spindle
19. UTILITIES to manipulate user symbols and screens edit copy delete etc GRAPHIC ELEMENTS to insert graphic elements in the selected symbol or screen TEXTS to insert texts in the selected symbol or screen MODIFICATIONS to modify the selected symbol or screen Page Chapter 10 Section SCREENEDITOR 10 1 UTILITIES The various options available in this mode are DIRECTORY To display the directory of user screens and symbols that are stored in the Memkey Card CARD A or in external devices through the serial lines Select the desired device and directory The CNC shows the size in bytes of each user screen page and symbol COPY To make copies within the Memkey Card CARD A orbetweenthe CARD A and the external devices Examples to copy screen page 5 from the Memkey Card to serial line 2 COPY PAGE 5 IN SERIAL LINE2 DNC to copy screen page 50 from serial line 2 into the Memkey Card COPY SERIALLINE2 DNC IN PAGE 50 ENTER to copy symbol 15 as symbol 16 within the Memkey Card COPY SYMBOL 15 IN SYMBOL 16 ENTER DELETE To delete a screen or symbol from the Memkey Card To do that proceed as follows Press the DELETE softkey Press the PAGE or SYMBOL softkey Keyinthe page or screen number to be deleted and press ENTER The CNC will request confirmation of the command Chapter 10 Section Page SCREENEDITOR UTILITIES 3 RENAME To assign
20. accuses 47 Maximum temperature exceeded 45 Modal subroutines cannot be programmed 24 No compensation is permitted No more G functions allowed in the block G2 or G3 not allowed when programming a canned cycle 5 MT 18 60 061 21 5 8 62 66872 E TOI D F S er 8 G66 G68 G69 not allowed when machining with C axis 25 EG X ZIGTALM HIS E uestem T G68 G69 X Z C D L M F H S Ev rtr terrere netten G8 defined incorrectly 30 G81 G82 XZ ORG DL M ri GS XAEIBIDKI 7 G84 85 XZQRC DLMEFH IK irssi 6 XZ QRIB G HA trennen 6 98 XZORIODB KL 6 G96 only possible with analog spindle 24 H Heat sink overtemperature 106 49 Helical path programmed incorrectly 99 High level blocks not allowed when defining a profile 5 HIRTH axis program only integer values 10 TO T board without VOllAge iecore rentre reri tees 45 I O 2 b
21. 0 DETECTED While editing at the CNC or while executing a program transmitted via DNC CAUSE In the Electronic threading G33 function an entry angle Q has been programmed but the type of spindle orientation available does not allow this operation SOLUTION order to define an entry angle spindle machine parameter M19TYPE P43 must be set to 1 0229 Program maximum 2 0230 Program inside R 0231 Program outside R DETECTED While editing at the CNC or while executing a program transmitted via DNC CAUSE While programming in high level language in the DGWZ instruction the indicated limit is missing or it has been defined with a non numerical value SOLUTION Check the syntax of the block 0234 Wrong graphic limits DETECTED During execution CAUSE One of the lower limits defined with the DGWZ instruction is greater than its corresponding upper limit SOLUTION Program the upper limit of the graphics display area greater than the lower ones 28 ERROR TROUBLESHOOTING MANUAL Aeon 3 8055T CNC PREPARATION AND EXECUTION ERRORS 1000 Not enough information about the path DETECTED During execution CAUSE The program has too many consecutive blocks without path data to apply tool radius compensation rounding chamfers or tangential entry exit SOLUTION _ In order to carry out these operations the CNC needs to know the path in advance therefore there canno
22. 1 4 EE If the starting point is X10 750 and you wish to machine an arc with the approach and exit paths in a straight line you should program G90 G02 X30 730 R20 G01 X30 710 Chapter 6 Section Page PATHCONTROL TANGENTIALEXIT 15 G38 If however in the same example you wish the exit from machining to be done tangentially and describing a radius of 5 mm you should program G90 G02 G38 R5 X30 Z30 R20 G01 X30 710 Lac a 104 4 ETE 0612 Page Chapter 6 Section 16 PATHCONTROL TANGENTIALEXIT G38 6 10 AUTOMATIC RADIUS BLEND G36 With function G36 itis possible to round a corner with a specific radius without having to calculate the center nor the starting and end points of the arc Function G36 is not modal so it should be programmed whenever controlled corner rounding is required This function should be programmed in the block in which the movement the end you want to round is defined The 5 5 value should always follow G36 It also indicates the rounding radius which the CNC applies to get the required corner rounding This R value must always be positive Examples with X axis programmed in diameter 40 G01 G36 R10 X80 Z10 G90 X60 Z90 TP0613 N 10 60 Chapter 6 Section Page PATHCONTR
23. MPLCn Returns the value assigned to the general machine parameter n P110 MPG 8 assigns the value of the general machine parameter INCHES to parameter P110 if millimeters P110 0 and if inches P110 1 Returns the value which was assigned to the machine parameter n of the indicated axes P110 MPY 1 assigns the value of the machine parameter P1 to arithmetic parameter P110 of the Y axis DFORMAT which indicates the format used in its display Returns the value which was assigned to the main spindle machine parameter n Returns the value which was assigned to the secondary spindle machine parameter n Returns the value of the machine parameter n for the auxiliary spindle Returns the value which was assigned to the PLC machine parameter n Page 12 PROGRAMMINGINHIGH LEVELLANGUAGE VARIABLESFOR Chapter 11 Section WORKZONES 11 2 5 VARIABLES ASSOCIATED WITH WORK ZONES Variables associated with work zones are read only variables The values for each axis are given in the active units If G70 in inches Max 3937 00787 If G71 in millimeters Max 99999 9999 If rotary in degrees Max 99999 9999 The status of the work zones are defined according to the following code 0 Disabled 1 Enabled as no entry zone 2 Enabled as no exit zone Read only variables FZONE Returns the status of work zone 1 P100 FZONE assigns to parameter P100 the stat
24. 11 5 EXPRESSIONS An expression is any valid combination between operators constants and variables All expressions must be placed between brackets but if the expression is reduced to an integer the brackets can be removed 11 51 ARITHMETIC EXPRESSIONS These are formed by combining functions and arithmetic binary and trigonometric operators with the constants and variables of the language The way to operate with these expressions is established by operator priorities and their associativity Priority from highest to lowest Associativity NOT functions negative from right to left EXP MOD from left to right from left to right add subtract from left to right relational operators from left to right AND XOR from left to right OR from left to right Itis advisable to use brackets to clarify the order in which the evaluation of the expression is done P3 P4 P5 P6 P7 P8 P9 P3 P4 P5 P6 P7 P8 P9 The use of repetitive or additional brackets will not produce errors nor will they slow down execution In functions brackets must be used except when these are applied to anumerical constant in which case they are optional SIN 45 SIN 45 both are valid and equivalent SIN 10 5 the same as SIN 10 5 Expressions can be used also to reference parameters and tables P100 P9 P100 P P7 P100 P P8 SIN P8 20 P100 ORGX 55 P100 ORGX 12 P9 PLCM5008
25. The CNC offers the following softkey options for each table EDIT The desired parameter When selecting this option the softkeys will change their color to a white background and they will show the various editing options In those tables corresponding to leadscrew and cross compensation the position values of the axis must be edited as follows Move the axis and when the error is found large enough to be considered press the softkey corresponding to this axis CNC will include in the editing area the name of the axis followed by the position value corresponding to that point This value can be modified if so desired Press the softkey corresponding to the error and key in its value Once the parameter is edited press ENTER This new parameter will be included in the table and the cursor will be positioned over it The editing area will be cleared thus allowing other parameters to be edited Press ESC to quit this mode Page Chapter 11 Section 6 MACHINE PARAMETERS OPERATION WITH PARAMETERTABLES MODIFY With this option itis possible to modify the selected parameter Before pressing this softkey the desired parameter must be selected When selecting this option the softkeys will change their color to a white background and they will show the various editing options By pressing ESC the information displayedin the editing window corresponding to the selected parameter will be
26. 00004 269 00004 269 00000 000 00011 755 00011 755 00000 000 F00000 0000 96120 S00000 0000 96100 T0000 D000 5 0000 RPM 0000 M MIN G00 G17 G54 PARTC 000000 00 00 00 00 TIMER 000000 00 00 A group of program blocks The first of them is the block being executed The axis coordinates in real or theoretical values according to the setting of the THEODPLY machine parameter and the format defined with the axis machine parameter DFORMAT Each axis is provided with the following fields COMMAND Indicates the programmed coordinate or position value which the axis must reach ACTUAL Indicates the actual current position of the axis TO GO Indicates the distance which is left to run to the programmed coordinate Chapter 3 Section Page EXECUTE SIMULATE DISPLAYSELECTION 3 3 2 2 POSITION DISPLAY MODE This display mode shows the position values of the axes This display mode shows the following fields or windows EXECUTION PART Z X 00100 000 X 00172 871 7 00004 269 2 00004 269 00011 755 C 00011 755 F00000 0000 120 S00000 0000 100 T0000 D000 S 0000 RPM 0000 M MIN G17 G54 PARTC 000000 CY TIME 00 00 00 00 TIMER 000000 00 00 CAP INS BLOCK STOP DISPLAY MDI TOOL GRAPHICS SINGLE SELECTION CONDITION SELECTION INSPECTION BLOCK axis coordinates in real or theoretical values according to the setting of the THEODPLY machine parameter and
27. Additional text Select the desired element The CNC shows the ISO code corresponding to that section in the editing area e Add the desired text Functions F S T D M or program comments may be added Press the VALIDATE softkey Chapter 4 Section Page EDIT PROFILEEDITOR gt Display area When selecting this option the following softkey options are shown Zoom to enlarge the image on the screen Zoom to reduce the image on the screen Optimum area to show the full profile on the screen The display area may be moved around with the left arrow right arrow up arrow and down arrow keys Pressthe VALIDATE softkey The CNC updates the values indicated in the upper right hand window DISPLAYED AREA To quit the MODIFY mode press ESC Page 12 Chapter 4 Section PROFILEEDITOR 4 1 4 7 FINISH This softkey must be pressed once all the sections of the profile have been defined The CNC will try to calculate the requested profile by previously solving all the unknowns Ifitfindsseveral possibilities forcertain sections the CNC will show them foreach section and the desired option framed in red will have to be chosen using the right and left arrow keys Once the whole profile has been solved the CNC will show the code of the part program currently being edited The ISO coded program for the edited profile is contained between these lines
28. Chapter 11 Section Page PROGRAMMINGINHIGH LEVELLANGUAGE GENERALPURPOSE 7 VARIABLES 11 22 VARIABLES ASSOCIATED WITH TOOLS These variables are associated with the tool offset table tool table and tool magazine table so the values which are assigned to or read from these fields will comply with the formats established for these tables Tool offset table X Z R I K F Tool table Tool offset number Family code Nominal life Real life Cutter angle Cutter width Cutting angle Tool magazine table Given in the active units If G70 in inches Max 3937 00787 If G71 in millimeters Max 99999 9999 If rotary in degrees Max 99999 9999 Integer value between and 9 0 NT OFFSET maximum 255 If normal tool 0 n 200 If special tool 200 n 255 0 65535 minutes or operations 0 99999 99 minutes or 99999 operations In degrees Max 359 9999 Given in the active units If G70 in inches Max 3937 00787 If G71 in millimeters Max 99999 9999 If rotary in degrees Max 99999 9999 In degrees Max 359 9999 Contents of each magazine position Position of tool in magazine Read only variables Tool number 1 NTOOL maximum 255 0 Empty 1 Position number 1 NPOCKET maximum 255 0 On spindle 1 Not found 2 In change position TOOL Returns the active tool number P00 TOOL assigns the number of the active tool to P100 TOD Re
29. Defines the angular position in degrees to orient the spindle to mill the first slot Defines the angular increment between two consecutive slots It is programmed in degrees with the positive sign when going counter clockwise Defines the numberof slots to be milled If 0 is programmed the CNC will issue the corresponding error message Defines the safety distance along the Z axis and it indicates how far from the starting point X Z thetool is to approach the part If not programmed the CNC will assume a value of 0 Chapter 9 Section Page ANNEDCYCLES G62 RADIAL 7 e SLOTMILLING 6 5 5 Defines the slot milling feedrate S 5 5 and turning direction sign of the live tool Basic operation 1 Rapid approach upto the safety distance D from the slot milling point 2 CNC turns the live tool on at the rpm and turning direction set by parameter 5 3 Orients the spindle to the indicated angular position If the spindle was turning the CNC will stop it 4 Milling of the slot by following these steps X 4 In feed at the feedrate selected prior to calling the cycle 4 2 Milling of the slot by moving the X axis at the programmed F feedrate 4 3 Rapid withdrawal to the reference point 4 4 Rapid return to the starting point 5 Depending on the setting of parmeter J number of slots 5 The spindle orients to the new position Angular increment A 5 2
30. ERROR TROUBLESHOOTING MANUAL 7 8055T CNC ERGO 3 0036 G60 G61 X ZIBQAJ DK HC S DETECTED While editing or executing programs via DNC CAUSE The parameters of the Face drilling tapping canned cycle G60 or Longitudinal drilling tapping canned cycle G61 have been programmed wrong The probable causes might be 1 A mandatory parameter is missing 2 The cycle parameters are programmed in the wrong order 3 A parameter has been programmed which does not match the calling format SOLUTION This type of machining requires the programming of the following parameters X Z Position of the machining operation Depth of the machining operation Type of operation to be carried out Angular positioning of the first machining operation Angular step between machining operations Number of machining operations Speed and turning direction of the live tool The rest of the parameters are optional The parameters must be edited in the order indicated by the error message Noe FOW 0037 G62 G63 X Z L IQ A J D FS DETECTED While editing or executing programs via DNC CAUSE The parameters of the Axial slot milling canned cycle G62 or Radial slot milling canned cycle G62 have been programmed wrong The probable causes might be 1 A mandatory parameter is missing 2 The cycle parameters are programmed in the wrong order SOLUTION This type of machining requires the programming of
31. SOLUTION In the history of the program work zone 2 defined with G20 G21 has been defined as no exit zone G22 K2 S2 To disable it program G22 K2 SO 1182 1190 axis following error limit overrun DETECTED During execution CAUSE The following error of the axis is greater than the values indicated by spindle parameters MAXFLWE1 P21 or MAXFLE2 P22 The probable causes for this error are DRIVE FAILURE MOTOR FAILURE Defective drive Defective motor Enable signals missing Power wiring Power supply missing Poor drive adjustment Velocity command signal missing FEEDBACK FAILURE CNC FAILURE Defective feedback device Defective CNC Defective feedback cable Wrong parameter setting MECHANICAL FAILURE Mechanical friction Axis mechanically locked up 1191 1199 Coupled axis following error difference too large CAUSE The n axis is electronically coupled to another one or it is slaved to a Gantry axis and the difference between their following errors is greater than the value set by axis machine parameter MAXCOUPE P45 1200 1208 axis hard limit overrun DETECTED During execution CAUSE An attempt has been made to exceed the physical travel limits of the axis Consequently the PLC activates the axis marks LIMIT 1 or LIMIT 1 1209 1217 axis servo error CAUSE The actual axis speed after a time period indicated by axis machine parameter FBALTIME P12
32. This variable allows reading or modifying the value assigned to the tool length wear along the Z axis K of the indicated tool n in the tool offset table This variable allows the tool offset number of the indicated tool n to be read or modified on the tool table This variable allows the family code of the indicated tool n to be read or modified on the tool table This variable allows the value assigned as the nominal life of the indicated tool n to be read or modified on the tool table This variable allows the value corresponding to the real life of the indicated tool n to be read or modified on the tool table This variable allows the contents of the indicated position n to be read or modified on the tool magazine table This variable allows reading or modifying the cutter angle value assigned to the indicated tool n in the tool offset table This variable allows reading or modifying the cutter width value assigned to the indicated tool n in the tool offset table This variable allows reading or modifying the cutting angle value assigned to the indicated tool n in the tool offset table Chapter 11 Section Page PROGRAMMING INHIGH LEVELLANGUAGE VARIABLES ASSOCIATED 9 WITHTOOLS 11 2 3 VARIABLES ASSOCIATED WITH ZERO OFFSETS These variables are associated with the tool offset table tool table and tool magazine table so the values which are assigned to or read from these fields will co
33. Thread repair Reference home the spindle before Simulation in rapid without assuming G95 or M3 M54 etc Geometry associated with the tool offset Installation manual Operating manual Programming manual Operating manual Programming manual Programming manual TC operating manual Operating manual Installation manual Operating manual Chap 3 Chap 1 Chap 7 Chap 1 Chap 1 Chap 3 Chap 14 Appendix Chap 9 Chap 4 Chap 3 Chap 6 Live tool with M45 or as if it were a 2nd spindle Installation manual Chap 3 PLC channel affected by another feedrate override set by PLC Independent x1 x10 x100 factor for each handwheel Handling the Fagor HBE handwheel Spindle synchronization G77 5 Optimizing of profile machining 2 axes controlled by a single servo drive G75 function affected by Feedrate override 96 Probe Probe position by cycle parameters Protection against deleting OEM screens Detecting temperature and battery voltage on the new CPU TC option ISO program management also like MDI Installation manual Installation manual Programming manual Installation manual Installation manual Programming manual Programming manual TC operating manual Installation manual Installation manual Programming manual Operating manual TC operating manual Chap 11 Chap 4 Chap 10 Appendix Chap 11 Chap 4 9 10 Appendix Chap 3 9 10 Appendix Chap 5
34. When not programming D the tool withdrawalis carried out following the profile up to the last pass C distance right drawing It must be borne in mind that when D is not programmed the cycle execution time is greater but the amount of stock to be removed on the finishing pass is less Defines the finishing pass along X It is given in radius If not programmed a value of 0 will be assumed Defines the finishing pass along Z It is given in radius If not programmed a value of 0 will be assumed Defines the feedrate for the final roughing pass If not programmed or programmed with a value of 0 it means that there is no final roughing pass X Defines the feedrate for the finishing pass If not programmed or programmed with a value of 0 it is considered that no finishing pass is desired Chapter 9 Section Page CANNEDCYCLES TURNINGWITHSTRAIGHT 27 SECTIONS G81 Basic operation The canned cycle will analyze the programmed profile performing if necessary a horizontal turning operation until the defined profile is reached The whole turning operation is carried out with the same pass this being equal to or smaller than the programmed one C Each turning pass is carried out in the following manner TPOSDO3 1 2 move in rapid Move 2 3 in GO1 at programmed feedrate F If D has been programmed the 3 4 move is done in r
35. Chapter 12 Section PROGRAMCONTROLSTATEMENTS SCREENCUSTOMIZING STATEMENTS DW expression 1 expression 2 DW expression 3 expression 4 The mnemonic DW displays in the window indicated by the value for expression 1 expression 3 once they have been evaluated the numerical data indicated by expression 2 expression 4 Expression 1 expression 2 expression 3 may contain a number or any expression which may result in a number The following example shows a dynamic variable display ODW 1 6 33 Defines data window 1 ODW 2 14 33 Defines data window 2 N10 DW1 DATE DW2 TIME Displays the date in window 1 and the time in 2 GOTO N10 The CNC allows displaying the data in decimal hexadecimal and binary format The following instructions are available DW1 100 Decimal format Value 100 displayed in window 1 DWH2 100 Hexadecimal format Value 64 displayedin window 2 DWB3 100 Binary format Value 01100100 displayed in window 3 When using the binary format the display is limited to 8 digits in sucha way thata value of 11111111 willbe displayed for values greaterthan 255 and the value of 10000000 for values more negative than 127 Besides the CNC allows the number stored in one of the 26 data input variables IBO IB25 to be displayed in the requested window The following example shows a request and later display of axis feedrate
36. G90 G01 X100 Z240 CALL 10 G90 G01 X100 7150 CALL 10 M30 SUB 10 G91 G01 7 10 X40 Z 10 G03 7 20 10 K 10 G01 X 20 G02 X0 7 20 10 K 10 G01 X40 7 10 7 20 Chapter 12 Section Page PROGRAMCONTROLSTATEMENTS SUBROUTINE 7 STATEMENTS PCALL expression assignment statement assignment statement The mnemonic PCALL calls the subroutine indicated by means of a number or any expression which results in a number In addition it allows up to a maximum of 26 local parameters of this subroutine to be initialized These local parameters are initialized by means of assignment statements Example PCALL 52 A3 B5 C4 P10 20 In this case in addition to generating a new subroutine nesting level a new local parameter nesting level will be generated there being a maximum of 6 levels of local parameter nesting within the 15 levels of subroutine nesting Both the main program and each subroutine which is found on a parameter nesting level will have 26 local parameters PO P25 Example X 100 gt e 40 A Chapter 12 Section 8 PROGRAM CONTROLSTATEMENTS SUBROUTINE STATEMENTS G90 G01 X80 27330 PCALL 10 P0220 P1 10 oralso PCALL 10 A20 B10 G90 G01 X80 Z260 PCALL 10 P0220 P1 10 oralso PCALL 10 A20 B 10 G90 G01 X200 7200 PCALL 10 P0230 P1 15 ora
37. IF condition lt actiont gt ELSE lt action2 gt If the condition is true it executes the action otherwise it executes lt action2 gt 0084 Expecting DETECTED While editing at the CNC or while executing a program transmitted via DNC CAUSE While programming in high level language a symbol or data has been entered that does not match the syntax of the block SOLUTION Enter the symbol in the right place ERROR TROUBLESHOOTING MANUAL 13 8055T CNC FAGOR 0085 Expecting DETECTED While editing at the CNC or while executing a program transmitted via DNC CAUSE While programming in high level language a symbol or data has been entered that does not match the syntax of the block SOLUTION Enter the symbol in the right place 0086 Expecting DETECTED While editing at the CNC or while executing a program transmitted via DNC CAUSE While programming in high level language a symbol or data has been entered that does not match the syntax of the block SOLUTION Enter the symbol in the right place 0087 Expecting DETECTED While editing at the CNC or while executing a program transmitted via DNC CAUSE S The various causes might be 1 While programming in high level language a symbol or data has been entered that does not match the syntax of the block 2 While programming in high level language an ISO coded inst
38. PLCCn Indicated n Counter s count VARIABLES ASSOCIATED WITH GLOBAL AND LOCAL ARITHMETIC PARAMETERS Section 11 2 13 Variable GUPn Global parameter n 100 P299 LUP a b Local parameter b and its nesting level a PO P25 CALLP Indicates which local parameters have been defined by means of a PCALL or MCALL instruction calling a subroutine SERCOS VARIABLES Section 11 2 14 Variable CNC SETGE X C W Work gear and parameter set for X C axis drive SETGES W Work gear and parameter set for main spindle drive SSETGS W Work gear and parameter set for 2nd spindle drive SVAR X C id R W Sercos variable for X C axis identifier id SVARS id R W Sercos variable for main spindle identifier id SSVARid R W Sercos variable for 2nd spindle identifier id TSVAR X C idR Third attribute of the sercos variable of X C axis identifier id TSVARS id R Third attribute of the sercos variable of main spindle identifier id TSSVAR id R Third attribute of the sercos variable of 2nd spindle identifier id 10 OTHER VARIABLES Section 11 2 15 Variable Z 2 Q OPMODE OPMODA OPMODB OPMODC NBTOOL PRGN BLKN GSn GGSA GGSB GGSC GGSD MSn GMS PLANE MIRROR SCALE SCALE X C PRBST CLOCK TIME DATE TIMER CYTIME PARTC FIRST KEY KEYSRC ANAIn ANAOn CNCERR PLCERR DNCERR AXICOM TANGAN 2 de
39. Read only variables PLCMSG Returns the number of the active PLC message with the highest priority and will coincide with the number displayed on screen 1 128 If there is none it returns 0 P100 PLCMSG assigns to P100 the number of the active PLC message with the highest priority Read write variables PLCIn This variable allows 32 PLC inputs to be read or modified starting with the one indicated n The value of the inputs which are used by the electrical cabinet cannotbe modifiedas their values are determined by it Nevertheless the status of the remaining inputs can be modified PLCOn This variable allows 32 PLC outputs to be read or modified starting from the one indicated n 110 022 Assigns to P110 the value of PLC outputs 022 thru 053 32 outputs PLC22 SP Sets outputs 022 thru 025 to 1 and outputs 026 thru 053 to 0 Bit 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 6 54 3 210 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 Output 53 52 51 50 49 48 47 46 45 44 43 42 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 Chapter 11 Section Page PROGRAMMINGINHIGH LEVELLANGUAGE VARIABLES ASSOCIATED 25 WITHTHEPLC PLCMn This variable allows 32 PLC marks to be read or modified starting from the one indicated n PLCRn This variable allows the status of 32 register bits to be read or modified starting from the one indicated n PLCTn This va
40. Rotary axis Absolute values G90 within 359 9999 a Rounding last DIBOK Lisa duna scere 29 Rounding radius too large 428 S S has been programmed without an active range 32 S has not been programmed in G96 add S not programmed in G95 or threadcutting ido 5 prGgrammed large Lucena 20 SERCOS chip RAM Error Press a key SERCOS chip version Error Press a key SERCOS error when homing 50 SERCOS ring error 1 50 SERCOS ring error Sercos variable accessing error Spindle drive error Spindle feedback error Spindle following error limit overrun Spindle locked 115 irren 41 Spindle speed range not defined for M19 232 Spindle travel limit overrun 41 Square root of a negative number 14 Step in straight path add Step in circular path adi Subroutine not available in program 28 Subroutine not defined oo Tool T4 D8 FS NS RB os 18 U User channel Do not program geometric aides comp or cycles 17 USER RAM memory error at the CNC Press any key 46 V ANG O SEU 21
41. aw 2 AWWE 0 D EX zz AA da eo a Operating mode Operating mode when working in the main channel Type of simulation Axes selected by handwheel Number of the tool being managed Number of the program in execution Label number of the last executed block Status of the indicated G function n Status of functions GOO thru G24 Status of functions G25 thru G49 Status of functions G50 thru G74 Status of functions G75 thru G99 Status of the indicated M function n Status of M functions M 0 6 8 9 19 30 41 44 Axes which form the active main plane Active mirror images Active general Slaving factor R Scaling Factor applied only to the indicated axis Returns the status of the probe System clock in seconds Time in Hours minutes and seconds Date in Year Month Day format Clock activated by PLC in seconds Time to execute a part in hundredths of a second Part counter of the CNC Flag to indicate first time of program execution keystroke code Keystroke source 0 keyboard 1 PLC 2 DNC Voltage in volts of the indicated analog input n Voltage in volts to apply to the indicated output n Active CNC error number Active PLC error number Number of the error generated during DNC communications Pair of axes toggled with function G28 Associated with G45 Angular position in referred to the path
42. function 1083 Range exceeded DETECTED During execution CAUSE The distance to travel for the axes very long and the programmed feedrate for that movement is very low SOLUTION Program a higher feedrate for this movement 1084 Circular path programmed incorrectly DETECTED During execution CAUSE S The probable causes might be 1 When programming an arc using the format 02 603 X Y J an arc cannot be made with the programmed radius and end point 2 When programming an arc using the format G09 X Y J The three points of the arc are in line or there are identical points 3 When trying to make a rounding or a tangential entry on a path not belonging to the active plane 4 When programming a tangential exit and the next path is tangent to and on the linear extension of the one prior to the tangential exit If the error comes up in the block calling the Pattern repeat canned cycle G66 Roughing canned cycle along the X axis G68 or Roughing canned cycle along the Z axis G69 it is because one of the cases mentioned earlier occur in the set of blocks defining the profiles SOLUTION The solution for each cause is 1 Correct the syntax of the block The coordinates of the end point or of the radius are defined wrong 2 The three points used to define the arc must be different and cannot be in line 3 Maybe a plane has been defined using G16 G17 G18 or
43. function has been programmed but either the spindle speed is not controlled or the spindle does not have an encoder SOLUTION To operate with the G96 function the spindle speed must be controlled SPDLTYPE P0 0 and the spindle must have an encoder NPULSES P13 other than zero 0180 Program DNC1 2 HD or CARD A optional DETECTED While editing or executing CAUSE While programming in high level language in the OPEN and EXEC instructions an attempt has been made to program a parameter other than DNC1 2 HD or CARD A or the DNC parameter has been assigned a value other than 1 or 2 SOLUTION Check the syntax of the block 24 ERROR TROUBLESHOOTING MANUAL Hicon 3 8055T CNC 0181 Program A append or D delete DETECTED While editing at the CNC or while executing a program transmitted via DNC CAUSE In the OPEN instruction the A D parameter is missing SOLUTION Check the syntax of the block The programming format is OPEN P ADD Where A Appends new blocks after the existing ones D Deletes the existing program and it opens it as a new one 0182 Option not available DETECTED While editing at the CNC or while executing a program transmitted via DNC CAUSE A G function has been defined which is not a software option 0185 Tool offset does not exist DETECTED While editing at the CNC or while executing a program transmitted via DNC CAUS
44. 0 the Z axis will be the main axis I will be taken as X residual value and C as the pass along X When programming 1 the X axis will be the main axis I will be taken as Z residual value and C as the pass along Z Page Chapter 9 Section CANNEDCYCLES PATTERNREPEAT CANNEDCYCLE G66 L5 5 5 5 TPOSA03 If parameter A is not programmed the I and C values depend on the tool dimensions If the tool length along X is greater than along Z the I value is taken as residual along X and the C value as the pass along X If the tool length along Z is greater than along X the I value is taken as residual along Z and the C value as the pass along Z Defines the finishing pass along X It is given in radius and if not programmed a value of 0 will be assumed Defines the finishing pass along Z If either L or M is negative the finishing pass will be carried out in round corner G05 When they are both positive the finishing pass will be performed in square corner G07 If M is not programmed the X and Z residual value will be the one indicated by parameter L and the roughing passes will be the same maintaining the C distance between two consecutive passes H5 5 Defines the feedrate for the finishing pass If not programmed or programmed with a value of 0 it is considered that no finishing pass is desired Chapter 9 Section Page CANNEDCYCL
45. 2 When trying to do a tangential exit in a path that is not in the active plane SOLUTION The solution for each cause is 1 Maybe a plane has been defined with G16 G17 G18 or G19 In this case circular interpolations can only be carried out on the main axes defining that plane To define a circular interpolation in another plane it must be defined beforehand 2 Maybe a plane has been defined with G16 G17 G18 or G19 In this case corner rounding chamfers and tangential entries exits can only be carried out on the main axes defining that plane To do it in another plane it must be defined beforehand 0053 Program pitch DETECTED While editing at the CNC or while executing a program transmitted via DNC CAUSE In the Electronic threading cycle G33 the parameter for the thread pitch is missing SOLUTION Remember that the programming format for this function is G33 X C L Where L Is the thread pitch ERROR TROUBLESHOOTING MANUAL 9 8055T CNC 0054 Pitch programmed incorrectly DETECTED While editing at the CNC or while executing a program transmitted via DNC CAUSE A helical interpolation has been programmed with the wrong or negative pitch SOLUTION Remember that the programming format is G02 G03 X Y I J Z K Where K is the helical pitch always positive value 0057 Do not program a slaved axis DETECTED
46. Angle Indicates the angular position in degrees with respect to the path 359 9999 If not programmed 0 will be assumed 6 Z 352 90 Ux 25 To cancel this function program G45 alone without defining the axis Every time G45 tangential control is activated the CNC acts as follows 1 Positions the tangential axis with respect to the first section in the programmed position x ol 2 The interpolation of the axes in the plane starts once the tangential axis has been positioned 3 On linear sections the orientation of the tangential axis is maintained and in circular interpolations the programmed orientation is maintained for the whole path mae Page Chapter 6 Section 28 PATHCONTROL TANGENTIALCONTROL G45 4 Ifthe joint of sections requires a new orientation of the tangential axis the following takes place a endsthecurrent section b orients the tangential axis with respect to the next section C resumesexecution When working in round corner G05 the tool orientation is not maintained at the corners since it begins before ending the current section Itis recommended to work in square corner G07 However to work in round corner G05 function G36 automatic radius blend should be used in order to also maintain tool orientation at the corners 5 To cancel the tangential control function program G45 alone without defining the axis Even when the tangentia
47. ESI With the MDI option it is possible to modify the machining conditions type of moves feedrates etc being selected Also the CNC will maintain the ones selected in this mode when switching to EXECUTION or SIMULATION modes This operating mode offers the following softkey options Chapter 5 Section Page JOG REFERENCE SEARCH With this option it is possible to perform a home search on the desired axis or axes The CNC offers two ways to search the machine reference home Usingthe subroutine associated with function G74 The number of this subroutine will defined by the general machine parameter REFSUB By selecting the axis or axes to be referenced Once the Reference search function is selected the CNC will show a softkey for each axis and the softkey ALL If the ALL softkey is selected the CNC will highlight in reverse video the names of all axes and after pressing the key it will execute the subroutine associated with G74 On the other hand to search the reference anywhere from one to all axes at once without executing the associated subroutine the softkeys corresponding to those axes must be pressed After pressing each softkey the CNC will highlight the name of the selected axis If an unwanted axis has been selected press ESC to cancel that selection and return to select REFERENCE SEARCH Once all the desired axes have been selected press
48. F has been defined for finishing SOLUTION Program a positive feedrate other than zero FINISHING Value of S 0 DETECTED While executing CAUSE The spindle speed S has not been defined for finishing SOLUTION Program a positive spindle speed S other than zero GEOMETRY Value of Zi Zf DETECTED While executing CAUSE The Z coordinates of the starting and end points are the same SOLUTION Z coordinates of the starting and end points must be different GEOMETRY Value of X Q DETECTED While executing CAUSE The coordinates of the starting and end diameters are the same SOLUTION The X coordinates of the starting and end diameters must be different from the end diameter FINISHING Wrong stock DETECTED While executing CAUSE The finishing stock is greater than the total machining depth SOLUTION The finishing stock must be smaller than the total machining depth ROUGHING Wrong tool shape code DETECTED While executing CAUSE The roughing of the groove cannot be done with the selected location code tool shape code SOLUTION Select a tool with the right location code shape FINISHING Wrong tool shape code DETECTED While executing CAUSE The finishing of the groove cannot be done with the selected location code tool shape code SOLUTION Select a tool with the right location code shape GEOMETRY Final diameter is not external DETECTED While executing CAUSE An outside groov
49. Ifa profile cannot be solved due to lack of data the CNC will issue the corresponding error message Warning When pressing the FINISH softkey the CNC quits the profile editor and adds to the program the ISO code corresponding to the profile just edited To quit the profile editor without changing the part program press ESC and the CNC will request confirmation of this command Chapter 4 Section Page EDIT PROFILEEDITOR 13 4 1 48 EXAMPLES OF PROFILE DEFINITION 10 45 Profile definition without rounded corners chamfers tangential entries or exits Abscissa and ordinate of the starting point Z 100 0 Section 1 STRAIGHT LINE Z 80 0 Section 2 STRAIGHT LINE Z 80 50 Section 3 STRAIGHT LINE Z 60 X 50 Section 4 CLOCKWISE ARC Z 40 X290 Zc 60 90 R 20 Section 5 STRAIGHT LINE Z 20 X 90 Section 6 STRAIGHT LINE Z 20 X 110 Section 7 STRAIGHT LINE Z 0 X 110 Section 8 STRAIGHT LINE Z 0 X 150 Adapt the image to the screen Select the DISPLAY AREA option and press the OPTIMUM ZONE Page Chapter 4 Section Hn m PROFILEEDITOR Definition of rounded corners chamfers tangential entries and exits Select the MODIFY option and define TANGENTIAL ENTRY Select corner 1 2 and press ENTER Select corner 2 3 and press ENTER ROUNDING Select corner 5 6 and press ENTER ROUNDING Select corner 6 7 and pres
50. MSG instruction has been edited wrong SOLUTION Correct the syntax of the block The programming format is MSG message ERROR number message The message must be between 0150 Incorrect number of bits DETECTED While editing tables CAUSE S The various causes might be 1 In the M function table in the section on customizing bits The number does not have 8 bits The number does not consist of 0 s and 1 s 2 In the machine parameter table an attempt has been made to assign the wrong value of bit to a parameter SOLUTION The solution for each cause is 1 The customizing bits must consist of 8 digits of 0 s and 1 s 2 The parameter only admits 8 bit or 16 bit numbers 0152 Incorrect parametric programming DETECTED During execution CAUSE The parameter has a value that is incompatible with the function it has been assigned to SOLUTION This parameter may have taken the wrong value in the program history Correct the program so this parameter does not reach the function with that value 0154 Insufficient memory DETECTED During execution CAUSE The CNC does not have enough memory to internally calculate the paths SOLUTION Sometimes this error is taken care of by changing the machining conditions 22 ERROR TROUBLESHOOTING MANUAL Hicon 3 8055T CNC 0156 Don t program G33 G95 or M19 S with no spindle encoder DETECTED While editing at the CNC or while
51. Nonexistent ae Nonparametric assignment after first point of profile 427 Not enough information about the 29 Not enough room for the automatic range change M code 32 Number of repetitions not 3 Numerical format exceeded O Onmset DO Bees Dot enun onum vp 19 Only one HIRTH axis per block is allowed 23 OPEN 16 MISIN usce e re sees toes aces artenrtenacesaueareeaiee 11 Option not available Overcurrent 13512 isis ER see syse sees noes cea artasetesecasamaneiee P Parameter does Mot EXIST bota 12 Password use uppercase lowercase letters or digits Pitch programmed WIGOMOCHY 10 Plane change during rounding or chamfering 29 Plane change during tool inspection PLG EPROM MEmON BRON pei ta het tutte PUG AMT ERR without description PEG WOE 407 A 46 PLO RAM error Press KM 46 PLC RAM memory error Point incompatible with active 9 Point within the forbidden Zone
52. Number of data entered Nr Number of required data Chapter 4 Section Page EDIT PROFILE EDITOR 5 4 1 4 1 OPERATION WITH THE PROFILE EDITOR Several profiles may be edited without quitting the profile editor To edit a profile proceed as follows 1 Selecta point of the profile as its beginning point 2 Break the profile into straight and curve sections Ifthe profile has corner roundings chamfers tangential entries or exits take one ofthe following actions Treatthemasindividual sections when having enough information to define them Ignorethem when defining the profile and once done defining the whole profile select the corners showing those characteristics and enter the corresponding radius value CONFIGURATION Use the abscissa axis and ordinate axis softkeys to select the editing plane The Autozoom function indicates whether the CNC recalculates the graphics display area or not when the edited lines go beyond it PROFILE For editing any profile CIRCLE Fora quick circular profile definition If the starting point X Y is not defined the CNC assumes one The Profile Direction softkey indicates whether the profile is programmed clockwise or counterclockwise This data is very important for later modifications and profile intersection Every time this softkey is pressed the text at the top of the middle right window changes STRAIGHTANGLE For a quick straight angular profile d
53. Page Chapter 12 Section 2 DIAGNOSIS CONFIGURATION 12 1 2 SOFTWARE CONFIGURATION This option shows Allavailable software options The software version installed Both for the CNC and the HD module The id codes of the unit They are only to be used by the Service Department The CODE VALIDATION softkey must be used after consulting with the Service Department when wishing to implement more software features Chapter 12 Section Page DIAGNOSIS CONFIGURATION 3 122 HARDWARE TEST This option checks the power supply voltages corresponding to the system and to the boards as well as the internal temperature of the central unit It displays the following information DIAGNOSIS 11 50 14 HARDWARE TEST SUPPLY VOLTAGES volts 45 X440 440 7 OOOOOOO VOLTAGE ON BOARDS 24 volts Axes nputs Outputs nputs Outputs nputs Outputs INSIDE TEMPERATURE CAP INS MM Ee 2 C 05 SUPPLY VOLTAGE It indicates the voltage of the lithium battery and the voltages supplied by the Power Supply Module The voltages supplied by the Power Supply module are internally used by the CNC Nextto the voltages it displays the value range maximum and minimum values the real value and whether it is OK or not BOARD VOLTAGE This section indicates wh
54. S M MIN PARTC CYTIME TIMER Programmed feedrate and selected feedrate OVERRIDE Programmed speed and OVERRIDE of the selected spindle Number of active tool Number of active tool offset Real speed of the spindle in RPM When working in M19 this indicates the position of the spindle in degrees Real speed of the spindle in Meters min or feet min All active displayable G functions All active M functions Parts counter It indicates the number of consecutive parts executed with the same part program Every time a new program is selected this variable is reset to 0 With this CNC variable PARTC it is possible to modify this counter from the PLC from the CNC program and via DNC Time elapsed during the execution of the part in hours minutes seconds hundredths of a second format Every time a part program execution starts even when repetitive this variable is reset to 0 Time indicated by the PLC enabled clock in hours minutes seconds format Page Chapter 3 Section EXECUTE SIMULATE DISPLAYSELECTION 3 2 1 STANDARD DISPLAY MODE This display mode is assumed by default on power up and after the key sequence SHIFT RESET and it shows the following fields or windows 54 G0 G17 G90 YO 210 T2 D2 TOR3 2 TOR4 1 672 S02 G66 D100 R200 F300 S400 E500 M30 100 G81 G98 Z5 I 1 F400 COMMAND ACTUAL TO GO x 00172 871 x 00172 871 00000 000
55. Section 11 2 3 Variable ORG X C PORGF PORGS ORG X C n PLCOF X C Zero offset active on the selected axis without including the incremental offset activated via PLC Abscissa coordinate value of polar origin Ordinate coordinate value of polar origin Zero offset n value of the selected axis Value of the additive Zero Offset activated via PLC VARIABLES ASSOCIATED WITH MACHINE PARAMETERS Section 11 2 4 Variable MPGn MP X C n MPSn MPSSn MPASn MPLCn Value assigned to general machine parameter n Value assigned to machine parameter n of the axis X C Value assigned to machine parameter n of the main spindle Value assigned to machine parameter n of the second spindle Value assigned to machine parameter n of the auxiliary spindle Value assigned to machine parameter n of the PLC VARIABLES ASSOCIATED WITH THE WORK ZONES Section 11 2 5 Variable Q Z Q Z 2 Q FZONE FZLO X C FZUP X C SZONE SZLO X C SZUP X C TZONE TZLO X C TZUP X C FOZONE FOZLO X C FOZUP X C AAAAAAAAAAAD Status of work zone 1 Lower limit of work zone 1 along the selected axis X C Upper limit of work zone 1 along the selected axis X C Status of work zone 2 Lower limit of work zone 2 along the selected axis X C Upper limit of work zone 2 along the selected axis X C Status of work zone 3 Lower
56. There are three preparatory functions for tool radius compensation G40 Cancelling of tool radius compensation G41 Tool radius compensation to the left of the part G42 Tool radius compensation to the right of the part G41 The tool is to the left of the part depending on the machining direction G42 The tool is to the right of the part depending on the machining direction Tool values X Z F R I K should be stored in the tool offset table before starting machining or should be loaded at the beginning of the program via assignments to variables TOX TOZ TOF TOR TOI TOK Once the plane in which compensation will be applied has been chosen via codes G16 G17 G18 or G19 this is put into effect by G41 or G42 assuming the value of the tool offset selected via code D or in its absence by the tool offset shown in the tool table for the selected tool T Functions G41 and G42 are modal and incompatible to each other They are cancelled by G40 G04 interruption of block preparation G53 programming with reference to machine zero G74 home search machining canned cycles G66 G68 G69 G81 G82 G83 G84 G85 G86 G87 G88 G89 and also on power up after executing M02 M30 or after EMERGENCY or RESET Page Chapter 8 Section 4 TOOL COMPENSATION RADIUS COMPENSATION G40 G41 G42 8 2 ACTIVATING TOOL RADIUS COMPENSATION Once the plane in which tool radius compensation has been selected via G16 G
57. Withdrawal Rapid move 00 from the approach corner back to the cycle calling point The withdrawal will be carried out in two stages Ist Movement along X axis 2nd Movement along Z axis Code 1 Code 7 4 Once the cycle has ended the CNC will return the measured values in the following global arithmetic parameters P298 RealX coordinate of the measured side Given in absolute with respect to Machine Reference Zero and in radius P299 RealZcoordinate ofthe measured side Given in absolute with respect to Machine Reference Zero Chapter 10 Section Page PROBING PROBECALIBRATION 11 Knowing these values and the probe dimensions the user will update the following general machine parameters after calculating the position values for the other sides of the probe PRBXMIN indicates the minimum X coordinate of the probe PRBXMAX indicates the maximum X coordinate of the probe PRBZMIN indicates the minimum Z coordinate of the probe PRBZMAX indicates the maximum Z coordinate of the probe Example If the tool used has a location code of F3 and the probe has a square stylus with a side of 40mm the values to be assigned to these parameters will be PRBXMAX PRBXMIN TP108 PRBZMIN PRBZMAX PRBXMIN P298 40mm PRBXMAX P298 PRBZMIN P299 40mm PRBZMAX P299 Page Chapter 10 Section 12 PROBING PROBECALIBRATION 10 5 PART MEASURING AND TOOL OFFSET CORRECTION C
58. 1053 1054 1055 1056 1057 1058 1059 1060 1061 1062 1063 1064 Program block structure Positioning and linear interpolation 600 601 1st part Positioning and linear interpolation 600 601 2nd part Circular interpolation G02 G03 1st part Circular interpolation G02 G03 2nd part Circular helical interpolation G02 G03 Arc tangent to previous path G08 1st part Arc tangent to provious path 08 2nd part Arc defined by three points 9 1st part Arc defined by three points G09 2nd part Threadcutting G33 Controlled corner rounding G36 Tangential entry G37 Tangential exit G38 Chamfer blend G39 Dwell Block preparation stop G04 04 Round Square corner G07 605 Mirror image G11 G12 G13 G14 Planes and longitudinal axis selection G16 G17 G18 G19 G15 Work zones G21 G22 Tool radius compensation G40 G41 G42 Zero offsets Millimeters inches G71 G70 Scaling factor G72 Machine reference search G74 Probing G75 Slaved axis G77 G78 Absolute incremental programming G90 G91 Coordinate and polar origin preset G92 G93 Feedrate programming G94 G95 Auxiliary function programming F S T and D Auxiliary function M programming SYNTAX ASSISTANCE CNC TABLES Page Page Page Page Page Page Page Page Page Page 1090 1091 1092 1093 1094 1095 1096 1097 1098 1099 Tool Offset table Tool table Tool magazine table Miscellaneous auxiliary function
59. 5 1 3 JOGGING WITH ELECTRONIC HANDWHEEL The various handwheel configurations are General handwheel 15 the typical handwheel It can be used to jog any axis one by one Select the axis and turn the handwheel to move it Individual handwheel Itreplaces the mechanical handwheels Up to 3 handwheels can be used one per axis Itonly moves the axis itis associated with Path handwheel For chamfering and rounding corners 2 axes are moved along a selected path by moving a single handwheel This feature must be activated via PLC The general handwheelis assumed as the path handwheel or the individual hand wheel associated with the Z axis When using several handwheel types the CNC sets the following priorities Path Handwheel YES Function NO Is there a general handwheel NO Any individual handhweel YES moving NO Individual Z handwheel as Path handwheel y Individual General Handwheel General handwheel as Path handwheel handwheels Active Active Individual handwheels active Operation when the path handwheel function is not active Any Individual handwheel has priority To jog with the general handwheel select the axis and turn the handwheel Operation when the path handwheel function is active If there is no General Handwheel the CNC assumes as path handwheel the individual handwheel associated with the Z axis If there is General handwheel
60. 8 This window displays the following information 5 Indicates that the SHIFT key has been pressed to activate the second function of the keys For example if key is pressed after the SHIFT key the will understand that the character is required CAP This indicates capital letters CAPS key The CNC will understand that capital letters are required whenever this is active INS REP Indicates if it is insert mode INS or substitution REP mode It is selected by means of the INS key MM INCH Indicates the unit system millimeters or inches selected for display 9 Shows the different options which can be selected with soft keys F1 thru F7 Chapter 1 Section Page MONITOR INFORMATION 5 SYERMEM LAYOUT 13 KEYBOARD LAYOUT In accordance with the use of the different keys it can be understood that the CNC keyboard is divided in the following way Dre rs r Les Lee 1 Alphanumeric keyboard for the data entry in memory selection of axes tool offset etc 2 Keys which allow the information shown on screen to be moved forward or backward page to page or line to line as well as moving the cursor all over the screen The CL key allows the character over which the cursor is positioned or the last one introduced if the cursor is at the end of the line to be erased The INS key allows the insert or substitution mode to be selected 3 Gr
61. A CNC machine needs the following origins and reference points defined Machine Reference Zero or home This is set by the manufacturer as the origin of the machine s coordinate system Part zero or point of origin of the part This is the point of origin which is set for programming the measurements of the part it can be freely selected by the programmer and its value with respect to machine zero can be set by the zero offset Machine Reference point This is a point on the machine established by the manufacturer around which the synchronization of the system is done The control positions the axis on this point instead of moving it as far as the Machine Reference Zero taking at this point the reference coordinates which are defined via the axis machine parameter REFVALUE ZMR M Machine reference zero W Part zero R Machine reference point XMW YMW ZMW etc Coordinates of part zero ZMR YMR ZMR etc Coordinates of machine reference point REFVALUE Chapter 4 Section Page REFERENCESYSTEMS 1 4 2 MACHINE REFERENCE SEARCH G74 The CNC allows you to program the machine reference search in two ways MACHINE REFERENCE SEARCH OF ONE OR MORE AXES IN A PARTICULAR ORDER G74 is programmed followed by the axes in which you want to carry out the reference search For example G74 X Z C Y The CNC begins the movement of all the selected axes which have a machine reference switch machi
62. A VARIABLESFOR 27 PROGRAMMINGINHIGH LEVELLANGUAGE LOCALP TERS 11 2 14 SERCOS VARIABLES They are used for data exchange between the CNC and the servo drives via Sercos interface Read only variables TSVAR X C identifier for the axes TSVARS identifier for the main spindle TSSVAR identifier for the second spindle It returns the third attribute of the sercos variable corresponding to the identifier The third attribute is used in particular software applications and its information is coded according to the Sercos standard P110 SVARX 40 assigns to parameter P110 the third attribute of the sercos variable of identifier 40 of the X axis which corresponds to VelocityFeedback Write only variables for the axes SETGES for the main spindle SSET GS for the second spindle The drive may have up to 8 work ranges or gears 0 through 7 Sercos identifier 218 GearRatioPreselection It may also have up to 8 parameter sets 0 through 7 Sercos indentifier 217 ParameterSetPreselection These variables permit changing the work range gear orthe paramete set for each drive The 4 least significant bits of these variables must indicate the work gear and the 4 most significant bits the parameter set to be selected Read Write variables SVAR X C identifier for
63. Display area To change the display area When selecting one of these options one of the profile elements will be highlighted To select another element of the same profile use the up down and left right arrow keys To select an element of another profile use the page up and page down keys Starting point e Select the desired element The CNC shows the values used to define it e Select the starting point of the desired profile The CNC shows the values used to define it Modify the desired values and press the VALIDATE softkey Modify element e Select the desired element The CNC shows the values used to define it tispossible to change the type of section straight or arc redefine the existing data define a new data or delete an existing one To delete data press the softkey that defines it and press ESC Once the element has been modified press the VALIDATE softkey The CNC recalculates the new profile with the data used to define that section and the next one tangency angle etc Insertelement e Select the point or corner after which the new is to be inserted Select the type of section straight or arc define it and press the VALIDATE softkey e recalculates the new profile with the data used to define that section and the next one tangency angle etc Delete element Select the element to be deleted and confirm the command The CNC recalculates the new profile
64. ENTER The values assigned will be entered into the table MODIFY Once this option has been selected the softkeys change color appearing over a white background and showing the information corresponding to each field On the other hand more information on the editing commands can be obtained at any time by pressing HELP To quit this help mode press HELP again By pressing ESC the information shownin the editing area is deleted From this point on the selected line may be edited again To quit the modify option the information appearing in the editing area must be deleted by pressing CL or ESC and then ESC The table will keep its previous values Once the modification is over press ENTER The new values assigned will be entered into the table Chapter 6 Section Page TABLES HOW TOEDIT TABLES 15 FIND Once this option has been selected the softkeys will show the following options BEGINNING When pressing this softkey the cursoris placed over the first line of the table that can be edited END Whenpressing this softkey the cursor is placed over the last line of the table ZERO OFFSET TOOL OFFSET TOOL POSITION PARAMETER When pressing one of these softkeys the CNC requests the field number to be found Once the field has been defined press ENTER The CNC searches for the requested field and places the cursor over it when found DELETE When deleting line the C
65. FAGOR logo will appear in the main window of the monitor or the screen previously prepared as page 0 by means of the GRAPHIC EDITOR Ifthe CNC shows the message Initialize ENTER ESC it should be borne in mind that after pressing the ENTER key all the information stored in memory and the machine parameters are initialized to default values indicated in the installation manual Onthelowerpartofthe screen the main CNC menu will be shown it being possibleto select the different operating modes by means of the softkeys F1 thru F7 Whenever the CNC menu has more options than number of softkeys 7 the character will appearin softkey f7 Ifthis softkey is pressed the CNC will show the rest of the options available The options which the main CNC menu will show after turning it on after pressing the key sequence SHIFT RESET or after pressing the MAIN MENU softkey are EXECUTE Allows the execution of part programs in automatic or single block SIMULATE Allows simulation of parts programs in several modes EDIT Allows editing new and already existing part programs JOG Allows manual control of the machine by means of the Control Panel keys TABLES Allows CNC tables relating to part programs Zero Offsets Tool Offsets Tools Tool Magazine and global or local arithmetic parameters to be manipulated UTILITIES Allows program manipulation copy delete rename etc STATUS Itshowsthe CNC status and that of the DNC commu
66. G19 In that case rounding chamfers and tangential entries exits can be carried out on the main axes defining that plane To make them in another plane it must be selected before 4 The path after the tangential exit may be tangent but it cannot be on the straight extension of the previous path 1085 Helical path programmed incorrectly DETECTED During execution CAUSE When programming an arc with the format 002 003 X Y J Z K the programmed helical path cannot be carried out The desired height cannot be reached with the programmed helical pitch SOLUTION Correct the syntax of the block The height of the interpolation and the coordinates of the end point in the plane must be related taking the helical pitch into consideration 1086 The Spindle cannot be referenced homed CAUSE Spindle machine parameter REFEED 1 P34 is set to 0 ERROR TROUBLESHOOTING MANUAL 39 8055T CNC neon 3 1087 Circle with zero radius DETECTED During execution CAUSE S The probable causes might be 1 When programming an arc with the format G02 GO03 X 2 1 a circular interpolation has been programmed with zero radius 2 While working with tool radius compensation an inside arc has been programmed with a radius equal to the tool radius SOLUTION The solution for each cause is 1 Arcs with zero radius cannot be programmed Program a radius value other than zero 2 When working with tool
67. Ground Protection symbol It indicates that point must be connected to the main ground point of the machine as protection for people and units OP Introduction 4 MATERIAL RETURNING TERMS When returning the Monitor or the Central Unit pack it in its original package and with its original packaging material If not available pack it as follows 1 Getacardboard box whose three inside dimensions are at least 15 cm 6 inches larger than those ofthe unit The cardboard being used to make the box must have a resistance of 170 Kg 375 Ib 2 When sending it to a Fagor Automation office for repair attach a label indicating the owner of the unit person to contact type of unit serial number symptom and a brief description of the problem 3 Wrap the unit in a polyethylene roll or similar material to protect it When sending the monitor especially protect the CRT glass 4 Padthe unit inside the cardboard box with poly utherane foam on all sides 5 Sealthe cardboard box with packing tape or industrial staples Introduction 5 OEM Manual USER Manual DNC Software Manual DNC Protocol Manual FLOPPY DISK Manual Introduction 6 FAGOR DOCUMENTATION FOR THE CNC Is directed to the machine builder or person in charge of installing and starting up the CNC Is directed to the end user or CNC operator It contains 2 manuals Operating Manual describing how to operate the CNC Programming Manual describi
68. It does not wait for the axes to physically reach the programmed position The distance prior to the programmed position where the CNC starts executing the next block depends on the actual axis feedrate Example X G91 G01 605 X100 F100 Z 120 Via this function round corners can be obtained as shown in the figure The difference between the theoretical and real profiles depends on the programmed feedrate value F The higher the feedrate the greater the difference between both profiles Function G05 is modal and incompatible with G07 G50 and G51 Function G05 can be programmed as G5 On power up after executing M02 M30 or after EMERGENCY or RESET the CNC assumes code 05 or G07 depending on how the general machine parameter ICORNER is set Chapter 7 Section Page ADDITIONALPREPARA TORY FUNCTIONS SQUARE CORNER G07 5 ROUND CORNER G05 G50 7 3 8 CONTROLLED ROUND CORNER 650 When working in G50 controlled round corner once the theoretical interpolation of the current block has concluded the CNC waits forthe axis to enterthe area defined by machine parameter INPOSW2 and it then starts executing the following block of the program Example XA INPOSW2 120 INPoswe 20 TPO74A Gof G01 G50 X100 F100 7 120 Function G50 assures that the difference between the theoretical and actual paths stays smaller than what was set by machin
69. ODW3 4 60 Defines data window 3 IB 1 INPUT Axis feed 5 4 Axis feedrate request DW3 IB1 Displays feedrate in window 3 Chapter 12 Section Page PROGRAMCONTROLSTATEMENTS SCREEN CUSTOMIZING 17 STATEMENTS SK expression 1 text1 expression 2 text 2 The mnemonic SK defines and displays the new softkey menu indicated Each of the expressions will indicate the softkey number which it is required to modify 1 7 starting from the left and the texts which itis required to write in them Expression 1 expression 2 expression 3 may contain a number or any expression which may result in a number Each text will allow a maximum of 20 characters which will be shown on two lines of 10 characters each If the text selected has less than 10 characters the CNC will centeritonthe top line butifit has more than 10 characters the programmer will center it Examples SK 1 HELP SK 2 MAXIMUM COORDINATE gt SK I FEEDRATE SK 2 MAXIMUM ORDINATE FEEDRATE MAXIMUM COORDINATE Warning If while a standard CNC softkey menu is active one or more softkeys are selected via high level language statement SK the CNC will clear all existing softkeys and it will only show the selected ones Ifwhile auser softkey menuis active one or more softkeys are selected via high level
70. Once the block has been edited press ENTER This new block will be added to the program after the one indicated by the cursor The cursor will position over the new edited block and the editing area window will be cleared so another block can be written To quit the block editing mode press ESC or MAIN MENU Page Chapter 4 Section 2 EDIT EDITING IN CNC LANGUAGE 4 1 2 TEACH IN EDITING It is basically identical to the previous option editing in CNC language except what regards the programming of position coordinate values This option shows the current position values of each one of the axes of the machine It permits to enter the axes position values from the CNC keyboard as when editing in CNC language or also use the TEACH IN editing format as described next the machine axes with the jogging keys or with the electronic handwheel up to the desired position Pressthe softkey corresponding to the axis to be defined CNC will assign to this axis its current physical position as the program position value Eitherposition value programming methods can be usedat any time while defining a block When the block being edited has no information empty editing area or window the ENTER key may be pressed in which case the CNC will generate a new block with the current position values of the axes This block will be added automatically to the program and it will be inserted after th
71. Otherwise the CNC will issue the corresponding error message The user screens stored in the Memkey Card may be Used in the screen customizing programs as described next Displayed on power up page 0 instead of the FAGOR logo Activated from the PLC The PLC has 256 marks with their corresponding mnemonics to select the user screens These marks are M4700 PICO M4701 M4702 PIC2 M4953 253 M4954 254 M4955 PIC255 When any of these marks is set high its corresponding screen page is activated Used to complete the M function assistance system screens 250 255 Whenrequesting programming assistance for the auxiliary M functions by pressing the HELP key the CNC will show the corresponding internal screen page When user page 250 is defined that information will also include the E gt symbol indicating that more help pages are available By pressing this key the CNC will display user screen 250 The CNC will keep showing that indicator as long as there are more user screens defined 250 255 These screens must be defined in a row always starting from page 250 If one of them is missing the CNC will interpret that there are no more screens defined Chapter 10 Section Page SCREENEDITOR 1 The user screens activated from the PLC may be displayed with the ACTIVE PAGES option of the PLC The various options available in this operating mode are
72. PM PANTS EDD FO 20 Vaas O SI A A 21 E cwdkriw 21 Vanes OS 98 677 OR HRS 21 Values OU d aiinsceneuinen GR EHE EHE URS 21 Valuss QUID Be HERO ERE 26 Wales O thia 65595 aeri i HEURE RE EAR 21 Values asas t Re EHE EE RERUM 21 Values thm S999 er e ERES 21 WATCHDOG in Periodic Module PE WBUF can only be executed in user channel while editing 18 Work zone limit range exceeded 40 bur 20 prs pe ree 20 ko Is ne H A 20 bou Ri s 20 Wrong erac M TUE iss ioo e ER EH EH HE UH HU EN E EHE 28 rong BESSWOU usns HEIN HT IAE 23 Voltage control error 100 Lua eim tie i ia 49 W WATCHDOG in Main Module PRQ e 48 Wrong plane in tangential 30 Wrong sercosid parameters for axes and spindle 53 Wrong tool position prior to canned cycle 34 Wrong work zone boundaries eere teens 41 Zero offset range exesedet eie r
73. Repeats the movements indicated on point 4 6 The live tool stops Considerations The machining conditions feedrate live tool rpm etc must be programmed prior to the calling the cycle Once the cycle has finished the program will resume the feedrate F and the functions which were active before calling the cycle Only the tool radius compensation that was active will be canceled and the program will be resumed in G40 Page 68 Chapter 9 Section CANNEDCYCLES G62 RADIAL SLOTMILLING 10 1 1 0 PROBING The CNC has two probe inputs one for 5V TTL signals and the other for 24V The appendix to the Installation and Start up manual explains the connections of the various probe types to these inputs This CNC allows by using probes the following operations to be performed Programming probing movements by means of function G75 Executing the various tool calibration and part measurement cycles by programming high level blocks PROBING G75 G76 The G75 function allows movements to be programmed which will end after the CNC receives the signal from the measuring probe used The G76 function allows movements to be programmed which willend after the CNC no longer receives the signal from the measuring probe used Their definition formatis G75 X C 5 5 G76 X C 5 5 After G75 or G76 the required axis or axes will be programmed as well as the coordinates of these axes which will def
74. TABLE 2 Initialize ENTER ESC CHECKSUM ERROR CROSS COMP TABLE 3 Initialize ENTER ESC DETECTED While starting the CNC up CAUSE Data lost in the tables Possible RAM error SOLUTION pressing ENTER the tables are loaded with default values If the error persists contact the Service Department eincx Incorrect X axis leadscrew table Press any key eincy Incorrect Y axis leadscrew table Press any key eincz Incorrect Z axis leadscrew table Press any key eincu Incorrect U axis leadscrew table Press any key eincv Incorrect V axis leadscrew table Press any key eincw Incorrect W axis leadscrew table Press any key einca Incorrect A axis leadscrew table Press any key eincb Incorrect B axis leadscrew table Press any key eincc Incorrect C axis leadscrew table Press any key DETECTED While starting the CNC up CAUSE Wrong data in the leadscrew compensation table SOLUTION The points must be defined in the table as follows They must be ordered according to their position on the axis starting from the most negative or least positive point to be compensated for The machine reference point must have an error value of zero The error difference between two points cannot be greater than the distance between them einx1 Incorrect cross compensation table 1 einx2 Incorrect cross compensation table 2 einx3 Incorrect cross compensation tab
75. The machining conditions feedrate live tool rpm etc must be programmed prior to the calling the cycle Once the cycle has finished the program will resume the feedrate F and the functions which were active before calling the cycle Only the tool radius compensation that was active will be canceled and the program will be resumed in G40 Page 60 Chapter 9 Section CANNEDCYCLES G60 AXIAL DRILLING TAPPING 9 14 661 RADIAL DRILLING TAPPING This cycle is available when the machine has a live tool While drilling or tapping the spindle is stopped and the tool is turning This makes it possible to machine anywhere on the workpiece Whether one operation or the other will be performed depends on the format being used For tapping parameter B must be set to 0 and for drilling B must be greater than 0 re E Feedrate at B Feedrate GOO e Won gu RRO 2 The basic block structure for each operation is Drilling G61XZIB QAJDKHCS Tapping G61X ZIBO QAJDS X 5 5 215 5 1 5 5 Defines the X coordinate where the cycle will be run It is programmed in absolute values and in the active measuring units radius or diameter Defines the Z coordinate where the cycle will be run Itis programmed in absolute values Defines the depth It is referred to the start
76. W axis A axis Parameter X and all related to it with the ordinate axis 2 22 X axis X axis B axis Chapter 9 Section Page CANNEDCYCLES 1 9 1 666 PATTERN REPEAT CANNED CYCLE This cycle machines the programmed profile maintaining the specified pass between the successive machining passes The basic structure of the block is TP09A01 G66XZICALMHSEQ X X 5 5 Z 5 5 15 5 5 5 1 Defines the X coordinate of the initial point of the profile It must be programmed in absolute values and in the active units radius or diameter Defines the Z coordinate of the initial point of the profile It must be programmed in absolute values Defines the residual stock i e the amount to be removed from the original part It is given in radius and it will be taken as X residual or Z residual depending on the value given to parameter A If H is other than zero and I is not greater than the finishing stock L or M The CNC will only run the finishing pass Defines the machining pass Itis giveninradius and it will be taken as pass along X or along Z depending on the value given to parameter A All the machining passes are performed with this value except the last one which will eliminate the remaining stock If programmed with a 0 value the CNC will display the corresponding error message Defines the main machining axis When programming
77. When using a PC through serial line 1 or 2 proceed as follows Execute the Fagor50 exe applications program at the PC Activate DNC communications at the CNC See chapter 8 in this manual Select the work directory as shown in chapter 7 of this manual Option Utilities Directory Serial L Change directory With the Edit mode of operation part programs residing in the CNC s RAM memory may be modified To modify a program stored in the MemKey Card in a PC or in the hard disk it must be previously copied into RAM memory Execution Part programs stored any where may be executed or simulated See chapter 3 in this manual The user customizing programs must be in RAM memory so the CNC can execute them The GOTO and RPT instructions cannot be used in programs executed from a PC connected through the serial lines See chapter 14 of the programming manual Chapter 1 Section Page OVERVIEW 1 The subroutines can only be executed if they reside in the CNC s RAM memory Therefore to execute a subroutine stored in the MemKey Card ina PC or in the hard disk it must be first copied into the CNC s RAM memory From a program in execution another program can be executed which is in RAM memory the MemKey Card in a PC or in the hard disk using the EXEC instruction See chapter 14 of the programming manual Utilities This operating mode chapter 7 of this manual lets display the part program director
78. another program Whenselecting this option the CNC will request the numberofthe destination program where the selected block or blocks are to be copied After entering the program number press ENTER Next indicate the first and last blocks to copy by following these steps Position the cursor over the first block to be copied and press the INITIAL BLOCK softkey Position the cursor over the last block to be copied and press the FINAL BLOCK softkey If the last block to be copied is also the last one ofthe program it can also be selected by pressing the TO THE END softkey To copy only one block the initial block and the final block will be the same one Once the first and last blocks are selected the CNC willhighlight the selected blocks and will execute the command If the destination program already exists the following options will be displayed Write over the existing program All the blocks of the destination program will be erased and will be replaced by the copied blocks Append add the copied blocks behind the ones existing at the destination program Abort or cancel the command without copying the blocks Page 22 Chapter 4 Section EDIT COPY TOPROGRAM 4 9 INCLUDE A PROGRAM With this option it is possible to include or merge the contents of another program into the one currently selected Once this option is selected the CNC will request the number
79. araphic 15 APPENDIX PS code EOS IEEE Luci uic E poH EH tere tener 3 Inteenal4 NC variables enini ea 5 High level PSS assirinati UEPHOT kE RARAS 11 T 1o err Tp 13 Logic outputs Tor key codes e EY E d Leda pi ds 14 Keys deis cum 15 Programming assistance system PARES 16 BA HET UIS OTt 19 VERSION HISTORY T LATHE MODEL Date December 1999 Software Version 4 0x AFFECTED MANUAL AND CHAPTERS Portuguese language Tangential control PLC user registers from R1 to R499 CNC status screen Hard Disk HD Installation manual Installation manual Programming manual Installation manual Programming manual Operating manual Installation manual Chap 3 Chap 9 Chap 10 Appendix Chap 6 Chap 11 Appendix Chap 6 Chap 7 Appendix Chap 11 Chap 8 Chap 1 Chap 3 Appendix Diagnosis of the HD Operating manual Chap 12 Integrate the HD in an external PC network Consult directories delete rename and copy programs in the same or another device Execution and simulation from RAM Memkey Card HD or serial line It is now possible to execute EXEC and open OPEN for editing a program stored in any device
80. execute the command M45 S 5 5 where S indicates the turning speed in rpms and the sign indicates the turning direction The CNC will output the analog voltage corresponding to the selected speed according to the value assigned to the machine parameter MAXSPEED for the auxiliary spindle To stop the auxiliary spindle program M45 or M45 SO Whenever the auxiliary spindle or live tool is active the CNC will let the PLC know by activating the general logic output DM45 M5548 Also itis possible to set the machine parameter for the auxiliary spindle SPDLOVR so the Override keys of the front panel can modify the currently active turning speed of the auxiliary spindle Chapter 5 Section Page PROGRAMMING BYISO CODE AUXILIARYFUNCTION M 15 6 PATH CONTROL The CNC allows you to program movements on one axis only or several at the same time Only those axes which intervene in the required movement are programmed The programming order of the axes is as follows X Y Z U V W A B C The coordinates for each axis are programmed in radius or diameter depending on the setting of their corresponding axis machine parameter DFORMAT Chapter 6 Section Page PATHCONTROL 1 6 1 RAPID TRAVEL G00 The movements programmed after GOO are executed at the rapid feedrate indicated in the axis machine parameter GOOFEED Independently of the number of axis which move the resulting path
81. is below 50 or over 200 of the programmed value ERROR TROUBLESHOOTING MANUAL 43 8055T CNC ERGO 3 1218 1226 axis work zone 3 overrun DETECTED During execution CAUSE An attempt has been made to move an axis to a point located inside the work zone 3 which has been defined as no exit zone SOLUTION In the history of the program work zone 3 defined with G20 G21 has been defined as no exit zone G22 K3 S2 To disable it program G22 K3 SO 1228 1236 axis work zone 4 overrun DETECTED During execution CAUSE An attempt has been made to move an axis to a point located inside the work zone 4 which has been defined as no exit zone SOLUTION In the history of the program work zone 4 defined with G20 G21 has been defined as no exit zone G22 K4 S2 To disable it program G22 K4 SO 1237 Do not change entry angle inside the thread DETECTED While executing CAUSE A multiple thread has been defined but an entry angle Q has been programmed between two threads SOLUTION When making multiple threads only the first one may have the entry angle 44 ERROR TROUBLESHOOTING MANUAL Aeon 3 8055T CNC HARDWARE ERRORS 2000 External emergency activated DETECTED During execution CAUSE PLC input 11 has been set to zero possible E stop button or the PLC mark M5000 EMERGEN has been set to zero SOLUTION Check at the PLC why these inp
82. the CNC assumes it as path handwheel The individual handwheels keep working Page Chapter 5 Section 12 JOG JOGGING WITHELECTRONIC HANDWHEEL To move any of them turn the switch to any of the handwheel positions Positions 1 10 and 100 indicate the multiplying factor being applied besides the internal x4 to the feedback pulses supplied by the electronic handwheel S JOG x For example when having a 25 lines turn handwheel with a M loo 8 Bu display format of 5 3 mm or 4 4 inches and the machine parameter MPGRES 0 i Switch position Distance per turn 1 0 100 or 0 0100 inch 10 1 000mm_ or 0 1000 inch 100 10 000 mm or 1 0000 inch To apply a different multiplying factor for each handwheel the HANFCT variable must be used Referto the section on variables associated with electronic handwheels in chapter 10 of this manual Warning Depending on how fast the handwheel is turned and on the selected handwheel switch position the CNC might be demanded to move the axis faster than the limit set by general machine parameter GOOFEED In that case the CNC will move the axis the indicated distance but it will limit the axis speed to that parameter value Chapter 5 Section Page JoG JOGGING WITHELECTRONIQ 13 HANDWHEEL 5 1 3 1 GENERAL HANDWHEEL Select the axis to be jogged Press one of the JOG keys of the axis to be jogged The selected
83. the same or another device Execution and simulation from RAM Memkey Card HD or serial line It is now possible to execute EXEC and open OPEN for editing a program stored in any device Thread repair Reference home the spindle before Simulation in rapid without assuming G95 or M3 M54 etc Geometry associated with the tool offset Installation manual Operating manual Programming manual Operating manual Programming manual Programming manual TC operating manual Operating manual Installation manual Operating manual Chap 3 Chap 1 Chap 7 Chap 1 Chap 1 Chap 3 Chap 14 Appendix Chap 9 Chap 4 Chap 3 Chap 6 Live tool with M45 or as if it were a 2nd spindle Installation manual Chap 3 PLC channel affected by another feedrate override set by PLC Independent x1 x10 x100 factor for each handwheel Handling the Fagor HBE handwheel Spindle synchronization G77 5 Optimizing of profile machining 2 axes controlled by a single servo drive G75 function affected by Feedrate override 96 Probe Probe position by cycle parameters Protection against deleting OEM screens Detecting temperature and battery voltage on the new CPU TC option ISO program management also like MDI Installation manual Installation manual Programming manual Installation manual Installation manual Programming manual Programming manual TC operating manual Installation manual I
84. 0 and 3 0136 Values 0 thru 4 DETECTED While editing machine parameters CAUSE An attempt has been made to assign the wrong value to a parameter SOLUTION parameter only admits values between 0 and 4 0137 Values 0 thru 9 DETECTED While editing machine parameters CAUSE An attempt has been made to assign the wrong value to a parameter SOLUTION The parameter only admits values between 0 and 9 0139 Values 0 thru 100 DETECTED While editing machine parameters CAUSE An attempt has been made to assign the wrong value to a parameter SOLUTION The parameter only admits values between 0 and 100 0140 Values 0 thru 255 DETECTED While editing machine parameters CAUSE An attempt has been made to assign the wrong value to a parameter SOLUTION The parameter only admits values between 0 and 255 0141 Values 0 thru 9999 DETECTED While editing machine parameters CAUSE S The various causes might be 1 An attempt has been made to assign the wrong value to a parameter 2 During execution when inside the program a call has been to a subroutine MCALL PCALL greater than 9999 SOLUTION The solution for each cause is 1 The parameter only admits values between 0 and 9999 2 The subroutine number must be between 1 and 9999 0142 Values 0 thru 32767 DETECTED While editing machine parameters CAUSE An attempt has been made to assign the wrong value to a parameter SOLUTION parameter
85. 00 CONTINUOUS JOG MOVE CAP INS MM REFERENCE PRESET TOOL MDI USER DISPLAY IMM INCHES SEARCH CALIBRAT SELECTION Page Chapter 5 Section JOG DISPLAY SELECTION MM INCHES This softkey toggles the display units for the linear axes from millimeters to inches and vice versa The lower right hand window will indicate which units are selected at all times Note that this switching obviously does not affect the rotary axes which are shown in degrees Chapter 5 Section Page JOG MM INCHES 9 5 1 JOGGING THE AXES 5 1 1 CONTINUOUS JOG Once the override of the jogging feedrate indicated by axis machine parameter JOGFEED has been selected with the switch at the Operator Panel press the jog keys corresponding to the desired axis and to the desired jogging direction Z 3 3 4 4 etc The axes can be jogged one at a time and in different ways depending on the status of the general logic input LATCHMAN If while jogging an axis the key is pressed the axis will move at the feedrate established by machine parameter GOOFEED for this axis as long as this key stays pressed When Ifthe PLC sets this mark low the axes will be jogged while pressing the corresponding Jog key Ifthe PLC sets this mark high the axes will be jogged from the time the corresponding Jog key is pressed until the key is pressed or another jog key is pressed In this case the
86. 11 Appendix Chap 9 Chap 4 Chap 3 4 9 Appendix Chap 3 Chap 10 Chap 7 Chap 3 TC option Coolant icon in all cycles TC operating manual Chap 4 TC option Background editing TC option Key codes for user cycles TC operating manual TC operating manual Chap 4 Appendix Version history T 1 INTRODUCTION SAFETY CONDITIONS Read the following safety measures in order to prevent damage to personnel to this product and to those products connected to it This unit must only be repaired by personnel authorized by Fagor Automation Fagor Automation shall not be held responsible for any physical or material damage derived from the violation of these basic safety regulations Precautions against personal damage Before powering the unit up make sure that it is connected to ground In order to avoid electrical discharges make sure that all the grounding connections are properly made Do not work in humid environments In order to avoid electrical discharges always work under 90 of relative humidity non condensing and 45 C 113 F Do not work in explosive environments In order to avoid risks damage do no work in explosive environments Precautions against product damage Working environment This unitis ready to be used in Industrial Environments complying with the directives and regulations effective in the European Community Fagor Automation shall not be held responsible for
87. Associated tool offset number tool table Tool length along X axis tool offset table 7 along Z axis tool offset table R Radius ofthe cutter tool offset table F Location code or type of tool tool offset table Ifthe X length assigned to a tool is greater than the Z length value the CNC will show a tool with a vertical handle and when X is shorter than Z with a horizontal handle paw Z Z I X X Z Page Chapter 6 Section 10 TABLES TOOLGEOMETRYTABLE Cutter angle NOSEA Indicates the angle formed by the sides of the cutter and it is given in degrees Cutter width NOSEW Cutting angle CUTA The parameters corresponding to the cutter angle NOSEA and the cutter width NOSEW must always be defined When the cutter is square its angle value will be 90 NOSEA 90 X NOSEA 90 70067 N When the cutter is round the cutter angle will be 90 NOSEA 90 and the parameter corresponding to the cutter width must be assigned its diameter value NOSEW 2R NOSEA 90 NOSEW 2R The cutting angle CUTA must be defined besides NOSEA and NOSEW only when the type location code of the selected tool is F1 F3 F5 or F7 If the selected tool type is FO or F9 it is not necessary to define any parameter and if it is F1 F5 or F7 the following parameters must be defined the cutter angle NOSEA the cutter width NOSEW and the cutting angle
88. CNC 1065 Beginning of compensation without a straight path DETECTED During execution CAUSE The first movement in the work plane after activating tool radius compensation G41 G42 is not a linear movement SOLUTION The first movement after activating tool radius compensation G41 G42 must be a linear movement 1066 End of compensation without a straight path DETECTED During execution CAUSE The first movement in the work plane after canceling tool radius compensation G40 is not a linear movement SOLUTION The first movement after canceling tool radius compensation G40 must be a linear movement 1067 Compensation radius too large DETECTED During execution CAUSE While working with tool radius compensation G41 G42 an inside arc has been programmed with a radius smaller than the tool radius SOLUTION Use a tool with a smaller radius When working with tool radius compensation G41 G42 the arc radius must be greater than the tool radius Otherwise the tool cannot machine along the programmed path 1068 Step in a straight path DETECTED During execution CAUSE While working with tool radius compensation G41 G42 the profile has a straight section that cannot be machined because the tool diameter is too large SOLUTION Use a tool with a smaller radius 1070 Step in circular path DETECTED During execution CAUSE While working with tool radius compensation G41 G42 the profile has
89. CNC will continue the operation ignoring the channel mom PER D M EN a UC EUN ANS ANN NN SS YQ QOS SS NS LS LAA A S N N N N N N N v SS NSN YN BY OO MH OA OY AAA SS AWS PSS OQH YS SN ASS SYS WOM BOQ HB QO HH HOMO Oy rn OHH QQ SS SS Q QOH ANS ANN S N 7 900804 Once the residual profile is machined the detected channels will be machined The profile may have an unlimited number of channels Section STOCKREMOVALCANNED CYCLEALONG Z AXIS G69 9 CANNEDCYCLES Chapter Page 20 To do so it will return in GOO to the point where the profile machining was interrupted 1 i pi 1 1 1 2 l 2 HE Y 7 2 2 7 7 i e5 7 i VA 1 1 l 2 1 2 o 7 7 a 1 2 1 2 1 5 7 gt 4 T Lp TTT yy A 7 PAZ gt 5 2 pp I pp pp CELL py 8 2 p LL LOE From this pointon it will follow the programmed contour maintaining the finishing stock until the selected pass is reached Section 1 2 The new roughing pass is performed in the following
90. CNC will show the source program that corresponds to the executable program object even when that program source has been deleted or modified at the CNC The CNC will also display all the variable consultations at logic level 1 including those not being executed and the actions whose conditions are met To display the program from a specific line on press the L key followed by that line number and then press ENTER The operator can move the cursor around the CRT a line at a time with the up down arrow keys and a page at a time with the page up and page down keys The various monitoring options available are described next Once any ofthe those options has been selected the operator has an editing window where the cursor may be moved with the right and left arrow keys The up arrow will position the cursor over the first character of the editing window and the down arrow over the last one MODIFY THE STATUS OF THE RESOURCES The CNC has the following instructions to modify the status of the different PLC resources I 1 256 0 1 Alters the status 0 1 of the indicated input For example 1120 0 sets input I120 to 0 I1 256 1 256 0 1 Alters the status 0 1 ofathe indicated group of inputs For example 1100 103 1 sets inputs I101 1102 and I103 to 1 1 256 0 1 Alters the status 0 1 of the indicated output Forexample O20 0 sets output O20 to 0 O 1 256 1 256 0 1 Alters the status 0 1 of the indicate
91. CONSTANTSAND OPERATORS Page 35 Trigonometric functions SIN sine P1 SIN 30 P1205 COS cosine P2 COS 30 P2 0 8660 TAN tangent TAN 30 gt P3 0 5773 ASIN arcsine P4 ASIN 1 4 90 ACOS arc cosine P5 ACOS 1 gt P5 0 ATAN arc tangent P6 45 arc tangent y x P7 ARG 1 2 P7 243 4349 There two functions for calculating the arc tangent ATAN which returns the result between 90 and ARG given between 0 and 360 Other functions ABS absolute value ABS 8 gt 8 LOG decimallogarithm P2 LOG 100 gt 2 2 SORT squareroot P3 SQRT 16 3 4 ROUND rounding up a number P4 ROUND 5 83 gt 4 6 FIX integer P5 FIX 5 423 gt 5 5 FUP ifinteger takes integer P6 FUP7 7 if not takes entire part 1 FUP 5 423 gt P6 6 BCD converts given number to BCD P7 BCD 234 gt P7 564 00100011 0100 BIN converts given numbertobinary BIN AB 8 171 1010 1011 Conversions to binary and are made in 32 bits it being possible to represent the number 156 in the following formats Decimal 156 Hexadecimal 9C Binary 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 1001 1100 BCD 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0001 0101 0110 Page Chapter 11 Section 36 PROGRAMMINGINHIGH LEVELLANGUAGE OPERATORS
92. CUTA When the selected tool type is F2 F4 F6 or F8 only the cutter angle NOSEA and width NOSEW must be defined When using a drill bit or end mill Tool type location code F10 must be used being necessary to define the values of of NOSEW cutter width and NOSEA cutter tip angle Chapter 6 Section Page TABLES TOOLGEOMETRYTABLE 11 N EEA D0 u ROSEY p CUTA HOSEA HOSEA Hos Page 12 Chapter TABLES 6 Section TOOLGEOMETRYTABLE 6 5 1 HOW TO EDIT THE TOOL GEOMETRY TABLE Once the tool geometry table is selected the following options are available EDIT Once this option is selected the softkeys will change their background color to white and they will offer the following options e Cutterangle e Cutter width e Cutting angle Previous menu To return to the to the tool geometry menu Press ESC to quit this editing mode and return to the tool table menu FIND With this function it is possible to select a new geometry table The CNC will request the number of the tool or offset associated with the geometry is to be displayed DELETE With this option it is possible to delete the geometry of the displayed tool setting to O its NOSEA NOSEW and CUTA field values CLEAR ALL With option it is possible to delete set to 0 all the geometry fields NOSEA NOSEW and CUTA of all the tables in the tool table MM INCH Every time this softkey
93. CYCLE ALONG THE X AXIS This cycle performs a grooving operation along the X axis maintaining the same pass between the successive passes being this equal to or smaller than the one programmed The basic structure of the block is G88 X ZQRCDK X 5 5 Z 5 5 0 5 5 5 5 5 5 D5 5 K5 X TPO9K01 Defines the X coordinate of the initial point of the groove It must be programmed in absolute values and in the active units radius or diameter Defines the Z coordinate of the initial point of the groove It must be programmed in absolute values Defines the X coordinate of the final point of the groove It must be programmed in absolute and in radius or diameter depending on the active units Defines the Z coordinate of the final point of the groove Defines the grooving pass Ifnot programmed the CNC will assume the width of the cuttter NOSEW of the active tool and if programmed with a zero value the CNC will issue the corresponding error message Defines the safety distance and it must have a positive value in radius If not programmed a value of 0 will be assumed Defines the dwell in hundredths of a second after each penetration until the withdrawal begins If not programmed a value of 0 is assumed Page 54 Chapter 9 Section CANNEDCYCLES GROOVINGALONG X AXIS G88 Basic operation The whole grooving operation is done with the same pass being this equal to or small
94. Department 4002 Drive overload 201 4003 Drive overtemperature 107 4004 Motor overtemperature 108 4005 Heat sink overtemperature 106 4006 Voltage control error 100 105 4007 Feedback error 600 606 4008 Power bus error 213 215 Y 4009 Overcurrent 212 y 4010 Power bus overvoltage 304 306 4011 Power bus undervoltage 307 DETECTED During execution CAUSE An error has been detected at the drive The number in brackets indicates the standard error number of the drive Refer to the drive manual for further information SOLUTION _ These types of errors come with messages 4019 4021 4022 or 4023 which indicate at which axis drive or spindle drive the error has come up Refer to the drive manual for the error number in brackets and act accordingly 4016 Error undefined class 1 DETECTED During execution CAUSE The drive has detected an error but it cannot identify it SOLUTION Contact the Service Department 4017 Drive error DETECTED During execution CAUSE An error has been detected at the drive which does not match the standard SERCOS errors SOLUTION _ These types of errors come with messages 4019 4021 4022 or 4023 which indicate at which axis drive or spindle drive the error has come up Refer to the drive manual for the error and act accordingly ERROR TROUBLESHOOTING MANUAL 49 8055T CNC 2 4018 Sercos variabl
95. HBE handwheel in JOG mode and if bit 30 is enabled Chapter 11 Section Page PROGRAMMINGINHIGH LEVELLANGUAGE VARIABLES ASSOCIATED 17 WITHHANDWHEELS The values assigned to bits c b a indicate the axis to be jogged and the selected multiplying factor cba 000 Itis not to be moved 001 xi factor 010 x10 factor 100 x100 factor If there are several axes selected the CNC attends to the next one in priority X Y Z V W If there are more than one bit to 1 on an axis the least significant bitis taken into account Thus cba 1 1 1 xl factor 1 1 0 x10 factor The HBE handwheel has priority In other words regardless of the mode selected at the CNC switch continuous or incremental JOG handwheel HBEVAR is defined as other than 0 the CNC goes into handwheel mode It highlights the selected axis and the multiplying factor selected by PLC When the HBEVAR variable is set to 0 it displays the mode selected at the switch again For further information refer to chapter 4 Example of PLC program for Fagor HBE handwheel in this manual Read and write variables MASLAN must be used when the Path Handwheel mode is selected Indicates the angle of the linear path X a G18 MASCFI MASCSE Must be used when the Path Handwheel mode is selected On circular paths they indicate the coordinates of the arc center M G18 MASCSE MASCFI Page Chap
96. K is not modal so it should be programmed whenever timing 1s required Function G04 K can be programmed as G4 K Timing is executed at the beginning of the block in which it is programmed Chapter 7 Section Page ADDITIONALPREPARATORY FUNCTIONS G04 AND G04K 3 7 3 WORKING WITH SQUARE G07 AND ROUND G05 G50 CORNERS 7 3 1 SQUARE CORNER G07 When working in G07 square corner the CNC does not start executing the following program block until the position programmed in the current block has been reached The CNC considers that the programmed position has been reached when the axisis within the INPOSW in position zone or dead band from the programmed position Example T 40 160 TPO73 G91 G01 607 X100 F100 Z 120 The theoretical and real profile coincide obtaining square corners as seen in the figure Function G07 is modal and incompatible with G05 G50 and G51 Function G07 can be programmed as G7 On power up after executing M02 M30 or after EMERGENCY or RESET the CNC assumes code 05 or G07 depending on how the general machine parameter ICORNER is set Page Chapter 7 Section 4 ADDITIONALPREPARATORY FUNCTIONS SQUARE CORNER G07 ROUND CORNER G05 G50 7 3 2 ROUND CORNER G05 When working in G05 round corner the CNC starts executing the following block of the program as soon as the theoretical interpolation ofthe current block has concluded
97. M table Zero offset table Leadscrew error compensation tables Crossed compensation table Machine parametertables User parameter tables Password table 17 18 SYNTAX ASSISTANCE HIGH LEVEL Page 1100 Page 1101 Page 1102 Page 1103 Page 1104 Page 1105 Page 1106 Page 1107 Page 1108 Page 1109 Page 1110 Page 1111 Page 1112 Page 1113 Page 1114 Page 1115 Page 1116 Page 1117 ERROR and MSG mnemonics GOTO and RPT mnemonics OPEN and WRITE mnemonics SUB and RET mnemonics CALL PCALL MCALL MDOFF and PROBE mnemonics DSBLK ESBLK DSTOP ESTOP DFHOLD EFHOLD mnemonics IF mnemonic Assignmentblocks Mathematical expressions PAGE mnemonic ODW mnemonic DW mnemonic IB mnemonic SK mnemonic WKEY and SYSTEM mnemonics KEYSRC mnemonic WBUF mnemonic SYMBOL mnemonic SYNTAX ASSISTANCE CANNED CYCLES Page 1076 Page 1078 Page 1079 Page 1080 Page 1081 Page 1082 Page 1083 Page 1084 Page 1085 Page 1086 Page 1087 Page 1088 Page 1089 Pattern Repeat canned cycle G66 Stock removal along X canned cycle G68 Stock removal along Z canned cycle G69 Turning canned cycle with straight sections G81 Facing canned cycle with straight sections G82 Drilling canned cycle G83 Turning canned cycle with circular sections G84 Facing canned cycle with circular sections G85 Longitudinal threadcutting canned cycle G86 Face threadcutt
98. ORGA ORGB ORGC All the letters of the alphabet A Z are also reserved words as they can make up a high level language word when used alone Page Chapter 11 PROGRAMMINGINHIGH LEVELLANGUAGE Section LEXICALDESCRIPTION 11 1 2 NUMERICAL CONSTANTS The blocks programmed in high levellanguage allow numbers in decimal format which do not exceed the format 6 5 and numbers in hexadecimal format in which case they must be preceded by the sign with a maximum of 8 digits The assignment to a variable of a constant higher than the format 6 5 will be made by means of arithmetic parameters by means of arithmetic expressions or by means of constants expressed in hexadecimal format Example To assign the value 100000000 to the variable TIMER It can be done in one of the following ways TIMER 5F5E100 TIMER 10000 10000 P100 10000 10000 TIMER P100 When the CNC is working in metric system mm resolution is in tenths of a micron and figures are programmed in the format 5 4 positive or negative with 5 integers and 4 decimals and if the CNC is operating in inches resolution is in 0 00001 inches figures being programmed with the format 4 5 positive or negative with 4 integers and 5 decimals For the convenience of the programmer this control always allows the format 5 5 positive or negative with 5 integers and 5 decimals adjusting each number appropriately to the workin
99. PLC program 82 PLC monitoring 83 Active PLC messages 84 Active PLC pages screens 85 Save PLC program 86 Restore PLC program 87 PLC resources in use mode 88 PLCstatistics Chapter 11 Section Page PROGRAMMINGINHIGH LEVELLANGUAGE OTHER VARIABLES 29 90 Graphic Editor 100 General machine parameter table 101 Axis machine parameter tables 102 Spindle machine parameter tables 103 Serial port machine parameter tables 104 PLC machine parameter table 105 M function table 106 Spindle and cross compensation table 107 Table of machine parameters for Ethernet 110 Diagnosis configuration 111 Diagnosis hardware test 112 Diagnosis RAM memory test 113 Diagnosis flash memory test 114 User diagnosis 115 Hard Disk diagnosis OPMODA Indicates the operating mode currently selected when working with the main channel Use the OPMODE variable to know at any time the selected operating mode main channel user channel PLC channel This information is given at the least significant bits with a 1 when active and with a 0 when not active or when it is not available in the current version bitO Programin execution bit 1 Programin simulation bit2 Block in execution via MDI JOG bit3 Repositioning in progress bit4 Program interrupted by CYCLE STOP bit5 MDI JOG Block interrupted bit6 Repositioning interrupted bit7 Intoolinspection bit8 Block in exec
100. PLCMS5008 OR 1 selects Single Block execution M5008 1 PLCM5010 PLCM5010 AND FFFFFFFE Frees feedrate Override M5010 0 Chapter 11 Section Page PROGRAMMINGINHIGH LEVELLANGUAGE OPERATORS 37 11 52 RELATIONAL EXPRESSIONS These are arithmetic expressions joined by relational operators IF P8 EQ 12 8 Analyzes if the value of P8 is equal to 12 8 IF ABS SIN P24 GT SPEED Analyzes if the sine is greater than the spindle speed CLOCK LT P9 10 99 Analyzes if the clock count is less than P9 10 99 At the same time these conditions can be joined by means of logic operators IF P8EQ12 8 OR ABS SIN P24 GT SPEED AND CLOCK LT PT 10 99 The result of these expressions is true or false Page Chapter 11 Section 38 PROGRAMMINGINHIGH LEVELLANGUAGE EXPRESSIONS 12 1 12 PROGRAM CONTROL STATEMENTS The control statements available to high level programming can be grouped as follows Programming statements consisting of Assignment statements Display statements Enable disable statements Flow control statements Subroutine statements Statements for generating programs Screen customizing statements Screen customizing statements Only one statementcan be programmed in each block and no other additional information may be programmed in this block ASSIGNMENT STATEMENTS This is the simplest type of statement and can be defined as target
101. PROBE CALIBRATION 9 The CNC does not change the machine parameters but considers the coordinates indicated in X U Z W only during this calibration If any of the X U Z W fields is left out the CNC assumes the value assigned to the corresponding machine parameter Basic operation Code 1 Code 7 1 Approach move Rapid move from the cycle calling point to the approach corner This point is located in front of the corresponding probe s corner at a safety distance B from both sides The approach is made in two stages Ist Move along Z axis 2nd Move along X axis 2 Probing move The probe sides used in this probing move as well as the tool path depEnd on the location code assigned to the selected tool This stage has two probing movements and each one of them consists of the following steps a Approach move Rapid move 00 up to the approach point located in front of the side to be probed and at a distance B from it b Probing move Probe movement at indicated feedrate F until probe signal is received The maximum distance to travel in each probing move is 2B If after travelling this distance the CNC has not yet received the probe signal it will display the corresponding error message and it will stop the axes c Withdrawal Rapid move G00 from the last touched point back to the approach corner Page Chapter 10 Section 10 PROBING PROBECALIBRATION 3
102. Page AXESANDCOORDINATESYSTEMS NOMENCLATURE 1 OFTHEAXES The drawing below shows an example ofthe nomenclature ofthe axes on a parallellathe 3 1 11 SELECTION OF THE AXES Of the 9 possible axes which can exist the CNC allows the manufacturer to select up to 7 of them Moreover all the axes should be suitably defined as linear rotary etc through the axis machine parameters which appear in the Installation and Start up Manual There is no limitation to the programming of the axes and interpolations can be made simultaneously with up to 7 axes Page Chapter 3 Section 2 AXES AND COORDINATESYSTEMS NOMENCLATURE OFTHEAXES 3 2 PLANE SELECTION 616 G17 G18 619 Plane selection should be made when the following are carried out Circular interpolations Controlled corner rounding Tangential entry and exit Chamfer blend Position values programming in polar coordinates Tool radius Compensation Toollength compensation The functions which enable selection of work planes are as follows G16axis1 axis2 Enables selection ofthe desired work plane plus the direction of G02 G03 circular interpolation axis1 being programmed as the abscissa axis and axis2 as the ordinate axis Y Q Q X U GI6XW GI6 UY G17 Selects the XY plane G18 Selects the ZX plane G19 Selects the YZ plane Chapter 3 Section Page AXES ANDCOORDINATESYSTEMS 3
103. The CNC will start the home search by moving all selected axes at once until the home reference switches for all axes are pressed and from then on the CNC will continue the home search one axis at a time Warning When searching home using the ALL softkey the CNC will maintain the part zero or zero offset active at the time However if the axes have been selected one by one the CNC will assume the home position as the new part zero PRESET With this function it is possible to preset the desired axis position value Once this option is selected the CNC will show the softkey corresponding to each axis After pressing the softkey of the corresponding axis to be preset the CNC will request the position value to be preset with Press ENTER after the value has been keyed in so the new value is assumed by the CNC Page Chapter 5 Section JOG REFERENCESEARCHAND PRESET With this function itis possible to calibrate the lengths along the X and Z axes of the selected tool by using a part of known dimensions for this purpose The tool calibration is done one axis at a time and in the following manner Before pressing this softkey the tool to be calibrated must be selected TOOL CALIBRATION MEE 5555 ANN AT NUN ttt ed a 5 DS toe LA uoo Ce 22 255 TX 55 5 52
104. This parameter is optional and if not set the CNC interprets that the profile is defined within the same program that contains the cycle Basic operation Inthose cases when the programmed profile cannot be machined valleys with the selected tool a warning message will be displayed at the beginning of the cycle execution X4 The operator will be able to stop the execution and select the proper tool If he she doesn t do that anew profile is calculated in the areas that are not accessible for the selected tool and CNC machines as far as it is possible The message will remain displayed during the whole machining process Chapter 9 Section Page CANNEDCYCLES STOCKREMOVALCYCLE 11 ALONG X AXIS G68 The whole machining operation will be performed in whatever G05 or G07 that was active when calling the cycle andit will be carried out with the same pass throughout the whole machining operation f when making a roughing pass a channel is detected the CNC will continue the operation ignoring the channel The profile may have an unlimited number of channels Once the residual profile is machined the detected channels will be machined 09 06 Page Chapter 9 Section 12 CANNEDCYCLES STOCKREMOVAL CYCLE ALONG X AXIS G68 To do so it will return in GOO to the point where the profile machining was interru
105. V B gt J Axes Z W C gt If the center of the arc is not defined the CNC will assume it that this coincides with the current polar origin Programming format Plane XY 02 603 Q 5 5 155 5 J 5 5 Plane ZX 602 603 5 5 15 5 5 5 Plane YZ 602 603 5 5 155 55 5 5 Chapter 6 Section Page PATHCONTROL CIRCULARINTERPOLATION 5 G02 GO3 c CARTESIAN COORDINATES WITH RADIUS PROGRAMMING The coordinates of the endpoint of the arc and radius R are defined Programming format Plane XY G02 G03 5 5 5 5 5 5 Plane ZX 602 603 X 5 5 745 5 5 5 Plane YZ 02 603 5 5 Y 5 5 5 5 Ifacomplete circle is programmed with radius programming the CNC will show the corresponding error as infinite solutions exist Ifan arc is less than 180 the radius is programmed with a plus sign and a minus sign if itis more than 180 X 1 UN 2 P1 ZX eo 74 If PO is the starting point and P1 the endpoint there are 4 arcs which have the same value passing through both points Depending on the circular interpolation G02 or G03 and on the radius sign the relevant arc is defined Thus the programming format of the sample arcs is as follows Arc 1 G02 X Z Arc 2 602 X Z R Arc 3 603 X Z Arc4 603 7 Page Chapter 6 Section 6 PATHCONTROL CIRCULARINTERPOLATION G02 GO3 Example with X axis programmed in radius Various progr
106. X 5 5 Defines the X coordinate of the initial point of the profile It must be programmedin absolute values and in the active units radius or diameter Z 5 5 Defines the Z coordinate of the initial point of the profile It must be programmed in absolute values C5 5 Defines the machining pass It is given by a positive radius value If programmed with a0 value the CNC will display the corresponding error message All the machining passes are performed with this value except the last one which will eliminate the remaining stock D 5 5 Defines the safety distance to withdraw the tool after each pass 0 9 02 When programming D witha value other than 0 the cutter withdraws at a 45 angle up to the safety distance left drawing Chapter 9 Section Page CANNEDCYCLES PATTERNREPEAT 9 CANNEDCYCLE G66 L 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 When programming D with a 0 value the exit path is the same as the entry path This may be interesting for grooving complex profiles to use these cycles on cylindrical grinders etc When not programming D the tool withdrawal is carried out following the profile up to the last pass C distance right drawing It must be borne in mind that when D is not programmed the cycle execution time is greater but the amount of stock to be removed on the finishing pass is less Defines the finishing pass a
107. Z as well as their location codes F and radius R For a probe the value will be the value of the radius of the stylus ball and its location code will depend on how the calibration is carried out Code I Code 7 PROBING X 4 Zr Z d SN X Code 5 I Zt t Eg X Code 3 41 4f Chapter 10 Section Page PROBING TOOLCALIBRATION 3 TP101 To execute this cycle it is required to use a table top probe placed in a set position on the machine and with its sides parallel to the X and Z axes Its position will be indicated in absolute coordinates referred to Machine Reference Zero by means of the following general machine parameters PRBXMIN indicates the minimum X coordinate of the probe PRBXMAX indicates the maximum X coordinate of the probe PRBZMIN indicates the minimum Z coordinate of the probe PRBZMAX indicates the maximum Z coordinate of the probe a 8 PRBZMIN PRBZMAX The programming format for this cycle is B5 5 5 5 PROBE 1 X U Z W Defines the safety distance with a positive radius value If programmed with a value of 0 the CNC will display its corresponding error message Defines the probing feedrate in mm min or inches min X U Z W are optional parameters which usually need not be defined On some machines due to the lack of probe positioning repeatability the probe must be calibrated before each calibration In
108. Z axis to V axis You cannot couple one axis to two others at the same time G77 V Y slaves Y axis to V axis G77 X Y gives an error signal because Y axis is slaved to V axis You can slave several axes to one in successive steps G77XZ slaves Z axis to X axis G77 XU slaves U axis to X axis Z U slaved to X G77 X Y slaves Y axis to X axis Y Z U slaved to X A pair of axes which are already coupled to each other cannot be slaved to another axis G77YU slaves U axis to Y axis G77 X Y gives an error signal because Y axis is slaved to U axis Page Chapter 7 Section 16 ADDITIONALPREPARATORY FUNCTIONS SLAVEDAXIS 7 742 AXIS CANCELLATION G78 Function G78 enables you to uncouple all the axes which are slaved or only uncouple indicated axes G78 Uncouples all slaved axes G78 Axis 1 gt lt Axis 2 gt lt Axis 3 gt lt Axis 4 Only uncouples indicated axes Example G77 X YU slaves Y and U axes to X axis G77NZ slaves Z axis to V axis G78 Y uncouples Y axis but U gt X and Z gt V stay slaved G78 uncouples all axes Chapter 7 Section Page ADDITIONALPREPARATORY FUNCTIONS SLAVEDAXIS 17 e TOOL COMPENSATION The CNC has a tool offset table its number of components being defined via the general machine parameter The following is specified for each tool offset Nominal tool length along X axis It will be progra
109. a circular section that cannot be machined because the tool diameter is too large SOLUTION Use a tool with a smaller radius 1071 Compensation plane change DETECTED During execution CAUSE While working with tool radius compensation G41 G42 another work plane has been selected SOLUTION change the work plane tool radius compensation must be canceled G40 1072 Radius comp not possible when positioning rotary axis DETECTED During execution CAUSE An attempt has been made to move a positioning only rotary axis while tool radius compensation G41 G42 is on SOLUTION Positioning only rotary axes do not admit tool radius compensation To cancel it use the G40 function ERROR TROUBLESHOOTING MANUAL 37 8055T CNC 23 1076 Angle coordinate programmed incorrectly DETECTED During execution CAUSE While programming in the angle coordinate format an axis movement has been programmed with an angle perpendicular to that axis v g the main plane is formed by the X Z axes and the X axis is programmed to move at 90 SOLUTION Check and correct the definition of the movement in the program When working with parameters check that they reach the definition of the movement with the right values 1077 Arc programmed with radius too small or complete circle DETECTED During execution CAUSE S The probable causes might be 1 When programming a full circle wit
110. a new name or comment to a page or symbol of the Memkey Card If there is another one with the same number the CNC will display a warning message and it will offer the chance to modify the command Examples to change the page number from 20 to 55 RENAME PAGE 20 TO NEW NUMBER 55 ENTER to change the comment of symbol 10 RENAME SYMBOL 10 TO NEW COMMENT Test ENTER EDIT To edit a new user screen page or symbol proceed as follows Press the EDIT softkey Press the PAGE or SYMBOL softkey Key in the page or symbol number Press ENTER If the page or symbol does not exists an empty page will appear in the editing area How to edit user screens and symbols is described later on in this chapter If the selected screen or symbol has been changed the CNC will request whether it is to be saved or not in the following instances Whenexiting the screen editor e When selecting another screen page or symbol SAVE To save the page or symbol being edited into the Memkey Card Page Chapter 10 Section SCREENEDITOR UTILITIES 10 2 EDITING CUSTOM SCREENS PAGES AND SYMBOLS Inordertoedita page or symbol itis necessary to selected first by means ofthe EDIT option of the UTILITIES mode of operation To edit or modify a page or symbol use the options GRAPHIC ELEMENTS TEXTS and MODIFICATIONS The information contained in a page or symbol must not occupy more than 4Kb otherwise the CNC wil
111. allowed DETECTED While editing at the CNC or while executing a program transmitted via DNC CAUSE Some functions can only be programmed with global parameters SOLUTION Global parameters are the ones included in the 100 299 range 0111 Block cannot be executed while running another program DETECTED While executing in MDI mode CAUSE An attempt has been made to execute a customizing instruction from MDI mode while the user channel program is running SOLUTION Customizing instructions can only be executed through the user channel ERROR TROUBLESHOOTING MANUAL 17 8055T CNC 0112 WBUF can only be executed in user channel while editing DETECTED During execution or user channel execution CAUSE An attempt has been made to execute the WBUF instruction SOLUTION WBUF instruction cannot be executed It can only be used in the editing stage through the user input 0113 Table limits exceeded DETECTED While editing tables CAUSE S The various causes might be 1 In the tool offset table an attempt has been made to define a tool offset with a greater number than allowed by the manufacturer 2 In the parameter tables an attempt has been made to define a nonexistent parameter SOLUTION The tool offset number must be smaller than the one allowed by the manufacturer 0114 Offset D3 X ZRFIK DETECTED While editing tables CAUSE In the tool offset table the parameter editing order h
112. an Emergency or Reset the CNC assumes G94 or G95 depending on the setting of general machine parameter IFFED Considerations The CNC variable PROGFIN will show the feedrate programmed as an inverted function of time and variable FEED will show the resulting feedrate in mm min or inches min If the resulting feedrate of any axis exceeds the maximum value set by machine parameter MAXFEED the CNC will apply this maximum value The programmed F is ignored on GOO movements All the movements will be carried out at the feedrate set by axis machine parameter GOOFEED When programming FO the movement will be carried out at the feedrate set by axis machine parameter MAXFEED Function G32 may be programmed and executed in the PLC channel Function G32 is canceled in JOG mode G32 is canceled when tracing If it is programmed while tracing is active the CNC will issue an error message Chapter 6 Section Page PATHCONTROL FEEDRATEASINVERTED FUNCTIONOFTIME G32 27 6 16 TANGENTIAL CONTROL G45 With the Tangential control feature the axis may maintain the same orientation with respect to the programmed path Orientation parallel to the path Orientation perpendicular to the path The path is defined by the axes of the active plane The axis maintaining the orientation must be a rotary rollover axis A B or C Programmingformat G45 Axis Angle Axis axis maintaining the orientation A B or C
113. arithmetic expression A local or global parameter or a read write variable may be selected as target The arithmetic expression may be as complex as required or a simple numerical constant P102 FZLOX ORGX 55 ORGX 54 P100 In the specific case of designating a local parameter using its name A instead of PO for example and the arithmetic expression being a numerical constant the statement can be abbreviated as follows P0 13 7 gt 13 7 gt A13 Within single block up to 26 assignments can be made to different targets single assignment being interpreted as the set of assignments made to the same target P1 P1 P2 P1 P1 P3 P1 P P4 P1 P1 p5 is the same as P1 P1 P2 P3 P4 P5 The different assignments which are made in the same block will be separated by commas s Chapter 12 Section Page PROGRAMCONTROLSTATEMENTS ASSIGNMENT 1 STATEMENTS 12 2 DISPLAY STATEMENTS ERROR integer error text This statement stops the execution of the program and displays the indicated error it being possible to select this error in the following ways ERROR integer This will display the error number indicated and the text associated to this number according to the CNC error code should there be one ERROR integer error text This will display the number and the error text indicated it being necessary to write the text between quote marks ERROR error text
114. axis Programming in absolute Programming in incremental Coordinate preset spindle speed limit Polar origin Feedrate in millimeters inches per minute Feedrate in millimeters inches per revolution Constant Surface Speed Spindle speed in r p m 2 5 3 2 X X X X X X X X X M means MODAL i e that once programmed the G function remains active as long as another incompatible G function is not programmed M02 M30 EMERGENCY RESET are not programmed or the CNC is not turned on or off Letter D means BY DEFAULT i e that these will be assumed by the CNC when turned on after executing M02 M30 or after EMERGENCY or RESET In cases indicated with it must be interpreted that the BY DEFAULT of these G functions depends on the settings of the general CNC machine parameters V means that the G function is displayed next to the machining conditions in the execution and simulation modes Chapter 5 Section Page PROGRAMMING BYISO CODE PREPARATORY 3 FUNCTIONS 5 2 FEEDRATE F The machining feedrate can be selected from the program It remains active until another feedrate is programmed It is represented by the letter Depending on whether it is working in G94 or G95 it is programmed in mm minute inches minute or in mm revolution inches revolution It s programming format is 5 5 in mm and 4 5 in inches The maximum operating feedrate ofthe machine limited on each axis by th
115. axis to which they were coupled There are three possible ways of coupling axes Mechanical coupling This is imposed by the manufacturer of the machine and is selected via the axis machine parameter GANTRY By means ofthe PLC This enables the coupling and uncoupling of each axis through logic input on CNC SYNCHRO1 SYNCHRO2 SYNCHRO3 SYNCHRO and SY NCHROS Each axis is coupled to the one indicated in the axis machine parameter SYNCHRO By means of the program This enables electronic coupling and uncoupling between two or more axes through functions G77 and G78 Chapter 7 Section Page ADDITIONAL PREPARATORY FUNCTIONS SLAVED AXIS 15 7 7 1 SLAVED AXIS G77 Function G77 allows the selection of both the master axis and the slaved axis axes The programming format is as follows G77 lt Axis 1 gt lt Axis 2 gt lt Axis 3 gt lt Axis 4 gt lt Axis 5 In which lt Axis 2 gt lt Axis 3 gt lt Axis 4 gt lt Axis 5 indicate the slave axes you wish to couple to the master axis lt Axis 1 gt You have to define lt Axis 1 gt and lt Axis 2 gt the programming of the rest of the axes being optional Example G77 X YU slaves Y and U axes to X axis The following rules should be observed when doing electronic axis slaving You may use one or two different electronic couplings G77 X YU slaves Y and U axes to X axis G77 VZ slaves
116. be modified Oncethe block contents have been modified press ENTER sothe new contents replace the old ones Chapter 9 PLC Section EDIT Page FIND This option is used to find a specific text within the selected program When selecting this option the following options will appear BEGINNING This softkey positions the cursor over the first program block which is then selected quitting the find option END This softkey positions the cursor over the last program block which is then selected quitting the find option TEXT With this function itis possible to search a text or character sequence starting from the block indicated by the cursor When this key is selected the CNC requests the character sequence to be found When the text is defined press the END OF TEXT softkey and the cursor will be positioned over the first occurrence of that text The search will begin at the current block The text found will be highlighted being possible to continue with the search or to quit it Press ENTER to continue the search up to the end of the program It is possible to search as many times as wished and when the end of the program is reached it will start from the first block Press the EXIT softkey or the ESC key to quit the search mode The cursor will be positioned where the indicated text was found last LINE NUMBER After pressing this key the CNC requests the number
117. block If while one of the mirror imaging functions G11 G12 G13 or G14 is active a new coordinate origin part zero is preset with G92 this new origin will notbe affected by the mirrorimaging function On power up after executing M02 M30 or after EMERGENCY or RESET the CNC assumes code G10 Chapter 7 Section Page ADDITIONALPREPARATORY FUNCTIONS MIRRORIMAGE 9 G10 G14 7 6 SCALING FACTOR G72 By using function G72 you can enlarge or reduce programmed parts In this way you can produce families of parts which are similar in shape but of different sizes with a single program Function G72 should be programmed on its own in a block There are two formats for programming G72 Scaling factor applied to all axes Scaling factor applied to one or more axes Page Chapter 7 Section 10 ADDITIONALPREPARATORY FUNCTIONS SCALING FACTOR G72 7 6 1 SCALING FACTOR APPLIED TO ALL AXES The programming format is as follows G72 S5 5 Following G72 all coordinates programmed are multiplied by the value of the scaling factor defined by S until a new G72 scaling factor definition is read or the definition is cancelled Programming example with X axis in diameter Al A2 100 M 7 EOM 30 40 60 80 100 The following subroutine defines the basic machining of the part G90 X200 70 1 X200 730 1 160 740 G03 X160 760 10 KIO G02 X160 780 10 KIO G03
118. can be programmed as G2 and G3 On power up after executing M02 M30 or after EMERGENCY or RESET the CNC assumes code or G01 depending on how general machine parameter IMOVE has been set Page Chapter 6 Section PATHCONTROL CIRCULARINTERPOLATION G02 GO3 6 4 CIRCULAR INTERPOLATION BY PROGRAMMING THE CENTER OF THE ARC IN ABSOLUTE COORDINATES G06 By adding function G06to a circular interpolation block you can program the coordinates ofthe center ofthe arc LJ or in absolute coordinates i e with respect to the zero origin and not to the beginning of the arc The center coordinates will be programmed in radius or diameter depending on the programming units selected by axis machine parameter DFORMAT Function G06 is not modal so it should be programmed any time the coordinates of the center of the arc are required in absolute coordinates G06 can be programmed as G6 Example with X axis programmed in radius Various programming modes are analyzed below point X40 Z60 being the starting point Cartesian coordinates G90 G06 X90 Z110 190 K60 G06 X40 Z160 190 K160 Polar coordinates G90 G06 G03 QO 190 0 G06 Q 90 190 K160 Chapter 6 Section Page PATHCONTROL CENTERABSOLUTE 9 COORDINATES G06 6 5 TP067 ARC TANGENT TO THE PREVIOUS PATH G08 Via function G08 you can program an arc tangential to the previous path without having to program the c
119. change position This move may be made by jogging the axes from the operator panel or in MDI Gain access to CNC tables tools Tool offsets etc in order to find another tool with thesimilarcharacteristics Select in MDI the new tool as the active one Make the tool change This operation will be performed depending on the type of tool changer used It is possible to execute the tool change in MDI in this step Return the axes to the position where the tool inspection began REPOSITIONING Resume program execution Note If during tool inspection the spindle is stopped the CNC will start it again when repositioning in the same direction as it was turning before M3 or M4 The CNC offers the following options by means of softkeys Page 16 Chapter 3 Section EXECUTE SIMULATE TOOLINSPECTION MDI Allows to edit blocks in ISO or high level except those associated with subroutines providing information on the corresponding format by means of softkeys Once the block has been edited and after the key has been pressed the CNC will execute this block without quitting this operating mode TABLES Allows access to any of the CNC tables associated with part programs Zero offsets Tool offsets Tools Tool magazine Global and Local Parameters Once the desired table has been selected all editing commands will be available for its verification and modification In order to return to the previous me
120. chapter 6 of the Operating Manual How to use the T and D functions The T and D functions may be programmed alone or together as shown in the following example T5 D18 selects tool 5 and assumes the dimensions of tool offset 18 D22 Tool 5 stays selected and it assumes the dimensions of tool offset 22 T3 selects tool 3 and assumes the dimensions of the offset associated with that tool e When having atool turret itis rather common to use more tools than the number of tool positions of the turret Thus the same turret position must be used by more than one tool In those cases both T and D must be programmed The T function refers to the turret position and the D function to the dimensions of the tool located in that position Thus for example programming T5 D23 means selecting the turret position 5 and assuming the geometry and dimensions of tool offset 23 Page Chapter 5 Section 10 PROGRAMMINGBY ISOCODE TOOL T OFFSET D e When having a tool holding arm with 2 cutters both T and D must be programmed as well The T function refers to the arm and the D function to the cutter dimensions Thus one may program D1 or T1 D2 depending on which of the 2 cutters is to be used Tool length and radius compensation The CNC looks upthe tooloffsettable and assumes thetool dimensions corresponding to the active D offset Length compensation is applied at all times wher
121. compensation tables the parameter editing order has not been respected SOLUTION Enter the table parameters in the right order P123 position of the axis to be compensated leadscrew error at that point 0120 Incorrect axis DETECTED While editing tables CAUSE In the leadscrew compensation tables an attempt has been made to edit a different axis from the one corresponding to that table SOLUTION Each axis has its own table for leadscrew compensation The table for each axis can only contain the positions for that axis 0121 Program value DETECTED While editing tables CAUSE In the machine parameter table the editing format has not been respected SOLUTION Enter the table parameters in the right order P123 parameter value 0122 Magazine P 1 255 T 1 9999 DETECTED While editing tables CAUSE In the tool magazine table the editing format has not been respected or some data is missing SOLUTION Enter the table parameters in the right order 0123 Tool TO does not exist DETECTED While editing tables CAUSE In the tool table an attempt has been made to edit a tool as TO SOLUTION No tool can be edited as TO The first tool must be T1 0124 Offset DO does not exist DETECTED While editing tables CAUSE In the tool table an attempt has been made to edit a tool offset as DO SOLUTION tool offset can be edited as DO The first tool offset must be D1 0125 Do
122. corresponding icon No negative safety distance permitted in this cycle DETECTED While executing CAUSE A negative safety distance has been defined SOLUTION Taper canned cycles require a positive safety distance Errors in the rounding cycles Cycle without roughing or finishing DETECTED While executing CAUSE No tool has been selected for roughing or finishing SOLUTION Select the tool for roughing If T 0 there is no roughing and for finishing If T 0 there is no finishing ROUGHING Value of A 0 DETECTED While executing CAUSE The cutting depth pass has not been defined A SOLUTION Program a pass greater than zero ROUGHING Value of F 0 DETECTED While executing CAUSE The roughing feedrate F has not been defined SOLUTION Program a positive feedrate other than zero ROUGHING Value of Sz0 DETECTED While executing CAUSE The spindle speed S has not been defined for roughing SOLUTION Program a positive spindle speed S other than zero FINISHING Value of F 0 DETECTED While executing CAUSE No feedrate F has been defined for finishing SOLUTION Program a positive feedrate other than zero 56 ERROR TROUBLESHOOTING MANUAL FAGOR 3 8055T CNC FINISHING Value of S 0 DETECTED While executing CAUSE The spindle speed S has not been defined for finishing SOLUTION Program a positive spindle speed S other than zero GEOMETRY Wrong radius value D
123. denominators I to display resources the CNC will display 20 of them per line and 3 when using their associated mnemonics symbols In the latter case the generic denomination will be displayed when no mnemonic is associated to a resource When requesting the status of a register bit the CNC will display only the requested bit on the corresponding line Chapter 9 Section Page PLC MONITORING 13 MODIFY WINDOW With this option it is possible to manipulate the active window the one selected by enlarging it reducing it clearing it or even eliminating closing it To do so the following softkey options are available ENLARGE REDUCE CLEAR CLOSE To enlarge the size of the window by one line every time this softkey is pressed Toreduce the size of the window by one line every time this softkey is pressed minimum 2 lines To clear the contents of the active window To close the active window the CNC will no longer display it ACTIVE WINDOW With this option it is possible to select between the PLC program and each one of the windows being displayed timers registers counters and binary data in orderto operate with it Bear in mind that the operator can only operate with the active window Once the active window has been selected it Will be possible to Move the cursor if the PLC program is the one active or shift the display area with the up and down arrow keys E
124. distance travelled by the axes for example in their lubrication P100 DISTX assigns to P100 the distance travelled by the X axis DISTZ P111 presets the variable indicating the distance travelled by the Z axis with the value of arithmetic parameter P111 If any of the DIST X C variables are accessed block preparation is interrupted and the CNC waits for this command to be executed to resume block preparation With these variables it is possible to set a second travel limit for each axis LIMPL for the upper limit and LIMMI for the lower limit Since the second limits are activated or deactivated from the PLC through general logic input ACTLIM2 M5052 besides setting the limits an auxiliary M code must be executed to let it know It is also recommended to execute function G4 after the change so the CNC executes the following blocks with the new limits The second travel limit will be taken into consideration when the first one has been set using axis machine parameters LIMIT P5 and LIMIT P6 Page 16 PROGRAMMINGINHIGH LEVELLANGUAGE VARIABLESFOR Chapter 11 Section COORDINATES 11 2 8 VARIABLES ASSOCIATED WITH THE ELECTRONIC HANDWHEELS Read only variables HANPF HANPS HANPT HANPFO HANFCT HBEVAR They return the number of pulses of the first HANPP second HANPS third HANPT or fourth HANPFO handwheel received since the CNC was turned on Regardless of whether
125. draw more arcs If no more arcs are desired press ESC to return to the previous menu POLYLINE A polyline consists of several lines where the last point of one of them is the beginning point for the next one Follow these steps after pressing this softkey 1 Place the cursor at one of the ends of the polyline and press ENTER to validate it 2 Move the cursor to the end of the first line which will be the beginning of the next one The CNC will continuously show the line being drawn Press ENTER to validate the line or ESC to quit this option which will delete the complete polyline 3 Repeat steps 1 and 2 for the rest of the lines Note that the maximum number of lines in a polyline is 127 Once the polyline is drawn press ENTER again to validate itor ESC to quitthis option deleting the complete polyline Repeat these steps to draw more polylines and if no more polylines are desired press ESC to return to the previous menu Page Chapter 10 Section 12 SCREENEDITOR GRAPHICELEMENTS SYMBOL This option allows a symbol to be drawn in the page or symbol being edited After pressing this softkey the following steps will be taken 1 Enter the number of the symbol to include in the page or symbol being edited and press the ENTER key to validate it The CNC will show the cursor situated at the reference point corresponding to the symbol upper left hand corner of the symbol 2 Movethecursorto the p
126. following options BEGINNING This softkey positions the cursor over the first program block which is then selected quitting the find option END This softkey positions the cursor over the last program block which is then selected quitting the find option TEXT With this function it is possible to search a text or character sequence starting from the block indicated by the cursor When this key is selected the CNC requests the character sequence to be found When the text is defined press the END OF TEXT softkey and the cursor will be positioned over the first occurrence of that text The search will begin at the current block The text found will be highlighted being possible to continue with the search or to quit it Press ENTER to continue the search up to the end of the program It is possible to search as many times as wished and when the end of the program is reached it will start from the first block Press the EXIT softkey or the ESC key to quit the search mode The cursor will be positioned where the indicated text was found last LINE NUMBER Afterpressing this key the CNC requests the number of the block to be found After keying in the desired number and pressing ENTER the cursor will position over that block which will then be selected quitting the search mode Chapter 4 Section Page EDIT FIND 17 44 REPLACE With this function itis possible to replace a charact
127. following way When one of the G54 G55 G56 G57 functions is executed the CNC applies the zero offset programmed with respect to machine zero cancelling the possible active zero offsets If one of the additive offsets G58 or G59 is executed the CNC adds its values to the absolute zero offset active at the time Previously cancelling the additive offset which might be active You can see in the following example the zero offsets which are applied when the program is executed G54 Applies zero offsets G54 gt G54 G58 Adds zero offsets G58 _ gt G54 G58 G54 Cancels G58 and adds G59 gt G54 G59 G55 Cancels whatever and applies G55 gt 655 Once a Zero Offset has been selected it will remain active until another one is selected or until a home search is carried out G74 This Zero Offset will remain active even after powering the CNC off This kind of zero offsets established by program is very useful for repeated machining operations at different machine positions Chapter 4 Section Page REFERENCESYSTEMS 7 Example Let us assume a zero offset table initialized with the following values G54 7330 55 7240 G58 7 90 56 7150 G59 Z 180 A2 Al ASSAD 045 Using absolute coordinates G54 Applies offset G54 Executionofprofile Executes profile Al G55 Applies offset G55 Execution of profile Executes profi
128. in the RPT or GOTO instruction SOLUTION Remember that the programming formats for these instructions are RPT N block number N block number GOTO N block number The block number label must be between 0 and 9999 0063 Program subroutine number 1 thru 9999 DETECTED While editing at the CNC or while executing a program transmitted via DNC CAUSE While programming in high level language a subroutine number out of the 0 9999 range has been programmed in the SUB instruction SOLUTION Remember that the programming format for this instruction is SUB integer The subroutine number must be between 0 and 9999 0064 Repeated subroutine DETECTED While editing at the CNC or while executing a program transmitted via DNC CAUSE There has been an attempt to define a subroutine already existing in another program of the memory SOLUTION In the CNC memory there could not be more than one subroutine with the same identifying number even if they are contained in different programs 0065 The main program cannot have a subroutine DETECTED execution or while executing programs transmitted via DNC CAUSE S The various causes might be 1 An attempt has been made to define a subroutine in the MDI execution mode 2 A subroutine has been defined in the main program SOLUTION The solution for each cause is 1 Subroutines cannot be defined from the MDI execution option of the menu 2 Subrouti
129. in the magazine to place the tool that currently is in the spindle The new tool may be defined in the tool table as special and more than magazine position may be reserved for it In that case that position is fixed for that tool and it cannot be occupied by another tool To avoid this error message a free position should be left in the tool magazine 1018 A tool change has been programmed without M06 DETECTED CAUSE SOLUTION During execution After searching for a tool and before searching for the next one an 06 has not been programmed This error comes up when having a machining center general machine parameter TOFFM06 P28 YES which has a cyclic automatic tool changer general machine parameter CYCATC P61 z YES In that case after searching for a tool and before searching for the next one a tool change has to be made using an MO6 1019 There is no tool of the same family to replace it DETECTED CAUSE SOLUTION During execution The real life of the requested tool exceeds its nominal life The CNC has tried to replace it with another one of the same family type it has found none Replace the tool or define another one of the same family 1020 Do not use high level to change active tool or next one DETECTED CAUSE SOLUTION During execution While programming in high level language using the TMZT variable an attempt has been made to assign the active tool or the next one t
130. in them will be updated dynamically The options MODIFY WINDOW ACTIVE WINDOW and ACTIVATE SYMBOLS allow the manipulation of these windows Every time a new window is created the CNC will assign 2 data lines to it in order to display the status of the desired resources There are two types of windows which can be selected with softkeys WINDOW TO DISPLAY TIMERS AND REGISTERS This window is divided into two sections one to display Timers and the other one to display Registers Timer It will show one timer per line showing the following information foreach one of them TG Indicates the logic status of the active trigger input M Indicates the status of the timer 5 means stopped means timing and D means disabled TEN Indicates the logic status of the Enable input TRS Indicates the logic status of the Reset input T Indicates the logic status of the status output of the timer ET Indicates the elapsed time TO Indicates the remaining time Key in the command T 1 256 or T 1 256 1 256 to request the data on a timer or group of timers and then press ENTER Register It will display one register per line showing the following information fields for each of them Indicates the hexadecimal value of its contents DEC Indicates the decimal value of its contents with sign Key in R 1 559 or R 1 559 1 559 to request information on one or more registers and then press ENTER P
131. is operating in closed loop M19 its following error is greater than the values indicated by spindle parameters MAXFLWE1 P21 or MAXFLE2 P22 The probable causes for this error are DRIVE FAILURE MOTOR FAILURE Defective drive Defective motor Enable signals missing Power wiring Power supply missing Poor drive adjustment Velocity command signal missing FEEDBACK FAILURE CNC FAILURE Defective feedback device Defective CNC Defective feedback cable Wrong parameter setting MECHANICAL FAILURE Mechanical friction Spindle mechanically locked up 1110 1118 axis range exceeded DETECTED During execution CAUSE A movement has been defined using parameters and the value of the parameter is greater than the maximum axis travel allowed SOLUTION Check the history of the program so that parameter does not reach with that value to the block where that movement has been programmed 1119 1127 axis cannot be synchronized DETECTED During execution CAUSE S The probable causes might be 1 An attempt has been made to synchronize an axis with another one from the PLC but the axis is already slaved to another one with function G77 2 When programming or trying to move an axis already synchronized with another one 1128 1136 axis maximum feed exceeded DETECTED During execution CAUSE The resulting feedrate of some axis after applying the particular scaling factor exceeds the maximum value i
132. is pressed the CNC will change the display units for the coordinates corresponding to the tool geometry X Z R The units currently selected mm or inches will be displayed in the lower right hand window Chapter 6 Section Page TABLES TOOLGEOMETRY TABLE 13 6 6 GLOBAL AND LOCAL PARAMETER TABLES The CNC has two types of general purpose variables Local parameters PO P25 7 levels Global parameters P100 P299 The CNC updates the parameter tables after carrying out the operations indicated in the block in preparation This operation is always carried out before executing the block Therefore the values shown in the table may not coincide with those of the block being executed Whenquitting the Execution mode afterinterrupting program execution the CNC updates the parameter tables with the values corresponding to the block that was being executed In the global and local parameter tables the values of the parameters may be displayed in decimal 4127 423 or in scientific notation 0 23476 E 3 The CNC generates a new nesting level of local parameters every time parameters are assigned to a subroutine Up to a maximum of 6 nesting levels of local parameters are possible Machining canned cycles G66 G68 G69 G81 G82 G83 G84 G85 G86 G87 G88 and G89 use the sixth nesting level of local parameters when they are active To access the different local parameter tables the corresponding level must be indic
133. is selected the softkeys will change their color showing their type of editing option over a white background Also it is possible to get more editing assistance by pressing HELP Press HELP again to exit the editing assistance mode Press the ESC key to exit the block editing mode when writing a block and this block will not be added to the program Once the block has been edited press ENTER to add it to the program behind the block previously indicated by the cursor The cursor will be positioned at the new block just edited and the editing window area will be cleared In order to edit a new block Press ESC or MAIN MENU to quit the block editing mode Page Chapter 9 Section 2 PLC EDIT MODIFY This option permits modifying the contents of a selected program block Before pressing this softkey select with the cursor the block to be modified Once this option is selected the softkeys will change their color showing their type of modifying option over a white background Also itis possible to get more editing assistance by pressing HELP Press HELP again to exit the editing assistance mode By pressing ESC the information corresponding to that block and which was shown in the editing area will be cleared It will then be possible to modify its contents again To quit the block modifying mode press CL or ESC to clear the editing window and then press ESC again This way the selected block will not
134. manner Move 2 3 in GO1 at programmed feedrate If D has been programmed the 3 4 move is done in rapid G00 but if D has not been programmed the 3 4 move is done following the profile in 01 at the programmed feedrate F Withdrawal 4 5 in rapid Chapter 9 Section Page CANNEDCYCLES STOCKREMOVALCANNED 21 CYCLE ALONG ZAXIS G69 f when machining a channel other channels inside it are detected the same procedure explained above will be followed WY S NSS WSN NSSAN NS S YX QOS WY NAN NA MY YQ QOH ANS ANS S NSS SH QQ S SS SS RS SS SS NN SA QD DS QQ MAA QE YN Q QQ YH SS QHHOYK ANN ANN S JLI ag al ML the CNC will run a pass parallel to the profile maintaining an L stock at the set feedrate ed If a final roughing pass has been programmed This final roughing pass will eliminate the ridges that were leftin the roughing stage V60060dL Once the profile roughing operation has ended the tool will return to the point from where the cycle was called Section STOCKREMOVALCANNED CYCLEALONGZAXIS G69 9 CANNEDCYCLES Chapter Page 22 Ifafinishing pass has been defined it will be carried out with tool radius compensation and at the indicated feedrate T
135. met The trigger vertical red line will be positioned at the end of the trace TRIGGER CENTER The CNC starts the data capture at the very instant the user selects the option to execute the trace Then once the trace has been executed the trigger vertical red line will be positioned in the center of the trace Chapter 9 Section Page PLC LOGICANALYZER 29 9 10 2 3 SELECTION OF TIME BASE By means of this parameter the user specifies the amount of time represented by each of verticalintervals Since the CRT width of these intervals is always the same the signal resolution will be established by this time base in such way that the smaller the time base the greater the signal resolution will be Example Having a Mark whose status changes every 2 milliseconds EX ET EM E With a time base of 10 milliseconds it will appear as follows 0096 10 ms 0097 re With a time base of 20 milliseconds it will appear as follows Lu 20 ms 098 a With a time base of 4 milliseconds it will appear as follows The time base is given in milliseconds and the information window will show the selected value By default the CNC assumes a time base of 10 milliseconds Itis possible to set a time base equal to the frequency of the signal to be monitored and then change it to obtain a finer signal resolution when analyzing the trace Pag
136. movement will be transferred to the axis corresponding to the new jog key releasing this key the axis will recover the previous feedrate with its override 96 Page 10 Chapter 5 JOG Section CONTINUOUS JOG X Z 5 1 2 INCREMENTAL JOG Itallowstojogthe selected axis in the selected direction an incremental step selected by the Feedrate Override switch and at the feedrate indicated by machine Parameter for that axis JOGFEED The available positions are 1 10 100 1000 and 10000 corresponding to display resolution units Example Display format 5 3 in mm or 4 4 in inches Switch position Movement 1 0 001 mm or 0 0001 inch 10 0 010 mm or 0 0010 inch 100 0 100 mm or 0 0100 inch 1000 1 000 mm or 0 1000 inch 10000 10 000 mm or 1 0000 inch The maximum permitted step is 10 mm or 1 inch regardless of the selected display format for example 5 2 in mm or 4 3 in inches After selecting the desired incremental move at the switch if a jog key is pressed X X Z Z 3 3 4 4 etc the corresponding axis will move the selected distance in the selected direction If while jogging an axis the key is pressed the axis will move ata feedrate established by machine parameter GOOFEED for this axis as long as this key stays pressed When releasing this key the axis will recover the previous feedrate with its override 96 Chapter 5 Section Page JoG INCREMENTALJOG H
137. negative value SOLUTION To define G36 or G39 parameter R must also be defined and with a positive value G36 R Rounding radius G39 R Distance between the end of the programmed path and the point be chamfered 0021 Program G72 55 5 or axes DETECTED While editing at the CNC or while executing a program transmitted via DNC CAUSE S The various causes might be 1 When programming a general scaling factor G72 without the scaling factor to apply 2 When programming a particular scaling factor G72 to several axes but the axes have been defined in the wrong order SOLUTION Remember that this function must be programmed in the following order G72 55 5 When applying a general scaling factor to all axes G72 X C5 5 When applying a particular scaling factor to one or several axes 4 ERROR TROUBLESHOOTING MANUAL FAGOR 3 8055T CNC 0023 Block incompatible when defining a profile DETECTED While editing at the CNC or while executing a program transmitted via DNC CAUSE In the set of blocks defining a profile there is a block containing a G function that cannot belong to the profile definition SOLUTION The G functions available in the profile definition are G00 Beginning of the profile G01 Linear interpolation G02 G03 Clockwise counterclockwise interpolation 906 Circle center in absolute coordinates G08 Arc tangent to previous path G09 Three
138. not programmed or programmed with a 0 value the tool will return to the approach point The tapping operation ignores this parameter thus not being necessary to program it If programmed it will be ignored Defines in radius the rapid approaching distance for successive drilling pecks If not programmed a distance of 1 mm 0 03937 inch will be assumed The tapping operation ignores this parameter thus not being necessary to program it If programmed it will be ignored RPM and turning direction sign of the live tool Page 62 Chapter 9 Section CANNEDCYCLES G61 RADIAL DRILLING TAPPING Drilling Basic operation 1 2 9 Rapid move to the approach point located at a D distance from the first hole position The CNC turns on the live tool at the rpm and in the turning direction indicated by parameter S Orients the spindle at the angular position set by Q If the spindle was turning it will stop First drilling peck The drilling axis moves in GO1 to the programmed incremental depth D B Drilling cycle The following steps will be repeated until the bottom of the hole is reached T 5 1 Rapid withdrawal a distance or to the approach point 5 2 Rapid approach G00 to a C distance from the next peck 5 3 New drilling peck in G01 to an incremental depth B Dwell K a the bottom of the hole in hundredths of a second if programmed Rapid withdra
139. of the selected axis is displayed and updated as the machine axis moves Page Chapter 11 Section 4 MACHINE PARAMETERS LEADSCREWERROR COMPENSATION TABLES 114 CROSS COMPENSATION TABLES The tables corresponding to cross compensation have the following structure CROSS COMP TABLE 11 50 14 POINT NUMBER POSITION 001 P002 PX PX PA PX PS PS PSPS PAL PS PS PS PS P PSPS PS PS PS PX 0 0000 0 0000 CAP INS MM MODIFY INITIALIZE MM INCH The number of points of each table is defined by means of the general machine parameter NPCROSS NPCROSS2 and NPCROSS3 respectively Each table defines The position of the axis causing the error The error suffered by the axis at that point Also the current position of the selected axis is displayed This position is updated as the axis moves Chapter 11 Section Page MACHINEPARAMETERS CROSS COMPENSATION 5 TABLES 11 5 OPERATION WITH PARAMETER TABLES Once one of the tables has been selected the cursor can be moved over the screen line by line by means of the up and down arrow keys or move from page to page by means of the page up and page down keys In addition the user has an area of the screen for editing itbeing possible to move the cursor over the screen by means of the right arrow key and left arrow key
140. of these canned cycles will be executed along the X and Z axes The canned cycles will be programmed by means of the high level statement PROBE being its format PROBE expression assignment statement This statement calls the probing canned cycle indicated by a number or by an expression which results in a number The parameters of such cycle can also be initialized with the desired values contained in the assignment statement General considerations The probing canned cycles are not modal therefore they must be programmed every time it is desired to execute them The probes used to execute these cycles are Probe placed at a set position of the machine used to calibrate tools Probe placed at the spindle that will be treated like a tool and will be used in the various measuring canned cycles The execution of a probing canned cycle does not alter the history of previous G functions except those concerning tool radius compensation G41 and G42 Page Chapter 10 Section PROBING PROBING CANNED CYCLES 10 3 TOOL CALIBRATION CANNED CYCLE Used to calibrate a tool or a probe placed at the spindle tool holder Once completed the cycle the X and Z values of their tool offset table are updated and their I and values will be reset to zero When calibrating the tool or the probe for the first time it is recommended to enter in their tool offset table approximate values of their lengths X
141. one with the highest priority which is the message with the smallest number In this way MSG1 will have the highest priority and MSG128 will have the lowest In this case the CNC will display the character plus sign indicating that there are more messages activated by the PLC it being possible to display them if the ACTIVE Page Chapter 1 OVERVIEW Section MONITOR INFORMATION LAYOUT MESSAGE option is accessed in the PLC mode In this window the CNC will also display the character asterisk to indicate that at least one of the 256 user defined screens is active The screens which are active will be displayed one by one if the ACTIVE PAGES option is accessed in the PLC mode 5 Main window Depending on the operating mode the CNC will show in this window all the information necessary When a CNC or PLC error is produced the system displays this in a superimposed horizontal window The CNC will always display the most important error and it will show The downarrow key to indicate that another less important error has also occurred and to press this key to view its message The up arrow key to indicate that another more important error has also occurred and to press this key to view its message 6 Editing window Insome operating modes the last four lines ofthe main window are used as editing area 7 CNC communications window errors detected in edition nonexistent program etc
142. or while executing a program transmitted via DNC CAUSE A movement has been programmed which involves the movement of two HIRTH axes simultaneously SOLUTION Only one HIRTH axis can be moved at a time 0167 Position only rotary axis Absolute values 0 359 9999 DETECTED During execution CAUSE A movement of a positioning only rotary axis has been programmed The movement has been programmed in absolute coordinates G90 and the target coordinate of the movement is not within the 0 to 359 9999 range SOLUTION Positioning only rotary axes In absolute coordinates only movements within the 0 to 359 9999 range are possible 0168 Rotary axis Absolute values G90 within 4 359 9999 DETECTED During execution CAUSE A movement of a rotary axis has been programmed The movement has been programmed in absolute coordinates G90 and the target coordinate of the movement is not within the 0 to 359 9999 range SOLUTION Rotary axes In absolute coordinates only movements within the 0 to 359 9999 range are possible ERROR TROUBLESHOOTING MANUAL 23 8055T CNC ROI 2 0169 Modal subroutines cannot be programmed DETECTED While executing in MDI mode CAUSE An attempt has been made to call upon a modal subroutine MCALL SOLUTION modal subroutines cannot be executed from the menu option MDI execution 0171 The window must be previously defined DETECTED During normal execution or execution
143. parameters PO through P25 1054 Local parameters not accessible DETECTED During execution CAUSE While programming in high level language more than 6 nesting levels have been used with the PCALL statement within the same loop SOLUTION No more than 6 nesting levels are possible with local parameters within the 15 nesting levels for subroutines Every time a call is made with the PCALL statement a new nesting loop is generated for local parameters as well as for the subroutines 1055 Nesting exceeded DETECTED During execution CAUSE While programming in high level language more than 15 nesting levels have been used with the CALL PCALL MCALL statements within the same loop SOLUTION more than 15 nesting levels are possible Every time a called is made with the CALL PCALL or statements a new nesting level is generated 1056 RET not associated to a subroutine DETECTED During execution CAUSE The RET instruction has been edited without having previously edited the SUB instruction SOLUTION use the RET instruction end of subroutine the subroutine must start with the SUB instruction subroutine number 1057 Subroutine not defined DETECTED During execution CAUSE A call has been made CALL PCALL to a subroutine that is not defined in the CNC s memory SOLUTION Check that the name of the subroutine is correct and that it exists
144. path and describing a radius of 5 mm you should program G90 G01 G37 R5 X20 Z30 G03 X40 Z10 R20 0610 10 80 60 As can be seen in the figure the CNC modifies the path so that the tool starts to machine with a tangential entry to the part Youhaveto program Function G37 plus value R inthe block which includes the path you want to modify 5 5 should appear in all cases following G37 indicating the radius of the arc which the CNC enters to obtain tangential entry to the part Its value must always be positive Function G37 should only be programmed in the block which includes a straight line movement G00 or G01 If you program in a block which includes circular movement G02 or G03 the CNC displays the corresponding error Page Chapter 6 Section 14 PATHCONTROL TANGENTIALENTRY G37 6 9 TIAL EXIT AT THE END OF A MACHINING OPERATION Function G38 enables the ending of a machining operation with a tangential exit of the tool The path should be in a straight line G00 or G01 Otherwise the CNC will display the corresponding error Function G38 is not modal so it should be programmed whenever a tangential exit of the tool is required Value R 5 5 should always appear after G38 It also indicates the radius of the arc which the CNC applies to get a tangential exit from the part This R value must always be positive Example with X axis programmed in radius 10
145. radius compensation the arc radius must be greater than the tool radius Otherwise the tool cannot machine the programmed path because the tool would have to machine an arc with zero radius 1088 Zero offset range exceeded DETECTED During execution CAUSE A zero offset has been programmed and the end position has too high a value SOLUTION Check that the values assigned to the zero offsets G54 G59 are correct If the offset values have been assigned from a program using parameters check that the parameter values are correct If an absolute zero offset Gib4 G57 has been programmed and an incremental one G58 G59 check that the sum of both does not exceed the travel limits of the machine 1089 Work zone limit range exceeded DETECTED During execution CAUSE Work zone limits G20 or G21 have been programmed using parameters and the value of the parameter is greater than the one allowed for this function SOLUTION Check the program history so this parameter does not reach with that value to the block defining those limits 1090 Point within the forbidden zone 1 DETECTED During execution CAUSE An attempt has been made to move an axis to a point located inside the work zone 1 which has been defined as no entry zone SOLUTION the history of the program work zone 1 defined with G20 G21 has been defined as no entry zone G22 K1 S1 To disable it program G22 K1 SO 1091 Point
146. restoring a profile CAUSE Within the group of blocks selected to restore the profile there is a block containing a G code that does not belong in the profile definition SOLUTION The G functions available in the profile definition are G00 901 G02 G03 G06 G08 Gog G36 G37 G38 G39 G90 G91 G93 0215 Invalid G function after first point of profile DETECTED While restoring a profile CAUSE Within the selected blocks for restoring the profile and after the starting point of a profile there is a block containing a G function that does not belong in the profile definition SOLUTION The G functions available in the profile definition are G00 G01 G02 G03 G06 G08 G09 G36 G37 G38 G39 G90 G91 G93 0216 Nonparametric assignment after first point of profile DETECTED While restoring a profile CAUSE Within the selected blocks for restoring the profile and after the starting point of a profile a nonparametric assignment has been programmed in high level language a local or global parameter SOLUTION The only high level instructions that can be edited are assignments to local parameters PO thru P25 and global parameters P100 thru P299 ERROR TROUBLESHOOTING MANUAL 27 8055T CNC FAGOR 0217 Invalid programming after first point of profile DETECTED While restoring a profile CAUSE Within the selected blocks for restoring the profile and after the starting point of a profile
147. selected by program Constant surface feed active at the CNC in meters min or feet min Constant surface feed selected via DNC Constant surface feed selected via PLC Constant surface feed selected by program Spindle Speed Override 96 active at the CNC Spindle Speed Override selected by program Spindle Speed Override selected via DNC Spindle Speed Override selected via PLC Spindle Speed Override selected from front panel Spindle speed limit in rpm active at the CNC Spindle speed limit selected via DNC Spindle speed limit selected via PLC Spindle speed limit selected by program Spindle real position max 999999999 in 0 0001 Spindle real position between 0 and 360 in 0 0001 Spindle theoretical position max 999999999 in 0 0001 Spindle theoretical position between 0 and 360 in 0 0001 Spindle following error when in Closed loop M19 in degrees Following error of the second spindle with respect to the main spindle when they re both synchronized VARIABLES ASSOCIATED WITH THE SECOND SPINDLE Section 11 2 10 Variable SSREAL SSPEED SDNCS SPLCS SPRGS SCSS SDNCCS SPLCCS SPRGCS SSSO SPRGSO SDNCSO SPLCSO SCNCSO SSLIMI SDNCSL SPLCSL SPRGSL SPOSS SRPOSS STPOSS SRTPOS SFLWES DJEDDA ado ur Real spindle speed in r p m Active spindle speed at the CNC Spindle speed selected via DNC Spindle speed s
148. the Service Department 2020 PLC EPROM memory error DETECTED While starting the CNC up or during diagnosis CAUSE An EPROM memory problem has been detected at the PLC SOLUTION Change the EPROM Contact the Service Department 2021 USER RAM memory error at the CNC Press any key DETECTED While starting the CNC up or during diagnosis CAUSE A user RAM memory problem has been detected at the CNC SOLUTION Contact the Service Department 2022 CNC system RAM memory error Press any key DETECTED While starting the CNC up or during diagnosis CAUSE A system RAM memory problem has been detected at the CNC SOLUTION Contact the Service Department 2023 PLC RAM error Press any key DETECTED While starting the CNC up or during diagnosis CAUSE A RAM memory problem has been detected at the PLC SOLUTION Contact the Service Department 46 ERROR TROUBLESHOOTING MANUAL FAGOR 3 8055T CNC 2024 The tracing module has no voltage DETECTED During execution CAUSE The 24V are missing from the outputs of the tracing board The fuse might be blown SOLUTION Supply the outputs of the tracing board with 24V If the fuse is blown replace it 2026 Maximum probe travel overrun DETECTED During execution CAUSE The probe has exceeded the maximum deflection allowed by machine parameter SOLUTION Reduce the feedrate and check that the probe is not damaged 2027 SERCOS chip RAM Error
149. the axes SVARS identifier for the main spindle SSVAR identifier for the second spindle They permitreading or modifying the value ofthe sercos variable corresponding to the axis identifier P110 SVARX 40 assigns to parameter P110 the value of the sercos variable of identifier 40 of the X axis which corresponds to the VelocityFeedback Page Chapter 11 Section 28 PROGRAMMINGINHIGH LEVELLANGUAGE SERCOSVARIABLES 11 2 15 OTHER VARIABLES Read only variables OPMODE Returns the code corresponding to the selected operating Mode 0 Mainmenu 10 Automatic execution 11 Single block execution 12 MDI in EXECUTION 13 Tool inspection 20 Theoretical path movement simulation 21 Gfunctions simulation 22 G M S and T functions simulation 23 Simulation with movement on main plane 24 Simulation with rapid movement 30 Normalediting 31 User editing 32 TEACH IN editing 33 Interactive editor 34 Profile editor 40 Movement in continuous JOG 4 Movement in incremental JOG 42 Movement with electronic handwheel 43 HOME search in JOG 44 Position preset in JOG 45 Toolcalibration 46 MDI in JOG 47 JOG user operation 50 Zero offset table 51 Tool Offset table 52 Tool table 53 Tool magazine table 54 Global parameter table 55 Local parameter table 60 Utilities 70 CNC status 71 DNC status 80 Editing PLC files 81 Compiling
150. the dimensions of each tool Tool Table It must be defined It indicates for each tool the family it belongs to the offset associated to it its nominal and real life spans etc Tool Magazine Table It must be defined It indicates the position each tool occupies in the tool magazine Tool Geometry table It must be defined It indicates the dimensions and cutting angle of each cutter Global and local parameter table It does not need to be defined Itis updated by the CNC When selecting a tool T or a tool offset D the CNC acts as follows If the machine has a tool magazine the CNC looks up the tool magazine table to know the position of the desired tool and of the selected tool Is there a Tool Magazine nord has not been defined it looks up the Tool Bii table to know the tool offset D associated with it Selects tool I Examines the Tool Offset Table and it assumes the tool dimensions corresponding to the D offset Is D defined Yes Analyzes the tool geometry to know the geometry of the cutter width angle and cutting No angle Takes D associated with T in tool table The Geometry table is associated with the T or with the D according to the manufacturer s 4 criteria general machine parameter GEOMTYPE P123 Takes tool dimensions D from tool offset table Itisrecommendedto saveth
151. the following parameters X Z Position of the slot Length of the slot Depth of the slot Angular position of the first slot Angular step between slot Number of slots Feedrate Speed and turning direction of the live tool The rest of the parameters are optional The parameters must be edited in the order indicated by the error message ance ror 0043 Incomplete Coordinates DETECTED While editing at the CNC or while executing a program transmitted via DNC CAUSE S The various causes might be 1 During simulation or execution when trying to make a movement defined with only one coordinate of the end point or without defining the arc radius while a circular interpolation G02 G03 is active 2 During editing when editing a circular movement G02 G03 by defining only one coordinate of the end point or not defining the arc radius SOLUTION The solution for each cause is 1 G02 or function may be programmed previously in the program history In this case to make a move both coordinates of the end point and the arc radius must be defined To make a linear movement program G01 2 To make a circular movement 602 003 both coordinates of the end point and the arc radius must be programmed 8 ERROR TROUBLESHOOTING MANUAL Hicon 3 8055T CNC 0045 Polar coordinates not allowed DETECTED While editing at the CNC or while executing a program tr
152. the intermediate point is always defined in Cartesian coordinates by the letters LJ or K each one being associated to the axes as follows Axes X U A gt Axes Y V B gt J Axes Z W C gt In Cartesian coordinates G18 G09 X 5 5 Z 5 5 145 5 K 5 5 Polar coordinates G18 609 Rx5 5 5 5 5 5 K 5 5 Example being PO the initial point X axis programmed in radius G09 X60 Z20 130 K50 X axis programmed in diameter G09 X120 720 160 K50 X Function 09 is not modal so it should always be programmed if you wish to execute an arc defined by three points Function G09 be programmed as G9 When G09 is programmed it is not necessary to program the direction of movement G02 or G03 Function G09 does not alter the history of the program The same G01 G02 or G03 function stays active after finishing the block Warning When using function G09 itis not possible to execute a complete circle as you have to program three different points The CNC displays the corresponding error code Chapter 6 Section Page PATHCONTROL ARCDEFINEDBY 11 THREE POINTS 09 6 7 HELICAL INTERPOLATION A helical interpolation consists of a circular interpolation in the work plane and the movement of the rest of the programmed axes Itis usually utilized on special machines having an auxiliary axis The helical interpolation is programmed in a block The circular interpolation by means of funct
153. through the user channel CAUSE An attempt has been made to write in a window DW that has not been previously defined ODW SOLUTION Itis not possible to write in a window that has not been previously defined Check that the window to write in DW has been previously defined 0172 The program is not accessible DETECTED During execution CAUSE An attempt has been made to execute a program that cannot be executed SOLUTION The program may be protected against execution To know if the program can be executed check the attributes column if the letter X is missing it means that it cannot be executed 0174 Circular helical interpolation not possible DETECTED During execution CAUSE An attempt has been made to execute a helical interpolation while the LOOK AHEAD G51 function was active SOLUTION Helical interpolations are not possible while the LOOK AHEAD G51 function is active 0175 Analog inputs ANAI 1 8 5 Volts DETECTED During execution CAUSE An analog input has taken a value out of the 5V range SOLUTION Analog inputs may only take values within the 5V range 0176 Analog outputs ANAO 1 8 10 Volts DETECTED During execution CAUSE An analog output has been assigned a value out of the 10V range SOLUTION Analog outputs may only take values within the 10V range 0178 G96 only possible with analog spindle DETECTED During execution CAUSE The G96
154. to be set at the CNC It shows how to program a home search how to program coordinates with respect to home how to preset coordinates zero offsets and polar origins Chapter 5 Programming by ISO code It shows how to program preparatory functions for feedrate and constant speed as well as additional functions such as F S T D and M Chapter 6 Path control It shows how to program rapid traverse linear circular and helical interpolations Itshows how to program tangential entries and exits as well as corner rounding and chamfering It shows how to program electronic threading and movements against hard stop It shows how to program the axis to machine along the surface and on the face of the part It shows how to program the tangential control Chapter 7 Additional preparatory functions It shows how to interrupt block preparation and how to program a dwell It shows how to program a part in square corner round corner or with an automatic radius blend It describes how to program the look ahead mirror image scaling factor pattern rotation and the electronic slaving unslaving of the axes Chapter 8 Tool compensation It shows how to program tool radius and length compensation Chapter9 Canned cycles It shows how to program the different machining canned cycles Chapter 10 Working with a probe It shows how to carry out probing moves and how to program the probing canned cycles Introduction 7 Chapter 11 Prog
155. tool offset being corrected once the measuring cycle has ended If not programmed or programmed with a value of 0 the CNC will assume that the tool offset must not be corrected Page Chapter 10 Section TOOLOFFSET i EROBING CORRECTION Z AXIS Basic operation 1 x TP1010 Approach move Rapid move of the probe G00 from the cycle calling point to the approach point This point is located in front of the point to be measured and at a safety distance B from it The approach movement is carried out in two stages Ist Move along Z axis 2nd Move along X axis Probing Movement of the probe along the Z axis at the indicated feedrate F until the probe signal is received The maximum distance to travel in this move is 2B If after travelling this distance the CNC has not yet received the probe signal it will issue the corresponding error message and it will stop the axes Once the probing has ended the CNC will assume as theoretical position the real position at the time when it received the probe signal Chapter 10 Section Page PROBING TOOLOFFSET 17 CORRECTIONZAXIS 3 Withdrawal Rapid movement of the probe 600 from the probed point to the cycle calling point The withdrawal is done in two stages Ist Z axis move back to the cycle calling point 2nd X axis move back to the cycle calling point Once the cycle has ended the CNC will return the real values obtained from t
156. tool tip lcs Compensated Path Theoretical Path 4 N Theoretical Tool tip Path Chapter 8 Section Page TOOLCOMPENSATION ACTIVATINGTOOLRADIUS 5 COMPENSATION STRAIGHT STRAIGHT path TPOB2 0 1 Page Chapter 8 Section 6 TOOL COMPENSATION ACTIVATING TOOLRADIUS COMPENSATION STRAIGHT CURVED path 0 1 Chapter 8 Section Page TOOLCOMPENSATION ACTIVATINGTOOL RADIUS 7 COMPENSATION 8 3 TOOL RADIUS COMPENSATION SECTIONS The diagrams below show the different paths followed by a tool controlled by a programmed CNC with tool radius compensation The programmed path is represented by a solid line and the compensated path by a dotted line The CNC reads up to 20 blocks ahead of the one it is executing with the aim of calculating in advance the path to be followed When the CNC works with compensation it needs to know the next programmed movement to calculate the path to be followed For this reason no more than 17 consecutive blocks can be programmed without movement N Page Chapter 8 Section 8 TOOL COMPENSATION TOOLRADIUS COMPENSATIONSECTIONS 4 i _ 1 gt M 74 N N M N N R R P Xs 7 b cop R b m S Syg R N N
157. with a value of 0 it is considered that no finishing pass is desired S4 Defines the label number of the first block describing the geometry of the profile E4 Defines the label number of the last block describing the geometry of the profile Q6 Defines the number of the program containing the geometry description of the profile This parameter is optional and if not set the CNC interprets that the profile is defined within the same program that contains the cycle Basic operation Inthose cases when the programmed profile cannot be machined valleys with the selected tool a warning message will be displayed at the beginning of the cycle execution X The operator will be able to stop the execution and select the proper tool If he she doesn t do that anew profile is calculated in the areas that are not accessible for the selected tool and CNC machines as far as it is possible The message will remain displayed during the whole machining process Chapter 9 Section Page CANNEDCYCLES STOCKREMOVALCANNED 19 CYCLE ALONG Z AXIS G69 Oncethe necessary roughing passes have been calculated the CNC will machine the resulting new profile The whole machining operation will be performed in whatever G05 or G07 that was active whencalling the cycle andit will be carried out with the same pass throughout the whole machining operation If when making a roughing pass a channel is detected the
158. with the CURSOR ADVANCE softkey Chapter 10 Section Page EDITINGCUSTOMSCREENS 9 Sees PAGES ANDSYMBOLS 10 35 GRAPHIC ELEMENTS Before accessing this option it is necessary to select the page or symbol to be edited or modified by means of the EDIT option of the UTILITIES mode of operation With this option it is possible to include graphic elements in the selected page or symbol The CNC displays a screen 80 columns wide 640 pixels for X coordinate by 21 rows high 336 pixels for Y coordinate When editing a new page the CNC will position the cursor in the center of the screen and when editing a new symbol it will position it at the upper left hand corner The cursor is white and can be moved around with the up and down arrow keys and the left and right arrow keys The cursor can also be moved by using the following keystroke combinations SHIFT Positions the cursor at the last column X638 SHIFT Positions the cursor at the first column X1 SHIFT Positions the cursor at the first row YO Le Lo SHIFT Positions the cursor at the last row Y334 It is also possible to key in the XY coordinates of the point where the cursor is to be positioned To do this follow these steps Press X or Y The CNC will highlight in the editing parameter display window the cursor position along the selected axis column or row Keyin the position value corresponding to the point wh
159. within the 0 to 359 9999 range 0200 Program G52 axis 5 5 DETECTED While editing at the CNC or while executing a program transmitted via DNC CAUSE When programming the Movement against a hard stop G52 either the axis to be moved has not been programmed or several axes have been programmed SOLUTION When programming the G52 function the axis to be moved must be programmed but only one axis at atime 0206 Values 0 thru 6 DETECTED While editing machine parameters CAUSE An attempt has been made to assign the wrong value to a parameter SOLUTION parameter only admits values between 0 and 6 0207 Complete Table DETECTED While editing tables CAUSE In the tables for M functions or tool offsets an attempt has been made to define more data than those allowed by the manufacturer by means of machine parameters When loading a table via DNC the CNC does not delete the previous table it replaces the existing values and it copies the new data in the free positions of the table SOLUTION maximum number of data that can be defined is limited by the machine parameters Maximum number of M functions NMISCFUN P29 Maximum number of NTOOL P23 Maximum number of tool offset NTOFFSET P27 Maximum number of magazine positions NPOCKET P25 To load a new table via DNC the previous table should be deleted 26 ERROR TROUBLESHOOTING MANUAL Hicon 3 8055T CN
160. work zones G22 the type of enable or disable of the work zone has not been defined or it has been assigned the wrong value SOLUTION parameter for enabling or disabling the work zones S must always be programmed and it may take the following values S 0 The work zone is disabled S 1 It is enabled as a no entry zone S 2 It is enabled as no exit zone 0019 Program work zone K1 K2 or 4 DETECTED While editing at the CNC or while executing a program transmitted via DNC CAUSE S The various causes might be 1 A G20 G21 or G22 function has been programmed without defining the work zone K1 K2 K3 or K4 2 The programmed work zone is smaller than 0 or greater than 4 SOLUTION solution for each cause is 1 The programming format for functions G20 G21 and G22 is G20 K X C 5 5 Definition of lower work zone limits G21 K X C 5 5 Definition of upper work zone limits G22 K S Enable disable work zones Where K Is the work zone X C Are the axes where the limits are defined S Is the type of work zone enable 2 The K work zone may only have the values of K1 K2 K3 or K4 0020 Program G36 G39 with R 5 5 DETECTED While editing at the CNC or while executing a program transmitted via DNC CAUSE In the G36 or G39 function the R parameter has not been programmed or it has been assigned a
161. 0 Mp n 21 9 10 A 23 S ID De sonp ca of the wark SOPBOS dose DN 23 9 10 2 Selection of variables and trigger conditions 2 26 915 2 Variable anthers eae nee T Xd Edu eid 26 9 10 2 2 Selection pf trigger condition aes 28 9 10 23 BASE 30 TIT S t 31 5S HISPAN EA ate 32 Modes of operation Lisa tr prr edet abr ERI EPA RUHE IHE p E PDHA LUE same Urb AU 33 AL SPOTS Te PS ient NETT EE 34 SALUTEM Oo 22 10 SCREEN EDITOR 10 1 MEHR ud DIM MU OI cca a Meca iN uU DERI 2 10 2 Editing custom screens pages and symbols 3 10 3 UDIN uses tps accutane DM 10 10 4 yo mere HERO 15 10 5 Modi eano TET RT 18 aw MH 11 MACHINE PARAMETERS 11 1 ADIOS issu uae iib i edu MS RU ab dU rat FREE DEM MUR HEP AUN E CAM AME 2 Hz Miscellaneous fonction Table8 i iu croit ntt uto GR Eo I
162. 0 DETECTED While executing CAUSE The cutting depth pass has not been defined A SOLUTION Program a pass greater than zero PROFILE CYCLE C AXIS Value of I 0 DETECTED While executing CAUSE The total machining depth has not been defined SOLUTION Program a machining depth other than zero PROFILE CYCLE C AXIS Value of F 0 DETECTED While executing CAUSE The feedrate F has not been defined SOLUTION Program a positive feedrate other than zero PROFILE CYCLE C AXIS Value of S 0 DETECTED While executing CAUSE The spindle speed St of the live tool has not been defined SOLUTION Program a positive spindle speed St other than zero Errors in the drilling cycle DRILLING Value of T 0 DETECTED While executing CAUSE No tool number has been defined SOLUTION tool number must be other than zero DRILLING Value of A 0 DETECTED While executing CAUSE The cutting depth pass has not been defined A SOLUTION Program a pass greater than zero DRILLING Value of L 0 DETECTED While executing CAUSE The drilling depth has not been defined SOLUTION Program a drilling depth other than zero DRILLING Value of Fz0 DETECTED While executing CAUSE The feedrate F has not been defined SOLUTION Program a positive feedrate other than zero DRILLING Value of Sz0 DETECTED While executing CAUSE The spindle speed S has not been programmed SOL
163. 0 DG not programi Saved AMS uuu erac 10 Do not program a slaved axis Do not program formats greater than 6 5 17 Do not program labels by 3 Do not switch axes already switched over 31 Do not switch axes over or back while G15 G23 G48 or 49 ACUIVG T 31 Do not use high level to change active tool or next 31 Don t program G33 G95 or M19 S with no spindle encoder 23 JU E ir Drive overload 201 Drive overtemperature 107 eene 49 E TEESE net associated WITH Es iussus iue oat to rto tetto 10 EMDI o End of compensation without a straight path dass 77 Errors taper cycles dn The ARMING issis titer er io hortis 60 Exro s Incthe Tacit euni mr er o teet hts Errors in the grooving cycles Errors in the multiple drilling cycle en 60 Errors in the multiple slot milling cycle 62 Errors in the multiple tapping cycle Errors in the profile cycles of the axis 58 Errors in qme profile Cycles 1i mr oo te
164. 17 G18 or G19 functions G41 or G42 must be used to activate it G41 Compensation of tool radius compensation to the left G42 Compensation of tool radius compensation to the right In the same block or a previous one in which G41 or G42 is programmed functions T D or only T must be programmed so that the tool offset value to be applied can be selected from the tool offset table If no tool offset is selected the CNC takes DO with ZO FO RO IO KO When the new selected tool has an MO6 associated to it and this M06 in turn has a subroutine associated to it the CNC will activate the tool radius compensation at the first movementblock of that subroutine If that subroutine has a G53 programmed in a block position values referred to Machine Reference Zero home the CNC will cancel any tool radius compensation G41 or G42 selected previously The selection of tool radius compensation G41 or G42 can only be made when functions G00 or G01 are active straight line movements If the compensation is selected while G02 or G03 are active the CNC will display the corresponding error message The following pages show different cases of starting tool radius compensation in which the programmed pathis represented by a solid line and the compensated path with a dotted line It must be borne in mind that the compensated path corresponds to the tool tip s center and that the graphic representation shows the theoretical path of the
165. 2 8 Variables associated with the electronic handwheels 17 11 2 9 Variables associated with the main spindle cecinit cet 19 11 2 10 Variables associated with the second spindle uiui iier sorbet 22 11 2 11 Variables asociadas a herramienta motorizada 24 11 2 12 Va abl s associated wih th pli e 25 11 2 15 Variables associated with local parameters htm 27 11 214 28 IX I ODE VOS a Un a dU BRYCE ee TAS 29 11 3 NR e cscs cnc 35 11 4 ij 35 11 5 Pee ee ER 37 115 1 Arithmetic expressions tM 37 11 32 38 12 PROGRAM CONTROL STATEMENTS 12 1 ASS enmet Sei aU eM EUR CHR aU 1 122 Display DRY RARE MN 2 12 3 Enabling isa bE statene nes 3 12 4 Flow control VR Punk iu e 4 12 5 Subroutine riti dr de T 6 12 5 1 Interruption subroutine State ie BE B asse icai tero ctia he Exp CMS Va 11 12 6 Program tiri ir qe 12 12 7 Sereen customizing statements
166. 5 If this has a value of 0 it means that it is not selected P1102 SPRGSO assigns to P110 the of spindle speed selected by program SPRGSO 111 sets the value indicating spindle speed 96 selected by program to the value of arithmetic parameter P111 11 2 11 VARIABLES ASOCIADAS A HERRAMIENTA MOTORIZADA Read only variables ASPROG Must be used within the subroutine associated with function M45 It returns the rpm programmed in M45 S When programming just M45 the variable takes the value of 0 This variable is updated just before executing function M45 so it is updated when executing the associated subroutine LIVRPM Must be used when operating in TC mode It returns the rpm selected by the operator for the live tool in TC mode Page Chapter 11 Section 24 PROGRAMMING INHIGH LEVELLANGUAGE VARIABLES ASSOCIATED WITHTHELIVETOOL 11 2 12 VARIABLES ASSOCIATED WITH THE PLC It should be borne in mind that the PLC has Inputs 11 thru I256 Outputs O1 thru O256 Marks M1 thru M5957 Registers R1 thru R499 of 32 bits each Timers T1 thru T256 with a timer count in 32 bits Counters C1 thru C256 with a counter count in 32 bits If any variable is accessed which allows the status of a PLC variable to be read or modified LO M R T C block preparation is interrupted and the CNC waits for this command to be executed in order to restart block preparation
167. 5 D8 If P8 2 12 8 executes the mnemonic CALL3 If P8 lt gt 12 8 executes the mnemonic PCALL 5 A2 B5 D8 The statement can lack the ELSE part i e it will beenough to program IF condition action Example IF P8 EQ 12 8 CALL 3 Both action1 and action2 canbe expressions or statements except for mnemonics IF and SUB Due to the fact that in a high level block local parameters can be named by means of letters expressions of this type can be obtained IF E EQ 10 M10 If the condition of parameter P5 E having a value of 10 is met the miscellaneous function M10 will not be executed since a high level block cannot have ISO code commands In this case M10 represents the assignment of value 10to parameter P12 i e one can program either IF E EQ 10 M10 or IF P5 EQ 10 P12 10 Chapter 12 Section Page PROGRAMCONTROLSTATEMENTS FLOWCONTROL 5 STATEMENTS 12 5 SUBROUTINE STATEMENTS A subroutine is a part of a program which being properly identified can be called from any position of a program to be executed A subroutine can be kept in the memory of the CNC as an independent part of a program and be called one or several times from different positions of a program or different programs Only subroutines stored in CNC RAM memory can be executed To execute asubroutine stored in the memory card the hard disk or in a PC connected through the serial line it must be copied first in
168. 5 Amp 250V against a voltage overload greater than 33V dc and against reverse connection of the power supply Input Output and Tracing Module All the digital inputs and outputs have galvanic isolation via optocouplers between the CNC circuitry and the outside They are protected by an external fast fuse F of 3 15 Amp 250V against a voltage overload greater than 33V dc and against reverse connection of the power supply Fan Module It carries 1 or 2 external fuses depending on model The fuses are fast F of 0 4 250V to protect the fans Monitor The type of protection fuse depends the type of monitor See the identification label of the unit itself Precautions during repair Do not manipulate the inside of the unit Only personnel authorized by Fagor Automation may manipulate the inside of this unit Do not manipulate the connectors with the unit connected to AC power Before manipulating the connectors inputs outputs feedback etc make sure that the unit is not connected to AC power Safety symbols Symbols which may appear on the manual WARNING symbol Ithas an associated text indicating those actions oroperations may hurt people or damage products gt Symbols that may be carried on the product WARNING symbol Ithas an associated text indicating those actions or operations may hurt people or damage products Electrical Shock symbol Itindicates that point may be under electrical voltage
169. 5 Defines the type of operation to be performed f B 0 the CNC will carry an axial tapping fB 0it will carry out an axial drilling where B indicates the drilling step D5 5 Defines the safety distance and it indicates at what distance the tool is positioned in the approach move If not programmed a value of 0 is assumed K5 Defines the dwell in hundredths of a second at the bottom of the hole before starting the withdrawal If not programmed a value of 0 is assumed 5 5 Defines the withdrawal distance after each drilling step GOO If not programmed or programmed a value of 0 it will withdraw to the approach point Page Chapter 9 Section 34 CANNEDCYCLES DRILLING CANNED CYCLE G83 5 5 Defines the approach distance along Z from the previous drilling step to start the next drilling step in GOO If not programmed a value of 1 millimeter Drilling Basic operation 1 Rapid move in GOO to the approach point located at a distance D from the the drilling point 2 First drilling operation The longitudinal axis moves in G1 at programmed feedrate to the programmed incremental depth D B 3 Drilling loop The following steps will be repeated until the total programmed depth is reached 3 1 Withdrawal in rapid G00 a distance H or to the approach point 3 2 Rapid approach up to a distance from the previous drilling step 3 3 New drilling ste
170. 6 Section 6 TABLES TOOLOFFSETTABLE Tool type location codes shape F0 through F10 They indicate the tool shape and how it has been calibrated Codes FO and F9 must only be used when calibrating the tool tip center and not the sides of the cutter FO FO When using an end mill or a drill bit this location code must be F10 How toedit these values is describedlateron They can also be modified from the PLC and from the part program using the high level variables associated with the tools Chapter 6 Section Page TABLES TOOLOFFSETTABLE 7 CODIGOS DE FORMA LOCATION CODES CODIGOS FO CODES FD and F8 X ON Fd oe 5 5 Page Chapter 6 Section 8 TABLES TOOLOFFSETTABLE CODIGO FS CODE F5 aa A A mmm Chapter 6 Section Page TABLES TOOLOFFSETTABLE 9 6 5 TOOL GEOMETRY TABLE This table contains information such as cutter angle cutting angles etc regarding the geometry of the available tools The data corresponding to each tool is contained in the following fields Cutter angle NOSEA Cutter width NOSEW Cutting angle CUTA NOSEA 90 NOSEA 90 NOSEW OR CAP INS MM EESTI EIL ALL ETC C GJ CJ C C Tool data contained in other tool tables Toolnumber D
171. 64 Chapter 9 Section G61 RADIAL CANNEDCYCLES DRILLING TAPPING 9 15 662 LONGITUDINAL SLOT MILLING CYCLE This cycle is available when the machine has a live tool While performing this operation the spindle is stopped and the tool is turning This makes it possible to machine anywhere on the workpiece TPOSNO3 The basic block structure is G62X ZLIQAJDFS 5 5 Z 5 5 L 5 5 1 5 5 0 5 5 5 5 J4 D5 5 Defines the X coordinate where the cycle is to be run It is programmed in absolute values and in the active units radius or diameter Defines the Z coordinate where the cycle is to berun Itis programmed in absolute coordinates Defines the length of the slot Itis referred to the starting point X Z and it will therefore have a positive value when machining in the negative Z direction and negatitve when doing it in the opposite direction L in the example above If programmed with a 0 value the CNC will issue the corresponding error Defines in radius the depth of the slot It is referred to the starting point X Z If programmed with a 0 value the CNC will issue the corresponding error Defines the angular position in degrees to orient the spindle to mill the first slot Defines the angular increment between two consecutive slots It is programmed in degrees with the positive sign when going counter clockwise Defines the number of slots to be milled
172. 7 2 p eee 3 3 3 Working with square G07 and round G05 G50 corners 4 Tou Sanare commer OOF pm 4 1 42 Round comer IUS 5 1523 Controlled round 6 7 4 IUe 3 73 Mi rtorinase GT11 62 CC I aae pe or Pere 9 7 6 relie ep 10 Tol Sodngtfactorapplied fo all anes ii aote qaot hn 11 762 Scaling factor applied to oe Of Mire AXES iiis ortis Re RS RUE PES RME 12 pue Slaved axis cance anon of slaved vir rn ER Eu US ERI ERE RUE 15 Td MIRO AURAIT NU TT 16 Ae scende DU EU a RE aed 17 8 TOOL COMPENSATION 8 1 Tool radius compensation G40 G41 G42 sese 4 8 2 Activating too radins comperisatioi siccis setae ere dat 3 8 3 Tool radius compensation i pe 8 8 4 Cancelling fool radius 11 8 5 Temporary tool radius cancellation with 00 0 14 8 6 tool compensation T8 awy pane aicaiicssniecrnednuosind 16 9 CA
173. 83480102 with keyboard 83480103 83480104 Video adapter digital analog Video duplicator DVD 83900001 83390003 DNC software 80500115 8C401001 14 Color monitor no keyboard 14 Color monitor with keyboard 83420004 Available manuals Standard Advanced Standard Advanced Mill Model software software Lathe Model software software code code code code Spanish 03753400 03753460 Spanish 03753420 03753480 English 03753401 03753461 English 03753421 03753481 French French German German Italian Italian portuguese portuguese Spanish 03753410 03753470 Spanish 03753430 03753490 English 03753411 03753471 English 03753431 03753491 French 03753412 03753472 French 03753432 03753492 German 03753413 03753473 German 03753433 03753493 Italian 03753414 03753474 Italian 03753434 03753494 portuguese 03753415 03753475 portuguese 03753435 03753495 Spanish 03753440 03753500 Spanish 03753450 03753510 English 03753441 03753501 English 03753451 03753511 Conversational French 03753442 03753502 Conversational French 03753452 03753512 model MC German 03753443 03753503 model TC German 03753453 03753511 Italian 03753444 03753504 talian 03753454 03753514 portuguese 03753445 03753505 portuguese 03753455 03753515 20 8055T CNC ERROR TROUBLESHOOTING MANUAL Ref 9905 ing ramming GTrOrS eee 1 Preparatio
174. 90 G42 601 770 CO Positioning at starting point G91 X 4 G90 G36 R3 C15 708 G36 R3 Z130 C31 416 G36 R3 C39 270 G36 R3 Z190 C54 978 G36 R3 C70 686 G36 R3 Z130 C86 394 G36 R3 C94 248 G36 R3 Z70 C109 956 G36 R3 C125 664 G91 X4 M30 Penetration Withdrawal Page Chapter 6 24 PATHCONTROL Section ACTIVATE CAXIS G15 6 13 2 FACE MACHINING In order to machine on the face of the part first define function G15 and then select the main plane by means of function G16 X C Next program the profile to be machined with linear and circular interpolations as well as tool radius compensation if so required Program the C axis as a normal linear axis and the values assigned to the X axis will be considered in radius regardless of the setting of machine parameter DFORMAT for the X axis 0621 G15 Face machining G16 XC GO X30 Positioning at starting point GO Z 2 Penetration G90 X15 F1000 C 10 X 12 C10 X0 X15 CO X30 GO 720 M30 Withdrawal Chapter 6 Section PATHCONTROL ACTIVATE CAXIS G15 Page 25 6 14 MOVE TO HARDSTOP 652 By means of function G52 itis possibleto program the movement ofan axis until running into an object This feature may be interesting for forming machines live tailstocks bar feeders etc Its programming format is G52 X C 5 5 After G52 program the desired axis as well as the target co
175. AND Indicates the programmed coordinate or position which the axis mustreach ACTUAL Indicates the actual current position of the axis TO GO Indicates the distance which is left to run to the programmed coordinate Page 14 Chapter 3 Section EXECUTE SIMULATE DISPLAYSELECTION 3 3 MDI This function is not available in the SIMULATION mode Besides if a program is being executed it must be interrupted in order to access this function Itis possible to execute any block ISO or high level and it provides information on the corresponding format via the softkeys Once the block has been edited and after the key has been pressed the CNC will execute this block without quitting this operating mode Chapter 3 EXECUTE SIMULATE Section MDI Page 15 3 4 TOOL INSPECTION This function is not available in the SIMULATION mode Besides if a program is being executed it must be interrupted in order to access this function This operating mode allows all the machine movements to be controlled manually and enabling the axis control keys on the Operator Panel X X Y Y Z Z 4 4 etc Also the CNC will show the softkeys to access the CNC tables edit and execute a block in MDI as well as repositioning the axes of the machine to the position from where this function was called One of the ways to make the tool change is as follows Move the tool to the required tool
176. ANNED CYCLE ALONG X AXIS A previously calibrated probe with the cycle described before placed in the spindle tool holder will be used With this cycle besides being possible to measure the part along the X axis it is also possible to correct the offset of the tool used to machine this surface This correction will only take place when the measured error is greater than a pre established value The programming format for this cycle is PROBE 3 X Z F L D X 5 5 Theoretical X coordinate of the point to be measured This value will be given Z 5 5 B5 5 F5 5 L5 5 D4 in the active units radius or diameter Theoretical Z coordinate of the point to be measured Defines the safety distance with a positive radius value If a value of 0 is programmed the CNC will display the corresponding error message Defines the probing feedrate in mm min or inches min Defines the tolerance amount to be applied to the measured error It will be programmed in radius and the correction will only take place if the error is equal to or greater than this value If not programmed the CNC will assume a value of 0 for this parameter Defines the number of the tool offset being corrected once the measuring cycle has ended Ifnot programmed or programmed with a value of 0 the CNC will assume that the tool offset must not be corrected Chapter 10 Section Page PROBING TOOLOFFSET 13 CORRECTION XAXIS Basic o
177. ART OPERATION softkey to carry out this command Chapter 9 Section Page PLC EDIT COPY TO PROGRAM With this option it is possible to copy a block or group of blocks of one program into another program Whenselecting this option the CNC will request the numberofthe destination program where the selected block or blocks are to be copied After entering the program number press ENTER Next indicate the first and last blocks to copy by following these steps Position the cursor over the first block to be copied and press the INITIAL BLOCK softkey Position the cursor over the last block to be copied and press the FINAL BLOCK softkey If the last block to be copied is also the last one of the program it can also be selected by pressing the TO THE END softkey Tocopy only one block the initial block and the final block will be the same one Once the first and last blocks are selected the CNC will highlight the selected blocks and will execute the command If the destination program already exists the following options will be displayed Write over the existing program All the blocks of the destination program will be erased and will be replaced by the copied blocks Append add the copied blocks behind the ones existing at the destination program Abort or cancel the command without copying the blocks INCLUDE PROGRAM With this option it is possible t
178. Analog output nor avallablg 22 nans near 12 Analog outputs ANAO 1 8 10 Volts eee 24 Angle coordinate programmed incorrectly 38 Arc programmed with radius too small or complete circle 38 ASIN ACOS range exceeded eee 15 Auxiliary spindle drive error Axes board without voltage Y d ZL MUSLOS E 26 Axes X Y or Z slaved or synchronized i ole Obes OL anmiana 9 Axis dive pog 50 B Base zero with positive exponent 15 Beginning of compensation without a straight path 37 Block cannot be executed while running another program 17 Block incompatible when defining a profile 5 Block not allowed in MDI or during tool inspection 38 C Canned does exiSt uices rta nr ntc Chamfer programmed incorrectly i Chamier value Too sce tete t eta im pedea ta eae CHECKSUM ERROR GENERAL PARAMETERS 51 CHECKSUM ERROR SPINDLE PARAMETERS CHECKSUM ERROR 2nd SPINDLE PARAMETERS 51 CHECKSUM ERROR AUX SPINDLE PARAMETERS 51 CHECKSUM ERROR AXIS PARAMETERS CHECKSUM ERROR CROSS COMP TABLE 1 5 CHECKSUM ERROR C
179. C 0208 Program A from 0 to 255 DETECTED During execution CAUSE In the LOOK AHEAD G51 function parameter A 96 of acceleration to be applied has been programmed with a value greater than 255 SOLUTION Parameter A is optional but when programmed it must have a value between 0 and 255 0209 Program nesting not allowed DETECTED During execution CAUSE From a running program an attempt has been made to execute another program with the EXEC instruction which in turn also has an EXEC instruction SOLUTION Another program cannot be called upon from a program being executed using the EXEC instruction 0210 No compensation is permitted DETECTED While editing at the CNC or while executing a program transmitted via DNC CAUSE An attempt has been made to activate or cancel tool radius compensation G41 G42 G40 in a block containing a nonlinear movement SOLUTION radius compensation must be activated deactivated in linear movements G00 G01 0213 For G28 or G29 a second spindle is required DETECTED While editing at the CNC or while executing a program transmitted via DNC CAUSE An attempt has been made to select the work spindle with G28 G29 but the machine only has one work spindle SOLUTION If the machine only has one work spindle the G28 G29 functions cannot be programmed 0214 Invalid G function when selecting a profile DETECTED While
180. C YC Radius of the arc TANGENCY Indicates whether the arc to be drawn is tangent to Et 0 the previous section or not Er 0 Ni 2 2 All these parameters need not be defined but all the known ones Nr should be defined To define a parameter press the corresponding softkey key in the desired value and press ENTER The value may be defined by a numeric constant or by any expression Examples X 100 X 10 cos 45 X 20 30 sine 30 X 2 20 30 sine 30 Once all known parameters are set press the VALIDATE softkey and the CNC will show the defined section if possible Ifthere are more than one possibility all the possible options will be shown and the desired one framed in red must be selected using the right and left arrow keys Example 1 40 1 30 X2 Y2 LO XC YC RA 20 TANGENCY YES Use the up and down arrow keys to choose whether all the possible options are shown only the one framed in red Ifthereis notenough datato show the section the CNC waits for more data in orderto solve the profile Once the desired option is selected press ENTER for the CNC to assume it Chapter 4 Section Page EDIT PROFILEEDITOR 9 4 1 4 5CORNERS When selecting this option the CNC shows the following option softkeys Rounding For rounding any corners of the profile Chamfer For adding chamfers at any corner of the profile Tangential Entry add a t
181. C admits 5 5 format thereby admitting 5 4 in millimeters and 4 5 in inches On power up after executing M02 M30 or after EMERGENCY or RESET the CNC will assume that the system of units of measurement is the one defined by the general machine parameter INCHES Chapter 3 Section Page AXES ANDCOORDINATESYSTEMS MILLIMETERS G71 5 INCHES G70 3 4 ABSOLUTE INCREMENTAL PROGRAMMING G90 G91 The CNC allows the programming of the coordinates of one point either with absolute G90 or incremental G91 values When working with absolute coordinates G90 the point coordinates refer to a point of origin of established coordinates often the part zero datum When working in incremental coordinates G91 the numerical value programmed corresponds to the movement information for the distance to be travelled from the point where the tool is situated at that time The sign in front shows the direction of movement Functions G90 G91 are modal and incompatible Example with X axis programming in diameter 100 40 E Absolute coordinates G90 X200 760 Point PO X160 760 Point Pl X 80 Z100 Point P2 X80 Z120 Point P3 Incremental coordinates G90 X200 Z 60 Point PO G91 X 40 Point P1 X 80 Z40 Point P2 Z 20 Point P3 On power up after executing M02 M30 or after an EMERGENCY or RESET the CNC will assume G90 or G91 according to the definition by the general machine parameter IS
182. C equations Examples of expressions and trigger conditions M100 The trigger occurs when M100 1 NOT M100 The trigger occurs when M100 0 CPS R100 1 trigger occurs when R100 1 120 AND I5 The trigger occurs when the expression is true Itis not possible to use more than 16 flank edge detecting instructions DFU and DFD among all the selected variable definitions and trigger conditions By pressing the ESC key the trigger condition being edited will be deleted From this point on that condition can be edited again Once the trigger condition has been edited press ENTER The new trigger condition will appear at the information window If no trigger condition has been specified the system assumes one by default and it displays the message Trigger type DEFAULT in the information window Besides it will not permit the selection of any other possible types of trigger before center or after TRIGGER BEFORE The CNC starts the data capture once after the selected trigger condition is met Then once the trace has been executed the trigger vertical red line will be positioned at the beginning of the trace Page Chapter 9 Section 28 PLC LOGICANALYZER TRIGGER AFTER The CNC starts the data capture at the very instant the user selects the option to execute the trace before the trigger condition is met The trace will be considered done when the selected trigger condition is
183. CION gt UARIO EJECUCION 000217 023705 000009 000208 000029 000869 000981 002759 000801 009389 000039 000026 000026 020634 14 programs 062800 bytes free CAP INS MM DIRECTORY DELETE RENAME PROTEC TIONS Oneach directory the CNC shows all the programs visible not hidden to the user that is Part programs Customizing programs The PLC program PLC PRG The PLC error file PLC ERR The PLC message file PLC MSG Chapter 7 UTILITIES Section DIRECTORY Page The program directory has the following definition fields Program It shows the number when it is a part program or a customizing program and the corresponding mnemonic when it is a PLC program the PLC error file or the PLC message file Comment Any program may have a comment associated with it for its identification The comments may be defined when editing the program or in this operating mode using the Rename option as described later on Size Itindicates in bytes the size ofthe program text It must be borne in mind that the actual size of the program is slightly greater because this field does not include the space occupied by some variables used internally header etc The date and the time when the program was edited last changed Attributes They show information
184. CNC 8055 T Operating Manual Ref 0001 in ii Please note that some of the features described in this manual might not be implemented in the software version that you just obtained Probing canned cycles Option Tool life monitoring Option DNC Option Software for 4 axes Option Software for 7 axes Option Profile editor Option C axis Lathe Option Tangential Control Option Conversational software TC and TCO The information described in this manual may be subject to variations due to technical modifications FAGOR AUTOMATION S Coop Ltda reserves the right to modify the contents of the manual without prior notice ii INDEX VERSION HISTOTY INTRODUCTION 1 OVERVIEW Ll BPursprosediita aeo RDUM EUR EM 1 12 Monitor 4 L3 Keyboard Layout 6 14 Operator panel iuuenes rho pha SR Pe ER bad 8 2 OPERATING MODES 2 1 Help SY SUNS M 3 cic E ob te a PIN RENE NUN IM RM cU 3 3 EXECUTE SIMULATE 34 Block selection and isi iion 4 3 2 Display 6 321 Standard display MOJE sesiis iain ienaa aaa aiaia 3 322 Poston displg mede iua ac amete den d ERI EHE
185. DOFF indicates thatthe modal quality acquired by the subroutine with the MCALL mnemonic finishes in this block The use of modal subroutines simplifies programming Example WO MANSY P100 20 P101 10 G90 G01 X80 27330 MCALL 10 G90 G01 X80 Z260 P100 30 P101 15 G90 G01 X200 Z200 G90 G01 X200 Z115 MDOFF M30 SUB 10 G91 601 7 101 XP100 ZP101 XP100 ZP101 RET PROBE expression assignment statement assignment statement The mnemonic PROBE calls the probe cycle indicated by means of a number or any expression which results in a number In addition it allows the local parameters of this subroutine to be initialized by means of assignment statements This mnemonic also generates a new level of subroutine nesting Page 10 Chapter 12 PROGRAM CONTROLSTATEMENTS Section SUBROUTINE STATEMENTS 12 5 1 INTERRUPTION SUBROUTINE STATEMENTS Whenever one of the general interruption logic input is activated INT1 M5024 INT2 M5025 INT3 M5026 or INT4 M5027 the CNC temporarily interrupts the execution of the program in progress and starts executing the interruption subroutine whose number is indicated by the corresponding general parameter With INT1 M5024 the one indicated by machine parameter INT1SUB P35 With INT2 M5025 the one indicated by machine parameter INT2SUB P36 With INT3 M5026 the one indicated by machine parameter INT3SUB P37 Wi
186. Defines the feedrate for the finishing pass If not programmed or programmed with a value of 0 it is considered that no finishing pass is desired Defines the distance in radius from the initial point X Z to the arc s center along the X axis Itis programmed in incremental values with respect to the initial point like the I for circular interpolations G02 G03 Defines the distance from the initial point X Z to the arc s center along the Z axis Itis programmed in incremental values with respect to the initial point like the for circular interpolations G02 G03 CANNEDCYCLES FACING WITH ARCS G85 41 Chapter 9 Section Page Basic operation The canned cycle will analyze the programmed profile performing if necessary a facing operation until the defined profile is reached The whole facing operation is carried out with the same pass this being equal to or smaller than the programmed one C Each facing pass is carried out in the following manner Xa 2940 1 Xa N Move 1 2 in rapid 00 Move 2 3 in GOI at programmed feedrate F If D has been programmed the 3 4 move is done in rapid G00 but if D has not been programmed the 3 4 move is done following the profile in GO1 at the programmed feedrate F Withdrawal 4 5 in rapid If a final roughing pass has been programmed the CNC will r
187. E I Displays page 11 and defines 2 data entry windows N10 PAGE 11 ODW 1 10 60 ODW 2 15 60 Editing WBUF PCALL 1 Adds PCALL 1 to the block being edited IB 1 INPUT X 6 5 Requests the value of X DW 1 IB1 Data window I shows the entered value WBUF X IB1 Adds X entered value to the block being edited WBUF Adds to the block being edited IB 2 INPUT Y 6 5 Requests the value of Y DW 2 IB2 Data window 2 shows the entered value WBUF 2 Adds Y entered value to the block being edited WBUF Adds to the block being edited WBUF Enters the edited block into memory For example PCALL 1 X2 Y3 GOTO N0 This sample program continues on next page Page Chapter 12 Section 20 PROGRAMCONTROLSTATEMENTS SCREENCUSTOMIZING STATEMENTS CYCLE 2 Displays page 12 and defines 3 data entry windows N20 PAGE 12 ODW 1 10 60 ODW 2 13 60 ODW 3 16 60 Editing WBUF PCALL 2 IB1 INPUT A 6 5 DW 1 IB1 WBUF A IB1 WBUF e IB 2 INPUT B 6 5 DW 2 2 WBUF B IB2 WBUF 699 IB3 INPUT C 6 5 DW 3 IB3 WBUF C IB3 WBUF WBUF Adds PCALL 2 to the block being edited Requests the value of A Data window 1 shows the entered value Adds A entered value to the block being edited Adds to the block being edite
188. E Within the block syntax a tool offset has been called upon which is greater than the ones allowed by the manufacturer SOLUTION Program a new smaller tool offset 0186 There is C axis DETECTED While editing or executing programs via DNC CAUSE An attempt has been made to activate the C axis but the machine does not have a C axis 0187 G66 G68 G69 not allowed when machining with C axis DETECTED While executing CAUSE An attempt has been made to execute a canned cycle G66 G67 or G68 while the C axis is active SOLUTION To operate with these cycle deactivate the C axis 0188 Function not possible from PLC DETECTED During execution CAUSE From the PLC channel and using the CNCEX instruction an attempt has been made to execute a function that is incompatible with the PLC channel execution SOLUTION The installation manual chapter 11 1 2 offers a list of the functions and instructions that may be executed through the PLC channel 0189 There is no live tool DETECTED While editing or executing programs via DNC CAUSE An attempt has been made to start the live tool M45 S but the machine does not have a live tool 0194 Repositioning not allowed DETECTED During execution CAUSE The axes cannot be repositioned using the REPOS instruction because the subroutine has not been activated with one of the interruption inputs SOLUTION Before executing t
189. ED While editing at the CNC or while executing a program transmitted via DNC CAUSE While programming in high level language the ERROR instruction has been programmed but the error number to be displayed is missing SOLUTION Remember that the programming format for this instruction is ERROR integer error message Although it can also be programmed as follows ERROR integer ERROR error message 0081 Incorrect expression DETECTED While editing at the CNC or while executing a program transmitted via DNC CAUSE While programming in high level language an expression has been edited with the wrong format SOLUTION Correct the block syntax 0082 Incorrect operation DETECTED While editing at the CNC or while executing a program transmitted via DNC CAUSE S The various causes might be 1 While programming in high level language the assignment of a value to a parameter is incomplete 2 While programming in high level language the call to a subroutine is incomplete SOLUTION Correct complete the format to assign a value to a parameter or a call to a subroutine 0083 Incomplete operation DETECTED While editing at the CNC or while executing a program transmitted via DNC CAUSE S While programming in high level language the IF instruction has been edited without the condition between brackets SOLUTION Remember that the programming format for this instruction are IF condition lt action1 gt
190. END Data capture Data capture Data capture Data capture The data capture in the execution of the trace in this program takes place At the beginning of each PRG cycle Every time the periodic cycle PE is executed every 5 milliseconds 3 times while executing the PRG module Once while executing the PE module This way by means of the TRACE instruction the data capture can be done any time especially at those program points considered more critical This instruction must only be used when debugging the PLC program and it should be avoided once the PLC program is fully debugged Page 32 Chapter 9 PLC Section LOGICANALYZER 9 10 3 2 MODES OF OPERATION The way the data is captured depends on the type of trigger selected This section describes the different types of trigger being used as well as the way the data capture is done in each case Trigger Before Trigger after Trigger center Trigger by Default The data capture begins as soon as the selected trigger condition is met that is when the trigger line shown at the information window changes its color The trace will be completed when the trace buffer is full or when the user interrupts it with the STOP TRACE softkey If interrupted before the trigger occurs the trace will be empty The data capture begins the instant the user presses the EXECUTE TRACE softkey The trace will be comp
191. ER Rn 3 11 3 Leadsctew eror compensation tables 4 11 4 Cross compensation tablen 2 quce ate orte ibo Fo on RS 5 11 5 Opergtion wit parameter 4D e iui uie bee bei MU 6 12 DIAGNOSIS T21 RR NRE 2 IP MEI UO cre AIO C NR 2 ILIO Solve COUT eret 3 12 2 uns c rr MTM m 4 153 halo TT 5 12 4 lu SI P EA E E E 5 Dh EA E acis abb Dan EM M OUR 5 12 6 E E O D T A A T A O A E E tad 5 12 7 Tnterestine M 6 VERSION HISTORY T LATHE MODEL Date December 1999 Software Version 4 0x AFFECTED MANUAL AND CHAPTERS Portuguese language Tangential control PLC user registers from R1 to R499 CNC status screen Hard Disk HD Installation manual Installation manual Programming manual Installation manual Programming manual Operating manual Installation manual Chap 3 Chap 9 Chap 10 Appendix Chap 6 Chap 11 Appendix Chap 6 Chap 7 Appendix Chap 11 Chap 8 Chap 1 Chap 3 Appendix Diagnosis of the HD Operating manual Chap 12 Integrate the HD in an external PC network Consult directories delete rename and copy programs in
192. ES LONGITUDINAL THREADCUTTING G86 If K has been defined itis a thread repair cycle Itindicates the angular spindle position corresponding to the thread measuring point Basic operation X TPOSIOS 1 Rapid move G00 to the approach point located at a safety distance D from the initial point Z X 2 Threading loop The following steps will be repeated until the finishing coordinate is reached programmed depth minus the finishing stock L 2 1 Rapid move G00 to the programmed depth indicated by B This move will be made according to the penetration angle of the selected tool A 2 2 Performs the threading of the programmed section with the selected exit J Neither can the feedrate F be altered with the Feedrate Override Switch nor the spindle speed S by means of the spindle speed override keys while threading They will be kept at 100 2 3 Withdrawal in rapid G00 to the approach point 3 Thread finishing Rapid move G00 to the programmed depth coordinate 7 This move will beradialoraccording to the tool penetration angle A which depends on the sign assigned to parameter L Chapter 9 Section Page CANNEDCYCLES LONGITUDINAL 47 THREADCUTTING G86 4 Itthreads the programmed section with the selected exit J Neither can the feedrate F be altered with the Feedrate Override Switch nor the spindle speed S by me
193. ES PATTERNREPEAT 3 CANNED CYCLE G66 S4 Defines the label number of the first block describing the geometry of the profile EA Defines the label number of the last block describing the geometry of the profile Q6 Defines the number of the program containing the geometry description of the profile This parameteris optional and if notset the CNC interprets that the profile is defined within the same program that contains the cycle Basic operation Inthose cases when the programmed profile cannot be machined valleys with the selected tool a warning message will be displayed at the beginning of the cycle execution 4 The operator will be able to stop the execution and select the proper tool Ifhe she doesn t do that anew profile is calculated in the areas that are not accessible for the selected tool and the CNC machines as far as itis possible The message will remain displayed during the whole machining process Once the profile to be executed has been calculated the CNC will calculate all the passes required to eliminate the programmed residual stock T The whole machining operation will be performed in whatever 05 or G07 that was active when calling the cycle When not programming parameter M the passes will be the same maintaining the C distance between 2 consecutive passes Also if the last section of the profile is an arc or an incline plane the CNC will calculate the different
194. ET Examples Application of the scaling factor to the Z axis working with tool radius compensation X As can be observed the tool path does not coincide with the required path as the scaling factor is applied to the calculated movement Page Chapter 7 Section 12 ADDITIONALPREPARATORY FUNCTIONS SCALINGFACTOR G72 However if a scaling factor equal to 360 21 is applied to a rotary axis being the radius of the cylinder on which you wish to machine this axis can be considered linear and any figure with tool radius compensation can be programmed on the cylindrical surface Chapter 7 Section Page ADDITIONALPREPARATORY FUNCTIONS SCALINGFACTOR G72 13 Programming example with the X axis in diameter assuming that the radius ofthe cylinder is R20 Scaling Factor to be applied 360 2qR 2 86 Gl6 ZC G90 G42 601 770 CO Positionatinitial point G9 X 4 Penetration G72 C2 86 Scaling Factor G90 G36 R5 C45 G36 R5 7130 C90 G36 R5 112 5 G36 R5 7190 C157 5 G36 R5 202 5 G36 R5 7130 C247 5 G36 R5 C270 G36 R5 Z70 C315 G36 R5 C360 G9 X4 Withdrawal G72 Cl Cancel Scaling Factor M30 Page Chapter 7 Section 14 ADDITIONALPREPARATORY FUNCTIONS SCALING FACTOR G72 7 7 SLAVED AXIS CANCELLATION OF SLAVED AXIS The CNC enables two or more axes to be coupled together The movement of all axes is subordinated to the movement of the
195. ETECTED While executing CAUSE The rounding radius has not been defined SOLUTION Program a rounding radius other than zero No negative safety distance permitted in this cycle DETECTED While executing CAUSE A negative safety distance has been defined SOLUTION Rounding canned cycles require a positive safety distance Errors in the threading cycle GEOMETRY Value of Zi Zf DETECTED While executing CAUSE The Z coordinates of the starting and end points are the same SOLUTION The Z coordinates of the starting and end points must be different THREADING Value of T 0 DETECTED While executing CAUSE No tool number has been defined SOLUTION tool number must be other than zero THREADING Value of Sz0 DETECTED While executing CAUSE The spindle speed S has not been programmed SOLUTION Program a positive spindle speed S other than zero THREADING Value of P 0 DETECTED While executing CAUSE The thread pitch has not been programmed SOLUTION Program a thread pitch greater than zero THREADING Value of H 0 DETECTED While executing CAUSE The depth of the thread has not been defined SOLUTION Program a thread depth other than zero THREADING Value of Az0 DETECTED While executing CAUSE The cutting depth pass has not been defined A SOLUTION Program a pass greater than zero THREADING Value of o gt Zf Zi DETECTED While executing CAUSE The distance to the end of th
196. Editor mode of operation It indicates how to create user defined pages screens and symbols to create user screens Itshows how to use user pages in customizing programs how to display a user page on power up and how to activate user pages from the PLC Chapter 11 Machine Parameters Description of the Machine Parameters mode of operation It is possible to access and operate with the tables for Machine parameters miscellaneous M functions leadscrew errorcompensation and cross compensation Chapter 12 Diagnosis Description of the Diagnosis mode of operation Itis possible to know the CNC configuration and run a system test Introduction 7 1 OVERVIEW In this manual an explanation is given of how to operate the CNC by means of its Monitor Keyboard unit and the Operator Panel The Monitor Keyboard unit consists of The Monitor or CRT screen which is used to show the required system information The Keyboard which allows communication with the CNC allowing information to be requested by means of commands or by changing the CNC status by generating new instructions 1 1 PART PROGRAMS Editing To create a part program access the Edit mode See chapter 5 in this manual The new part program edited is stored in the CNC s RAM memory A copy of the part programs may be stored in the MemKey Card at a PC connected through serial line 1 or 2 or in the hard disk HD module See chapter 7 in this manual
197. G functions allowed in the block DETECTED While editing at the CNC or while executing a program transmitted via DNC CAUSE A G function has been programmed after the machining conditions or after the tool data SOLUTION Remember that the programming order is 1 Block skip conditional block 1 2 or 3 2 Label N 3 G functions 4 Axes coordinates X Y Z 5 Machining conditions F S T D 6 M functions All the data need not be programmed 0010 No more M functions allowed in the block DETECTED While editing at the CNC or while executing a program transmitted via DNC CAUSE More than 7 M functions have been programmed in a block SOLUTION CNC does not let program more than 7 M functions in a block To do so write them in a separate block The M functions may go alone in a block 0011 This G or M function must be alone DETECTED While editing at the CNC or while executing a program transmitted via DNC CAUSE The block contains either a G or an M function that must go alone in the block SOLUTION Write it alone in the block 0012 Program F S T D before the M functions DETECTED While editing at the CNC or while executing a program transmitted via DNC CAUSE A machining condition F S or tool data T D has been programmed after the M functions SOLUTION Remember that the programming order is F S T D M Up to 7 M
198. H LEVELLANGUAGE VARIABLESFOR ZEROOFFSETS Read write variables ORG X C n This variable allows the value of the selected axis to be read or modified on the table corresponding to the indicated zero offset n 110 55 Assigns the value of X to parameter P1100nthe table corresponding to zero offset G55 ORGY 54 P111 Assigns the value of parameter P111 to the Y axis on the table corresponding to G54 zero offset PLCOF X C This variable allows the value of the selected axis to be read or modified on the additive zero offset table indicated by the PLC Ifany of the PLCOF X C variables are accessed block preparation is interrupted and the CNC waits for this command to be executed to begin block preparation again Chapter 11 Section Page PROGRAMMING INHIGH LEVELLANGUAGE VARIABLES FOR 11 MACHINEPARAMETERS 11 2 4 VARIABLES ASSOCIATED WITH MACHINE PARAMETERS Variables associated with machine parameters are read only variables In order to become familiar with the values returned it is advisable to consult the installation and start up manual Values 1 0 correspond to the parameters which are defined with YES NO and ON OFF The coordinates and feedrate values are given in the active units If G70 in inches Max 3937 00787 If G71 in millimeters Max 99999 9999 If rotary in degrees Max 99999 9999 Read only variables MPGn MP X C n MPSn MPSSn MPASn
199. K instruction has not been respected SOLUTION Correct the syntax of the block The programming format is SK1 text 1 SK2 text 2 If the character is entered after a text the CNC expects the name of another softkey 0098 Program softkeys 1 thru 7 DETECTED While executing in the user channel CAUSE In the block syntax a softkey has been programmed out of the 1 to 7 range SOLUTION Only softkeys within the 1 to 7 range can be programmed ERROR TROUBLESHOOTING MANUAL 1 5 8055T CNC FAGOR 0099 Program another window DETECTED While editing at the CNC or while executing a program transmitted via DNC CAUSE While editing a customizing program the programming format for the DW instruction has not been respected SOLUTION Correct the syntax of the block The programming format is DW1 assignment DW2 assignment If the character is entered after an assignment the CNC expects the name of another window 0100 Program windows 0 thru 25 DETECTED While executing in the user channel CAUSE In the block syntax a window has been programmed out of the 0 to 25 range SOLUTION Only windows within the 0 to 25 range can be programmed 0101 Program rows 0 thru 20 DETECTED While executing in the user channel CAUSE In the block syntax a row has been programmed out of the 0 to 20 range SOLUTION Only rows within the 0 to 20 range can be programmed 0102 Pro
200. LC tables have the following structure PARAMETER P000 POOL P002 P003 P004 P005 P006 P007 P008 P009 P010 P011 P012 P013 P014 P015 THEODPLY P016 GRAPHICS P017 P018 P019 CAP INS MM GJ G9 Where the parameter number is indicated the value assigned to it and the name or mnemonic associated with this parameter Page Chapter 11 Section 2 MACHINE PARAMETERS MACHINEPARAMETER TABLES 11 2 MISCELLANEOUS FUNCTION TABLES The table corresponding to the miscellaneous M functions has the following structure M FUNCTION TABLE 11 50 14 Miscellaneous Function Customizing bits 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 CAP INS MM MODIFY DELETE ed Gd Cd e 5 The number of M functions in the table is defined by means of the general machine parameter NMISCFUN The following is defined for each line The number 0 9999 of the defined miscellaneous M functions If an M function is not defined the CNC will show M The number of the subroutine to be associated with this miscellaneous function 8customizing bits x x Bit 0 Bit 1 Bit 2 Bit 3 Bit 4 X xx xxx 543210 Indicates whether the CNC must 20 or must not 21 wait for the signal AUXEND signal of the M executed to resume program execution Indicates whether the M function i
201. LE 11 50 14 LENGTH X LENGTHZ TYPE ZWEAR e COOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOQO CcOOOOOOOOOOOOOoooooo QOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOoOo QU CU VOR CU PU CU RU CU GU 2 COOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOoco COOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOooco CcOOOOOOOOOoooooooooo OOooooooooooooooooooo OOoooooooooooooooooo DO D DO D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D ooooooooooo o oo9 OOO OOOD Coto OOD CAP INS MM MODIFY DELETE Pre el eT C The end of this chapter describes how to edit this table Each tool offset has several fields defining the tool dimensions These fields are Tool length along the X and Z axes In radius Tool radius Tool length wear along the X axis Itis given in diameters The CNC will add this value to the nominal length along the X axis in order to calculate its real length XI Tool length wear K along the Z axis Itis given in diameters and in the work units indicated by the general machine parameter INCHES Its format is 5 5 The CNC will add this value to the nominal length along the Z axis in order to calculate its real length Z I Page Chapter
202. LL 000002 PCALL 000002 PCALL 000002 PCALL 000002 PCALL 000002 CALL 0101 000002 COMMAND ACTUAL TO GO 00172 871 X 00172 871 00000 000 00004 269 00004 269 00000 000 00011 755 00011 755 00000 000 F00000 0000 96120 S00000 0000 100 T0000 D000 5 0000 RPM 50000 M MIN G00 G17 G54 PARTC 000000 CY TIME 00 00 00 00 TIMER 000000 00 00 CAP INS BLOCK STOP DISPLAY MDI TOOL GRAPHICS SINGLE SELECTION CONDITION SELECTION INSPECTIO BLOCK Page 10 Chapter 3 Section EXECUTE SIMULATE DISPLAYSELECTION Information on the subroutines which are active NS Indicates the nesting level 1 15 which the subroutine occupies NP Indicates the level of local parameters 1 6 in which the subroutine is executed SUBROUTINE Indicates the type of block which has caused a new nesting level Examples RPT N10 N20 CALL 25 PCALL 30 G87 REPT Indicates the number of times which remain to be executed Forexample if RPT N10 N20 is programmed andis the first time that it is being executed this parameter will show a value of 4 M If an asterisk is shown this indicates that a Modal subroutine is active in this nesting level and this is executed after each movement PROG Indicates the program number where the subroutine is defined The axis coordinates in real or theoretical values according to the setting of the THEODPLY machine parameter and in the format determined by the axis machine pa
203. N The length of the slot must be other than zero FAGOR 62 ERROR TROUBLESHOOTING MANUAL FAGOR aj 8055T CNC NOTES ERROR TROUBLESHOOTING MANUAL 63 8055T CNC NOTES FAGOR 64 ERROR TROUBLESHOOTING MANUAL 8055T CNC FAGOR ALPHABETICAL INDEX axis cannot be symehronizetd ttr ri 42 axis feedback Gol Luise trn trait tiennent knit ase 45 axis following error limit overrun 43 axis hard limit overrun VOBIS OCKO axis maximum feed 42 axis range exceeded T TAAS SINO ONON TREE axis soft linit OVOeFFU 43 axis work zone 1 overrun axis work zone 2 43 axis work zone 3 ccsscncssecscerstnecsnesenescneceneseneseneate 44 axis work zone 4 overrun 2nd spindle drive erbe tertie iere detti be dae 50 A A self intersecting contour has been programmed 34 A subroutine is not allowed for automatic range change A tool change has been programmed without MO6 Access to a variable with non permitted index Analog inputs ANAI 1 8 5 Volts m
204. NC as wellastesting thesystem The CNC offers the following softkey options System Configuration Hardware test Memory test Flash memory test User Hard disk Chapter 12 Section Page DIAGNOSIS 12 1 CONFIGURATION This option shows the current system configuration Once this option has been chosen two new softkeys will appear in order to select the hardware configuration or the software configuration of the system 12 1 1 HARDWARE CONFIGURATION This option shows the system configuration displaying the following information DIAGNOSIS 11 50 14 CONFIGURATION OF THE CNC CPU Power supply CPU CNC 25 Sercos module Axes module Input output module 1 Input output module 2 Digital Video CNC RESOURCES PLC RESOURCES RAM Memory kb PLC integrated into CPU CNC User 1024 System 1024 Memory card A Flash 4092 CAP INS MM HARDWARE SOFTWARE CONFIG CONFIG Ee 3 Cn CONFIGURATION OF THE CENTRAL UNIT Itindicatesthe modules making up the new configuration of the central unit of the CNC The numbers which appear in brackets next to some of the modules and options indicate the logic address assigned to each of them CNC RESOURCES It indicates the RAM memory in Kb available for the system and for the user It also indicates the memory of the Memkey Card in Kb
205. NC sets all the fields to 0 To delete a line indicate its number and press ENTER To delete several lines indicate the beginning press the UP TO softkey indicate the last line to be deleted and press ENTER To delete all the lines press the ALL softkey The CNC requests confirmation of the command INITIALIZE It deletes all the data of the table by setting them all to 0 The CNC requests confirmation of the command LOAD The tables may be loaded from the Memkey Card CARD A ora peripheral device or a PC through the two serial communications lines RS232C or RS422 The transmission starts after pressing the corresponding softkey When using a serial line the receptor must be ready before starting the transmission To interrupt the transmission press the ABORT softkey If the length of the table received does not coincide with the current table length the CNC will act as follows If the table received is shorter than the current one the received lines are modified and the rest remain with their previous values If the table received is longer than the current one all the lines of the table are modified and when detecting that there is no more room the CNC will issue the corresponding error message Page 16 Chapter 6 Section TABLES HOW TOEDITTABLES SAVE The tables may be saved into the Memkey Card CARD A or out to a peripheral device or PC through the two serial lines
206. NC will display the softkeys for the following options EDIT See section 4 1 To edit new lines in the selected program MODIFY See section 4 2 To modify an existing line of the program FIND See section 4 3 To search a string of characters within a program REPLACE See section 4 4 To replace a string of characters with another DELETE BLOCK See section 4 5 To delete a block or group of blocks MOVE BLOCK See section 4 6 To move a block or group of blocks within a program COPY BLOCK See section 4 7 To copy a block or group of blocks to another program position COPY TO PROGRAM See section 4 8 To copy a block or group of blocks into a different program INCLUDE PROGRAM See section 4 9 To insert the contents of another program into the one currently selected EDITOR PARAMETERS See section 4 10 To select the editing parameters automatic numbering and axes for Teach in editing Chapter 4 Section Page EDIT 1 4 1 EDIT With this option it is possible to edit new lines or blocks of the selected program Select with the cursor the block after which the new ones will be added and press the softkey corresponding to one of the available editing modes CNG LANGUAGE 255 See section 4 1 1 The program is edited in ISO code or high level language TEACH FIN eh See section 4 1 2 The machine is jogged to the desired posi
207. NITORING 15 ACTIVATE DEACTIVATE SYMBOLS With this option it is possible to display in all available windows the symbols or mnemonics associated to the various resources The names of the resources may be displayed in two ways using their generic names I O M T C R by deactivating symbols or using their associated symbols by activating them When a resource has no mnemonic associated to it it will always be displayed with its generic name This softkey will toggle between ACTIVATE SYMBOL and DEACTIVATE SYMBOL every time is pressed in order to show which option is available LOGIC ANALYZER Itis especially suited to help in the machine startup and for troubleshooting errors and critical situations in signal behavior START PLC When selecting this option the CNC will start executing the PLC program from the beginning including the CY1 cycle The CNC will ignore this command when it is already executing the PLC program FIRST CYCLE When selecting this option the CNC will execute only the initial cycle of the PLC program CY 1 The CNC will ignore this command when it is already executing the PLC program SINGLE CYCLE When selecting this option the CNC will execute the main cycle of the PLC program PRG only once The CNC will ignore this command when it is already executing the PLC program STOP PLC This softkey interrupts the execution of the PLC program CONTINUE This softkey resumes the execu
208. NNED CYCLES 9 1 Patter repeat canned Gyele s cisciasijeesediannmesianameaionamne nenseainenmemmnnedenests 2 9 2 G68 Stock removal cycle along X axis Lees sarete Ia pe atre ad AE Ela ta ARE eda 9 9 3 169 Stock removal canned cycle along Z Bxis 1 esee eee tein sd 17 9 4 G81 Turning canned cycle with straight sections 26 182 Facing canned cycle with straight Sections 30 9 6 G83 Axial drilling and tapping canned cycle esee 34 9 7 G84 Tumming canned cycle with 68 eiecti 36 9 8 G85 Facing canned Cycle with GIGS ERI 40 9 9 G86 Longitudinal threadeutting canned Cycle 44 9 10 187 Face treadcuotiing canned cycle Re pla 49 9 11 G88 Grooving canned eycle along the X AXIS i esce aerei ipee debi 54 9 12 G89 Grooving canned cycle along the Z axis esee 56 9 13 58 9 14 GOI Radial tapping Hd ve bb EU Ed 61 9 15 G62 Longitudinal slot milling 65 9 16 G63 slot mulling Cyele CHASE
209. OGICANALYZER CursorOffset Indicates the time difference in milliseconds between the cursor position green line and the trigger position red line Trigger Type Indicates the type of trigger selected The texts shown and their meanings are the following Before The trigger is positioned at the beginning of the trace After The trigger is positioned at the end of the trace Center The trigger is positioned at the center of the trace Default When no trigger condition has been specified Editing window Itisthe standard CNC editing window It is used for all the processes requiring data entry Message window The CNC uses this window to display a warning or error message Chapter 9 Section Page PLC LOGICANALYZER 25 9 10 2 SELECTION OF VARIABLES AND TRIGGER CONDITIONS Before requesting a trace it is necessary to define the variables to be analyzed the trigger type and conditions and the time base to be used to display the captured data To do this the following softkey options are available VARIABLE SELECTION TRIGGER CONDITION and TIME BASE 9 10 21 VARIABLE SELECTION With this option it is possible to select up to 8 variables to be analyzed later It displays a cursor over the variable area and it can be slid up and down by means of the up and down arrow keys The following softkey options will appear EDIT With this option itis possible to edit a new variable or modify on
210. OGRAMMINGINHIGH LEVELLANGUAGE VARIABLES FOR 15 FEEDRATES 11 2 7 VARIABLES ASSOCIATED WITH COORDINATES The values for each axis are given in the active units If G70 in inches Max 3937 00787 If in millimeters Max 99999 9999 If rotary in degrees Max 99999 9999 Read only variables PPOS X C POS X C TPOS X C FLWE X C Returns the programmed theoretical coordinate of the selected axis P100 PPOSX assigns to P100 the programmed theoretical position of the X axis Returns the real coordinate of the selected axis referred to machine reference zero home Returns the theoretical coordinate real following error of the selected axis referred to machine reference zero home Returns the amount of following error of the selected axis The coordinate values returned by PPOS X C POS X C and TPOS X C will be expressed in the active units radius or diameter set by axis machine parameter DFORMAT When accessing one of these variables POS X C TPOS X C and FLWE X C block preparation is interrupted and the CNC waits for that command to be executed before resuming block preparation Read write variables DIST X C LIMPL X C LIMMI X C These variables allow the distance travelled by the selected axis to be read or modified This value is accumulative is expressed in format 5 5 and is very useful when it is required to perform an operation which depends on the
211. OL RADIUSBLEND 17 G36 I 1 10 50 G90 X20 760 G01 G36 R10 X80 G02 X60 710 120 K 30 G02 G36 R10 X60 Z50 R28 X60 Z10 R28 90 Page 18 Chapter 6 PATHCONTROL Section RADIUSBLEND G36 6 11 AUTOMATIC CHAMFER BLEND G39 In machining operations itis possible using G39 to chamfer corners between two straight lines without having to calculate intersection points Function G39 is not modal so it should be programmed whenever the chamfering of a corner is required This function should be programmed in the block in which the movement whose end you want to chamfer is defined The R5 5 value should always follow G39 It also indicates the distance from the end of the programmed movementas far as the point where you wish to carry out the chamfering This R value must always be positive Example with X axis programmed in diameter G90 X20 Z80 G01 639 R10 X80 760 100 710 Chapter 6 Section Page PATHCONTROL AUTOMATICCHAMFER 19 BLEND G39 6 12 ELECTRONIC THREAD CUTTING G33 Ifthe spindle has a rotary encoder itis possible to make threads with a cutter by means of function G33 Although this threading is often done along the entire length of an axis the CNC enables threading to be done interpolating more than one axis at a time Programming forma
212. ON In order to make a path tangent to a previous one there must be information about the previous path and it must be in the 48 blocks prior to the tangent path 1010 Wrong plane in tangential path DETECTED During execution CAUSE A plane change has been programmed between the definition of the Arc tangent to previous path G08 function and the previous path SOLUTION The plane change cannot be done between both paths 1011 The radius has not been programmed for 115 DETECTED While executing CAUSE The Z C plane has been selected but the radius of the cylinder to be machined has not been defined SOLUTION work in the 2 plane first the radius of the cylinder to be machined must be defined with function G15 R 1015 Tool not defined in tool table DETECTED During execution CAUSE A tool change has been defined but the new tool is not defined in the tool table SOLUTION Define the new tool in the tool table 1016 The tool is not in the tool magazine DETECTED During execution CAUSE A tool change has been defined but the new tool is not defined in any table position of the tool magazine SOLUTION Define the new tool in the tool magazine table 30 ERROR TROUBLESHOOTING MANUAL Hicon 3 8055T CNC 1017 There is no empty pocket in the tool magazine DETECTED CAUSE SOLUTION During execution A tool change has been defined but there isn t any pockets
213. P103 Therefore P103 5 The message displayed by the CNC will be SELECT T5 AND PRESS CYCLE START Returns the program number being executed Should none be selected a value of 1 is returned Returns the label number of the last block executed Returns the status of the G function indicated n 1 if it is active and 0 if not P120 GS17 assigns the value 1 to parameter P120 if the G17 function is active and O if not Returns the status of the M function indicated n 1 if itis active and O if not This variable provides the status of M00 M01 M02 M03 M04 MOS M06 M08 M09 M19 M30 M41 M42 M43 M44 and M45 functions Chapter 11 Section Page PROGRAMMINGINHIGH LEVELLANGUAGE OTHERVARIABLES 31 PLANE MIRROR SCALE SCALE X C PRBST CLOCK Returns data on the abscissa axis bits 4 to 7 and the ordinate axis bits 0 to 3 of the active plane in 32 bits and in binary 7654 3210 LSB L Ordinateaxis Abscissa axis The axes are coded in 4 bits and indicate the axis number according to the programming order Example Ifthe CNC controls the X Y Z U B C axes and is selected in the ZX plane G18 P122 PLANE assigns value 31 to parameter P122 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0011 0001 LSB Returns in the least significant bits in a group of 32 bits the status of the mirror imag
214. PARAMETERS Initialize ENTER ESC echk_cax CHECKSUM ERROR AUX SPINDLE PARAMETERS Initialize ENTER ESC echk_rs1 CHECKSUM ERROR SERIAL LINE 1 PARAMETERS Initialize ENTER ESC echk_rs2 CHECKSUM ERROR SERIAL LINE 2 PARAMETERS Initialize ENTER ESC echk plc CHECKSUM ERROR PLC PARAMETERS Initialize ENTER ESC DETECTED While starting the CNC up CAUSE Data lost in the tables Possible RAM error SOLUTION By pressing ENTER the tables are loaded with default values If the error persists contact the Service Department echk_org CHECKSUM ERROR ZERO OFFSET TABLE Initialize ENTER ESC echk_psw CHECKSUM ERROR PASSWORD TABLE Initialize ENTER ESC DETECTED While starting the CNC up CAUSE Data lost in the tables Possible RAM error SOLUTION By pressing ENTER the tables are loaded with default values If the error persists contact the Service Department echk ejex CHECKSUM ERROR AXIS X PARAMETERS Initialize ENTER ESC echk ejey CHECKSUM ERROR AXIS Y PARAMETERS Initialize ENTER ESC echk ejez CHECKSUM ERROR AXIS Z PARAMETERS Initialize ENTER ESC echk ejeu CHECKSUM ERROR AXIS U PARAMETERS Initialize ENTER ESC echk ejev CHECKSUM ERROR AXIS V PARAMETERS Initialize ENTER ESC echk ejew CHECKSUM ERROR AXIS W PARAMETERS Initialize ENTER ESC echk ejea CHECKSUM ERROR AXIS A PARAMETERS Initialize ENTER ESC echk ejeb CHECKSUM ERROR AXIS B PARAMETERS Initial
215. Press a key DETECTED While starting the CNC up or during diagnosis CAUSE A RAM memory problem has been detected at the SERCOS chip SOLUTION Change the SERCOS board Contact the Service Department 2028 SERCOS chip version Error Press key DETECTED While starting the CNC up CAUSE The SERCOS chip version is old SOLUTION Change the SERCOS chip Contact the Service Department ERROR TROUBLESHOOTING MANUAL 47 8055T CNC FAGOR 2 PLC ERRORS 3000 ERR without description DETECTED During execution CAUSE Marks ERR1 through ERR64 have been set to 1 SOLUTION Check why these marks set to 1 in the PLC program and act accordingly 3001 WATCHDOG in Main Module PRG DETECTED At any time CAUSE S The probable causes might be 1 The main PLC program execution takes longer than the time period set by PLC parameter WAGPRG PO 2 The program is in a loop SOLUTION Increase the time period of PLC parameter WAGPRG PO or increase the PLC processing speed Insert the CPU TURBO Change the PLC parameter CPUTIME P26 or general parameter LOOPTIME P72 3002 WATCHDOG in Periodic Module PE DETECTED Atany time CAUSE S The probable causes might be 1 The periodic PLC program execution takes longer than the time period set by PLC parameter WAGPER P1 2 The program is in a loop SOLUTION Increase the time period of PLC parameter WAGPER P1 or
216. ROSS COMP TABLE 2 CHECKSUM ERROR CROSS COMP TABLE 3 x CHECKSUM ERROR LEADSCREW TABLE CHECKSUM ERROR M FUNCTION TABLE CHECKSUM ERROR MAGAZINE TABLE CHECKSUM ERROR PASSWORD TABLE CHECKSUM ERROR PLC PARAMETERS CHECKSUM ERROR SERIAL LINE 1 PARAMETERS CHECKSUM ERROR SERIAL LINE 2 PARAMETERS CHEGKSUM ERROR TOOL OFFSET TABLE s CHECKSUM ERROR TOOL TABLE a CHECKSUM ERROR ZERO OFFSET TABLE areis xut ORG FOIS abe act tcs acd ak d Circular helical interpolation not possible 24 Circular path programmed 39 EPROM memory error eessssssssssseeeees 46 CNC RAM memory error CNC system RAM memory error Press any key 46 Compensation plane change Compensation radius too large Gompas o MET TT T 26 Coupled axis following error difference too large 43 D Division by zero in PUG Laici rar tears 48 JE eugoge p 14 Do not modify the active tool or the next 19 Do not program Q with parameter M19TYPE 0 De n t propram a GANTRY axis wcrc essence 1
217. RS232C or RS422 The transmission starts after pressing the corresponding softkey When using a serial line the receptor must be ready before starting the transmission To interrupt the transmission press the ABORT softkey MM INCHES It toggles the display units for the data The lower right hand side window shows the units selected MM INCH Chapter 6 TABLES Section HOW TOEDIT TABLES Page 17 UTILITIES In this operating mode one can access the programs stored in the CNC s RAM memory inthe Memkey Card CARD A in the hard disk HD and in external devices through the serial lines 1 and 2 They can be deleted renamed or their protection changed Itis also possible to make copies within the same device or from one to another 7 1 DIRECTORY To access the program directory of the CNC s RAM memory the Memkey Card CARD A the hard disk HD and of the external devices through serial lines 1 and 2 The subroutine directory of the CNC can also be accessed Program directory By default the CNC shows the program directory of the RAM memory to view another directory press the corresponding softkey UTILITIES 11 50 14 PROGRAM COMMENT DATE ATTRIBUTH 00001 P000002 P000003 P000010 P000012 P000111 P000112 P000200 P000662 P009999 P022463 PLC ERR PLC MSG PLC PRG MOLDE 1 lt SUBRUTINAS CNC gt lt MOLDE 3 lt gt UARIO EDI
218. Read write variables TIMER PARTC KEY KEYSRC ANAOn This variable allows time in seconds indicated by the clock enabled by the PLC to be read or modified Possible values 0 4294967295 If this variable is accessed block preparation is interrupted and the CNC waits for this command to be executed to resume block preparation The CNC has a part counter whose count increases every time M30 or M02 is executed and this variable allows it value to be read or modified which will be given by a number between 0 and 4294967295 If this variable is accessed block preparation is interrupted and the CNC waits for this command to be executed to resume block preparation Returns the code of the last key accepted If this variable is accessed block preparation is interrupted and the CNC waits for this command to be executed to resume block preparation This variable allows the origin of keys to be read or modified possible values being 0 Keyboard 1 PLC 2 DNC The CNC only allows modification of this variable if this is at 0 This variable allows the required analog output n to be modified The value assigned will be expressed in volts and in the 2 4 format 10 Volts The analog outputs which are free among the eight 1 8 available atthe CNC may be modified the corresponding error being displayed if an attempt is made to write in an occupied one If this variable is accessed block preparation is interr
219. SIN ACOS range exceeded DETECTED While editing at the CNC or while executing a program transmitted via DNC CAUSE An operation has been programmed which involves calculating the arcsine or arccosine of a number out of the 1 range SOLUTION Only the arcsine ASIN or arccosine ACOS of numbers between 1 can be calculated When working with parameters that parameter may have already acquired a negative value or zero Check that the parameter does not reach the operation with that value 0095 Program row number DETECTED While editing at the CNC or while executing a program transmitted via DNC CAUSE While editing a customizing program a window has been programmed with the ODW instruction but the vertical position of the window on the screen is missing SOLUTION vertical position of the window on the screen is defined by rows 0 25 0096 Program column number DETECTED While editing at the CNC or while executing a program transmitted via DNC CAUSE While editing a customizing program a window has been programmed with the ODW instruction but the horizontal position of the window on the screen is missing SOLUTION horizontal position of the window on the screen is defined by columns 0 79 0097 Program another softkey DETECTED While editing at the CNC or while executing a program transmitted via DNC CAUSE While editing a customizing program the programming format for the S
220. Section 10 AXESANDCOORDINATESYSTEMS PROGRAMMINGOF COORDINATES 3 5 3 ANGLE AND ONE CARTESIAN COORDINATE A point on the main plane can be defined via one of its cartesian coordinates and the exit angle of the previous path Example with X axis programming in radius TP039 X0 Z160 Q90 X30 0149 7110 QI80 X80 0146 3 Z50 Q90 X100 If you wish to represent a point in space the remaining coordinates can be programmed in cartesian coordinates 50 80 146 30 1800 110 160 Point PO Point P1 Point P2 Point P3 Point P4 Point P5 Chapter 3 AXESANDCOORDINATESYSTEMS Section PROGRAMMINGOF COORDINATES Page 11 3 6 ROTARY AXES The types of rotary axes available are Normal rotary axis Positioning only rotary axis Hirth rotary axis Each one of them can be divided into Rollover When their position reading goes from 0 to 360 No rollover When their position reading goes from 99999 to 99999 They are all programmed in degrees Therefore their readings are not affected by the inch mm conversion Normal rotary axes They can be interpolated with linear axes Movement in GOO and 01 Rollover axis programming G90 The sign indicates the turning direction and the target position between 0 and 359 9999 G91 The sign indicates the turning direction If the programmed movement exceeds 360 the axis will rotate more than one turn before posit
221. T es tcrtia 40 Point within the forbidden zone 2 40 Point within this forbidden Zone F iiie 41 Point within the forbidden ore 41 Polar coordinates not allowed ii Position only rotary axis Absolute values 0 359 9999 Power bus error 213 215 ecd exhi eibi Preset of rotary axes Values between 0 359 9999 Probe signal has not been received Probing canned cycle not defined sisirin Program columns ORE iocos inet tritus 16 Program A append or D delete ix CP i WEE 299 Mw Program already CRISIS koh eee ase et aa 12 Program another softkey regiam another SII cuius be ect ale a 16 66 ERROR TROUBLESHOOTING MANUAL 8055T CNC FAGOR Programi 8 amp 9 Program cannot be opened Program channel O CNC 1 PLC or 2 DNC 13 Program column pis Program DNC1 2 HD or CARD A optional 24 Program does not nd Program error number 0 thru 9999 13 Program F S T D before the M functions m Program G15 befo
222. TECTED While executing CAUSE No feedrate F has been defined for finishing SOLUTION Program a positive feedrate other than zero FINISHING Value of S 0 DETECTED While executing CAUSE The spindle speed S has not been defined for finishing SOLUTION Program a positive spindle speed S other than zero GEOMETRY Value of Zi Zf DETECTED While executing CAUSE The Z coordinates of the starting and end points are the same SOLUTION 2 coordinates of the starting and end points must be different GEOMETRY Value of X Q DETECTED While executing CAUSE The coordinates of the starting and end diameters are the same SOLUTION The X coordinates of the starting and end diameters must be different from the end diameter FINISHING Wrong stock DETECTED While executing CAUSE The finishing stock is greater than the total machining depth SOLUTION finishing stock must be smaller than the total machining depth Errors in taper cycles Cycle without roughing or finishing DETECTED While executing CAUSE No tool has been selected for roughing or finishing SOLUTION Select the tool for roughing If T 0 there is no roughing and for finishing If T 0 there is no finishing ROUGHING Value of A 0 DETECTED While executing CAUSE The cutting depth pass has not been defined A SOLUTION Program a pass greater than zero ROUGHING Value of Fz0 DETECTED While executing CAUSE The roughing fe
223. TER key to delete this element otherwise the ESC key Should there be several elements in this area the CNC will highlight them in succession and it will ask for confirmation before deleting any of them MOVE SCREEN With this option itis possible to reposition the whole page not its individual elements separately and it can only be used to move pages and not symbols It allows the entire page to be moved with the right left up and down arrow keys The center of the page is taken as a reference for this movement To do this follow these steps 1 The CNC will show the page with the cursor placed in the middle of the screen 2 Move the cursor to the position to place the page reference point Press ESC to quit this option without making any changes and the CNC will show the previous menu Repeatthese steps to perform more moves otherwise press ESC and the CNC will show the previous menu Chapter 10 Section Page SCREENEDITOR MODIFICATIONS 19 1 1 MACHINE PARAMETERS In order for the machine tool to execute the programmed instructions correctly the CNC must know specific data on the machine such as feedrates accelerations feedbacks automatic tool changes etc This data is determined by the manufacturer of the machine and must be stored in the machine parameter tables These tables may be edited in this work mode or copied into the Memkey Card or a PC as described later on The CNC has the foll
224. TINE STATEMENTS Section 12 5 SUB integer Definition of subroutine RET End of subroutine CALL expression Call to subroutine PCALL expression assignment statement assignmentstatement Call to a subroutine Besides allows the initialization by means of assignment mnemonics of up to 26 local parameters of this subroutine MCALL expression assignment statement assignmentstatement The same as PCALL but converting the subroutine indicated into a modal subroutine MDOFF Cancellation of modal subroutine PROBE expression assignment statement assignment statement Executes a probing canned cycle its parameters being initialized by means of assignment statements REPOS X Y Z It must always be used inside interruption subroutines and it facilitates the repositioning of the machine axes to the interruption point 12 PROGRAM STATEMENTS Section 12 6 EXECP expression directory Starts the execution of the program OPEN P expression target directory A D program comment Starts generating anew program and allows it to be associated with a program comment WRITE block text gt Adds the information contained in block text after the last program block of the program which was being generated with OPEN P as anew program block CUSTOMIZING STATEMENTS Section 12 7 PAGE expression Displays the user page n
225. TORPARAMETERS 4 10 2 AXES SELECTION FOR TEACH IN EDITING Remember that in the TEACH IN editing mode the following feature is available When the block being edited has no information editing area empty the ENTER key can be pressed In this case the CNC will generate a new block with the current position values of the axes The option described here permits the selection of the axes whose position values will be automatically entered in said block After pressing the TEACH IN AXES softkey the CNC shows all the axes of the machine The operator must eliminate pressing the corresponding softkeys the axis or axes not desired Every time a softkey is pressed the CNC will eliminate the corresponding axis displaying only the selected ones To end this operation press ENTER The CNC will assume from now on and whenever editing in TEACH IN the selected axes To change those values access this option again and select the new axes Chapter 4 Section Page EDIT EDITORPARAMETERS 25 This mode of operation will be used whenever the manual control of the machine is desired Once this mode of operation is selected the CNC allows the movement of all the axes by means ofthe axes control keys X X Z Z 3 3 4 4 located on the operator panel or by means of the electronic handwheel if available This mode of operation offers the following softkey options 2
226. The green cursor line can be slid right and left along the trace and it can be used to measure the time difference between two of its points The status area is divided in several vertical sections Each of them represents the amount of time established by the time base constant This constant determines the resolution of the logic signals and after being defined by the user can be modified at will The relationship between the time base and the signal resolution is inversely proportional in such way that the smaller the time base the greater the signal resolution is and vice versa Cycle window This window displays a series of vertical lines Each one of them indicates the instant when a new PLC program cycle starts being executed It allows to maintain a relationship between the flow of the logic signals and the duration of each PLC execution cycle Information window This window provides general information about the trace being shown at the time The shown data is the following Trigger It shows the trigger condition set by the user to do the trace Time Base Indicates the time base set by the user and used to show the current trace Trace Status Indicatesthecurrenttrace status The shown texts and their meanings are as follows Empty There is no calculated trace Capturing There is one trace in progress Complete One stored trace is available Page 24 Chapter 9 Section PLC L
227. This will display the error text only The error number may be defined by means of a numerical constant or an arithmetic parameter When using a local parameter its numeric format must be used PO thru P25 instead of A thru Z Programming Examples ERROR 5 ERROR P100 ERROR Operator error ERROR 3 Operator error ERROR P120 Operator error MSG message This statement will display the message indicated between quote marks The CNC screen is provided with an area for displaying DNC or user program messages and always displays the last message received irrespective of where it has come from Example MSG Check tool DGWZ expression 1 expression 2 expression 3 expression 4 The DGWZ instruction Define Graphic Work Zone defines the graphics area Eachexpression forming the instruction syntax correspond to one of the limits and they must be defined in millimeters or inches expression Xminimum expression2 X maximum expression3 Y minimum expression4 Y maximum Page Chapter 12 Section PROGRAM CONTROLSTATEMENTS DISPLAYSTATEMENTS 12 3 ENABLING DISABLING STATEMENTS ESBLK and DSBLK Afterexecuting the mnemonic ESBLK the CNC executes all the blocks which come after as if it were dealing with a single block This single block treatment is kept active until it is cancelled by executing the mnemonic DSBLK In this way should the program be executed in t
228. Tracing G33 Electronic threading G52 Movement against hardstop G74 Home search G75 G76 Probing G95 Feedrate per revolution Function G51 must be programmed alone ina block and there must be no more information in that block On power up after executing an M02 M30 of after an EMERGENCY or RESET the CNC will cancel G51 if it was active and it will assume G05 or G07 according to the setting of general machine parameter ICORNER Page Chapter 7 Section 8 ADDITIONALPREPARATORY FUNCTIONS LOOKAHEAD G51 7 5 MIRROR IMAGE G10 G11 G12 G13 614 G10 G12 G14 cancel mirror image mirror image on X axis mirror image on Y axis mirror image on Z axis mirror image on any axis X C or in several at the same time Examples G14 W GIAXZAB When the CNC works with mirror images itexecutes the movements programmed in the axes which have mirror image selected with the sign changed Example The following subroutine defines the machining of part A G90 G00 X40 Z150 G02 X80 Z110 R60 G01 Z60 X120 Z0 The programming of all parts would be Execution of subroutine machines A G13 mirror image on Z axis M30 end of program Functions G11 G12 G13 and G14 are modal and incompatible with G10 G11 G12 and can be programmed in the same block because they are not incompatible with each other Function G14 must be programmed alone in the
229. UTION Program a positive spindle speed S other than zero Errors in the multiple drilling cycle DRILLING Value of T 0 DETECTED While executing CAUSE No tool number has been defined SOLUTION tool number must be other than zero DRILLING Value of Az0 DETECTED While executing CAUSE The drilling peck has not been defined A SOLUTION Program a drilling peck greater than zero DRILLING Value of L 0 DETECTED While executing CAUSE The drilling depth has not been defined SOLUTION Program a drilling depth other than zero DRILLING Value of Fz0 DETECTED While executing CAUSE The feedrate F has not been defined SOLUTION Program a positive feedrate other than zero FAGOR 60 ERROR TROUBLESHOOTING MANUAL FAGOR 3 8055T CNC DRILLING Value of S 0 DETECTED While executing CAUSE The spindle speed St of the live tool has not been defined SOLUTION Program a positive spindle speed St other than zero MULTIPLE CYCLE Value of 0 DETECTED While executing CAUSE The angular step between operations has not been programmed SOLUTION Program an angular step other than zero MULTIPLE CYCLE Value of N 0 DETECTED While executing CAUSE The number of operations has not been defined SOLUTION The minimum number of machining operations is 1 Errors in the tapping cycle TAPPING Value of T 0 DETECTED While executing CAUSE No tool number has b
230. While editing at the CNC or while executing a program transmitted via DNC CAUSE The various causes might be 1 When trying to move an axis alone while being slaved to another one 2 When trying to slave an axis that is already slaved using the G77 function Electronic axis slaving SOLUTION The solution for each cause is 1 A slaved axis cannot be moved separately To move a slaved axis its master axis must be moved Both axes will move at the same time Example If the Y axis is slaved to the X axis an X axis move must be programmed in order to move the Y axis together with the X axis To unslave the axis program G78 2 An axis cannot be slaved to two different axes at the same time To unslave the axes program G78 0058 Do not program a GANTRY axis DETECTED While editing at the CNC or while executing a program transmitted via DNC CAUSE S The various causes might be 1 When trying to move an axis alone while being slaved to another one as a GANTRY axis 2 When defining an operation on a GANTRY axis Definition of work zone limits planes etc SOLUTION The solution for each cause is 1 A GANTRY axis cannot be moved separately To move a GANTRY axis its associated axis must be moved Both axes will move at the same time Example If the Y axis is a GANTRY axis associated with the X axis an X axis move must be programmed in order to move the Y axis together with the X axis GANTRY axes are defined by m
231. X160 7100 10 0 G02 X160 7120 10 0 The programming of the part would be Execution of subroutine machines 1 G92 Z0 coordinate preset zero offset G72 S0 5 applies scaling factor 0 5 Execution of subroutine machines A2 G72 51 cancels scaling factor M30 end of program Chapter 7 Section Page ADDITIONALPREPARATORY FUNCTIONS SCALING FACTOR G72 11 7 6 2 SCALING FACTOR APPLIED TO ONE OR MORE AXES TP077 The programming format is G72 5 5 After G72 the axis or axes and the required scaling factor are programmed All blocks programmed after G72 are treated by the CNC as follows The CNC calculates the movement of all the axes in relation to the programmed path and compensation It then applies the scaling factor indicated to the calculated movement of the corresponding axis or axes If the scaling factor is applied on one or more axes the CNC will apply the scaling factor indicated both to the movement of the corresponding axis or axes and to their feedrate If within the same program both scaling factor types are applied the one applied to all the axes and the one for one or several axes the CNC applies a scaling factor equal to the product of the two scaling factors programmed for this axis to the axis or axes affected by both types Function G72 is modal and will be cancelled when the CNC is turned on after executing M02 M30 or after an EMERGENCY or RES
232. XECUTION TOOL POS TIME MACH TIME TOOL POS TIME MACH TIME TOOL POS TIME MACH TIME TOTAL TIME 00 00 00 M FUNCTIONS 0038 TOOL CHANGES 0 COMMAND ACTUAL TO GO 00172 871 00172 871 00000 000 00153 133 00153 133 00000 000 00004 269 00004 269 00000 000 00071 029 00071 029 00000 000 00011 755 00011 755 00000 000 F00000 0000 96120 S00000 0000 96100 T0000 D000 NT0000 ND000 S 0000 RPM G00 G17 G54 PARTC 000000 CYTIME 00 00 00 00 TIMER 000000 00 00 CAP INS BLOCK STOP DISPLAY MDI TOOL GRAPHICS SINGLE SELECTION CONDITION SELECTION INSPECTION BLOCK M033 A display window shows the estimated program execution time at 100 of the programmed feedrate This display area shows the following information The time each tool TOOL takes to execute the positioning moves POS TIME as well as the machining moves MACH TIME indicated in the program The TOTAL TIME required to execute the complete program The M FUNCTIONS being exectued in the program The number of TOOL CHANGES performed during the execution of the program Chapter 3 Section Page EXECUTE SIMULATE DISPLAYSELECTION 13 The position values for the axes of the machine It must be borne in mind that the display format for the axes is established by machine parameter DFORMAT and that real or theoretical position values will be shown depending on the setting of machine parameter THEODPLY Each axis has the following fields COMM
233. XZOR C DL M F H DETECTED While editing or executing programs via DNC CAUSE SOLUTION The parameters of the Turning canned cycle with straight sections G81 or Facing canned cycle with straight sections G82 have been programmed wrong The probable causes might be 1 A mandatory parameter is missing 2 The cycle parameters are programmed in the wrong order 3 A parameter has been programmed which does not match the calling format This type of machining requires the programming of the following parameters X Z Profile starting point Q R Profile end point C Outting pass The rest of the parameters are optional The parameters must be edited in the order indicated by the error message 0035 G83 X ZI B DK H C DETECTED While editing or executing programs via DNC CAUSE SOLUTION The parameters of the Axial drilling tapping canned cycle G83 have been programmed wrong The probable causes might be 1 A mandatory parameter is missing 2 The cycle parameters are programmed in the wrong order 3 A parameter has been programmed which does not match the calling format This type of machining requires the programming of the following parameters X Z Position of the machining operation Depth of the machining operation B of operation to be carried out The rest of the parameters are optional The parameters must be edited in the order indicated by the error message
234. YSTEM Page Chapter 3 Section 6 AXES AND COORDINATESYSTEMS ABSOLUTE G90 INCREMENTAL G91 3 5 PROGRAMMING OF COORDINATES The CNC allows the selection of up to 7 from the 9 possible axes X Y Z U V W A B C Eachofthese may be linear linearto position only normal rotary rotary to position only orrotary withhirth toothing positioning in complete degrees according tothe specification in the machine parameter of each AXISTYPE axis With the aim of always selecting the most suitable coordinate programming system the CNC has the following types Cartesian coordinates Polar coordinates Angle and one Cartesian coordinate 3 5 1 CARTESIAN COORDINATES The Cartesian Coordinate System is defined by two axes on the plane and by three or more axes in space The origin of all these which in the case of the axes X Y Z coincides with the point of intersection is called Cartesian Origin or Zero Point of the Coordinate System The position of the different points of the machine is expressed in terms of the coordinates of the axes with two three four or five coordinates The coordinates of the axes are programmed via the letter of the axis X Y Z U V W A B C always in this order followed by the coordinate value The values of the coordinates are absolute or incremental depending on whether it is working in G90 or G91 and its programming format is 5 5 SNS X40 100230 gt
235. a rotary anda linear axis the programmed feedrate is taken in mm min or inches min and the movement of the rotary axis programmed in degrees will be considered programmed in millimeters or inches The relationship between the feedrate of the axis component and the programmed feedrate F 15 the same as that between the movement of the axis and the resulting programmed movement Feedrate F x Movement of axis Feedratecomponent Resulting programmed movement Page Chapter 5 Section PROGRAMMINGBYISOCODE FEEDRATE F Example a machine which has linear X and Z axes and rotary C axis all located at point YO CO the following movement is programmed G90 X100 Z20 C270 F10000 You get E F Ax 10000 x 100 x 100 20 270 E F Ay 10000 x 20 Ax C Ac 1002 202 2702 F Ac 10000 x 270 97 VS XY amp CA 100 20 2702 Function G94 is modal i e once programmed it stays active until G95 is programmed On power up after executing M02 M30 or following EMERGENCY or RESET the CNC assumes function G94 or G95 according to how the general machine parameter TFEED is set 5 2 2 FEEDRATE IN MM REV OR INCHES REV G95 From the moment when the code G95 is programmed the control assumes that the feedrates programmed through 5 5 are in mm rev or inches mm This function does no
236. a specific point along the trace Itis also possible to change the time base for the trace or calculate the time difference between two points of the trace To do this the following softkey options are available Find beginning Find End Find Trigger Find Time Base Calculate Times The cursor will position at the beginning of the trace being shown It will show the last section of the trace and the cursor will position at the end of it It will show the area of the trace corresponding to the trigger zone The trigger position will appear as a vertical red line over the trace The CNC will execute this option when a trigger occurs while analyzing the trace When pressing this key the CNC will requestthe cursor position with respect to the trigger point This value is given in milliseconds For example Having selected a Find time base of 1000 milliseconds the CNC will show the trace section corresponding to 1 second prior to the trigger instant Ifno trigger occurred while analyzing the trace the CNC will assume that the indicated position is referred to the beginning of the trace With this option it is possible to find out the time between two points ofthe trace To do this follow these steps in orderto set the initial and final points of the calculation Position the cursor at the initial point of calculation and press the MARK BEGINNING softkey to validate it Use the left arrow 39 rig
237. aboutthe source and usefulness of each program The attributes are defined in this operating mode by means of the Protections option as described later on TTheprogramisrunning either because it is the main program or because it contains a subroutine which has been called upon from that program or from another subroutine O The program was created by the machine manufacturer The program is hidden and cannot be displayed in any directory Since a hidden program can nevertheless be edited or deleted if its number is known itis recommended to remove the Modifiable attribute to prevent it from being edited or deleted M The program may be modified In other words it may be edited copied etc If a program does not have this attribute the operator cannot see or modify its contents X Indicates that the program may be executed A program not having this attribute cannot be executed by the operator Only the attributes currently selected will be shown the ones not selected will appear as n Example O X Indicates that the program was created by the manufacturer it will be displayed in the directory not hidden it cannot be modified but it may be executed Page Chapter 7 Section 2 UTILITIES DIRECTORY Subroutines directory UTILITIES 11 50 14 SUBR PROG SUBR PROG PROG P000002 P000002 0003 P000002 P000002 P000002 P000002 0013 P000002 P000002 P000002 P000002 10 Subr
238. achine parameter 2 The axes defined as GANTRY cannot be used in the definition of operations or movements These operations are defined with the main axis that the GANTRY axis is associated with 0059 HIRTH axis program only integer values DETECTED While editing at the CNC or while executing a program transmitted via DNC CAUSE A rotation of a HIRTH axis has been programmed with a decimal value SOLUTION HIRTH axes do not accept decimal angular values They must be full degrees 0061 ELSE not associated with IF DETECTED While editing at the CNC or while executing a program transmitted via DNC CAUSE S The various causes might be 1 While editing in High level language when editing the ELSE instruction without having previously programmed an IF 2 When programming in high level language an IF is programmed without associating it with any action after the condition SOLUTION Remember that the programming formats for this instruction are IF condition lt action1 gt IF condition lt actiont gt ELSE lt action2 gt If the condition is true it executes the action otherwise it executes the lt action2 gt 1 0 ERROR TROUBLESHOOTING MANUAL Hicon 3 8055T CNC 0062 Program label N 0 9999 DETECTED While editing at the CNC or while executing a program transmitted via DNC CAUSE While programming in high level language a block number out of the 0 9999 range has been programmed
239. acing operation until the defined profile is reached The whole facing operation is carried out with the same pass this being equal to or smaller than the programmed one C Each facing pass is carried out in the following manner ILC 7 040 EN 2 gt 7 Move 1 2 in rapid GOO Move 2 3 in GOI at programmed feedrate F If D has been programmed the 3 4 move is done in rapid G00 but if D has not been programmed the 3 4 move is done following the profile in GO1 at the programmed feedrate F Withdrawal 4 5 in rapid If a final roughing pass has been programmed the CNC will run a pass parallel to the profile maintaining an L and M stock at the set feedrate F This final roughing pass will eliminate the ridges that were leftin the roughing stage Xa Z Page Chapter 9 Section 32 CANNEDCYCLES FACING WITHSTRAIGHT SECTIONS G82 Afterthe facing operation with or without finishing pass the canned cycle will always end at the cycle calling point X 7 Considerations The machining conditions feedrate spindle speed etc as well as the tool radius compensation G41 G42 must be programmed before calling the cycle Once the canned cycle has ended the program will continue with the same feedrate F and G functions active previous to calling the cycle Only the tool ra
240. age 12 Chapter 9 Section PLC MONITORING WINDOW TO DISPLAY COUNTERS AND BINARY DATA This window is divided into two sections one to display Counters and the other one to display Binary Data Counter It will display one counter per line showing the following information fields for each of them CEN Indicates the logic status of the ENABLE input CUP Indicates the logic status of the UP COUNT input CDW Indicates the logic status of the DOWN COUNT input CPR Indicates the logic status of the PRESET input 5 Indicates the status of the counter 1 when its internal count is 0 and 0 for all other cases Indicates its count value Key in C 1 256 or C 1 256 1 256 to request information on one or more counter and then press ENTER Binary Data It will show one dataline perresource or group of resources requested The instructions available to request information of the various resources are I 1 256 or I 1 256 1 256 It shows the status of the selected input or group ofinputs O 1 256 or O 1 256 1 256 It shows the status of the selected output or group of outputs M 1 5957 or M 1 5957 1 5957 It shows the status of the selected mark or group of marks B 0 31 R 1 559 It shows the status of the selected bit of the indicatedregister When requesting the status of one or more inputs outputs or marks the CNC will show complete data lines even when all of them have not been requested When using generic
241. al 1 5500 5997 550 562 5000 5465 500 505 Real values I1 1256 01 0256 1 2047 Logic Inputs CNC Physical 0 Image values 11 1256 01 0256 M1 M2047 The real values of the resources corresponding to the physical inputs will be updated every lO milliseconds The physical outputs will be updated every 10 milliseconds with the real values of the corresponding O resources ThePLC will attend to all requests and modifications of its internal variables Page 18 Chapter 9 PLC Section MONITORING PLCIN OPERATIONPLCSTOPPED 9 4 ACTIVE MESSAGES When selecting this option the CNC will display a page or screen showing dynamically all the active messages generated by the PLC These messages will be listed by priority always starting from the one with the smallest number highest priority The operator can move the cursor a line at a time with the up and down arrow keys or page by page with the page up and page down keys To delete one of the displayed messages select it with the cursor and press the DELETE MESSAGE softkey Note that the CNC dynamically updates the active messages 9 5 ACTIVE PAGES SCREENS When selecting this option the CNC will show the active page with the lowest number Todelete a page oraccess the otheractive pages the CNC will display the following softkey options NEXT PAGE Pres
242. al parameters nevertheless all global parameters may be used to define them PAGE expression The mnemonic PAGE displays the page number indicated by means of a number or by means of any expression which results in a number User defined pages will be from page 0 to page 255 and will be defined from the CNC keyboard in the Grahic Editor mode and as indicated in the Operating Manual System pages will be defined by a number greater than 1000 See the corresponding appendix SYMBOL expression 1 expression 2 expression 3 The mnemonic SYMBOL displays the symbol whose numberis indicated by means of the value of expression 1 once this has been evaluated Its position on screen is also defined by expression 2 column and by expression 3 row Expression 1 expression 2 and expression 3 may contain a number or any expression which results in a number The CNC allows to display any user defined symbol 0 255 defined at the CNC keyboard in the Graphic Editor mode such as is indicated in the Operating Manual In order to position it within the display area its pixels must be defined 0 639 for columns expression 2 and 0 335 for rows expression 3 Chapter 12 Section Page PROGRAMCONTROLSTATEMENTS SCREENCUSTOMIZING 15 STATEMENTS IB expression INPUT format The CNC has 26 data entry variables IBO 1B25 The IB mnemonic displays the text indicated in the data input window and sto
243. am ora section of it the CNC will maintain the machining conditions type of movement feedrates etc selected while executing or simulating it Chapter 3 Section Page EXECUTE SIMULATE 1 When simulating a part program the CNC will ask for the type of simulation desired offering the following Options THEORETICAL PATH Itignores tool radius compensation functions G41 G42 thus showing the graphic representation of the programmed path It does not output the M S T function to the PLC It does not move the machine axes or start the spindle G FUNCTIONS Ittakes into account tool radius compensation functions G41 G42 thus showing the graphic representation of the path for the theoretical tool nose it does not coincide with the programmed path Programmed Path Path of theoretical tool tip It does not output the M S T functions to the PLC It does not move the machine axes or start the spindle G M S T FUNCTIONS Ittakes into account tool radius compensation functions G41 G42 thus showing the graphic representation of the path for the theoretical tool nose It outputs the M S T functions to the PLC It does not move the machine axes or start the spindle RAPID Ittakes into account tool radius compensation functions G41 G42 thus showing the graphic representation of the path for the theoretical tool nose It outputs the M S T functions to the PLC It starts the spindle if i
244. ame a program proceed as follows Press the RENAME softkey Indicate the location of the program RAM CARD A HD or DNC Key in the number of the program to be renamed Press the TO softkey Press either the NEW NUMBER or the NEW COMMENT softkey Key in the new number or the new comment Press ENTER The files associated with the PLC program messages and errors are always referred to with their associated mnemonics Therefore only their comment may be renamed If there is a program with the same number the CNC will issue a warning message and it will offer the chance to modify the command Examples To change the name of program 200103 from the Memkey RENAME CARD A 200103 TO NEW NUMBER P12 ENTER to change the comment of program 100453 from the CNC RENAME MEMORY P100453 TO NEW COMMENT Test ENTER Chapter 7 Section Page UTILITIES RENAME 5 7 5 PROTECTIONS To prevent certain programs from being manipulated and restrict access to the operator to certain CNC commands Itis possible to protect programs stored in the CNC s RAM memory in the Memkey card CARD A or in the Hard Disk HD USER PERMISSIONS Lets the operator see those CNC programs that have been created by the operator and sets their attributes To modify the attributes of a program proceed as follows Press the USER PERMISSION softkey Indicate the location of the program RAM MEMORY CARD A or HD Key in
245. amming modes are analyzed below point X40 Z60 being the starting point Cartesian coordinates G90 G03 X90 Z110 I50 KO X40 7160 10 50 Polarcoordinates G90 603 Q0 150 KO Q 90 I0 K50 Or G93 190 J60 definespolarcenter G03 00 G93 190 J160 defines new polar center Q 90 Cartesian coordinates with radius programming G90 G03 X90 Z110 R50 X40 7160 R50 Chapter 6 Section Page PATHCONTROL CIRCULARINTERPOLATION 7 G02 GO3 The CNC calculates depending on the programmed arc the radii of the starting point and endpoint Although in theory both points should be exactly the same the CNC enables you to select with the general machine parameter the maximum difference permissible between both radii If this valueis exceeded the CNC displays the corresponding error The programmed feedrate can be varied between 0 and 120 by using the switch located on the Operator Panel of the CNC or by selecting it between 096 and 25596 from the PLC via the DNC or from the program The CNC however has general machine parameter MAXFOVR tolimitthe maximum variation of the feedrate If the general machine parameter PORGMOVE has been selected and a circular interpolation G02 or G03 is programmed the CNC assumes the center of the arc to be a new polar origin Functions G02 and G03 are modal and incompatible both among themselves and with G00 G01 and G33 Functions G02 and G03
246. amming with respect to machine zero G70 Programming in inches G71 Programming in millimeters G90 Absolute programming G9 Incremental programming G93 Polar origin preset Itis also possible to program the following functions although they will be ignored by the canned cycle G05 Round corner G07 Square corner G50 Controlled corner rounding The F S T D and M functions Chapter 9 Section Page CANNEDCYCLES PATTERNREPEAT 7 CANNED CYCLE G66 Considerations The machining conditions feedrate spindle speed etc mustbe programmed before calling the canned cycle The canned cycle calling position must be off the part to be machined and at a distance greater than that defined as residual stock I of the outmost profile of the part ee 1 TPOSAOS xp If the tool position is not correct to execute the cycle the CNC will display the corresponding error message Oncethe canned cycle has ended the active feedrate will bethe last one programmed i e the one corresponding to the roughing operation F or the finishing operation The CNC will assume functions G00 G40 and G90 Page Chapter 9 Section CANNEDCYCLES PATTERNREPEAT CANNEDCYCLE G66 9 2 668 STOCK REMOVAL CYCLE ALONG X AXIS This cycle machines the programmed profile maintaining the specified pass between the successive machining passes The basic structure of the block is G68 XZCDLMKFHSEQ TPOOBO1
247. an be modified by using the right and left arrow keys Once the desired value is selected press ENTER to validate the new value Press ESC to quit this function without making any changes to this field Itisalso possibleto change the simulation speed while itis redrawing after a zoom This lets you check the machining of a particular operation PATH COLORS With this option it is possible to modify the colors used to draw the various tool paths inthe execution and simulation modes They can only be used inline graphics XZ The available parameters are The color for representing rapid moves The color for representing path without compensation The color for representing path with compensation The color for representing threading The CNC will show a series of windows for the definition of graphics parameters Among the various colors to choose from there is a black or transparent one If this one is chosen for a particular path this path will not be displayed on the screen If any of them is to be modified first select the corresponding window using the up and down keys and then use right and left arrow keys to select the desired color Once the desired colors have been selected press ENTER to validate the new choices or ESC to ignore the changes and leave this function with the original values intact Page 24 Chapter 3 Section EXECUTE SIMULATE GRAPHICS COLOR OF SOLID With this option itis possibl
248. analyzed at the time when the block is read i e 20 blocks before execution If the block skip needs to be analyzed at the time of execution it is necessary to interrupt the block preparation by programming G4 in the previous block BLOCK LABEL OR NUMBER N 0 9999 This is used to identify the block and is only used when block references or jumps are made They are represented by the letter N followed by up to 4 figures 0 9999 It is not necessary to follow any order and randomly arranged numbers are allowed If two or more blocks with the same label number are present in the same program the CNC will always give priority to the first number Although it is not necessary to program it by using a SOFTKEY the CNC allows the automatic programming of labels The programmer can select the initial number and the step between labels Page Chapter 2 Section CREATINGAPROGRAM 2 1 2 PROGRAM BLOCK This is written with commands in ISO and High Level languages To prepare a program blocks written in both languages will be used although each one should be edited with commands in just one language 2 1 2 1 ISO LANGUAGE This language is specially designed to control axis movement as it gives information and movement conditions in addition to data on feedrate It includes Preparatory functions for movement used to determine geometry and working conditions such as linear and circular interpolations threadin
249. ane in C axis mode Chapter 5 Section Page PROGRAMMING BYISO CODE SYNCHRONIZEDSPINDLES G30 G77 G78 9 5 6 TOOL NUMBER T AND TOOL OFFSET D With the T function itis possible to select the tool and with the D function it is possible to select the Is there a No offset associated with it When defining both ToolMagazine 7 parameters the programming order is T D For example T6 D17 Yes If the machine has a tool magazine the CNC looks Selects tool up the Tool magazine table to know the position occupied by the selected tool and the desired one aem Is D defined Yes If the D function has not be defined it looks up the m Tool table to know the D offset associated with it No It looks up the tool offsets table and assumes the Takes D associated tool dimensions corresponding to the D offset with T in tool table e It looks up the Tool geometry table to know the Takes tool cutter geometry width angle cutting angle The Tool geometry tableis associated with the T or the D according to the machine manufacturer s criteria Yes No general machine parameter GEOMTYPE P123 Takes cutter dimensions Takes cutter dimensions s defined for D from defined for T from To access check and define these tool geometry table tool geometry table tables refer to
250. angential tool entry when machining TangentialExit Toaddatangential tool exit at the end ofthe machining operation When selecting one of these one of the corners of the profiles will appear highlighted To select another corner of the same profile use the up down and left right arrow keys To select a corner of another profile use the page up and page down keys To define the rounding enter the rounding radius and press ENTER To define the chamfer enter the chamfer radius and press ENTER To define the tangential entry enter the radius of the path that the tool has to follow when doing a tangential entry and press ENTER To define the tangential exit enter the radius of the path that the tool has to follow when doing a tangential exit and press ENTER To quit the CORNER mode press ESC Page Chapter 4 Section 10 m PROFILEEDITOR 4 1 4 6MODIFY When selecting this option the CNC shows the following softkey options Starting Point To modify the starting point of the profile Modifyelement modify any element of the profile even the type of element straight lines clockwise or counterclockwise arcs Insertelement To insert a new element straight line or arc in any position of the profile Delete element To delete any element of the profile Additional Text To add additional text to any section of the profile Configuration To add a new editing plane or redefine the Autozoom option
251. annot be used when the CNC is already executing or simulating the selected program When this option is selected the CNC will show the selected program since the initial block must always belong to this program The operator must select with the cursor the block where the execution or simulation of the program will be started To do this the cursor can be moved line by line with the up and down arrow keys or page by page with the page up and page down keys The find softkey options are also available BEGINNING By pressing this key the cursor will position at the first line of the program END By pressing this key the cursor will position at the last line of the program TEXT With this function it is possible to search for a text or character sequence starting at the current cursor position When this softkey is pressed the CNC requests the character sequence to be found Once this text has been keyed in press the END OF TEXT softkey and the cursor will position over the first occurrence of the keyed text The found text will be highlighted and it will be possible to continue by pressing ENTER with the search all along the program or quit by pressing either the ESC key or ABORT softkey The search can be done as many times as it is desired Once searched to the end of the program it will continue the search from the beginning When quitting the search mode the cursor will be positioned at the last matchi
252. ans of the spindle speed override keys while threading They will be kept at 100 5 Withdrawal in rapid 600 to the approach point Considerations The machining conditions feedrate spindle speed etc mustbe programmed before calling the cycle Once the canned cycle has ended the program will continue with the same feedrate F and G functions active previous to calling the cycle Only the tool radius compensation will be cancelled G40 if it was active Page 48 Chapter 9 Section CANNEDCYCLES LONGITUDINAL THREADCUTTING G86 9 10 G87 FACE THREADCUTTING CANNED CYCLE With this cycle itis possible to cut outside and inside threads of constant face pitch The basic block structure 15 G87 XZQRKIBEDLCJAW XA 09701 5 5 K 5 5 1 5 5 Defines the X coordinate of the initial point of the thread It must be programmedin absolute values and in the active units radius or diameter Defines the Z coordinate of the initial point of the thread It must be programmed in absolute values Defines the X coordinate of the final point of the thread It must be programmed in absolute and in radius or diameter depending on the active units Defines the Z coordinate of the final point of the thread Optional It is used with parameter W for thread repair Defines the Z coordinate of the point where the thread is to be measured Usually itis an intermediate point of the thread Defines th
253. ansmitted via DNC CAUSE When Programming with respect to home G53 the end point has been defined in polar or cylindrical coordinates or in Cartesian coordinates with an angle SOLUTION When programming with respect to home only Cartesian coordinates may be programmed 0046 Axis does not exist DETECTED While editing at the CNC or while executing a program transmitted via DNC CAUSE A block has been edited whose execution implied the movement of a nonexistent axis SOLUTION Check that the name of the axis is correct 0047 Program axes DETECTED While editing at the CNC or while executing a program transmitted via DNC CAUSE No axis has been programmed in a function requiring an axis SOLUTION Some instructions require the programming of axes REPOS G14 G20 G21 0048 Incorrect order of axes DETECTED While editing at the CNC or while executing a program transmitted via DNC CAUSE The axis coordinates have not been programmed in the correct order or an axis has been programmed twice in the same block SOLUTION Remember that the correct programming order for the axes is X Y Z U V W A B C All axes need not be programmed 0049 Point incompatible with active plane DETECTED While editing at the CNC or while executing a program transmitted via DNC CAUSE S The various causes might be 1 When trying to do a circular interpolation the end point is not in the active plane
254. any damage suffered or caused when installed in other environments residential or homes Install the unit in the right place Itisrecommended whenever possible to instal the CNC away from coolants chemical product blows etc that could damage it This unit complies with the European directives on electromagnetic compatibility Nevertheless it is recommended to keep it away from sources of electromagnetic disturbance such as Powerful loads connected to the same AC power line as this equipment Nearby portable transmitters Radio telephones Ham radio transmitters Nearby radio TC transmitters Nearby arc welding machines Nearby High Voltage power lines Etc Ambient conditions The working temperature must be between 5 C and 45 C 41 F and 113 F The storage temperature must be between 25 C and 70 C 13 F and 158 F Introduction 3 Protections of the unit itsel Power Supply Module It carries two fast fuses of 3 15 Amp 250V to protect the mains AC input Axes module All the digital inputs and outputs have galvanic isolation via optocouplers between the CNC circuitry and the outside They are protected by an external fast fuse F of 3 15 Amp 250V against reverse connection of the power supply Input Output Module All the digital inputs and outputs have galvanic isolation via optocouplers between the CNC circuitry and the outside They are protected by an external fast fuse F of 3 1
255. apid G00 but if D has not been programmed the 3 4 move is done following the profile in 01 at the programmed feedrate F Withdrawal 4 5 in rapid If a final roughing pass has been programmed the CNC will run a pass parallel to the profile maintaining an L and M stock at the set feedrate F This final roughing pass will eliminate the ridges that were leftin the roughing stage X Page 28 Chapter 9 Section CANNEDCYCLES TURNINGWITHSTRAIGHT SECTIONS G81 Afterthe turning operation with or without finishing pass the canned cycle will always end at the cycle calling point P4 N G f Considerations The machining conditions feedrate spindle speed etc as well as the tool radius compensation G41 G42 must be programmed before calling the cycle Once the canned cycle has ended the program will continue with the same feedrate F and G functions active previous to calling the cycle Only the tool radius compensation will be cancelled G40 if it was active The distance between the starting point and final point R Q along the X axis must be equal to or greater than L The distance between the starting point and the initial point Z X along the Z axis must be equal to or greater than M TP09D05 N If the tool position is not correct to execute the cycle the CNC will display the corresponding e
256. applies the tool offset DO with X 0 Z 0 F 0 R 0 I 0 and K 0 Every time a tool is selected active tool and on the first X or Z axis move the CNC applies automatically the tool length compensation corresponding to the selected tool offset the sum of X I along the X axis and the sum Z K along the Z axis If there is no active tool the CNC will apply no tool length compensation Chapter 8 Section Page TOOLCOMPENSATION 1 CODIGOS DE FORMA LOCATION CODES CODIGOS FO y CODES FD and F8 Page Chapter 8 Section 2 TOOL COMPENSATION CODIGO F5 CODE FS x py ene c vu ES RN ap 2 EZ T p ALTE d A 2 X Chapter 8 Section Page TOOLCOMPENSATION 3 8 11 TOOL RADIUS COMPENSATION 640 641 G42 In normal machining operations itis necessary to calculate and define the path of the tool taking its location code F and radius R into account so that the required dimensions of the part are achieved Tool radius compensation allows the direct programming of part contouring and of the tool radius without taking the dimensions of the tool into account The CNC automatically calculates the path the tool should follow based on the contour of the part and the tool s location code and its radius value stored in the tool offset table corresponding to that tool
257. aration Returns in hundredths of a second the time it has taken to make the part Possible values 0 4294967295 Ifthis variable is accessed block preparation is interrupted and the CNC waitsforthiscommand to beexecuted toresume block preparation Indicates whether itis the firsttime that a program has been run Itreturns a value of 1 if it is the first time 0 for the remainder of times A first time execution is considered as being one made After turning on the CNC After pressing the Shift Reset keys Every time a new program is selected Returns in volts and in 1 4 format values 5 Volts the status ofthe analog input indicated n itbeing possibleto selectone among eight 1 8 analog inputs Ifthis variable is accessed block preparation is interrupted and the CNC waits forthiscommand to beexecuted toresume block preparation Returns in the 3 least significant bytes the axis pairs toggled with function G28 LSB The axes are coded in 4 bits and indicate the axis number 1 through 7 according to the order they are programmed If the CNC controls the X Z C W axes and G28 ZW has been programmed the AXICOM variable will show the following information Pair 3 Pair 2 Pair 1 W Z 0010 is Chapter 11 Section Page PROGRAMMINGINHIGH LEVELLANGUAGE OTHER VARIABLES 33 Variable associated with tangential control G45 It indicates the programmed angular position
258. arge or reduce the size of the new display area and the arrow keys to move the zoom window around to the desired location on the screen Once the new display area has been defined press ENTER to validate the new values Press ESC to quit this ZOOM mode without making any changes to the initial values Every time a Zoom is carried out in line graphics XZ XC ZC it redraws the machining executed up to that point If the number of points to be redrawn exceeds the amount of memory reserved for it only the last points will be redrawn and the older ones will be lost When zooming into a solid graphics the drawing will be initialized showing a new unmachined 3D block Chapter 3 Section Page EXECUTE SIMULATE GRAPHICS 23 3 5 4 GRAPHIC PARAMETERS This function can be used any time even during part program execution or simulation With this function itis possible to modify the simulation speed and the colors used to draw the tool paths The modifications made to any parameter are immediately assumed by the CNC and can be made during the execution or simulation of the part program The softkey options displayed by the CNC are SIMULATION SPEED With this option it is possible to modify the percentage of the speed used by the CNC to execute the part programs in the simulation modes The CNC will display a window at the top right hand side of the screen indicating the current of simulation speed This value c
259. as not been respected SOLUTION Enter the table parameters in the right order 0115 Tool T4 D3 F3 N5 R5 2 DETECTED While editing tables CAUSE In the tool table the parameter editing order has not been respected SOLUTION Enter the table parameters in the right order 0116 Zero offset G54 59 axes 1 5 DETECTED While editing tables CAUSE In the Zero offset table the zero offset to be defined G54 G59 has not be selected SOLUTION Enter the table parameters the right order To fill out the zero offset table first select the offset to be defined G54 G59 and then the zero offset position for each axis 0117 function M4 54 bits 8 DETECTED While editing tables CAUSE In the M function table the parameter editing order has not been respected SOLUTION Edit table following the format M1234 associated subroutine customizing bits 0118 G51 A E DETECTED In execution or while executing programs transmitted via DNC CAUSE In the Look Ahead G51 function the parameter for the maximum contouring error is missing SOLUTION This type of machining requires the programming of E Maximum contouring error The rest of the parameters are optional The parameters must be edited in the order indicated by the error message 1 8 ERROR TROUBLESHOOTING MANUAL Hicon 3 8055T CNC 0119 Leadscrew Position Error DETECTED While editing tables CAUSE In the leadscrew
260. at canned cycle G66 have been programmed wrong The probable causes might be 1 A mandatory parameter is missing 2 The cycle parameters are programmed in the wrong order 3 A parameter has been programmed which does not match the calling format This type of machining requires the programming of the following parameters X Z Profile starting point Residual stock C Cutting pass S Block where the profile geometry description begins E where the profile geometry description ends The rest of the parameters are optional The parameters must be edited in the order indicated by the error message 0033 G68 G69 XZC DL MFH SE DETECTED While editing or executing programs via DNC CAUSE SOLUTION The parameters of the Roughing canned cycle along the X axis G68 or Roughing canned cycle along the Z axis G69 have been programmed wrong The probable causes might be 1 A mandatory parameter is missing 2 The cycle parameters are programmed in the wrong order 3 A parameter has been programmed which does not match the calling format This type of machining requires the programming of the following parameters X Z Profile starting point C Outting pass S Block where the profile geometry description begins E Block where the profile geometry description ends The rest of the parameters are optional The parameters must be edited in the order indicated by the error message 0034 G81 G82
261. ated 0 through 6 While programming in high level local parameters may be referred to as PO P25 oras A Z A being the same as PO and Z the same as 25 To do that the local parameter tables show the letter associated to them in brackets next to the parameter number In the tables the parameter can only referred to as PO P25 letters are not allowed Page Chapter 6 Section 14 TABLES GLOBALANDLOCAL PARAMETERTABLE 6 7 HOW TO EDIT TABLES The screen may be scrolled up and down line by line using the up down arrow keys or page by page using the page up down keys There are several ways to edit or modify a line which will be described next Once the user has selected any of those options a editing area is available on the screen which may be scrolled up and down using the up down arrow keys On the other hand with the up arrow key the cursor may be placed over the first character of the editing window and with the down arrow key over the last character EDIT Once this option has been selected the softkeys change color appearing over a white background and they show the information corresponding to the type of editing that may be done On the other hand more information on the editing commands can be obtained at any time by pressing HELP To quit this help mode press HELP again Press ESC to quit the editing mode and maintain the table with the previous values Once the editing is done press
262. atement X20 Z20 Is notexecuted X20 Z10 Is notexecuted N22 G01 X10 710 F10000 Continues execution in this block G02 740110 KO RPT N expression N expression The mnemonic RPT executes within the same program the part of the program which exists between the blocks defined by means of the labels N expression Both labels can be indicated by means of a number or by any expression which results in a number The part of the program selected by means of the two labels must belong to the same program by first defining the initial block and then the final block The execution of the program will continue in the block following the one in which the mnemonic RPT was programmed once the selected part of the program has been executed Example N10 G91 G01 20 7 20 X10 G02 X10 Z 10 KO N20 01 Z 10 N30 RPT N10 N20 N3 N40 G01 X20 M30 When reaching block N30 the program will execute section N10 N20 three times Once this has been completed the program will continue execution in block N40 Page Chapter 12 Section PROGRAMCONTROLSTATEMENTS FLOW CONTROL STATEMENTS IF condition lt action1 gt ELSE lt action2 gt This statement analyzes the given condition which must be a relational expression If the condition is true result equal to 1 lt action1 gt will be executed otherwise result equal to 0 action2 will be executed Example IF P8 EQ 12 8 CALL 3 ELSE PCALL 5 A2 B
263. ater than 25 or with a global parameter greater than 299 SOLUTION parameters used by the CNC are Local 0 25 Global 100 299 0075 Read only variable DETECTED While editing at the CNC or while executing a program transmitted via DNC CAUSE An attempt has been made to assign a value to a read only variable SOLUTION Read only variables cannot be assigned any values through programming However their values can be assigned to a parameter 0077 Analog output not available DETECTED While editing at the CNC or while executing a program transmitted via DNC CAUSE An attempt has been made to write to an analog output currently being used by the CNC SOLUTION The selected analog output may be currently used by an axis or a spindle Select another analog output between 1 and 8 12 ERROR TROUBLESHOOTING MANUAL FAGOR 3 8055T CNC 0078 Program channel O CNC 1 PLC or 2 DNC DETECTED While editing at the CNC or while executing a program transmitted via DNC CAUSE While programming in high level language the KEYSCR instruction has been programmed but the source of the keys is missing SOLUTION When programming the KEYSCR instruction the parameter for the source of the keys must always be programmed KEYSCR 0 CNC keyboard KEYSCR 1 PLC KEYSCR 2 DNC The CNC only lets modifying the contents of this variable if it is zero 0079 Program error number 0 thru 9999 DETECT
264. auses might be 1 A mandatory parameter is missing 2 The cycle parameters are programmed in the wrong order 3 A parameter has been programmed which does not match the calling format SOLUTION This type of machining requires the programming of the following parameters X Z Starting point of the thread Q R End point of the thread Depth of the thread B Cutting pass C Thread pitch The rest of the parameters are optional The parameters must be edited in the order indicated by the error message 0031 G88 G98 X ZQ R C D DETECTED While editing or executing programs via DNC CAUSE The parameters of the Grooving canned cycle along the X axis G88 or Grooving canned cycle along the Z axis G89 have been programmed wrong The probable causes might be 1 A mandatory parameter is missing 2 The cycle parameters are programmed in the wrong order 3 A parameter has been programmed which does not match the calling format SOLUTION This type of machining requires the programming of the following parameters X Z Starting point of the groove Q R End point of the groove The rest of the parameters are optional The parameters must be edited in the order indicated by the error message 6 ERROR TROUBLESHOOTING MANUAL EAGOR 8055T 0032 G66 21 AL MH S E DETECTED While editing or executing programs via DNC CAUSE SOLUTION The parameters of the Pattern repe
265. aximum value while they are synchronized When cancelling this synchronism the limit is no longer applied and the main spindle assumes the programmed speed While the spindles are synchronized in speed function G77S active with G30 they may also be synchronized in position and set an angular offset between them so the second spindle follows the main spindle at this set offset distance Programming format G30 D 359 9999 offset in degrees For example with G30 D90 the second spindle will turn 90 behind the main spindle Considerations Before activating the synchronism both spindles must be homed referenced The spindles cannot be synchronized if the XC or ZC C axis plane is selected To synchronized the spindles in position G30 they must be synchronized in speed already G77S While the spindles are synchronized only the signals of the main spindle will be attended to PLCCNTL SPDLINH SPDLREV etc On the other hand when making a thread only the feedback and reference pulses of the main spindle will be taken into account While the spindle synchronism is active it is possible to Execute functionsG94 G95 G96 G97 M3 M4 M5 M19 S Change the spindle speed via DNC PLC or CNC S Change the spindle speed override via DNC PLC CNC or keyboard Change the spindle speed limit via DNC PLC or CNC G92 S But itis NOT possible to Toggle the spindles G28 G29 Change gears M41 M42 M43 M44 Define the XC or ZC pl
266. axis must be equal to or greater than L The distance between the starting point and the initial point Z X along the Z axis must be equal to or greater than M NSS If the tool position is not correct to execute the cycle the CNC will display the corresponding error message Chapter 9 CANNEDCYCLES Section TURNING WITHARCS G84 Page 39 9 8 685 FACING CANNED CYCLE WITH ARCS This cycle faces the programmed section maintaining the indicated pass between the successive facing passes It allows to select whether or not the canned cycle will perform a finishing pass after completing the programmed facing operation The basic structure of the block is G85 X ZQRCDLMFHIK M X Wao aoe NOn masocsu parc P a re Se Sa Si sae 01 X 5 5 Defines the X coordinate of the initial point of the profile It must be programmed in absolute values and in the active units radius or diameter Z 5 5 Defines the Z coordinate of the initial point of the profile It must be programmed in absolute values Q 5 5 Defines the X coordinate of the final point of the profile It must be programmed in absolute values and in the active units radius or diameter R 5 5 Defines the Z coordinate of the final point of the profile It must be programmed in absolute values C5 5 Defines the facing pass The who
267. axis will be highlighted When using aFAGOR handwheel with an axis selector button the axis may be selected as follows Push the button on the back of the handwheel The CNC select the first axis and it highlights it When pressing the button again the CNC selects the next axis and so on in a rotary fashion To deselect the axis hold the button pressed for more than 2 seconds Jog the axis Once the axis has been selected it will move as the handwheel is being turned and in the direction indicated by it 5 1 3 2 INDIVIDUAL HANDWHEEL Jog the axis Each axis will move as the corresponding handwheel is being turned according to the switch position and in the direction indicated by it Page Chapter 5 Section 14 JOG JOGGING WITHELECTRONIC HANDWHEEL 5 1 3 3 PATH HANDWHEEL This feature allows to move two axes simultaneously with a single handwheel along a straight path or an arc for rounding or chamfering corners The CNC assumes as Path Handwheel the general handwheel or when not available the individual handwheel the individual handwheel associated with the Z axis This feature must be handled by the machine manufacturer After slecting the path handwheel mode the type of path must be indicated Straight line or an arc Fora linear path the path angle must be given at variable MASLAN degrees between the linear path and the first axis of the plane X pa m G18 Foran arc th
268. c parameter for its value at that time Chapter 5 Section Page PROGRAMMING BYISO CODE 1 5 1 PREPARATORY FUNCTIONS Preparatory functions are programmed using the letter G followed by 2 digits They are always programmed at the beginning of the body of the block and are useful in determining the geometry and working condition of the CNC Table of G functions used in the CNC Function Meaning Section G00 Rapid travel G01 Linear interpolation G02 Clockwise circular interpolation G03 Counter clockwise circular interpolation G04 Dwell block preparation stop G05 Round corner G06 Absolute arc center coordinates G07 Square corner G08 Arc tangent to previous path G09 Arc defined by three points Mirror image cancellation Mirror image on X axis Mirror image on Y axis Mirror image on Z axis Mirror image in the programmed directions Selection of main plane in two directions Main plane X Y and longitudinal Z Main plane Z X and longitudinal Y Main plane Y Z and longitudinal X Definition of lower work zone limits Definition of upper work zone limits Activate cancel work zones X X X X X X X X X Selection of the second spindle or axis toggle Selection of the main spindle or axis toggle Spindle syncronization in position Feedrate F as an inverted function of time Threadcutting Automatic radius blend Tangential entry Tangential exit Automatic chamfer bl
269. change and having programmed in a block seven M functions and an S function involving a tool change the CNC cannot include the M for the automatic tool change in that block SOLUTION Program one of the M functions or the S function in a separate block 1031 A subroutine is not allowed for automatic range change DETECTED During execution CAUSE In machines using an automatic gear change when programming an S speed that involves a gear change and the M function for the automatic gear change has a subroutine associated with it SOLUTION When using an automatic gear change the M functions for the gear change cannot have an associated subroutine 1032 Spindle speed range not defined for M19 DETECTED During execution CAUSE An M19 has been programmed but none of the gear change functions is active M41 M42 M43 or M44 SOLUTION power up the CNC does not assume any gear Therefore if the gear change function is not automatically generated spindle parameter AUTOGEAR P6 NO the auxiliary functions must be programmed for the gear change M41 M42 M43 or M44 1033 Incorrect range change DETECTED During execution CAUSE S The various probable causes are 1 When trying to make a gear change and the machine parameters for the gears MAXGEAR 1 MAXGEAR2 MAXGEAR3 or MAXGEAR4A set wrong All the gears have not be used and the unus
270. chining depth SOLUTION The finishing stock must be smaller than the total machining depth GEOMETRY Final diameter is not external DETECTED While executing CAUSE In an outside diameter the final diameter is greater than the initial one SOLUTION In an outside diameter the final diameter must be smaller than the initial one GEOMETRY Final diameter is not internal DETECTED While executing CAUSE In an inside diameter the final diameter is smaller than the initial one SOLUTION inside diameter the final diameter must be greater than the initial one 54 ERROR TROUBLESHOOTING MANUAL FAGOR 3 8055T CNC Errors in the facing cycle Cycle without roughing or finishing DETECTED While executing CAUSE No tool has been selected for roughing or finishing SOLUTION Select the tool for roughing If T 0 there is no roughing and for finishing If T 0 there is no finishing ROUGHING Value of A 0 DETECTED While executing CAUSE The cutting depth pass has not been defined A SOLUTION Program a pass greater than zero ROUGHING Value of Fz0 DETECTED While executing CAUSE The roughing feedrate F has not been defined SOLUTION Program a positive feedrate other than zero ROUGHING Value of Sz0 DETECTED While executing CAUSE The spindle speed S has not been defined for roughing SOLUTION Program a positive spindle speed S other than zero FINISHING Value of F 0 DE
271. cleared From this point on a new value can be entered To quit this option first clear the editing window using the CL key or the ESC key and then press ESC again The selected parameter will not be modified Once this modification has concluded press the ENTER key to validate it FIND The beginning or end of the table or the parameter whose number is indicated by positioning the cursor on the required parameter BEGINNING Whenpressing this softkey the cursor positions over the first parameter of the table quitting this option END When pressing this softkey the cursor positions over the last parameter of the table quitting this option PARAMETER When pressing this softkey the CNC will request the number of the parameter to be found Key in that number and press ENTER The cursor will be positioned over the indicated parameter quitting this option INITIALIZE With this option itis possible to reset all the parameters of the selected table to their default values These default values are indicated in the chapter corresponding to machine parameters in the installation manual Chapter 11 Section Page MACHINE PARAMETERS OPERATION WITH 7 PARAMETERTABLES LOAD To load tables stored in the Memkey Card CARD A or in a peripheral device or PC through the two serial lines RS232C or RS422 Thetransmission begins after pressing the corresponding softkey When using aserial line the receptor must be
272. ctive editor and the Profile editor Description of the JOG mode of operation This is the operating mode to be used whenever the machine is to be controlled manually to move the axes of the machine as well as to control the spindle Description of the Tables mode of operation It allows access to the various data tables of the CNC Zero offsets Tool offsets Tool table tool magazine and global and local arithmetic parameters Utilities Status PLC Description of the Utilities mode of operation It allows access to the directory of part programs subroutines and to the part program directory of the PC or peripheral device connected to the CNC It is also possible to copy delete move or rename part programs It indicates the protections that could be assigned to a part program It shows the various ways to operate with the EEPROM memory It shows the status of the CNC and the DNC communication lines Description of the DNC mode of operation and how to operate via the serial lines Description of the PLC mode of operation It indicates how to edit and compile the PLC program Itis possible to verify how the PLC program works and the status of its numerous variables It shows the date the PLC program was edited its memory size and the execution times cycle times for its different modules It offers a detailed description of the logic analyzer Chapter 10 Graphic Editor Description of the Graphic
273. d Requests the value of B Data window 2 shows the entered value Adds B entered value to the block being edited Adds to the block being edited Requests the value of C Data window 3 shows the entered value Adds C entered value to the block being edited Adds to the block being edited Enters the edited block into memory Example PCALL 2 A3 B1 C3 Chapter 12 PROGRAMCONTROLSTATEMENTS Section SCREENCUSTOMIZING STATEMENTS Page 21 APPENDIX ISO CODE PROGRAMMING Giediek sck hub naa ui diuRi b Eu 3 B INTERNAL CNC VARIABLES 5 C HIGH LEVEL PROGRAMMING 11 D BEY CODES H 13 E LOGIC OUTPUTS FOR KEY CODE STATUS 14 FE KEYS INHIBITING CODES 15 PROGRAMMING ASSISTANCE SYSTEM PAGES 16 H MAINTENANCE 19 ISO CODE PROGRAMMING Function Meaning Section G00 Rapid travel 6 1 G01 Linear interpolation 2 62 G02 Clockwise circular interpolation G03 Counter clockwise circular interpolation G04 Dwell block preparation stop G05 Round corner G06 Absolute arc center coordinates G07 Square corner G08 Arc tangent to previous path G09 Arc defined by three points G10 Mirror image cancellation Gil Mirror image on X axis G12 Mirror
274. d K with the abscissa axis Z axis W axis A axis Parameters X and I with the ordinate axis X axis X axis B axis Page Chapter 8 Section 16 TOOL COMPENSATION TOOLCOMPENSATION INANYPLANE 9 e CANNED CYCLES The CNC offers the following machining canned cycles 666 Patternrepeat G68 Stock removal along the X axis G69 Stock removal along the Z axis 681 Turningcycle with straight sections 682 Facingcycle with straight sections 683 Drillingcycle 684 Turning cycle with circular sections 685 Facing cycle with circular sections G86 Longitudinalthreadcutting 687 Facethreadcutting 688 Grooving cycle along X axis 689 Grooving cycle along Z axis Machining canned cycles with a live tool G60 Drilling tapping canned cycle on the face of the part G61 Drilling tapping canned cycle along the surface of the part G62 Slot milling canned cycle along the surface of the part G63 Slot milling canned cycle on the face of the part A canned cycle is defined by the G function indicating the canned cycle and its corresponding parameters A canned cycle may be defined anywhere in the program that is in the main program as well as in a subroutine When working in a plane otherthan the ZX forexample G16 WX the CNC interprets the canned cycle parameters as follows ZX plane WX plane AB plane Parameter Z and all related to it with the abscissa axis 00000 Z axis
275. d group of outputs For example O22 25z 1 sets outputs O22 thru O25 to 1 M 1 5957 0 1 Alters the status 0 1 of the indicated mark For example M330 0 sets Mark M330 to 0 M 1 5957 1 5957 0 1 Alters the status 0 1 of the indicated group of marks For example M400 403 1 sets marks M400 thru M403 to 1 TEN 1 256 0 1 Alters the status 0 1 of the ENABLE input of the indicated timer For example TEN12 1 sets the Enable input of timer T12 to 1 Page Chapter 9 Section 10 PLC MONITORING TRS 1 256 0 1 TGn 1 256 n 0 1 CUP 1 256 0 1 CDW 1 256 0 1 CEN 1 256 0 1 CPR 1 256 n 0 1 1 256 n B 0 31 R 1 559 0 1 1 559 1 559 1 559 n Alters status 0 1 of the RESET input of the indicated timer For example TRS2 0 sets the reset input of timer T2 to 0 Alters the status 0 1 of the trigger input TGn of the indicated timer 1 thru 256 assigning the desired time constant n toit Forexample TG1 22 1000setsthe trigger input 1 of timer T22 to one and it assigns a time constant of 1000 10 seconds Alters the status 0 1 of the UP count input of the indicated counter For example CUP 33 0 sets the status of the UP input of counter C33 to 0 Alters the status 0 1 of the DOWN count input of the indicated counter Forexample CDW 32 1 sets the status of the UP input of counter C32 to 1 Alters the status 0 1 of the enable input of the indica
276. d it will add them to the program once the editing of this option is done and it will insert them after the one indicated by the cursor The main window will show again the graphic options corresponding to the main menu being possible to continue editing the program Page Chapter 4 Section 4 EDIT INTERACTIVE EDITOR 4 1 4 PROFILE EDITOR When selecting this option the CNC displays the following fields or windows EDIT P000123 11 50 14 DISPLAYED AREA 7 300 300 X 200 200 STARTING POINT Zi 0 0000 X1 0 0000 Enter ABSCISSA and ORDINATE of the starting point Mh Z X ABSCISSA ORDINATE VALIDATE AXIS AXIS Window showing the graphic representation of the profile being edited Editing window showing the new generated block in CNC language Area for editing messages Display area Indicates the area of the plane shown in the graphic representation of the profile Indicated by the maximum and minimum position values of each axis The way to select this display are is described later on Display area for the profile section currently selected for editing or modifying It may be the starting block straight line a clockwise arc or a counter clockwise arc Display area for additional information It shows a series of parameters for internal use and whose meanings are Et Total elements of the profile Ec Complete elements Ni
277. d press ENTER Hus v The value may be defined by a numeric constant or by any expression Examples X 100 X 10 cos 45 X 20 30 sine 30 X 2 20 30 sine 30 Once all known parameters are set press the VALIDATE softkey and the CNC will show the defined section if possible If there is not enough data to show the section the CNC will show a dotted line indicating its orientation Example X120 Y1 0 X2 Y2 Ol 60 If there are more than one possibility all the possible options will be shown and the desired one framed in red must be selected using the right and left arrow keys Example X2 Y2 a OL 60 TANGENCY YES Use the up and down arrow keys to choose whether all the possible options are shown or only the one framed in red Once the desired option is selected press ENTER for the CNC to assume it Page Chapter 4 Section 8 EDIT PROFILEEDITOR 4 1 44 DEFINITION OF A CIRCULAR SECTION When pressing the CLOCKWISE ARC or COUNTER P SPLAY AREA CLOCKWISE ARC softkey the CNC displays the data shown on X 300 300 the right margin of this page Y 200 200 Y1 Coordinates of the starting point of the arc CLOCKWISE ARC They cannot be modified because they correspond to the last point of the previous section 50 000 Y1 60 000 2 2 Coordinates of end point of the arc X2 Y2 XC YC Coordinates of the arc center RA X
278. d with G94 will show the resulting feedrate in mm min or inches min Page Chapter 11 Section 14 PROGRAMMINGINHIGH LEVELLANGUAGE VARIABLESFOR FEEDRATES Read only variables associated with Feedrate Override FRO DNCFRO PLCFRO CNCFR0 PLCCFR Returns Feedrate Override 96 selected at the CNC This will be given by an integer between 0 and MAXFOVR maximum 255 This feedrate percentage may be indicated by the PLC by DNC or from the front panel and the CNC will select one of them the order of priority from highest to lowest being by program by DNC by PLC and from the switch Returns the Feedrate Override selected by DNC If this has a value of 0 it means that it is not selected Returns the Feedrate Override selected by PLC If this has a value of 0 it means that it is not selected Returns the Feedrate Override selected from the switch at the CNC Operator Panel Returns the Feedrate Override selected for the PLC execution channel Read write variables PRGFRO Thisvariableallowsthe feedrate percentage selected by program to beread or modified This will be given by an integer between 0 and MAXFOVR maximum 255 Ifithas a value of 0 this means that itis not selected P110 PRGFRO assigns to P110 the of feedrate override selected by program PFRGFRO P111 sets the feedrate override selected by program to the value of P111 Chapter 11 Section Page PR
279. defined as following A Available E Expired real life greater than nominal life R Rejected by the PLC Chapter 6 Section Page TABLES TOOLMAGAZINETABLE 3 6 3 TOOL TABLE This table stores information about the tools available indicating the type of tool offset associated with them their family etc NOMINAL LIFE REAL LIFE eJ QU UU EJ EU UU ZU EJ EU ZU EU QU FU ZU 2 EU ZU gt gt gt gt gt gt gt gt gt gt gt gt gt gt gt gt gt gt gt gt N00000 CAP INS MM MODIFY DELETE SAVE MM INCH C CT Gs C The end of this chapter describes how to edit the table Each tool has the following data fields Offset number associated with the tool Every time a tool is selected the CNC will assume its dimensions as they appear in the tool offset table for the specified tool offset Family code It will be used when having an automatic tool changer and it will allow replacing the worn out tool with another one with similar characteristics There are two types of families Those for normal tools whose codes are between and 199 Those for special tools which occupy more than one magazine pocket whose numbers are between 200 and 255 Every time a new tool is selected the CNC checks whether it is worn out real life greater than nominal life Ifthatisthe case it will n
280. ding G00 X200 Z190 b Multiple longitudinal threading We wantto make a dual entry thread The threads are shifted 180 and each oneis2 mm deep and has a pitch of 5 mm 58 m 7 40 180 190 G90 G00 X200 Z190 X116 Z180 G33 740 L5 00 istthread G00 X200 Z190 X116 Z180 G33 740 L5 0180 2nd thread G00 X200 Z190 Chapter 6 Section Page PATHCONTROL THREADCUTTING 21 G33 c Tapered thread We wand to make in a single pass a tapered thread 2 mm deep and a pitch of 5 mm o0 G90 G00 X200 7190 X84 G33 X140 750 15 Thread G00 X200 Z190 d Thread blending We want to blend a longitudinal thread and a tapered one 2 mm deep and with a5 mm pitch 60 120 2830 G90 G05 X220 7230 X96 G33 7120 15 Thread X160 Z60 L5 Thread G00 X220 7230 Chapter 6 Section 22 PATHCONTROL THREADCUTTING G33 6 13 ACTIVATE C AXIS 615 Preparatory function G15 activates the C axis making it possible to machine on the cylindrical surface of part or on its front This is an optional feature and it requires the software option for 4 or more axes Inb order to use this G function it is necessary to set one of the axes of the machine as a C axis general machine parameters PO thru P7 and define it as a normal rotary axis machine parameter AXISTYPE for the axis When the C axis is activated by m
281. displays ACTUAL When selecting this option the CNC will show the current position of the axes with respect to part zero ACTUAL X 00100 000 Z 00004 269 C 00011 755 F03000 0000 100 S00000 0000 100 T0000 D000 S 0000 RPM 50000 M MIN G00 G17 G54 PARTC 000000 CYTIME 00 00 00 00 TIMER 000000 00 00 CONTINUOUS JOG MOVE CAP INS MM REFERENCE PRESET TOOL MDI USER DISPLAY IMM INCHES SEARCH CALIBRAT SELECTION Page Chapter 5 Section 6 JOG DISPLAYSELECTION FOLLOWING ERROR When selecting this option the CNC will show the following error difference between the theoretical and real positions of the axes foreach axis and the spindle FOLLOWING ERROR X 00000 002 Z 00000 003 5 00000 000 00000 002 F03000 0000 100 500000 0000 100 T0000 D000 S 0000 RPM 50000 M MIN G00 G17 G54 PARTC 000000 CYTIME 00 00 00 00 TIMER 000000 00 00 CONTINUOUS JOG MOVE CAP INS MM REFERENCE PRESET TOOL MDI USER DISPLAY MM INCHES SEARCH CALIBRAT SELECTION Chapter 5 Section Page JOG DISPLAY SELECTION 7 ACTUAL AND FOLLOWING ERROR When selecting this option the CNC will show both the actual axes positions and theirfollowing errors ACTUAL FOLLOWING ERROR X 00100 000 X 00000 002 Z 00004 269 Z 00000 003 C 00011 755 C 00000 002 F03000 0000 96100 S00000 0000 100 T0000 D000 S 0000 RPM 50000 M MIN G00 G17 G54 PARTC 000000 CYTIME 00 00 00 00 TIMER 000000 00
282. dius compensation will be cancelled G40 if it was active The distance between the starting point and final point Z X along the X axis must be equal to or greater than L The distance between the starting point and the initial point R Q along the Z axis must be equal to or greater than M 7 Xa 9 05 If the tool position is not correct to execute the cycle will display the corresponding error message Chapter 9 Section Page CANNEDCYCLES DRILLINGCANNED 33 CYCLE G83 9 6 683 AXIAL DRILLING AND TAPPING CANNED CYCLE With this cycle itis possible to perform an axial drilling or tapping whose selection depends on the programming format being used For tapping set parameter 0 and for axial drilling set gt 0 The basic block structure for each operation is Axialdrilling G83 X ZIBDKHC Axial tapping G83 X ZI BODK X 5 5 Defines the X coordinate of the drilling position It must be programmed in absolute and in the active units radius or diameter Z 5 5 Defines the Z coordinate of the drilling position It must be programmed in absolute I 5 5 Defines the total drilling depth It is referred to the drilling point Thus it will have a positive value when drilling in the negative Z direction and vice versa If programmed with a value of 0 the CNC will display the corresponding error message B5
283. e 5 parameter at the beginning of the profile definition and the label for the E parameter at the end of the profile definition 1061 Label cannot be searched DETECTED During execution in MDI mode CAUSE While programming in high level language an N or GOTO N instruction has been defined SOLUTION RPT or GOTO type instructions cannot be programmed in MDI mode 1062 Subroutine not available in program DETECTED During execution CAUSE A subroutine has been called which is contained in a program that is currently being used by the DNC SOLUTION Wait for the DNC to be done with the program If the subroutine is going to be used often it is advisable to keep it in a separate program 1063 Program cannot be opened DETECTED During execution CAUSE While running a program in infinite mode an attempt has been made to execute another infinite program using the EXEC instruction at the running program SOLUTION Only one infinite program may be run at a time 1064 The program cannot be executed DETECTED During execution CAUSE An attempt has been made to execute a program from another one using the EXEC instruction but the program does not exit or is protected against execution SOLUTION program to be executed with the EXEC instruction must be in CNC memory and it must be executable 36 ERROR TROUBLESHOOTING MANUAL Hicon 3 8055T
284. e The main spindle remains in its previous status Example 51500 M4 Second spindle turns counter clockwise at 1500 rpm The main spindle keeps turning at 1000 rpm To select the main spindle again execute function G29 From then on all the keyboard actions and spindle related functions affect the main spindle The second spindle stays in its previous status Example 52000 The main spindle keeps turning clockwise but at 2000 rpm The second spindle keeps turning at 1500 rpm Page Chapter 5 Section 8 PROGRAMMING BYISOCODE SPINDLESELECTION G28 G29 5 5 SYNCHRONIZED SPINDLES 630 G77S 6788 With function G77S two spindles main and secondary may be synchronized in speed This synchronism may be cancelled with function G78S Always program G77S and G78S because functions G77 G78 to slave and unslave the axes When the spindles are synchronized in speed the second one turns at the same speed as the main spindle Function G77S may be executed at any time open loop M3 M4 or closed loop M19 the spindles may even have different ranges gears General output SYNSPEED M5560 will be high while the spindle are in synch same speed When this synchronism is cancelled G78S the second spindle recovers its previous speed and status M3 M4 M5 M19 and the main spindle stays in the current status If while in synchronism S is programmed greater than the maximum allowed the CNC applies the m
285. e 30 Chapter 9 Section CANNEDCYCLES FACING WITHSTRAIGHT SECTIONS G82 When programming D with a value other than 0 the cutter withdraws at a 45 angle up to the safety distance left drawing When programming D with a 0 value the exit path is the same as the entry path This may be interesting for grooving complex profiles to use these cycles on cylindrical grinders etc When not programming D the tool withdrawalis carried out following the profile up to the last pass C distance right drawing It must be borne in mind that when D is not programmed the cycle execution time is greater but the amount of stock to be removed on the finishing pass is less 125 5 Defines the finishing pass along X It is given in radius and if not programmed a value of 0 will be assumed 5 5 Defines the finishing pass along Z It is given in radius and if not programmed a value of 0 will be assumed F5 5 Defines the feedrate for the final roughing pass If not programmed or programmed with a value of 0 it means that there is no final roughing pass X d 5 5 Defines the feedrate for the finishing pass If not programmed or programmed with a value of 0 it is considered that no finishing pass is desired Chapter 9 Section Page CANNEDCYCLES FACINGWITHSTRAIGHT 31 SECTIONS G82 Basic operation The canned cycle will analyze the programmed profile performing if necessary a f
286. e same one corresponds it recovers the information which was in the main window before requesting help The help menu can also be abandoned after pressing the ESC key to return to the previous operating option or the MAIN MENU key to return to the main menu Chapter 2 Section Page OPERATING MODE HELPSYSTEMS 3 CANNED CYCLES EDITING HELP Itis possible to access this help when editing a canned cycle It offers information on the corresponding canned cycle and an editing assistance for the selected canned cycle is obtained at this point For the user s own cycles a similar editing assistance can be obtained by means of a user program This program must be prepared with screen customizing instructions Once all the fields or parameters of the canned cycle have been defined the CNC will show the information which exists in the main window before requesting help The canned cycle which is programmed by means of editing assistance will be shown in the editing window and the operator can modify or complete this block before entering it in memory by pressing the ENTER key Editing assistance can be abandoned at any time by pressing the HELP key The CNC will show the information which existed on the main window before requesting help and allows programming of the canned cycle to continue in the editing window The help menu can also be abandoned after pressing the ESC key to return to the previous operating option or t
287. e the indicated number oftimes The number of repetitions is represented by the letter N followed by upto 4 digits 0 9999 Theactive machining operation does not take place if NO is programmed Only the movement programmed within the block takes place BLOCK COMMENT The CNC allows you to incorporate any kind of information into all blocks in the form of a comment The comment is programmed at the end of the block and should begin with the character 5 If a block begins with all its contents will be considered as a comment and it will not be executed Empty blocks are not permitted They should contain at least one comment Page Chapter 2 Section CREATINGAPROGRAM 3 e AXES AND COORDINATE SYSTEMS Given that the objective of the CNC is to control the movement and positioning of axes it is necessary to determine by means of coordinates the position of the point to be reached 7 The CNC allows you to use absolute relative or incremental coordinates throughout the same program 3 1 NOMENCLATURE OF THE AXES The axes are named according to DIN 66217 Characteristics of the system of axes X amp Y main movements on the main work plane of the machine Z parallel to the main axis of the machine perpendicular to the main XY plane U V W auxiliary axes parallel to X Y Z respectively rotary axes on each of the X Y Z axes Chapter 3 Section
288. e Chapter 9 Section 30 PLC LOGICANALYZER 9 10 3 EXECUTE TRACE Once having selected the variables and trigger conditions desired press the EXECUTE TRACE softkey to indicate to the CNC to begin the data capture When the selected trigger condition is met the trigger line displayed at the information window will change its color While the trace is being executed the information window will display the message Trace Status CAPTURING The trace will be completed when the internal memory buffer dedicated to this function is full or it is interrupted by pressing the STOP TRACE softkey At this point the information window will show the message Trace Status COMPLETE Chapter 9 Section Page PLC LOGICANALYZER 31 9 10 3 1 DATA CAPTURE The data capture takes place atthe beginning of each cycle PRG and PE after reading the physical inputs and updating the marks corresponding to the CNC logic outputs and just before starting the PLC program execution Use this instruction to carry out another data capture while executing the PLC cycle This instruction permits the data capture of signals changing at frequencies greater than the cycle time as well as of those changing status during the execution ofthe cycle while keeping it the same at the beginning and at the end of the cycle Example of how to use the TRACE instruction PRG TRACE TRACE TRACE END PES TRACE
289. e Halon speed m spun OUT sneis eaaa 7 5 4 selenom 128 G29 em M 8 5 5 Synchronized spindles 030 G77S UR AM Rap aa 9 5 6 Tooliumber T and toololiset eee mene te eee ie ak er oe 10 a Mliscellau ous function us asserere pho Fabr bep rk FEMPCR GRE 12 571 MOO Programi Stop 13 S42 programi StOP 13 552 End Of proprali Ho A 13 57A MI30 Eud of program with return to first 13 57 5 Clockwise spindle iicet anainn 13 5 56 Counterclockwise spindle rotation Lue aie oor ite 13 3 57 MOS Spindle ris quae hoe npe ahaa r 13 3 58 Tool chant aoc e RIDE 14 3 59 Spindle orentati n Rua Kos eive Racine 14 5 7 10 M41 M42 M43 M44 Spindle speed range change 15 5 7 11 MAS spindle 7 live essct or tio 15 6 PATH CONTROL 6 1 Rapid ave CODD ausi Rp HERI REUS aie d Kin 2 6 2 Linear
290. e accessing error DETECTED During execution CAUSE An attempt has been made to read or write a SERCOS variable from the CNC but 1 The variable does not exist 2 The maximum minimum values have been exceeded 3 The SERCOS variable has variable length 4 the variable is read only and cannot be written SOLUTION Check that the variable is of the right type for that particular action 4019 Axis drive error on DETECTED During execution CAUSE These messages come with errors 4002 4011 When one of those errors come up it indicates on which axis it came up 4021 Spindle drive error 4022 2nd spindle drive error 4023 Auxiliary spindle drive error DETECTED During execution CAUSE These messages come with errors 4002 4011 When one of those errors come up it indicates on which spindle it came up 4024 SERCOS error when homing DETECTED During execution CAUSE The SERCOS home searching command has been executed wrong 4025 SERCOS ring error 1 DETECTED During execution CAUSE The time it takes to calculate the axis speed exceeds the cycle time set to transmit to the drive SOLUTION Contact the Service Department 50 ERROR TROUBLESHOOTING MANUAL Figon 3 8055T CNC TABLE DATA ERRORS echk gen CHECKSUM ERROR GENERAL PARAMETERS Initialize ENTER ESC echk cab CHECKSUM ERROR SPINDLE PARAMETERS Initialize ENTER ESC echk cab2 CHECKSUM ERROR 2nd SPINDLE
291. e after the cutting conditions F S T or D or the M functions 2 When the marks of the block skip conditional block 1 2 or 3 are not at the beginning of the block 3 When programming a block number greater than 9999 while programming in ISO code 4 While programming in high level the value of the RPT instruction exceeds 9999 SOLUTION The solution for each cause is 1 2 Remember that the programming order is 1 Block skip conditional block 1 2 or 3 2 Label N 3 G functions 4 Axes coordinates X Y Z 5 Machining conditions F S T D 6 M functions All the data need not be programmed 3 Correct the block syntax Program the labels between 0 and 9999 4 Correct the block syntax Program the labels between 0 and 9999 0003 Improper data order DETECTED While editing at the CNC or while executing a program transmitted via DNC CAUSE The machining conditions or the tool data have been programmed in the wrong order SOLUTION Remember that the programming order is F 5 D All the data need not be programmed ERROR TROUBLESHOOTING MANUAL 1 8055T CNC 0004 No more information allowed in the block DETECTED While editing at the CNC or while executing a program transmitted via DNC CAUSE S The various causes might be 1 When editing a G function after an axis coordinate 2 When trying to edit some data after a G function o
292. e axis machine parameter MAXFEED may be programmed via code FO or by giving F the corresponding value The programmed feedrate F is effective working in linear G01 or circular G02 G03 interpolation If function F is not programmed CNC assumes the feedrate to be FO When working in rapid travel G00 the machine will moveatthe rapid feedrate indicated by the axis machine parameter GOOFEED apart from the programmed The programmed feedrate F may be varied between 0 and 255 via the PLC or by DNC or between 0 and 120 via the switch located on the Operator Panel of the CNC The CNC however is equipped with the general machine parameter MAXFOVR to limit maximum feedrate variation Ifyou are working in rapid travel G00 rapid feedrate will be fixed at 100 alternatively it can be varied between 0 and 100 depending on how the machine parameter RAPIDOVR is set When functions G33 electronic threading G86 longitudinal threadcutting canned cycle or G87 face threadcutting canned cycle are executed the feedrate cannot be modified It is set at 100 of programmed 5 2 1 FEEDRATE IN MM MIN OR INCHES MIN G94 From the moment the code G94 is programmed the control takes that the feedrates programmed through F5 5 are in mm min or inches mm If the movement corresponds to a rotary axis the CNC interprets the feedrate as being programmed in degrees min interpolation is made between
293. e basic block structure is G86 X ZQRKIBEDLCJAW XA TPU9IO1 5 5 Z 5 5 0 5 5 5 5 5 5 1 5 5 B 5 5 Defines the X coordinate of the initial point of the thread It must be programmed in absolute values and in the active units radius or diameter Defines the Z coordinate of the initial point of the thread It must be programmed in absolute values Defines the X coordinate of the final point of the thread It must be programmed in absolute and in radius or diameter depending on the active units Defines the Z coordinate of the final point of the thread Optional It is used with parameter W for thread repair Defines the Z coordinate of the point where the thread is to be measured Usually itis an intermediate point of the thread Defines the depth of the thread in radius Its value must be positive for outside threads and negative for inside ones Ifa value of 0is programmed the CNC will display the corresponding error message Defines the depth of the threading passes and it is given in radius 09102 Page 44 Chapter 9 Section CANNEDCYCLES LONGITUDINAL THREADCUTTING G86 fapositive value is programmed the depth of each pass will depend on the number of the corresponding pass This way the penetrations along the X axis are B BVZ BV3 BV4 BVn fanegative value is programmed the passes will have the same depth with a value equal t
294. e block indicated by the cursor The cursor will position over the new edited block and the editing area will be cleared so another can be written When the position values of all the axes are not to be programmed in this fashion the CNC permits to select the desired axes To do this in this operating mode and within the EDITOR PARAMETERS option there is a soft key for TEACH IN AXES Chapter 4 Section Page EDIT TEACH IN EDITING 4 1 3 INTERACTIVE EDITOR This editor leads the operator through the program editing process by means of questions he she will answer This type of editing offers the following advantages No knowledge of CNC programming language is required CNC only admits the data it is requesting thus no erroneous data can be entered programmer has at all times the appropriate programming aide by means of screens and messages When selecting this option the CNC displays in the main window a series of graphic options selectable by softkey If the selected option has more menus the CNC will keep showing new graphic options until the desired one is selected From this moment the information corresponding to this option will appear in the main window and it will start requesting the data necessary to program it Astherequested data is entered the editing window will show in CNC language the block being edited The CNC will generate all necessary blocks an
295. e block the initial block and the final block will be the same one Once the first and last blocks are selected the CNC will highlight the selected blocks requesting confirmation to move them Then indicate the block after which this group of blocks must be placed Press the START OPERATION softkey to carry out the move Page Chapter 4 Section 20 EDIT MOVEBLOCK 47 COPY BLOCK With this option it is possible to copy ablock or group of blocks by previously indicating the first and last blocks to be copied To do so follow these steps Position the cursor over the first block to be copied and press the INITIAL BLOCK softkey Position the cursor over the last block to be copied and press the FINAL BLOCK softkey If the last block to be copied is also the last one ofthe program it can also be selected by pressing the TO THE END softkey To copy only one block the initial block and the final block will be the same one Once the first and last blocks are selected the CNC will highlight the selected blocks requesting confirmation to copy them Then indicate the block after which this group of blocks must be placed Press the START OPERATION softkey to carry out this command Chapter 4 Section Page EDIT COPY BLOCK 21 4 8 COPY A PROGRAM With this option it is possible to copy a block or group of blocks of one program into
296. e center coordinates must be given at variables MASCFI and MASCSE for the first and second axis of the main plane G18 MASCSE pm 7 i ee MASCFI Chapter 5 Section Page OG JOGGING WITHELECTRONIC 15 HANDWHEEL 5 2 MANUAL CONTROL OF THE SPINDLE Itis possible to control spindle by means of the following Operator Panel keys without the need to execute M03 M04 or MOS issimilarto executing It starts the spindle clockwise and it displays in A thehistory of machining conditions is similar to Executing M04 It starts the spindle counter clockwise and it displays M04 in the history of machining conditions is similar to executing 05 It stops the spindle and vary the programmed spindle speed between the set in spindle machine parameters MINSOVR and MAXSOVR with incremental steps set in spindle machine parameter SOVRSTEP Itisrecommended to define the spindle speed before selecting the turning direction in order to avoid an abrupt start Page Chapter 5 Section 16 JOG MANUALCONTROL OF THE SPINDLE 6 TABLES In order to select a new tool tool offset or zero offset it is necessary that those values be previously stored at the CNC The tables available at the CNC are Zero Offset table It must be defined It indicates each axis offset for each zero offset Tool Offset table It must be defined It stores
297. e corresponding to the point where the cursor is to be placed along this axis The horizontal position is defined as the X value between 1 and 638 and the vertical position as the Y value between 0 and 334 Once these coordinates have been keyed in press ENTER and the cursor will be positioned at the indicated coordinates The possible options to modify a page or symbol are CLEAR PAGE Allows the selected page or symbol to be deleted Once this softkey has been pressed the CNC will request an OK before executing the indicated operation Ifthis option is executed the CNC will delete the page or symbol being edited but it will keep in the Memkey Card the contents of that page or symbol the last time the SAVE command was executed Page Chapter 10 Section 18 SCREENEDITOR MODIFICATIONS DELETE ELEMENTS This option allows an element of the displayed page or symbol to be selected and then deleted To do this follow these steps 1 Place the cursor in the position to delete an element and press the ENTER key to validate it An area of between 8 pixels from the position indicated will be analyzed If the element to be deleted is a filled circle or a filled polygon the cursor must be positioned on a point on the circumference or external polygon periphery 2 If any graphic element or text exists in this area this will be highlighted and you will be asked if you wish to delete it Press the EN
298. e cursor to the opposite corner The CNC will continuously show the rectangle being drawn 3 Press ENTER to validate the rectangle or ESC to cancel it Repeat these steps to draw more rectangles If no more rectangles are desired press ESC to return to the previous menu CIRCLE Follow these steps after pressing this softkey 1 Place the cursor at the center of the circle and press ENTER to validate it 2 Move the cursor in order to define the radius As the cursor moves the CNC will show the circle corresponding to that radius 3 Press ENTER to validate the circle or ESC to cancel it Once the circle is validated the cursor is positioned at its center in order to facilitate the drawing of concentric circles Repeat these steps to draw more circles If no more circles are desired press ESC to return to the previous menu Chapter 10 Section Page SCREENEDITOR GRAPHICELEMENTS 11 ARC Follow these steps after pressing this softkey 1 Place the cursor at one of the arc s ends and press ENTER to validate it 2 Move the cursor to the other end of the arc the CNC will show a line joining both ends and press ENTER to validate it The cursor is now positioned automatically at the center of that line 3 Movethecursorto definethe curvature The line will become an arc passing through 3 points the two ends and the cursor point 4 Press ENTER to validate it or ESC to cancel it Repeat these steps to
299. e depth ofthe thread Its value will be positive if threading in the negative Z direction and vice versa Ifa value of 0is programmed the CNC will display the corresponding error message Defines the depth of the threading passes and it is given in radius Ifa positive value is programmed the depth of each pass will depend on the number of the corresponding pass This way the penetrations along the Z axis are B BV2 BV3 BV4 BVn CANNEDCYCLES FACETHREADCUTTING 49 Chapter 9 Section Page G87 E 5 5 Q S amp BE fanegative value is programmed the passes will have the same depth with a value equal to the one programmed B This way the penetrations along the Z axis are B 2B 3B 4B nB favalue of 0 is programmed the CNC will display the corresponding error message Itis related to parameter B Itindicates the minimum value to be reached the penetration pitch when parameter B has been programmed with a positive value If not programmed a value of 0 will be assumed D 5 5 Defines the safety distance and it indicates at what distance along Z from the initial point must the tool be positioned in the approach move It is programmed in radius The return to the initial point after each pass will be carried out maintaining this distance D from the programmed section If the programmed value is positive this withdra
300. e has been defined with a final diameter larger than the initial one SOLUTION an outside groove the final diameter must be smaller than the initial one GEOMETRY Final diameter is not internal DETECTED While executing CAUSE An inside groove has been defined with a final diameter smaller than the initial one SOLUTION Inan inside groove the final diameter must be larger than the initial one 58 ERROR TROUBLESHOOTING MANUAL FAGOR 3 8055T CNC ROUGHING Wrong tool for GROOVING DETECTED While executing CAUSE The selected tool has the wrong geometry for this operation SOLUTION Select a tool with the right geometry FINISHING Wrong tool for GROOVING DETECTED While executing CAUSE The selected tool has the wrong geometry for this operation SOLUTION Select a tool with the right geometry GEOMETRY Wrong angle for GROOVING DETECTED While executing CAUSE The angle of the groove walls is either smaller than 0 or greater than 90 SOLUTION angle of the groove walls must be in the 0 to 90 range GEOMETRY The sides of the groove cut each other DETECTED While executing CAUSE The two walls of the groove intersect each other SOLUTION Check the cycle data The groove walls must not intersect each other Errors in the profile cycles Cycle without roughing or finishing DETECTED While executing CAUSE No tool has been selected for roughing or finishing SOLUTION Select the tool for r
301. e indicated axis TPOS X C Theoretical real lag position value of the indicated axis FLWE X C Following error of the indicated axis DIST X C Distance travelled by the indicated axis LIMPL X C Upper second travel limit LIMMI X C Lower second travel limit VARIABLES ASSOCIATED WITH HANDWHEELS Section11 2 8 Variable HANPF HANPS HANPT HANPFO HANFCT HBEVAR MASLAN MASCFI MASCSE 1st handwheel pulses received since CNC power up 2nd handwheel pulses received since CNC power up 3rd handwheel pulses received since CNC power up 4th handwheel pulses received since CNC power up Multiplying factor different per handwheel When having several HBE handwheel Reading enabled axis to jog x factor x1 x10 x 100 Angle of the linear path with Path Handwheel Arc center coordinates when using Path Handwheel Arc center coordinates when using Path Handwheel R R R R R R R W R W R W VARIABLES ASSOCIATED WITH THE MAIN SPINDLE Section 11 2 9 Variable Q Z Q SREAL SPEED DNCS PLCS PRGS CSS DNCCSS PLCCSS PRGCSS SSO PRGSSO DNCSSO PLCSSO CNCSSO SLIMIT DNCSL PLCSL PRGSL POSS RPOSS TPOSS RTPOSS FLWES SYNCER DJEDDA zi 2 a MANO Real spindle speed in r p m Active spindle speed at the CNC Spindle speed selected via DNC Spindle speed selected via PLC Spindle speed
302. e name of the shared directory For example 8055 Whenselecting the option Connect again when initiating the session the selected CNC will appear on each power up as another path of the Windows Explorer without having to define it again This connection is established through Ethernet and therefore the CNC does not control the syntax of the programs while they are received or modified Wheneveraccessing the program directory ofthe Hard Disk HD the following verification takes place File name The file number must always have 6 digits and the extension PIM for milling or PIT for lathe Examples 001204 PIM 000100 Ifthe file has been given the wrong name for example 1204 PIM or 100 PIT the CNC will not change it but it will display it with the comment 46 74 The file cannot be modified from the CNC It must be edited from the PC to correct the error File size If the file is empty size 0 the CNC will display it with the comment The file can be edited or deleted either from the CNC or from the First line of the program The first line of the program must have the character the comment associated with the file up to 20 characters and between the 2 commas the program attributes O OEM H hidden M modifiable X executable Examples Comment MX OMX Page Chapter 1 Section OVERVIEW
303. e of each axis 1 in the case of being active and 0 if The name of the axis corresponds to the order they have been programmed Example If the CNC controls axes X Y Z U B C Axis 1 X Axis2 Y Axis3 Z Axis4 U Axis5 B Axis6 C Returns the general scaling factor being applied Returns the indicated specific scaling factor of the axis X C Returns the status of the probe O The probe is not touching the part 1 The probe is touching the part Returns in seconds the time indicated by the system clock Possible values 0 4294967295 If this variable is accessed block preparation is interrupted and the CNC waits for this command to be executed to resume block preparation Page 32 PROGRAMMINGINHIGH LEVELLANGUAGE OTHERVARIABLES Chapter 11 Section TIME DATE CYTIME FIRST ANAIn AXICOM Returns the time in hours minutes seconds format 150 assigns hh mm ss to P150 For example if the time 1s 18h 22m 34 sec P150 will contain 182234 Ifthis variable is accessed block preparation is interrupted and the CNC waits for this command to beexecuted toresume block preparation Returns the date in year month day format P151 DATE assigns year month day to P151 Forexample if the date is April 25th 1992 P151 will contain 920425 Ifthis variable is accessed block preparation is interrupted and the CNC waits for this command to beexecuted toresume block prep
304. e of the currently defined variables Before pressing this softkey we must select with the cursor the location where that variable will be shown Once this optionis selected the softkeys will change their background color to white and they will show the information corresponding to the editing type possible Itis possible to analyze any logic signal of the PLC I3 BIR120 TEN3 CDW 4 DFU M200 etc and it can be referred to by its name or by its associated symbol Itis also possible to analyze logic expressions formed with one or more consultations which must follow the syntax and rules used to write the PLC equations M100 AND NOT I15 OR I5 AND CPS C1 EQ 100 Although it might seem difficult to understand the processing of expressions and consultations at a logic analyzer it should be borne in mind that it could prove very useful when it comes to finding out the status of a whole expression Itis not possible to use more than 16 flank edge detecting instructions DFU and DFD among all the selected variable definitions and trigger conditions By pressing the ESC key the variable being edited will be deleted From this point on that variable can be edited again Page Chapter 9 Section 26 PLC LOGICANALYZER Once the variable has been edited press the ENTER key The new variable will appear in the cursor position inside the variable area Only the first 8 characters of the selected variable or expres
305. e parameter INPOSW2 On the other hand when working in G05 the difference between the theoretical and real profiles depends on the programmed feedrate value F The higher the feedrate the greater the difference between both paths Function G50 is modal and incompatible with G05 G07 and G51 On power up after executing M02 M30 or after EMERGENCY or RESET the CNC assumes code 05 or G07 depending on how the general machine parameter ICORNER is set Page Chapter 7 Section 6 ADDITIONALPREPARATORYFUNCTIONS SQUARECORNER G07 ROUND CORNER G05 G50 74 LOOK AHEAD 651 Usually a program consisting of very small movement blocks CAM digitizing etc run very slowly With this feature high speed machining is possible for this type of programs It is recommended to have the CPU TURBO feature when using LOOK AHEAD because the CNC has to analyze the machining path ahead of time up to 50 blocks in order to calculate the maximum feedrate for each section of the path The programming format is G51 A E A 0 255 Is optional and it defines the percentage of acceleration to be applied Whennotprogrammedor programmed with a 0 value the CNC assumes the acceleration value set by machine parameter for each axis E 5 5 Maximum contouring error allowed Parameter A permits using a standard working acceleration and another one to be used when executing with Look Ahead The smaller the E parame
306. e predetermined texts follow these steps 1 Press the corresponding softkey The CNC will show a screen area to indicate the text number The cursor may be moved within this area with the right and left arrow keys n Indicate desired number by keying it in from the keyboard and press ENTER The CNC will display the text corresponding to this number and the rectangle indicating the screen space it occupies If another text is desired key in the other number and press ENTER again Press ESC to quit this option without inserting the text and the CNC will show the previous menu 1 Once the desired text has been selected press ENTER The typed text will remain in the editing window and the cursor will be positioned in the main window 4 Position the rectangle by moving the cursor 5 Press ENTER to validate this command and the text will replace the rectangle on the screen Observe that once the text has been entered neither its size its color can be modified Therefore these options must be selected before pressing ENTER Warning This application may be useful when the pages or symbols being edited are to beshowninotherlanguages since the CNC will translate them into the chosen language Usually when the texts are to be shown in one single language it is more practical to simply write them upinstead of searching themina list of more than 1500 predetermined messages However sho
307. e program being executed This can be used in any operating mode In order to recover the previous display it is necessary to press the keys using the same sequence Chapter 1 Section Page OVERVIEW KEYBOARD LAYOUT 7 1 44 OPERATOR PANEL LAYOUT According tothe utility which the different parts have it can be considered that the Operator Panel of the CNC is divided in the following way 1 Position of the emergency button or electronic handwheel 2 Keyboard for manual movement of axes 3 Selector switch with the following functions Select the multiplication factor of the number of pulses from the electronic handwheel 1 10 or 100 Select the incremental value of the movement of the axes in movements made in the JOG mode Modify the programmed axis feedrate between 0 and 120 4 Keyboard whichallows the spindle to be controlled it being possible to activate it in the desired direction stop it or vary the programmed turning speed between percentage values established by means of spindle machine parameters MINSOVR and with an incremental step established by means of the spindle machine parameter SOVRSTEP 5 Keyboard for CYCLE START and CYCLE STOP of the block or program to be executed Page Chapter 1 Section 8 OVERVIEW OPERATOR PANEL LAYOUT 2 OPERATING MODES After turning on the CNC or after pressing the sequence of SHIFT RESET keys the
308. e spindle in open loop M3 M4 and with the spindle in closed loop M19 In order to work in closed loop it is necessary to have a rotary encoder installed on the spindle of the machine To switch from open loop to closed loop execute function M19 or M19 5 5 5 The CNC will act as follows Tf the spindle does not have a home switch the CNC changes the spindle speed until itreaches the one set by spindle machine parameter REFEEDJ2 finds the marker pulse home and then orients the spindle to the position defined by S 5 5 Ifthe spindle has a home switch the CNC modifies the spindle speed until it reaches the one set by spindle machine parameter REFEED1 Then it carries out the search forthe home switch at this speed Next it looks for the marker pulse home at the speed set by spindle machine parameter REFEED2 and finally it orients the spindle to the position defined by 5 5 5 If only M19 is executed the spindle is oriented to position SO after having found the home switch To now orient the spindle to another position program M19 S 5 5 the CNC will not perform the home search since it is already in closed loop and it will orient the spindle to the indicated position S 5 5 The S 5 5 code indicates the spindle orient position in degrees from the encoder s marker pulse position SO The sign indicates the counting direction and the 5 5 value is always considered to be absolute coordinates regardles
309. e taper With a negative sign if the pitchis programmed along the associated axis Ifa value of 0is programmed the CNC will display the corresponding error message The right hand and left hand threads will be programmed by indicating the direction of the spindle rotation M03 or M04 J5 5 Exit from the thread It defines at what distance from the final point R Q along the Z axis starts the withdrawal from the thread If not programmed a value of 0 is assumed A 5 5 Defines the penetration angle of the tool It is referred to X axis and if not programmed a value of 30 will be taken 0 2 09104 If A 0 is programmed the thread will be made with radial penetration Ifthe value assigned to parameter A is half the tool angle the penetration will be done rubbing the thread s flank If A is programmed with a negative value the penetration will be done alternating the flanks of the thread W 5 5 Optional Its meaning depends on parameter K If parameter K has not been defined it indicates the angular position of the spindle corresponding to the thread s starting point With this it is possible to make multiple entry threads The following example shows how to make 3 entry point thread Ti do that 3 threading canned cycles will be programmed with the same values except for W G86 XZORKIBEDLCJA WO G86 XZORKIBEDLCJAWI20 G86 XZORKIBEDLCJA W240 Page Chapter 9 Section 46 CANNEDCYCL
310. e thread is greater than its length SOLUTION Program a distance to the end of the thread smaller than its length GEOMETRY Value of XizXf DETECTED While executing CAUSE The X coordinates of the starting and end points are the same SOLUTION X coordinates of the starting and end points must be different THREADING Value of o gt Xf Xi DETECTED While executing CAUSE The distance to the end of the thread is greater than its length SOLUTION Program a distance to the end of the thread smaller than its length ERROR TROUBLESHOOTING MANUAL 57 8055T CNC 2 Errors in the grooving cycles Cycle without roughing or finishing DETECTED While executing CAUSE No tool has been selected for roughing or finishing SOLUTION Select the tool for roughing If T 0 there is no roughing and for finishing If T 0 there is no finishing ROUGHING Value of A 0 DETECTED While executing CAUSE The cutting depth pass has not been defined A SOLUTION Program a pass greater than zero ROUGHING Value of F 0 DETECTED While executing CAUSE The roughing feedrate F has not been defined SOLUTION Program a positive feedrate other than zero ROUGHING Value of Sz0 DETECTED While executing CAUSE The spindle speed S has not been defined for roughing SOLUTION Program a positive spindle speed S other than zero FINISHING Value of F 0 DETECTED While executing CAUSE No feedrate
311. e to modify the colors used to draw the solid These values will be taken into account for part porgram simulation and execution The following parameters are available Color for the cutter Color for the part Color for the axes Color for the clamps The CNC will show to the right of the screen a series of windows indicating the currently selected colors Among the various colors offered it is also possible to select black If this color is selected to draw the part none of the machining operations will be shown To modify any of them use the up and down arrow keys to select the corresponding window and then the right and left arrow keys to select the desired color Once the colors have been selected press ENTER for the CNC to assume the new values To quit this mode without altering the original values press ESC instead Chapter 3 Section Page EXECUTE SIMULATE GRAPHICS 25 3 5 5 CLEAR SCREEN In order to use this function no part program may be in execution or simulation If this is the case it must be interrupted Erases the screen or graphic representation shown Ifthe solid graphic mode is selected it will return to its initial status showing the unmachined part 3 5 6 DEACTIVATE GRAPHICS Itallowsthe graphic representation to be deactivated at any time even during execution or simulation of a part program To activate this function again the GRAPHICS softkey must be press
312. e tool withdrawal is carried out following the profile up to the last pass C distance right drawing It must be borne in mind that when D is not programmed the cycle execution time is greater but the amount of stock to be removed on the finishing pass is less Defines the finishing pass along X It is given in radius and if not programmed a value of 0 will be assumed Defines the finishing pass along Z If either L or is negative the finishing pass will be carried out in round corner G05 When they are both positive the finishing pass will be performed in square corner 07 If M is not programmed the X and Z residual value will be the one indicated by parameter L and the roughing passes will be the same maintaining the C distance between two consecutive passes XA lt 4 __ 4 0 9 11 Z c Defines the penetration feedrate for the valleys If not programmed or programmed with a value of 0 it assumes the machining feedrate that was programmed before calling the cycle Defines the feedrate for the final roughing pass If not programmed or programmed with a value of 0 it means that there is no final roughing pass X TPOSC12 gt Z Page 18 Chapter 9 Section CANNEDCYCLES STOCKREMOVALCANNED CYCLEALONGZAXIS G69 H5 5 Definesthefeedrateforthe finishing pass If not programmed or programmed
313. e use of these global purpose variables will depend on the type of block in which they are programmed and the channel of execution In block programmed in ISO code parameters can be associated with all fields G X C FS T D M The block label number will be defined with a numerical value If parameters are used in blocks programmed in high level language these can be programmed within any expression Program which are executed in the user channel may contain any global parameter but may not use local parameters The CNC will update the parameter table after processing the operations indicated in the block which is in preparation This operation is always done before executing the block and for this reason the values shown in the table do not necessarily have to correspond to the block being executed If the Execution Mode is abandoned after interrupting the execution of the program the CNC will update the parametertables with values corresponding to the block which was being executed When accessing the local parameter and global parameter table the value assigned to each parameter may be expressed in decimal notation 4127 423 or in scientific notation 223476 E 3 The CNC has high level statements which allow the definition and use of subroutines which can be called from the main program or from another subroutine it also being possible to call a second subroutine from the second to a third etc The CNC limits these calls allow
314. eans of G15 the CNC performs a home search if the spindle was previously operating in open loop The G15 functionis modal and the logic output CA XIS M5955 stays active while the C axis is active No more functions can be programmed in the block containing G15 The C axis is deactivated returning to operate in regular spindle mode open loop after executing an M03 M04 MOS etc On the other hand if machine parameter PERCAX NO the CNC cancels the C function on power up or after executing an M02 M30 EMERGENCY or RESET 6 13 1 MACHINING ON A CYLINDRICAL SURFACE In order to machine on a cylindrical surface first define the radius of the work surface by means of function G15 R and then select the main plane by means of G16 Z C Next program the profile to be machined with linear and circular interpolations as well as tool radius compensation if so required Porgram the C axis as anormal linear axis since the CNC will calculate the corresponding angular movements based on the radius value given by G15 R Program G15 R again to modify the radius at any point of the program Programming example with the X axis in diameter assuming that the work radius ofthe surface to be machined is R20 G15 R20 Machining on a cylindrical surface Chapter 6 Section Page PATHCONTROL ACTIVATE CAXIS G15 23 TP0620 218 G16 2 70 130 190 G
315. eas radius compensation must be selected by the operator by means of functions G40 G41 G42 Ifthereisnotool selected or DO is defined neither tool length nor radius compensation is applied For further information refer to chapter 8 tool compensation in this manual Chapter 5 Section Page PROGRAMMING BYISO CODE TOOL T OFFSET D 11 5 7 MISCELLANEOUS FUNCTION The miscellaneous functions are programmed by means ofthe M4 Code it being possible to program up to 7 functions in the same block When more than one function has been programmed in one block the CNC executes these correlatively to the order in which they have been programmed The CNC is provided with an M functions table with NMISCFUN general machine parameter components specifying for each element Thenumber 0 9999 of the defined miscellaneous M function Thenumberofthesubroutine whichis required to associate to this miscellaneous function An indicator which determines if the M function is executed before or after the movement block in which it is programmed Anindicator which determines if the execution ofthe M function interrupts block preparation or not Anindicator which determines if the M function is executed or not after the execution of the associated subroutine An indicator which determines if the CNC must wait for the signal AUX END or not Executed M signal coming from the PLC to continue the
316. ecute a subroutine stored in MemKey Card in a PC or in the hard disk it must be first copied into the CNC s RAM memory From a program in execution another program can be executed which is in RAM memory in the MemKey Card in a PC or in the hard disk using the EXEC instruction See chapter 14 of the programming manual Utilities This operating mode chapter 7 of this manual lets display the part program directory of all the devices make copies delete rename and even set the protections for any of them Ethernet When having the Ethernet option and if the CNC is configured as another node within the computer network the following operations are possible from any PC of the network Access the part program directory of the Hard Disk HD Edit modify delete rename etc the programs stored on the hard disk HD Copy programs from the hard disk to the PC and vice versa To configure the CNC as another node within the computer network see section 3 3 4 of the installation manual Page Chapter 1 Section OVERVIEW Operations that may be carried out with part programs Consult the program directory in Consult the subroutine directory in Create work directory in Change work directory in Edit a program in Modify a program in Delete a program from Copy from to RAM memory to from Copy from to CARD A to from Copy from to HD to from Copy f
317. ed again To do this the CNC must not be executing or simulating a part program If this is the case it must be interrupted Page Chapter 3 Section 26 EXECUTE SIMULATE GRAPHICS 3 5 7 MEASURE To use this function a Graphic planes XZ XC or CZ must be selected and the CNC must not be executing orsimulating the part program If it is it must be interrupted Once this function is selected the CNC shows the following information on the screen 000110 0010 00151 538 00034 311 00151 538 00333 099 00367 409 00000 000 00367 409 E 1 4296 CAP INS _ JE JE JE The center of the CRT shows a dotted line with two cursors the section to be measured Also the right hand side of the screen shows coordinates of those two cursors with respect to part zero The distance D between them and the components of this distance along the axes of the selected plane X and Z om The cursor step corresponding to the selected display area It is given in the work units millimeters or inches The CNC shows the selected cursor and its coordinates in red To select the other cursor press the or key The CNC shows the new selected cursor and its coordinates in red To move the selected cursor use the up down right and left arrow keys Also with the keystroke sequences Shift Up arrow Shift Down arrow Shift Right arrow and Shift Left arrow itis possible t
318. ed on the product WARNING symbol Ithasan associated text indicating those actions oroperations may hurt people or damage products Electrical Shock symbol Itindicates that point may be under electrical voltage Ground Protection symbol It indicates that point must be connected to the main ground point of the machine as protection for people and units OP Introduction 3 MATERIAL RETURNING TERMS When returning the Monitor or the Central Unit pack it in its original package and with its original packaging material If not available pack it as follows 1 Getacardboard box whose three inside dimensions are atleast 15 cm 6 inches larger than those of the unit The cardboard being used to make the box must have a resistance of 170 Kg 375 1 2 When sending it to a Fagor Automation office for repair attach a label indicating the owner of the unit person to contact type of unit serial number symptom and a brief description of the problem 3 Wrap the unit in a polyethylene roll or similar material to protect it When sending the monitor especially protect the CRT glass 4 Pad the unit inside the cardboard box with poly utherane foam on all sides 5 Sealthe cardboard box with packing tape or industrial staples Introduction 4 FAGOR DOCUMENTATION FOR THE CNC OEM Manual Is directed to the machine builder or person in charge of installing and starting up the CNC USER Manual Is directed to the end
319. ed ones have been set to maximum speed of zero 2 When a gear change has been programmed M41 M42 M43 or M44 but the PLC has not responded with corresponding active gear signal GEAR1 GEAR2 GEAR3 or GEAR4 SOLUTION The solution for each cause is 1 When not using all four gears the lowest ones must be used starting with MAXGEAR1 and the unused gears must be assigned the highest value of the ones used 2 Check the PLC program 1034 S has been programmed without an active range DETECTED During execution CAUSE An attempt has been made to start the spindle but no gear has been selected SOLUTION power up the CNC does not assume any gear Therefore if the gear change function is not automatically generated spindle parameter AUTOGEAR P6 NO the auxiliary functions must be programmed for the gear change M41 M42 M43 or M44 1035 S programmed too large DETECTED During execution CAUSE An S value has been programmed that is greater than the maximum value allowed for the last active range gear SOLUTION Program a smaller S value 32 ERROR TROUBLESHOOTING MANUAL FAGOR 3 8055T CNC 1036 S not programmed in G95 or threadcutting DETECTED During execution CAUSE Either the feedrate has been programmed in mm inches per rev G95 or the Electronic threading G33 without having a spindle speed selected SOLUTION Working in mm re
320. edrate F has not been defined SOLUTION Program a positive feedrate other than zero ERROR TROUBLESHOOTING MANUAL 55 8055T CNC 2 ROUGHING Value of Sz0 DETECTED While executing CAUSE The spindle speed S has not been defined for roughing SOLUTION Program a positive spindle speed S other than zero FINISHING Value of F 0 DETECTED While executing CAUSE No feedrate F has been defined for finishing SOLUTION Program a positive feedrate other than zero FINISHING Value of S 0 DETECTED While executing CAUSE The spindle speed S has not been defined for finishing SOLUTION Program a positive spindle speed S other than zero GEOMETRY Value of Zi Zf DETECTED While executing CAUSE The Z coordinates of the starting and end points are the same SOLUTION Z coordinates of the starting and end points must be different GEOMETRY Value of X Q DETECTED While executing CAUSE The coordinates of the starting and end diameters are the same SOLUTION The X coordinates of the starting and end diameters must be different from the end diameter GEOMETRY Wrong angle value DETECTED While executing CAUSE The taper angle is smaller than 0 or greater than 90 SOLUTION The taper angle must be the 0 to 90 range GEOMETRY Wrong Quadrant DETECTED While executing CAUSE A taper has been defined in the wrong quadrant SOLUTION Select the right quadrant with the
321. een defined SOLUTION tool number must be other than zero TAPPING Value of Lz0 DETECTED While executing CAUSE The tapping depth has not been defined SOLUTION Program a tapping depth other than zero TAPPING Value of Fz0 DETECTED While executing CAUSE The feedrate F has not been defined SOLUTION Program a positive feedrate other than zero TAPPING Value of S 0 DETECTED While executing CAUSE The spindle speed S has not been programmed SOLUTION Program a positive spindle speed S other than zero Errors in the multiple tapping cycle TAPPING Value of T 0 DETECTED While executing CAUSE No tool number has been defined SOLUTION The tool number must be other than zero TAPPING Value of L 0 DETECTED While executing CAUSE The tapping depth has not been defined SOLUTION Program a tapping depth other than zero TAPPING Value of Fz0 DETECTED While executing CAUSE The feedrate F has not been defined SOLUTION Program a positive feedrate other than zero TAPPING Value of S 0 DETECTED While executing CAUSE The spindle speed St of the live tool has not been defined SOLUTION Program a positive spindle speed St other than zero MULTIPLE CYCLE Value of 0 DETECTED While executing CAUSE The angular step between operations has not been programmed SOLUTION Program an angular step other than zero MULTIPLE CYCLE Value of N 0 DETECTED While e
322. efined in any of the following ways REPOSC X Y Z REPOSC X Z Y 7 If the REPOS statement is detected while executing a subroutine not activated by an interruption input the CNC will issue the corresponding error message Chapter 12 Section Page PROGRAM CONTROLSTATEMENTS SUBROUTINESTATEMENTS 11 12 6 PROGRAM STATEMENTS With this CNC from a program in execution one can Execute another program essere Statement EXEC P Generate d new e enn v REP Statement OPEN P Add blocks to an existing program Statement WRITE EXEC P expression directory The EXEC P statement executes the part program of the indicated directory The part program may be defined by anumber or any expression resulting in a number By default the CNC assumes that the part program is in the CNC s RAM memory If itis in another device it must be indicated in directory CARDA in the Memkey CARD HD on the hard disk DNCI at a PC connected through serial line 1 DNC2 at a PC connected through serial line 2 OPEN P expression destination directory A D program comment This statement starts editing a part program whose number will be given by any number or expression resulting in a number By default the new part program edited will be stored in the CNC s RAM memory To store it another device it mu
323. efinition The Profile Direction softkey indicates whether the profile is programmed clockwise orcounterclockwise This datais very important for later modifications and profile intersection Every time this softkey is pressed the text at the top of the middle right window changes C Eg clockwise counterclockwise A straight angular profile is defined with a single command but the CNC internally breaks into 4 straight segments Page Chapter 4 Section mE PROFILE EDITOR 4 1 42 PROFILE EDITING When pressing the PROFILE softkey the CNC requests the starting point of the profile To define it use the corresponding softkeys Forexample if when working in the XY planethe new desired starting point is 20 50 X 20 ENTER Z 50 ENTER The values may be set by means of a numeric constant or by means of any expression Examples X 100 X 10 cos 45 X 20 30 sine 30 X 2 20 30 sine 30 Once the starting point has been set press the VALIDATE The CNC will show a filled circle in the graphics area to indicate the starting point of the profile Also the softkeys will show the following options STRAIGHT LINE CLOCKWISE ARC To edit a straight section To edit a clockwise arc COUNTERCLOCKWISE ARC To edit a counterclockwise arc CORNERS MODIFY NEW PROFILE FINISH To insert roundings chamfers tangential entries and exits To modify the starting poin
324. elected via DNC Its value is given in m min or feet min A value of 0 means that no speed is selected Returns the Constant Surface Speed selected via PLC Its value is given in m min or feet min A value of 0 means that no speed is selected Returns the Constant Surface Speed selected by program Its value is given in m min or feet min Page 22 Chapter 11 Section PROGRAMMINGINHIGH LEVELLANGUAGE VARIABLES FOR THESECONDSPINDLE SSSO SDNCSO SPLCSO SCNCSO SSLIMI SDNCSL SPLCSL SPRGSL SPOSS SRPOSS STPOSS SRTPOS Returns the Override 96 of the spindle speed selected at the CNC This will be given by an integer between 0 and MAXSOVR maximum 255 This spindle speed percentage may be indicated by the PLC by DNC or from the front panel and the CNC will select one of them the order of priority from highest to lowest being by program by DNC by PLC and from the front panel Returns the spindle speed percentage selected by DNC If this has a value of 0 it means that it is not selected Returns the spindle speed percentage selected by PLC If this has a value of 0 it means that it is not selected Returns spindle speed percentage selected from the front panel Returnsthe value established forthe spindle speed limit in revolutions per minute selected at the CNC This limit can be indicated by program by the PLC or DNC and the CNC selects one ofthese t
325. elected via PLC Spindle speed selected by program Constant surface feed active at the CNC in meters min or feet min Constant surface feed selected via DNC Constant surface feed selected via PLC Constant surface feed selected by program Spindle Speed Override 96 active at the CNC Spindle Speed Override selected by program Spindle Speed Override selected via DNC Spindle Speed Override selected via PLC Spindle Speed Override selected from front panel Spindle speed limit in rpm active at the CNC Spindle speed limit selected via DNC Spindle speed limit selected via PLC Spindle speed limit selected by program Spindle real position max 999999999 in 0 0001 Spindle real position between 0 and 360 in 0 0001 Spindle theoretical position max 999999999 in 0 0001 Spindle theoretical position between 0 and 360 in 0 0001 Spindle following error when in Closed loop M19 in degrees VARIABLES ASSOCIATED WITH THE LIVE TOOL Section 11 2 11 Variable ASPROG Rpm programmed in M45 S within the associated subroutine LIVRPM Rpm of the live tool in TC mode Section 11 2 12 Variable PLCMSG Number of the active PLC message with the highest priority PLCIn 32 PLC inputs starting from n PLCOn 32 PLC outputs starting from n PLCMn 32 PLC marks starting from n PLCRn Indicated n Register PLCTn Indicated n Timer s count
326. end Cancellation of tool radius compensation Right hand tool radius compensation Left hand tool radius compensation Tangential control Controlled corner rounding Look ahead Movement to hard stop Program coordinates with respect to home Page Chapter 5 Section 2 PROGRAMMINGBYISOCODE PREPARATORY FUNCTIONS lt Function Meaning Section G54 G55 G56 G57 G58 Absolute zero offset Absolute zero offset Absolute zero offset Absolute zero offset Additive zero offset Additive zero offset Axial drilling tapping canned cycle Radial drilling tapping canned cycle Longitudinal slot milling canned cycle Radial slot milling canned cycle Pattern repeat canned cycle Stock removal canned cycle along X axis Stock removal canned cycle along Z axis Programming in inches programming in millimeters General and specific scaling factor Machine reference search Probing until touching Probing while touching Slaved axis Spindle synchronization in speed Slaved axis cancellation Cancel spindle synchronization X X X X X X X X X X X Turning canned cycle with straight sections Facing canned cycle with straight sections Drilling canned cycle Turning canned cycle with circular sections Facing canned cycle with circular sections Longitudinal threadcutting canned cycle Face threadcutting canned cycle Grooving canned cycle along X axis Grooving canned cycle along Z
327. ental zero offsets They can also be modified from the PLC and from the part program by means of high level variables ORG X C In order for one of these incremental zero offsets to be active it must be selected at the CNC using its corresponding G code G58 or G59 The new incremental zero offset will be added to the absolute zero currently selected Page Chapter 6 Section TABLES ZERO OFFSET TABLE 6 2 TOOL MAGAZINE TABLE This table contains information about the tool magazine indicating all the tools of the magazine and their position in it MAGAZINE TABLE 11 50 14 MAGAZINE POSITION STATUS TOOL 1 T TOO N A N A CAP INS MM DELETE MM INCH The end of this chapter describes how to edit the table Magazine position Besides indicating each position in the magazine it indicates the active tool and the one selected for the following operations The next tool will be placed in the spindle after executing auxiliary function M06 Tool Itindicates the number of the tool occupying that position The empty positions appear with the letter T and the canceled ones with the characters qx Status The first letter indicates the tool size and the second one its status The size depends on the number of pockets it occupies in the magazine N Normal family 0 199 S Special family 200 255 The tool status is
328. er sequence with another throughout the selected program When selecting this option the CNC requests the character sequence to be replaced Once the text to be replaced is indicated press the WITH softkey and the CNC will request the character sequence which will replace the previous one Once this text is keyed in press the END OF TEXT softkey and the cursor will be positioned over the first occurrence of the searched text The search will begin at the current block The found text will be highlighted and the following softkey options will appear REPLACE Will replace the highlighted text and will continue the search from this point to the end of the program Ifno more occurrences of the textto be replaced are found the CNC will quit this mode If anotheroccurrence of the text is found it will be highlighted showing the same replacing or notreplacing options DO NOT REPLACE Will not replace the highlighted text and will continue the search from this point to the end of the program Ifno more occurrences of the text to be replaced are found the CNC will quit this mode If another occurrence of the text is found it will be highlighted showing the same replacing or notreplacing options TO THE END This function will automatically replace all the matching text from the current block to the end of the program without offering the option of notreplacing it ABORT This function will not replace t
329. er supply Input Output Module All the digital inputs and outputs have galvanic isolation via optocouplers between the CNC circuitry and the outside They are protected by an external fast fuse F of 3 15 Amp 250V against a voltage overload greater than 33V dc and against reverse connection of the power supply Input Output and Tracing Module All the digital inputs and outputs have galvanic isolation via optocouplers between the CNC circuitry and the outside They are protected by an external fast fuse F of 3 15 Amp 250V against a voltage overload greater than 33 Vdc and against reverse connection of the power supply Fan Module It carries 1 or 2 external fuses depending on model The fuses are fast F of 0 4 250V to protect the fans Monitor The type of protection fuse depends on the type of monitor See the identification label of the unit itself Precautions during repair Do not manipulate the inside of the unit Only personnel authorized by Fagor Automation may manipulate the inside of this unit Donotmanipulatethe connectors with the unit connected to AC power Before manipulating the connectors inputs outputs feedback etc make sure that the unit is not connected to AC power gt Safety symbols Symbols which may appear on the manual WARNING symbol Ithasan associated text indicating those actions oroperations may hurt people or damage products gt Symbols that may be carri
330. er than C Each grooving pass is carried out in the following manner The penetration is done at programmed feedrate F The withdrawal and the move to the next penetration point are done in rapid G00 After completing the grooving operation the canned cycle will always end at the cycle calling point Considerations The machining conditions feedrate spindle speed etc must be programmed before calling the cycle Once the canned cycle has ended the program will continue with the same feedrate F and G functions active previous to calling the cycle Only the tool radius compensation will be cancelled G40 if it was active The tool must be located at a distance along X equal to or greater than the one indicated by canned cycle parameter D safety distance with respect to the part If the depth of the groove is 0 the CNC will display the corresponding error message Ifthe width ofthe groove is smaller than the width ofthe cutter NOSEW the CNC will display the corresponding error message Chapter 9 Section Page CANNEDCYCLES GROOVING ALONG 55 X AXIS G88 9 12 G89 GROOVING CANNED CYCLE ALONG THE Z AXIS This cycle performs a grooving operation along the Z axis maintaining the same pass between the successive passes being this equal to or smallerthan the one programamed The basic structure of the block is GSOXZQRCDK X 5 5 Z 5 5 0 5 5 R 5 5 5 5 D5 5 K5 XA
331. eration The basic structure of the block 15 681 X ZQRCDLMFH X 5 5 Z 5 5 0 5 5 5 5 C55 D 5 5 Defines the X coordinate of the initial point of the profile It must be programmed in absolute values and in the active units radius or diameter Defines the Z coordinate of the initial point of the profile It must be programmed in absolute values Defines the X coordinate of the final point of the profile It must be programmed in absolute values and in the active units radius or diameter Defines the Z coordinate of the final point of the profile It must be programmed in absolute values Defines the turning pass It is given by a positive radius value The whole turning operation is carried out with the same pass which is the same or smaller than the programmed one C If programmed with a 0 value the CNC will display the corresponding error message Defines the safety distance to withdraw the tool after each pass Zs Z4 TPOODO2 gt X When programming D with a value other than 0 the cutter withdraws at a 45 angle up to the safety distance left drawing Page 26 Chapter 9 Section CANNEDCYCLES TURNING WITHSTRAIGHT SECTIONS G81 L5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 When programming D with a 0 value the exit path is same as the entry path This may be interesting for grooving complex profiles to use these cycles on cylindrical grinders etc
332. ere the cursor is to be placed along this axis The horizontal position is defined as the X value between 1 and 638 and the vertical position as the Y value between 0 and 334 Once these coordinates have been keyed in press ENTER and the CNC will position the cursor at the indicated coordinates Once this option is selected itis possible to modify the editing parameters at any time even while defining the graphic elements This way itis possible to edit shapes of different line and color Press INS to access this menu Once in this mode press the corresponding softkey to modify those parameters Press INS again to quit this mode and return to the previous menu Page Chapter 10 Section 10 SCREENEDITOR GRAPHICELEMENTS The possible graphic elements which can be used to create a page or symbol are selected with the softkeys and are the following LINE Follow these steps after pressing this softkey 1 Place the cursor at the beginning of the line and press ENTER to validate it 2 Movethecursorto the end of the line the CNC will continuously show the line being drawn 3 Press ENTER to validate the line or ESC to cancel it Repeat the preceding steps to draw more lines If no more lines are desired press ESC to return to the previous menu RECTANGLE Follow these steps after pressing this softkey 1 Place the cursor on one of the corners of the rectangle and press ENTER to validate it 2 Move th
333. es and it may consist of simple geometrical elements suchas straight and curved lines roundings and chamfers which will be programmed following their own syntax rules Function G00 indicates that the profile definition is done and this block is the beginning of the definition of the rough part profile Program G01 G02 or G03 in the next block because is modal thus preventing the CNC from displaying the corresponding error message The profile description must not contain mirror images scaling factor changes pattern rotation or zero offsets It must not contain high level blocks such as jumps calls to subroutines or parametric programming It must not contain other canned cycles Only the following G functions may be programmed in the profile definition Positioning in rapid 01 Linear interpolation G02 Clockwise circular interpolation G03 Counter clockwise circular interpolation Chapter 9 Section Page CANNEDCYCLES STOCKREMOVALCYCLE 15 ALONG X AXIS G68 G06 Circle center in absolute coordinates G08 Arc tangent to previous path G09 Arc defined by three points G36 Automatic radius blend G39 Chamfer G53 Programming with respect to machine zero G70 Programming in inches G71 Programming in millimeters G90 Absolute programming G9 Incremental programming G93 Polar origin preset Itis also possible to program the following functions although they will be ignored by the canned c
334. etablesinthe Memkey Card CARD A or out to a peripheral device or PC Yes No When accessing the TABLES operating mode the CNC shows all Takes cutter dimensions Takes cutter dimensions the tables saved into the Memkey defined for D from defined for T from Card CARD A tool geometry table tool geometry table Chapter 6 Section Page TABLES 1 6 1 ZERO OFFSET TABLE This table stores the offset of each axis ZERO OFFSET TABLE 11 50 14 ZERO OFFSET PLC X 0 0000 G54 0 0000 G55 0 0000 G56 0 0000 G57 0 0000 G58 0 0000 G59 0 0000 CAP INS MM MODIFY DELETE MM INCH The end of the chapter describes how to edit the table The possible zero offsets are PLC Additive zero offset defined by PLC It is used among others to compensate for possible deviations due to machine dilatation These values are set from the PLC and from the part program by means of high level variables PLCOF X C The CNC always adds these values to the zero offset currently active G54 through G57 Absolute zero offsets They can also be modified from the PLC and from the part program by means of high level variables ORG X C In order for one of these absolute zero offsets to be active it must be selected at the CNC using its corresponding G code G54 G55 G56 or G57 G58 and G59 Increm
335. etain thc Zero offset G54 59 axes 1 5 ERROR TROUBLESHOOTING MANUAL 67
336. ether the AXES module the I O TRACING module and the I O modules are supplied or not with 24 V The lack of these 24V may be because the connectors have not been supplied or because the protection fuse for the corresponding module is blown INSIDE TEMPERATURE Itshows the value range maximum and minimum values the inside temperature of the Central Unit and whether that value is OK or not Page Chapter 12 Section 4 DIAGNOSIS TEST 12 3 MEMORY TEST This option checks the status of the internal CNC memory that of the memory available for the User and for the System To carry out this verification the PLC program must be stopped otherwise the CNC will ask the operator whether this operation is to be carried out or not 12 4 FLASH MEMORY TEST This option checks the status of the internal CNC Flash memory These memories contain the CNC software version currently installed 12 5 USER This option will execute the program whichis selected with the general machine parameter in the user channel To quit its execution and return to the previous menu press ESC 12 6 HARD DISK Once this option has been selected two softkeys will be displayed Test It check the status of the hard disk user memory available It takes about 30 minutes In order to perform this test the PLC program must be stopped If it is running the CNC will ask the operator whether it is to be stopped or not C
337. executing a program transmitted via DNC CAUSE A G33 G95 or M19 S has been programmed without having an encoder on the spindle SOLUTION If the spindle does not have an encoder functions M19 S G33 or G95 Spindle machine parameter NPULSES P13 indicates the number of encoder pulses per turn 0159 Inch programming limit exceeded DETECTED During execution CAUSE An attempt has been made to execute in inches a program edited in millimeters SOLUTION Enter function G70 inch programming or G71 mm programming at the beginning of the program 0162 No negative radius allowed with absolute coordinates DETECTED During execution CAUSE While operating with absolute polar coordinates a movement with a negative radius has been programmed SOLUTION Negative radius cannot be programmed when using absolute polar coordinates 0164 Wrong password DETECTED While assigning protections CAUSE ENTER has been pressed before selecting the type of code to be assigned a password SOLUTION Use the softkeys to select the type of code to which a password is to be assigned 0165 Password use uppercase lowercase letters or digits DETECTED While assigning protections CAUSE A bad character has been entered in the password SOLUTION The password can only consist of letters upper and lower case or digits 0166 Only one HIRTH axis per block is allowed DETECTED While editing at the CNC
338. execution of the program If when executing the M miscellaneous function this is not defined in the M functions table the programmed function will be executed at the beginning of the block and the CNC will wait for the AUX END to continue the execution of the program Some of the miscellaneous functions are assigned an internal meaning in the CNC Warning All the miscellaneous M functions which have an associated subroutine must be programmed alone in a block If while executing the associated subroutine of an miscellaneous function there is ablock containing the same this will be executed but not the associated subroutine Page Chapter 5 Section 12 PROGRAMMINGBY ISOCODE AUXILIARY FUNCTION M 5 7 1 M00 PROGRAM STOP When the CNC reads code in a block it interrupts the program To start up again press CYCLE START We recommend that you set this function in the table of M functions in such a way that it is executed at the end of the block in which it is programmed 5 72 M01 CONDITIONAL PROGRAM STOP This is identical to except that the CNC only takes notice of it if the signal M01 STOP from the PLC is active high logic level 5 7 3 M02 END OF PROGRAM This code indicates the end of program and carries out a General Reset function of the CNC returning it to original state It also carries out the M05 function Itis recommended to set this functi
339. f up to 20 characters 99 Then and separated by a comma comes the attribute protection each file has reading modifying etc This protectionis optional and does not have to programmed Toend the file header RETURN RT or LINE FEED LF characters should be sent separated by a comma Example Fagor Automation MX RT Following the header the file blocks should be programmed These will all be programmed according to the programming rules indicated in this manual After each block to separate it from the others the RETURN RT or LINE FEED LF characters should be used Example N20 G90 G01 X100 Y200 F2000 LF RPT N10 N20 N3 LF If communication is made with a peripheral device you will need to send the end of file command This command is selected via the machine parameter for the serial port and can be one of the following characters ESC ESCAPE EOT END OF TRANSMISSION SUB SUBSTITUTE EXT END OF TRANSMISSION Page Chapter 1 Section OVERVIEW 2 1 2 e CREATING A PROGRAM A CNC numerical control program consists of a series of blocks or instructions These blocks or instructions are made of words composed of capitalletters and numerical format The CNC s numerical format consists of the symbols the figures0123456789 Programming allows spaces between letters numbers and symbols in addition to ignoring the nu
340. final profile must be defined first and then that of the rough part The first and last profile defining blocks must have a label number These labels will indicate the beginning and end of the profile geometry definition for this canned cycle The profile programming syntax must follow these rules 1 4 5 It may be programmed in absolute or incremental coordinates and it may consist of simple geometrical elements suchas straight and curved lines roundings and chamfers which will be programmed following their own syntax rules Function G00 indicates that the profile definition is done and this block is the beginning of the definition of the rough part profile Program G01 G02 or G03 in the next block because GOO is modal thus preventing the CNC from displaying the corresponding error message The profile description must not contain mirror images scaling factor changes pattern rotation or zero offsets It must not contain high level blocks such as jumps calls to subroutines or parametric programming It must not contain other canned cycles Only the following G functions may be programmed in the profile definition Positioning in rapid 01 Linear interpolation G02 Clockwise circular interpolation G03 Cgunter clockwise circular interpolation G06 Circle center in absolute coordinates G08 Arc tangent to previous path G09 Arc defined by three points G36 Automatic radius blend G39 Chamfer G53 Progr
341. first one included If 0 is programmed the CNC will issue the corresponding error message Defines in radius the safety distance along the X axis and it indicates how far from the starting point X Z the toolis to approach the part If not programmed the CNC will assume a value of 0 Chapter 9 Section Page ANNEDCYCL G62 LONGITUDINAL 5 E SLOTMILLING 5 5 Defines the slot milling feedrate S 5 5 and turning direction sign of the live tool Basic operation 1 Rapid approach upto the safety distance D from the slot milling point 2 The CNC turns the live tool on at the rpm and turning direction set by parameter 5 3 Orients the spindle to the indicated angular position If the spindle was turning the CNC will stop it 4 Milling of the slot by following these steps X A 2 gt 4 1 In feed at the feedrate selected prior to calling the cycle 4 2 Milling of the slot by moving the Z axis at the programmed F feedrate 4 3 Rapid withdrawal to the reference point 4 4 Rapid return to the starting point 5 Depending on the setting of parmeter J number of slots 5 The spindle orients to the new position Angular increment A 5 2 Repeats the movements indicated on point 4 6 live tool stops Considerations The machining conditions feedrate live tool rpm etc must be programmed prior to the calling the cycle Once the c
342. functions may be programmed All the data need not be programmed 0014 Do not program labels by parameters DETECTED While editing at the CNC or while executing a program transmitted via DNC CAUSE A label block number has been defined with a parameter SOLUTION The programming of a block number is optional but it cannot be defined with a parameter only with a number between 0 and 9999 0015 Number of repetitions not possible DETECTED While editing at the CNC or while executing a program transmitted via DNC CAUSE A repetition has been programmed wrong or the block does not admit repetitions SOLUTION High level instructions do not admit a number of repetitions at the end of the block To do a repetition assign to the block to be repeated a label block number and use the RPT instruction ERROR TROUBLESHOOTING MANUAL 3 8055T CNC FAGOR 0017 Program G16 axis axis DETECTED While editing at the CNC or while executing a program transmitted via DNC CAUSE In the function Main plane selection by two axes G16 one of the two parameters for the axes has not been programmed SOLUTION Check the syntax of the block The definition of the G16 function requires the name of the axes defining the new work plane 0018 Program G22 K 1 2 3 4 S 0 1 2 DETECTED While editing at the CNC or while executing a program transmitted via DNC CAUSE In the function Enable Disable
343. g G86 longitudinal threadcutting canned cycle or G87 face threadcutting canned cycle are executed the spindle speed cannot be modified It is set at 100 of programmed S Page Chapter 5 Section PROGRAMMINGBYISOCODE SPINDLESPEED S 5 3 1 CONSTANT SURFACE SPEED G96 When G96 is programmed the CNC understands that the spindle speed programmed by means of 85 4 is given in m min or feet min and the lathe begins to work in Constant Surface Speed C S S mode Itisrecommendedto program the spindle speed S5 4 in the same block with the G96 being the spindle speed range M41 M42 M43 M44 selected either in the same block or in the previous one If a spindle speed is not programmed and a there is none selected previously or the corresponding spindle speed range gear has not been selected the CNC will issue the corresponding error message Function G96 is modal that is that once programmed it will remain active until a G97 is programmed On power up after executing M02 M30 or after an EMERGENCY or RESET CNC assumes function G97 5 3 2 SPINDLE ROTATION SPEED IN RPM G97 When G97 is programmed the CNC assumes that the spindle speed programmed by 85 4 is given in revolutions per minute If in the block containing G97 the spindle speed 55 4 is not programmed the CNC assumes the current spindle speed as the one programmed Function G97 is modal i e once programmed it is active until G96 is p
344. g etc Control functions for axis feedrate and spindle speeds control functions Complementary functions with technological instructions 2 1 2 2 HIGH LEVEL LANGUAGE This enables access to general purpose variables and to system tables and variables It gives the user anumber of control sentences which are similar to the terminology used in other languages such as IF GOTO CALL etc It also allows the use of any type of expression arithmetic referential or logical It also has instructions for the construction of loops plus subroutines with local variables Local variable is understood to mean one which is only recognized by the subroutine in which it has been defined Itis also possible to create libraries grouping subroutines with useful and tested functions which can be accessed from any program Chapter 2 Section Page CREATINGA PROGRAM 3 2 1 3 END OF BLOCK The end of block is optional and may consist of the indication of number of repetitions of the block and of the block comment Both must be programmed in this order NUMBER OF REPETITIONS OF THE BLOCK N 0 9999 This indicates the number of times the block will be executed Movement blocks can only be repeated which at the time of their execution are under the influence of a modal subroutine In these cases the CNC executes the programmed move and the active machining operation canned cycle or modal subroutin
345. g point Z X the tool will approach the part If not programmed the CNC will assume Defines the dwell in hundredths of a second at the bottom of the hole before starting to withdraw the tool If not programmed the CNC will assume 0 The tapping operation ignores this parameter thus not being necessary to program it If programmed it will be ignored Defines the rapid in GOO withdrawing distance along the Z axis after each drilling peck If not programmed or programmed with a 0 value the tool will return to the approach point The tapping operation ignores this parameter thus not being necessary to program it If programmed it will be ignored Defines the rapid approaching distance for successive drilling pecks If not programmed a distance of 1 mm 0 03937 inch will be assumed The tapping operation ignores this parameter thus not being necessary to program it If programmed it will be ignored RPM and turning direction sign of the live tool Drilling Basic operation 1 2 Rapid move to the approach point located at a D distance from the first hole position The CNC turns on the live tool at the rpm and in the turning direction indicated by parameter S Orients the spindle at the angular position set by Q If the spindle was turning it will stop First drilling peck The drilling axis moves in to the programmed incremental depth D B Drilling cycle The following steps wil
346. g units every time they are used 11 1 3 SYMBOLS The symbols used in high level language are Chapter 11 Section Page PROGRAMMINGINHIGH LEVELLANGUAGE LEXICALDESCRIPTION 3 11 22 VARIABLES The internal CNC variables which can be accessed by high level language are grouped in tables and can be read only or read write variables There is a group of mnemonics for showing the different fields of the table of variables Inthis way ifitis required to access an element from one ofthese tables the required field will be indicated by means ofthe corresponding mnemonic for example TOR and then the required element TOR3 The variables available at the CNC can be classified in the following way General purpose parameters or variables Variables associated with tools Variables associated with zero offsets Variables associated with machine parameters Variables associated with work zones Variables associated with feedrates Variables associated with position coordinates Variables associated with the spindle Variables associated with the PLC Variables associated with local parameters Other variables Variables which access to real values of the CNC interrupt the preparation of blocks and the CNC waits for each command to be performed before restarting block preparation Thus precaution must be taken when using this type of variable as should they be placed between machining b
347. gram columns 0 thru 79 DETECTED While executing in the user channel CAUSE In the block syntax a column has been programmed out of the 0 to 79 range SOLUTION Only columns within the 0 to 79 range can be programmed 0103 Program pages 0 thru 255 DETECTED While executing in the user channel CAUSE In the block syntax a page has been programmed out of the 0 to 255 range SOLUTION Only pages within the 0 to 255 range can be programmed 0104 Program INPUT DETECTED While editing at the CNC or while executing a program transmitted via DNC CAUSE While programming in high level language an IB instruction has been edited without associating an INPUT to it SOLUTION Remember that the programming formats for this instruction are IB expression INPUT text format IB expression INPUT text 0105 Program inputs 0 thru 25 DETECTED While executing in the user channel CAUSE In the block syntax an input has been programmed out of the 0 to 25 range SOLUTION Only inputs within the 0 to 25 range can be programmed 1 6 ERROR TROUBLESHOOTING MANUAL Hicon 3 8055T CNC 0106 Program numerical format DETECTED While editing at the CNC or while executing a program transmitted via DNC CAUSE While programming in high level language an IB instruction has been edited with non numeric format SOLUTION Remember that the programming format for this instruction is IB exp
348. h the format G02 G03 X Z R 2 When programming with the format 2 X Z but the distance to the arc s end point is greater than the diameter of the programmed circle SOLUTION The solution for each cause is 1 With this format full circles cannot be made Program the end point with different coordinates from those of the starting point 2 The diameter of the circle must be greater than the distance to the arc s end point 1078 Negative radius in polar coordinates DETECTED During execution CAUSE While working in incremental polar coordinates a block is executed which gives a negative final radius position SOLUTION When programming incremental polar coordinates negative radius can be programmed but the final absolute position of the radius must be positive 1079 There is no subroutine associated with G74 DETECTED While executing a home search CAUSE S The probable causes might be 1 When trying to carry out a home search on all axes manually but the associated subroutine indicating the searching sequence does not exist 2 Function G74 has been programmed but the associated subroutine indicating the searching sequence does not exist SOLUTION The solution for each cause is 1 To execute function 074 its associated subroutine must be defined 2 If function G74 is to be executed from a program the home searching sequence for the axes may be defined 1080 Plane c
349. hange during tool inspection DETECTED While executing the tool inspection option CAUSE The work plane has been changed but it has not been restored before resuming execution SOLUTION Before resuming execution the plane that was active before doing the tool inspection must be restored 1081 Block not allowed in MDI or during tool inspection DETECTED While executing the tool inspection option CAUSE An attempt has been made to execute the RET instruction SOLUTION This instruction cannot be executed within the tool inspection option 38 ERROR TROUBLESHOOTING MANUAL EAGOR 3 8055T CNC 1082 Probe signal has not been received DETECTED During execution CAUSE S The probable causes might be 1 A PROBE probing canned cycle has been programmed but the probe has moved the maximum safety distance of the cycle without sending the probe signal to the CNC 2 When programming the G75 function the end coordinate has been reached without receiving the probe signal Only when general machine parameter PROBERR P119 YES SOLUTION The solution for each cause is 1 Check that the probe is connected properly The maximum probing distance in the PROBE cycles depends on the safety distance B To increase this distance increase the safety distance 2 If PROBERR P119 NO no error will be issued when this end coordinate is reached without receiving the probe signal only with the G75
350. has been verified it is a good idea to save it into the Memkey Card CARD A using the instruction SAVE PROGRAM as described later on Chapter 9 Section Page PLC 1 91 EDIT Once this option is selected indicate with the corresponding softkey the PLC program to be edited The PLC program PLC PRG The PLC error file PLC ERR The PLC message file PLC MSG The cursor can be moved line by line with the up and down arrow keys or page by page with the page up and page down keys The cursor position or line number will be displayed in a white window inside the communications window bottom of the screen next to the CAP INS indicator window This operating mode offers various options which are described next Once any of these functions is selected the CNC shows an editing area on the CRT where the cursor may be moved by using the up down and right left arrow keys Also the up arrow key positions the cursor over the first character of the editing area and the down arrow key positions the cursor over the last character EDIT With this option it is possible to edit new lines or blocks of the selected program Before pressing this softkey the block after which the new ones will be added must be selected with the cursor The program will be edited written a block at a time and each block can be written in ISO language High Level language or it can be just a program comment Once this option
351. he REPOS instruction one of the interruption inputs must be activated ERROR TROUBLESHOOTING MANUAL 25 8055T CNC 23 0195 Axes X Y or 2 slaved or synchronized DETECTED During execution CAUSE While programming in high level language an attempt has been made to execute a probing cycle using the PROBE instruction but one of the X or Z axis is slaved or synchronized SOLUTION execute the PROBE instruction the X Z axes must not be slaved or synchronized To unslave the axes program G78 0196 Axes X Y and Z must exist DETECTED While editing at the CNC or while executing a program transmitted via DNC CAUSE While programming in high level language an attempt has been made to edit the PROBE instruction but one of the X or Z axis is missing SOLUTION operate with the PROBE instruction the X Z axes must be defined 0197 Program G15 before C axis DETECTED While editing or executing programs via DNC CAUSE An attempt has been made to execute an operation on the C axis but it was not active SOLUTION work with the C axis it must be activated first with function G15 0199 Preset of rotary axes Values between 0 359 9999 DETECTED While presetting coordinates CAUSE An attempt has been made preset the coordinates of a rotary axis with a value out of the 0 to 359 9999 range SOLUTION The preset value of rotary axes must be
352. he measurements in the global arithmetic parameters P298 Real Z value of the measured point P299 Detectederror Difference betweenthe real coordinate and the programmed theoretical one If a tool offset number D was selected the CNC will alter its value as long as the measured error is equal to or greater than the allowed tolerance Page Chapter 10 Section 18 PROBING TOOLOFFSET CORRECTIONZAXIS 1 1 e PROGRAMMING IN HIGH LEVEL LANGUAGE The CNC has a series of internal variables which can be accessed from the user program from the PLC program or through DNC Access to these variables from the user program is gained with high level commands Each of the system variables which can be accessed will be referred to by means of its mnemonic and will be separated according to theiruse into read only variables and read write variables 11 1 LEXICAL DESCRIPTION All the words which form the high level language of the numerical control must be written in capital letters except for associated texts which may be written in upper and lower case letters The following elements are available for high level programming Reserved words Numerical constants Symbols Chapter 11 Section Page PROGRAMMINGINHIGH LEVELLANGUAGE LEXICALDESCRIPTION 1 11 1 1 RESERVED WORDS The set of words which the CNC uses in high level programming for naming system variables operators co
353. he CNC software when replacing the Hard Disk module The CNC software and the Hard Disc module must be compatible Chapter 2 Section Page OPERATING MODE SOFTWAREUPDATE 5 3 EXECUTE SIMULATE The EXECUTE operating mode allows the execution of part programs in automatic mode or in single block mode The SIMULATE operating mode allows the simulation of part programs in automatic or single block mode When selecting one of these operating modes one must indicate the location of the part program to be executed or simulated The part program may be stored in the CNC s internal RAM memory in the Memkey Card in PC connected through serial line 1 or 2 or in the hard disk HD module After pressing one of these softkeys the CNC displayes the corresponding part program directory The program may be selected by Keying in its number and pressing ENTER or Positioning the cursor of the scren over the desired program and pressing ENTER When wished to SIMULATE a part program the CNC will request the type of simulation to be carried out as shown on the next page The executing or simulating conditions fist block type of graphics etc may be set before executing or simulating the part program These conditions may also be modified if the execution orsimulation is interrupted To execute or simulate a part program press Note To switch to JOG mode once executed or simulated a part progr
354. he MAIN MENU key to return to the main menu Page Chapter 2 Section OPERATING MODES HELPSYSTEMS 2 2 SOFTWARE UPDATE Procedure 1 Turn the CNC off 2 Replace the memory card in Slot A with the one containing the new software version 3 Set SW1 switch to 1 Or g gE v 4 Turn the CNC on e The screen will show the software updating page with the following information ine e 1 e Installed version and New version i Checksum of the installed version and that of the new one 5 Pressthe Update software softkey CPU The CNC will display the various stages of the software updating Packs process and their status When done with the updating process the CNC will display a new screen with the steps to follow 7 6 Turn the CNC off or E ri 9 7 Replace the memory card in Slot A with the Memkey zi 8 Set the SWI switch to 0 MN j 9 Turn the CNC on The software version is now updated za Notes With the memory card that contains the software version the CNC CANNOT executed anything If the CNC is turned on with the Memkey Card in and the SW1 switch set to 1 the CNC does not come on but its data is NOT affected Warning Reinstall t
355. he SINGLE BLOCK operating mode the group of blocks which are found between the mnemonics ESBLK and DSBLK will be executed in a continuous cycle i e execution will not be stopped at the end of a block but will continue by executing the following one Example G01 X30 710 F1000 DI ESBLK Start of single block G01 X20 Z10 G01 X20 Z20 G02 X10 Z30 I 10 KO DSBLK Cancellation of single block G01 X10 Z40 M30 ESTOP and DSTOP Afterexecuting the mnemonic DSTOP the CNC enables the Stop key as well asthe Stop signal from the PLC It will remain disabled until it is enabled once again by means of the mnemonic ESTOP EFHOLD and DFHOLD After executing the mnemonic DFHOLD the CNC enables the Feed Hold input from the PLC It will remain disabled until it is enabled once again by means of the mnemonic EFHOLD Chapter 12 Section Page PROGRAM CONTROLSTATEMENTS ENABLING DISABLING 3 STATEMENTS 124 FLOW CONTROL STATEMENTS The GOTO and RPT statements cannot be used in programs executed from a PC connected to one of the serial lines GOTO N expression The mnemonic GOTO causes a jump within the same program to the block defined by the label N expression The execution of the program will continue after the jump from the indicated block The jump label can be addressed by means of a number or by any expression which results in a number Example G00 X30 Z10 T2 D4 X30 Z20 GOTO N22 Jump st
356. he highlighted text and it will quit the find and replace mode Page 18 Chapter 4 Section EDIT REPLACE 45 DELETE BLOCK With this function it is possible to delete a block or group of blocks To delete only one block just position the cursor over it and press ENTER To delete a group of blocks indicate the first and last blocks to be deleted To do so follow these steps Position the cursor over the first block to be deleted and press the INITIAL BLOCK softkey Position the cursor over the last block to be deleted and press the FINAL BLOCK softkey If the last block to be deleted is also the last one of the program it can also be selected by pressing the TO THE END softkey Once the first and last blocks are selected the CNC will highlight the selected blocks requesting confirmation to delete them Chapter 4 Section Page EDIT DELETEBLOCK 19 4 6 MOVE BLOCK With this option it is possible to move a block or group of blocks by previously indicating the first and last blocks to be moved To do so follow these steps Position the cursor over the first block to be moved and press the INITIAL BLOCK softkey Position the cursor over the last block to be moved and press the FINAL BLOCK softkey If the last block to be moved is also the last one of the program it can also be selected by pressing the TO THE END softkey To move only on
357. he one with the highest priority being that indicated by DNC and theone with the lowest priority that indicated by program Returns the spindle speed limitin revolutions per minute selected by DNC If this has a value of 0 it means that it is not selected Returns the spindle speed limit in revolutions per minute selected by PLC If this has a value of 0 it means that it is not selected Returns the spindle speed limitin revolutions per minute selected by program Returns in degrees max 99999 9999 the real spindle position coordinate Returns in degrees between 0 and 360 the real spindle position coordinate Returns in degrees max 99999 9999 the theoretical spindle position coordinate real following error Returns in degrees between 0 and 360 the theoretical spindle position coordinate real following error Chapter 11 PROGRAMMINGINHIGH LEVELLANGUAGE Section Page VARIABLESFOR 23 THESECONDSPINDLE SFLWES Returns in degrees max 99999 9999 the amount of following error of the spindle When accessing one of these variables SPOSS SRPOSS STPOSS SRTPOS or SFLWES block preparation is interrupted and the CNC waits for that command to be executed before resuming block preparation Read write variables SPRGSO Thisvariableallowsthe percentage of the spindle speed selected by program to be read or modified This will be given by an integer between 0 and MAXSOVR maximum 25
358. he thick line to draw polylines or polygons They are always drawn in fine line TEXT SIZE With this option it is possible to select the size of the letters used to write the texts to be inserted in the pages or symbols Three sizes are available Normal size All the characters of the keyboard numbers signs upper and lower case letters can be written in this size Double and triple sizes Only capital letters A through Z numbers 0 through 9 the UE 60 Peer inet Mr signs and the special characters C B can be written in these sizes d din ec When selecting lower case letters for these sizes the CNC will convert them automatically into upper case Follow these steps to select the text size after pressing this softkey 1 Use the right and left arrow keys to select the desired size The currently selected size will be highlighted 2 Press ENTER to validate the selected step or ESC to quit this mode leaving the previous selection intact When editing a new page or symbol the CNC assumes the normal size by default Chapter 10 Section Page EDITINGCUSTOMSCREENS 7 Sees PAGES ANDSYMBOLS BACKGROUND COLOR With this option it is possible to select the background color over which the different graphic elements and texts will be edited It is not possible to select the background color when editing a symbol since it is an attribute of the page and no
359. his profile will coincide or not with the programmed profile depending on whether there are areas not accessible to the selected tool TPO9CO9 Once the finishing pass has ended the tool will return to the point from where the cycle was called Optimizing the machining process If only the desired profile is defined CNC assumes that the rough part is cylindrical and it machines it as shown in the drawing on the left XA gt Z 7 2 5 2 When the profile ofthe rough part is known itis recommended to define both profiles therough partand the desired final profile The machining is faster since only the stock between both profiles is removed Chapter 9 Section Page CANNEDCYCLES STOCKREMOVALCANNED 23 CYCLEALONGZAXIS G69 Profile programming syntax When defining the profile there is no need to program the initial point since it is already indicated by cycle defining parameters X and Z When defining 2 profiles the final profile must be defined first and then that of the rough part The first and last profile defining blocks must have a label number These labels will indicate the beginning and end of the profile geometry definition for this canned cycle The profile programming syntax must follow these rules 1 Itmay be programmed in absolute orincremental coordinates and it may consist of simple geome
360. ht arrow page up and page down keys to move the cursor Position the cursor at the final point of calculation and press the MARK END softkey to validate it The CNC will display in the message window the time difference between those two points It will be given in milliseconds This feature can prove very useful to calculate exactly the rise and fall times ofa signal times between two signals times between the trigger of a signal and the beginning of a cycle etc Modify Time Base This option permits the Time Base to be modified The status area is divided into several vertical sections Each of these sections represents a time pitch determined by the Time Base constant The relationship between the Time Base and the signal resolution is inversely proportional in such way that the smaller the time base the greater the signal resolution and vice versa When pressing this softkey the CNC will request the new value for the time base This value must be given in milliseconds Chapter 9 Section Page PLC LOGICANALYZER 35 1 0 SCREEN EDITOR In this operating mode the operator can create up to 256 pages screens which will be stored in the Memkey Card The operator can also create up to 256 SYMBOLS to be used when creating the user screens These symbols are also stored in the Memkey The information contained in a page or symbol cannot occupy more than 4Kb of memory
361. ia X E Sn E om 22 Feedrate at F Ms Feedrate GOO 25 The basic block structure for each operation is Drilling G60XZIB QAJDKHCS Tapping G60XZIBO0 QAJDS X 5 5 Defines the X coordinate where the cycle will be run It is programmed in absolute values and in the active measuring units radius or diameter Z 5 5 DefinestheZ coordinate where the cycle will berun Itis programmed in absolute values 1 5 5 Defines the depth Itis referred to the starting point X Z It must be assigned a positive value when drilling or tapping in the negative Z direction and negative when in doing it in the positive Z direction If programmed with a zero value the CNC will issue the corresponding error B5 5 Defines the type of operation to be run 0 for tapping B gt 0 for drilling where B indicates the drilling step Q 5 5 Defines the first angular position to orient the spindle to drill or tap the first hole Page Chapter 9 Section 58 CANNEDCYCLES G60 AXIAL DRILLING TAPPING 05 5 5 5 C5 5 S 5 5 Defines the angular increment between two consecutive operations It is programmed in degrees Positive when counter clockwise Defines the number of holes to be drilled or tapped including the first one If programmed with a 0 value the CNC will issue the corresponding error Defines the safety distance along the Z axis and indicates how far from the startin
362. ia DNC CAUSE A canned cycle has been attempted to execute while the G02 G03 or G33 functions were active SOLUTION execute a canned cycle 200 G01 must be active Maybe 202 or function was activated in the M code history instead Check that these functions are not active when the canned cycle is defined ERROR TROUBLESHOOTING MANUAL 5 8055T CNC ERGO 3 0029 G84 85 X ZQ R C DLMFH I K DETECTED While editing or executing programs via DNC CAUSE The parameters of the Turning canned cycle with arcs G84 or Facing canned cycle with arcs G85 have been programmed wrong The probable causes might be 1 A mandatory parameter is missing 2 The cycle parameters are programmed in the wrong order 3 A parameter has been programmed which does not match the calling format SOLUTION This type of machining requires the programming of the following parameters X Z Profile starting point Q R Profile end point C Outting pass Distance from the starting point to the center of the arc The rest of the parameters are optional The parameters must be edited in the order indicated by the error message 0030 086 87 X ZQ R IB D L C J A DETECTED While editing or executing programs via DNC CAUSE The parameters of the Longitudinal threading canned cycle G86 or Face threading canned cycle G87 have been programmed wrong The probable c
363. if it exists Page 1012 Coincides with 252 of the directory if it exists Page 1013 Coincides with 253 of the directory if it exists Page 1014 Coincides with 254 of the directory if it exists Page 1015 Coincides with 255 of the directory if it exists Page 1016 High level language listing from A to G Page 1017 High level language listing from H to N Page 1018 High level language listing from 0 to S Page 1019 High level language listing from T to Z Page 1020 High level accessible variables 1st part Page 1021 High level accessible variables 2nd part Page 1022 High level accessible variables 3rd part Page 1023 High level accessible variables 4th part Page 1024 High level accessible variables 5th part Page 1025 High level accessible variables 6th part Page 1026 High level accessible variables 7th part Page 1027 High level accessible variables 8th part Page 1028 High level accessible variables 9th part Page 1029 High level accessible variables 10th part Page 1030 High level accessible variables 11th part Page 1031 High level accessible variables 12th part 16 SYNTAX ASSISTANCE ISO LANGUAGE Page Page Page Page Page 1033 1034 1035 1036 1037 Page 1038 Page Page Page Page 1039 1040 1041 1042 Page 1043 Page Page Page Page Page Page Page Page Page Page Page Page Page Page Page Page Page Page Page Page Page 1044 1045 1046 1047 1048 1049 1050 1051 1052
364. ill request the number of the line to be found Key in the desired line number and press ENTER The cursor will then be positioned at the desired line Once the desired starting block has been selected press ENTER to validate it NUMBER OF TIMES This function will be used to indicate that the execution or simulation of the selected program must stop after executing the end block a specific number of times When selecting this function the CNC will request the number of times to be executed or simulated If a canned cycle or a call to a subroutine has been selected as the end block of the program the CNC will stop after executing the complete canned cycle orthe indicated subroutine Iftheselected block has anumber of block repetitions the program will stop after doing all the repetitions indicated Chapter 3 Section Page EXECUTE SIMULATE STOPCONDITION 5 3 2 DISPLAY SELECTION With this option itis possible to select the most appropriate display mode at any time even during execution or simulation of a part program The display modes available at the CNC and which can be selected with softkeys are STANDARD POSITION PART PROGRAM SUBROUTINES FOLLOWING ERRORS USER EXECUTION TIMES All the display modes have a window at the bottom of the CRT which shows the history with the conditions in which machining is being done The information shown is as follows F and S and T D S RPM
365. image on Y axis G13 Mirror image on Z axis G14 Mirror image in the programmed directions G15 G16 G17 Selection of main plane in two directions Main plane X Y and longitudinal Z G18 Main plane Z X and longitudinal Y G19 Main plane Y Z and longitudinal X G20 Definition of lower work zone limits G21 Definition of upper work zone limits G22 Activate cancel work zones X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X G28 Selection of the second spindle or axis toggle G29 Selection of the main spindle or axis toggle G30 Spindles synchronized in position G32 Feedrate F as an inverted function of time G33 Threadcutting G36 Automatic radius blend G37 Tangential entry G38 Tangential exit G39 Automatic chamfer blend G40 Cancellation of tool radius compensation G41 Right hand tool radius compensation G42 Left hand tool radius compensation G45 Tangential control G50 G51 G52 G53 G54 G55 G56 G57 G58 G59 Controlled corner rounding Look ahead Movement to hard stop Program coordinates with respect to home Absolute zero offset Absolute zero offset Absolute zero offset Absolute zero offset Additive zero offset Additive zero offset Xo X X X X X X xXx X X lt Function Meaning Section G60 G61 G62 G63 G66 G68 Axial drilling tapping canned cycle 9 13 Radial drilling tapping canned cycle 9 14 Longitudinal slot milling canned cycle 2 19 15 Radial slot mil
366. increase the PLC processing speed Insert the CPU TURBO Change the PLC parameter CPUTIME P26 or general parameter LOOPTIME P72 3003 Division by zero in PLC DETECTED Atany time CAUSE The PLC program contains a line whose execution involves a division by zero SOLUTION When working with registers that register may have receive the zero value throughout the program history Check that the register does not reach the operation with that value 3004 PLC Error gt DETECTED Atany time CAUSE An error has been detected on the PLC board SOLUTION Change the PLC board Contact the Service Department 48 ERROR TROUBLESHOOTING MANUAL Aeon 3 8055T CNC DRIVE ERRORS 4000 SERCOS ring error DETECTED During execution CAUSE SERCOS communication has been interrupted This could be because there has been an interruption in the connection ring disconnected or broken fiber link or the wrong configuration 1 The node selector switch position does not match the sercosid 2 Parameter P120 SERSPD does not match the transmission speed 3 The drive version is not compatible with the CNC 4 An error has been detected on the SERCOS board 5 The transmission speeds are different at the drive and at the CNC SOLUTION To check that the connection ring has not been interrupted verify that the light travels through the optical fiber If it is due to the wrong configuration contact the Service
367. ine the end point of the programmed movement The machine will move according to the programmed path until it receives the signal from the probe G75 or until itno longer receives the probe signal G76 At this time the CNC will consider the block finished taking as the theoretical position of the axes the real position which they have at that time If the axes reach the programmed position before receiving G75 or while receiving G76 the external signal from the probe the CNC will stop the movement of the axes This type of movement with probing blocks are very useful when it is required to generate measurement or verification programs for tools and parts Functions G75 and G76 are not modal and therefore must be programmed whenever it is wished to probe Itis not possible to vary the Feedrate Override while either G75 or G76 is active It stays set at 100 Functions G75 and G76 are incompatible with each other and with G00 G02 G03 G33 G41 and G42 functions In addition once this has been performed the CNC will assume functions G01 and G40 Chapter 10 Section Page PROBING PROBING G75 1 10 2 PROBING CANNED CYCLES The CNC offers the following probing canned cycles 1 Tool calibration canned cycle Probe calibration canned cycle Part measuring and tool offset correction canned cycle along X axis Ww N Part measuring and tool offset correction canned cycle along Z axis All movements
368. ing canned cycle G87 Grooving canned cycle along X axis G88 Grooving canned cycle along Z axis G89 Tool geometry Y 42 1 a MAINTENANCE Mow N 5 2222 Cleaning Theaccumulated dirt inside the unit may actas a screen preventing the proper dissipation of the heat generated by the internal circuitry which could result in a harmful overheating of the CNC and consequently possible malfunctions On the other hand accumulated dirt can sometimes act as an electrical conductor and shortcircuit the internal circuitry especially under high humidity conditions Toclean the operator panel and the monitor a smooth cloth should be used which has been dipped into de ionized water and or non abrasive dish washer soap liquid never powder or 75 alcohol Do not use highly compressed air to clean the unit because it could generate electrostatic discharges The plastics used on the front panel are resistant to 1 Grease and mineral oils 2 Bases and bleach 3 Dissolved detergents 4 Alcohol Avoid the action of solvents such as Chlorine hydrocarbons Benzole Esters and Ether which can damage the plastics used to make the unit s front panel Preventive Inspection If the CNC does not turn on when actuating the start up switch verify that the monitor fuses are in good condition and that they are the right ones To check the fuses first disconnect the power t
369. ing point X Z It must be assigned a positive value when drilling or tapping in the negative X direction and negative when in doing it in the positive X direction If programmed with a zero value the CNC will issue the corresponding error Chapter 9 Section Page CANNEDCYCLES G61 RADIAL 61 DRILLING TAPPING B5 5 0 5 5 5 5 J4 D5 5 H5 5 C5 5 S 5 5 Defines the type of operation to be run 0 for tapping B gt 0 for drilling where B indicates the drilling step Defines the first angular position to orient the spindle to drill or tap the first hole Defines the angular increment between two consecutive operations It is programmed in degrees Positive when counter clockwise Defines the number of holes to be drilled or tapped including the first one If programmed with a value the CNC will issue the corresponding error Defines in radius the safety distance along the X axis and indicates how far from the starting point Z X the tool will approach the part If not programmed the CNC will assume 0 Defines the dwell in hundredths of a second at the bottom of the hole before starting to withdraw the tool If not programmed the CNC will assume 0 The tapping operation ignores this parameter thus not being necessary to program it If programmed it will be ignored Defines inradius the rapid in GOO withdrawing distance along the X axis after each drilling peck If
370. ing up to a maximum of 15 nesting levels 26 local parameters PO P25 can be assigned to a subroutine These parameters which will be unknown for blocks external to the subroutine may be referenced by the blocks of this subroutine The CNC allows local parameters to be assigned to more than one subroutine 6 nesting levels of local parameters being possible within the 15 nesting levels of a subroutine Page Chapter 11 Section 6 PROGRAMMINGINHIGH LEVELLANGUAGE GENERALPURPOSE VARIABLES Local parameters used in high level language may be defined using the above format or by using the letter A Z except for N so that A is equal to PO and Z to P25 The following example shows these two methods of definition IF PO P1 P2 P3 EQ P4 GOTO N100 IF A B C D EQ E GOTO N100 When using a parameter name letter for assigning a value to it A instead of PO for example if the arithmetic expression is a constant the statement can be abbreviated as follows PO 13 7 gt A 13 7 gt A13 7 Be careful when using parenthesis since M30 is not the same as M30 The CNC interprets M30 as a high level statement meaning P12 30 and not the execution of the miscellaneous M30 function The global parameter P100 P299 can be used throughout the program by any block irrespective of the nesting level Machining canned cycles G81 thru G89 use the next local parameter nesting level when active
371. intermpolation 3 6 3 Circular G02 OUS iua oe inve kr rre RYE 4 6 4 Circular interpolation by programming the center of the arc in absolute eee 9 6 5 Ate tangent to the previous path G08 uc ae p RP REPAS EAR 10 6 6 Zac detuned by three points G09 esse eek mtv tb ie ERU GRE 11 6 7 Helical idem T 12 6 8 Tangential entry at the beginning of a machining operation G37 13 6 9 Tangential exit at the end of a machining operation G38 15 6 10 Automate radis Hend asco vp Ua EE E VOS um ERI EU VER RA 17 6 11 Avtomati chamber GII i eb HEU NUR MEE 19 6 12 Blectronie chread ciant OII au aei ERR ERREUR REN 20 6 13 SM 23 6 13 1 Machining on acylindrical aac ort porre tom rk Fait ile EU 23 6122 Jar CEDE icio deii troia och niin ibas bM Adeo ane Mies 25 6 14 Move te haditop 26 6 15 Feedrate F as an inverted function of time 32 27 6 16 Tanpental control CS osia A E E T 28 6 16 1 Considerations about function 45 30 7 ADDITIONAL PREPARATORY FUNCTIONS 7 1 Intetccupton of block preparation GOA Lu uisa eb ranana 1
372. inus the finishing stock 2 1 Rapid move G00 to the programmed depth indicated by This move will be made according to the penetration angle of the selected tool A 2 2 Performs the threading of the programmed section with the selected exit J Neither can the feedrate F be altered with the Feedrate Override Switch nor the spindle speed S by means of the spindle speed override keys while threading They will be kept at 100 2 3 Withdrawal in rapid G00 to the approach point Thread finishing Rapid move G00 to the programmed depth coordinate This move will beradialoraccording to the tool penetration angle A which depends on the sign assigned to parameter L Itthreads the programmed section with the selected exit J Neither can the feedrate F be altered with the Feedrate Override Switch nor the spindle speed S by means of the spindle speed override keys while threading They will be kept at 100 Withdrawal in rapid G00 to the approach point Considerations The machining conditions feedrate spindle speed etc must be programmed before calling the cycle Once the canned cycle has ended the program will continue with the same feedrate F and G functions active previous to calling the cycle Only the tool radius compensation will be cancelled G40 if it was active Chapter 9 Section Page CANNEDCYCLES FACETHREADCUTTING 53 G87 9 11 688 GROOVING CANNED
373. ioning at the desired point Non rollover axis programming In G90 and G91 like a linear axis Positioning only Axes They cannot be interpolated with linear axes Movement Always in G00 and they do not admit tool radius compensation G41 G42 Rollover axis programming G90 Always positive and via the shortest path End coordinate between 0 amp 359 9999 G9 The sign indicates the turning direction If the programmed movement exceeds 360 the axis will rotate more than one turn before positioning at the desired point Non rollover axis programming In G90 and G91 like a linear axis HIRTH axes They work like the positioning only axis except that they do not admit decimal position values coordinates More than one hirth axis can be used but they can only be moved one at a time Page Chapter 3 Section 12 AXESANDCOORDINATESYSTEMS ROTARY AXES 3 7 WORK ZONES The CNC provides four work zones or areas and also limits the tool movement in each of these 3 71 DEFINITION OF THE WORK ZONES Within each work zone the CNC allows you to limit the movement of the tool in each axes with upper and lower limits being defined in each axis G20 Defines the lower limits in the desired zone G21 Defines the upper limits in the desired zone The format to program these functions is G20 K X C 5 5 G20 K X C 5 5 In which K Indicates the work zone you wish to define 1 2 3 or 4 X C Indicates
374. ions G02 G03 G08 or G09 The movement of the other axis or axes by indicating the target coordinate of that movement Example of circular interpolation in the YZ plane and movement of the X axis G02 YZJKX For the helical interpolation to make more than one turn the circular interpolation and the movement of ONLY one axis must be programmed The helical pitch must also be defined 5 5 format using the letters I J K These letters are associated with the axes as follows 1 for the X U A axes J forthe Y V axes for the Z W C axes Example of acircularinterpolationin the YZand movementofthe X axis with a helical pitch of 5 mm G02YZJKXI5 Page Chapter 6 Section 12 PATHCONTROL HELICALINTERPOLATION 6 8 TANGENTIAL ENTRY AT THE BEGINNING OF A MACHINING OPERATION G37 Via function G37 you can tangentially link two paths without having to calculate the intersection points Function G37 is not modal so it should always be programmed if you wish to start a machining operation with tangential entry Example with X axis programmed in radius If the starting point is X20 Z60 and you wish to machine an arc the path of approach being straight you should program G90 G01 X20 730 G03 X40 710 R20 Chapter 6 Section Page PATHCONTROL TANGENTIALENTRY 13 G37 If however in the same example you require the entrance of the tool to the part to be machined tangential to the
375. ironment This unit is ready to be used in Industrial Environments complying with the directives and regulations effective in the European Community Fagor Automation shall not be held responsible for any damage suffered or caused when installed in other environments residential or homes Install the unit in the right place Itisrecommended whenever possible to instal the CNC away from coolants chemical product blows etc that could damage it This unit complies with the European directives on electromagnetic compatibility Nevertheless it is recommended to keep it away from sources of electromagnetic disturbance such as Powerful loads connected to the same AC power line as this equipment Nearby portable transmitters Radio telephones Ham radio transmitters Nearby radio TC transmitters Nearby arc welding machines Nearby High Voltage power lines Etc Ambient conditions The working temperature must be between 5 C and 45 C 41 F and 113 F The storage temperature must be between 25 C and 70 C 13 F and 158 F Introduction 2 Protections of the unit itself Power Supply Module It carries two fast fuses of 3 15 250V to protect the mains AC input Axes module All the digital inputs and outputs have galvanic isolation via optocouplers between the CNC circuitry and the outside They are protected by an external fast fuse F of 3 15 Amp 250V against reverse connection of the pow
376. is always a straight line between the starting point and the final point Example with X axis programmed in radius X100 Z100 Startingpoint G00 G90 X300 Z400 Programmed path It is possible via the general machine parameter RAPIDOVR to establish if the feedrate override switch when working in G00 operates from 0 to 100 or whether it stays constant at 100 When G00 is programmed the last F programmed is not cancelled i e when G01 602 or G03 are programmed again F is recovered G00 is modal and incompatible with G01 G02 G03 G33 and G75 Function GOO can be programmed as G or GO On power up after executing M02 M30 or after EMERGENCY or RESET the CNC assumes code or G01 depending on how general machine parameter IMOVE has been set Page Chapter 6 Section 2 PATHCONTROL RAPIDTRAVEL G00 6 2 LINEAR INTERPOLATION 601 The movements programmed after GO1 are executed according to a straight line and at the programmed feedrate F Whentwoorthree axes move simultaneously the resulting path is a straight line between the starting point and the final point The machine moves according to this path to the programmed feedrate F The CNC calculates the feedrates of each axis so that the resulting pathis the F value programmed Example with X axis programmed in diameter 400 P 150mm min 150
377. ith that value 0091 Division by zero DETECTED While editing at the CNC or while executing a program transmitted via DNC CAUSE An operation has been programmed which involves a division by zero SOLUTION Only divisions by numbers other than zero are allowed When working with parameters that parameter may have already acquired a negative value or zero Check that the parameter does not reach the operation with that value 14 ERROR TROUBLESHOOTING MANUAL Hicon 3 8055T CNC 0092 Base zero with positive exponent DETECTED While editing at the CNC or while executing a program transmitted via DNC CAUSE An operation has been programmed which involves elevating zero to a negative exponent or zero SOLUTION Zero only be elevated to positive exponents greater than zero When working with parameters that parameter may have already acquired a negative value or zero Check that the parameter does not reach the operation with that value 0093 Negative base with decimal exponent DETECTED While editing at the CNC or while executing a program transmitted via DNC CAUSE An operation has been programmed which involves elevating a negative number to a decimal exponent SOLUTION Negative numbers can only be elevated to integer exponents When working with parameters that parameter may have already acquired a negative value or zero Check that the parameter does not reach the operation with that value 0094 A
378. ize ENTER ESC echk ejec CHECKSUM ERROR AXIS C PARAMETERS Initialize ENTER ESC DETECTED While starting the CNC up CAUSE Data lost in the axis parameter tables Possible RAM error SOLUTION By pressing ENTER the tables are loaded with default values If the error persists contact the Service Department ERROR TROUBLESHOOTING MANUAL 51 8055T CNC FAGOR 23 echk herr echk corr echk alm echk aux echk husx echk husy echk husz echk husu echk husv CHECKSUM ERROR TOOL TABLE Initialize ENTER ESC CHECKSUM ERROR TOOL OFFSET TABLE Initialize ENTER ESC CHECKSUM ERROR MAGAZINE TABLE Initialize ENTER ESC CHECKSUM ERROR M FUNCTION TABLE Initialize ENTER ESC CHECKSUM ERROR LEADSCREW X TABLE Initialize ENTER ESC CHECKSUM ERROR LEADSCREW Y TABLE Initialize ENTER ESC CHECKSUM ERROR LEADSCREW Z TABLE Initialize ENTER ESC CHECKSUM ERROR LEADSCREW U TABLE Initialize ENTER ESC CHECKSUM ERROR LEADSCREW V TABLE Initialize ENTER ESC husw CHECKSUM ERROR LEADSCREW W TABLE Initialize ENTER ESC echk_husa echk_husb echk_husc echk cru1 echk cru2 echk cru3 CHECKSUM ERROR LEADSCREW A TABLE Initialize ENTER ESC CHECKSUM ERROR LEADSCREW B TABLE Initialize ENTER ESC CHECKSUM ERROR LEADSCREW C TABLE Initialize ENTER ESC CHECKSUM ERROR CROSS COMP TABLE 1 Initialize ENTER ESC CHECKSUM ERROR CROSS COMP
379. l axis takes the same orientation by programming 90 or 270 the turning direction in a direction change depends on the programmed value 90 270 90 270 4 a Chapter 6 Section Page PATHCONTROL TANGENTIAL CONTROL G45 29 6 16 1 CONSIDERATIONS ABOUT FUNCTION G45 Tangential control G45 is optional It can only be executed in the main channel and is compatible with e Tool radius and length compensation G40 41 42 43 44 Mirror image G10 11 12 13 14 Gantry axes including the gantry axis associated with the tangential rotary axis The maximum feedrate while orienting the tangential axis is defined by machine parameter MAXFEED for that axis While tangential control is active tool inspection is also possible When accessing tool inspection the tangential control is deactivated the axes are free and when quitting tool inspection tangential control may be activated again While in JOG mode tangential control may be activated in MDI mode and the axes may be moved by programming blocks in MDI Tangential control is canceled when jogging the axes with the jog keys not in MDI Once the movement is over tangential control is recovered On the other hand the following is NOT possible Todefine as tangential axis one of the plane axes the longitudinal axis or any other axis which is not rotary Tojogthe tangential axis in JOG mode or by program using ano
380. l be repeated until the bottom of the hole is reached 1 5 1 Rapid withdrawal G00 a distance or to the approach point Chapter 9 Section Page CANNEDCYCLES G60 AXIAL 59 DRILLING TAPPING 9 5 2 Rapid approach G00 to a C distance from the next peck 5 3 New drilling peck in 01 to an incremental depth B Dwell K a the bottom of the hole in hundredths of a second if programmed Rapid withdrawal G00 to the approach point Depending on the value assigned to J number of holes to be drilled 8 1 The spindle rotates to the new hole position Angular increment A 8 2 Repeats steps 4 5 6 and 7 Stops the live tool Tapping Basic operation 1 Rapid move to the approach point located at a D distance from the first hole position 2 CNC turns on the live tool at the rpm and in the turning direction indicated by parameter S 3 Orients the spindle at the angular position set by If the spindle was turning it will stop 4 Tapping Movement of the tapping axis to the bottom of the hole I MFO SSO FEED HOLD and CYCLE STOP are disabled 5 live tool reverses turning direction 6 Withdrawal G01 to the approach point 7 Depending on the value assigned to J number of holes to be tapped 7 1 The spindle rotates to the new hole position Angular increment A 7 2 Repeats steps 4 5 6 and 7 8 Stops the live tool Considerations
381. l issue the corresponding error message Once the page or symbol has been selected the CNC will display a screen similar to this Tre pe em rame FEA 2020202010010 CAP INS ee es one The upper left hand side of the screen will show the number of the page or symbol being edited The main window will show the selected page or symbol When it is a new page or symbol the main window will be blank blue background There is also a window at the bottom of the screen which shows the different editing parameters and highlights their selected values Chapter 10 Section Page CRE EDITINGCUSTOMSCREENS 5 PARDOS PAGES ANDSYMBOLS The various parameters available are Thetype of drawing line used when defining the graphic elements The cursor moving steps cursor advance in pixels The letter size to create the texts for the pages and symbols Thebackgroundandforeground main colors for the graphic elements and for the letters One of the color rectangles shown has another rectangle in it The inside rectangle indicates the selected main color and the outside rectangle indicates the selected background color This window also shows The cursor position coordinates in pixels The horizontal position is indicated by the X value 1 through 638 and the vertical position by the Y value 0 through 334 Once one of the options GRAPHIC ELEMENTS TEXTS or MODIFICATIONS has been selec
382. language statement SK the CNC will only replace the selected softkeys leaving the others intact WKEY The mnemonic WKEY stops execution of the program until the key is pressed The pressed key will be recorded in the KEY variable Example WKEY Wait for key IF KEY FC00 GOTO N1000 If key F1 has been pressed continue in N1000 Page Chapter 12 Section 18 PROGRAM CONTROLSTATEMENTS SCREENCUSTOMIZING STATEMENTS WBUF expression The WBUF statement can only be used when editing a program in the user channel This mnemonic may be programmed in two ways WBUF text expression This statement adds the text and value of the expression once this has been evaluated to the block which is being edited and within the data input window Expression may contain anumber orany expression which results in a number It will be optional to program the expression but it will be required to define the text If no text is required must be programmed WBUF Enters into memory adding to the program being edited and after the cursor position the block being edited by means of WBUF text expression Italso clears the editing buffer in order to edit a new block This allows the user to edit a complete program without having to quit the user editing mode after each block and press ENTER to enter it into memory Example WBUF PCALL 25 IB 1 INPUT Pa
383. lar to the G01 602 G03 or G33 path at its end point Whenever the CNC detects a transition from 00 to G01 G02 G03 or G33 the new block receives the treatment corresponding to the first compensated point resuming tool radius compensation as usual Special case If the CNC does not have enough information for compensation but itis a move this move will be carried out without tool radius compensation Machining example in diameter with tool radius compensation Page Chapter 8 Section 14 TOOL COMPENSATION TEMPORARY TOOLRADIUS CANCELLATION WITHG00 The programmed path is shown with a solid line and the compensated path with a dotted line Tool Number TI Tool Offset Number DI G90 G00 X240 7220 D1 G42 601 7200 G03 X60 717010 K 30 G01 Z120 G02 X120 Z90 130 KO G01 X160 X200 Z30 G40 G00 X240 7220 M30 Tool Offset Activate compensation Cancelcompensation Chapter 8 TOOLCOMPENSATION Section TEMPORARYTOOLRADIUS CANCELLATION WITH G00 Page 15 8 6 TOOL COMPENSATION IN ANY PLANE With general machine parameter PLACOM itis possible to work with tool compensation either in all planes or only in the ZX plane see chapter on machine parameters in the installation manual When setting PLACOM 1 to work with tool compensation in all planes the CNC interprets the tool table as follows ZX plane WX plane AB plane Parameters Z an
384. le 3 DETECTE CAUSE D While starting the CNC up Wrong data in the cross compensation table SOLUTION The points must be defined in the table as follows They must be ordered according to their position on the axis starting from the most negative or least positive point to be compensated for The machine reference point must have an error value of zero 52 ERROR TROUBLESHOOTING MANUAL Hicon 3 8055T CNC einxx Incorrect cross compensation table parameters DETECTED While starting the CNC up CAUSE The parameters indicating which axis take part in the cross compensation are defined wrong SOLUTION nonexistent axis might have been defined or that the axis affected by the compensation is the same as the one causing the error esercos Wrong sercosid parameters for axes and spindle DETECTED While starting the CNC up CAUSE The sercosid parameters are wrong SOLUTION sercosid parameters must start from 1 must be consecutive must not be repeated Except on lathes with a C axis The spindle and the axis may share the same sercosid ERROR TROUBLESHOOTING MANUAL 53 8055T CNC REGE 2 ERRORS IN 8055TC OPERATING MODE Errors in the turning cycle Cycle without roughing or finishing DETECTED While executing CAUSE No tool has been selected for the roughing or finishing operations SOLUTION Select the tool for roughing If T 0 there is no r
385. le A2 G56 Applies G56 Execution of profile Executes profile Using incremental coordinates G54 Applies offset G54 Execution of profile Executes profile Al G58 Applies offset G54 G58 Execution of profile Executes profile A2 G59 Applies G54 G59 Execution of profile Executes profile Page Chapter 4 Section 8 REFERENCESYSTEMS 45 POLAR ORIGIN PRESET G93 Function G93 allows you to preset any point from the work plane as anew origin of polar coordinates This function must be programmed alone in the block its format being G93 1 5 5 J 5 5 Parameters I amp J respectively define the abscissa and ordinate axes of the new origin of polar coordinates Their values will be in radius or diameter depending on the setting of axis machine parameter DFORMAT Example with X axis programming in diameter Assuming that the tool is at XO YO E G90 X180 750 G01 X160 G93 I90 J160 G03 Q270 G01 7130 G93 1130 JO G02 00 If G93 is only programmed in a block the point where the machine is at that moment becomes the polar origin Notes CNC does not modify the polar origin when defining a new part zero but it modifies the values of the variables PORGS If while selecting the general machine parameter PORGMOVYVE a circular interpolation is programmed G02 or G03 the CNC assumes the center of the Point PO Point P1 in a straight li
386. le facing operation is carried out with the same pass value which will be equal to or smaller than the one programmed If programmed with a 0 value the CNC will display the corresponding error message D 5 5 Defines the safety distance to withdraw the tool after each pass X X e TPOSHO2 Page Chapter 9 Section 40 CANNEDCYCLES FACING WITHARCS G85 L5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 1 5 5 5 5 When programming D with a value other than 0 the cutter withdraws at a 45 angle up to the safety distance left drawing When programming D with a 0 value the exit path is the same as the entry path This may be interesting for grooving complex profiles to use these cycles on cylindrical grinders etc When not programming D the tool withdrawalis carried out following the profile up to the last pass C distance right drawing It must be borne in mind that when D is not programmed the cycle execution time is greater but the amount of stock to be removed on the finishing pass is less Defines the finishing pass along X It is given in radius and if not programmed a value of 0 will be assumed Defines the finishing pass along Z It is given in radius and if not programmed a value of 0 will be assumed Defines the feedrate for the final roughing pass If not programmed or programmed with a value of 0 it means that there is no final roughing pass Xi TPO9HO6
387. leted when the selected trigger condition is met or it is interrupted by pressing the STOP TRACE softkey If interrupted before the trigger occurs a trace will be shown with data but without the trigger position vertical red line The data capture begins the instant the user presses the EXECUTE TRACE softkey The CNC will enable half the trace buffer to store the data corresponding to the trace prior to the trigger and the other half for the data corresponding to the trace after the trigger The trace is completed when its buffer is full or when it is interrupted by pressing the STOP TRACE softkey If interrupted before the trigger occurs a trace will be shown with data but without the trigger position vertical red line The CNC carries out this type of trace when no trigger condition has been specified The data capture begins the instant the EXECUTE TRACE softkey is pressed The trace is completed when interrupted by pressing the STOP TRACE showing a trace with data but without the trigger position vertical red line Chapter 9 Section Page PLC LOGICANALYZER 33 9 10 3 3 TRACE REPRESENTATION Once the data capture is done the CNC will display graphically in the status window the status of the signals based on the trace calculated for the analyzed variables Also a vertical red line indicating the trigger position and a vertical green line indicating the cursor positi
388. limit of work zone 3 along the selected axis X C Upper limit of work zone 3 along the selected axis X C Status of work zone 4 Lower limit of work zone 4 along the selected axis X C Upper limit of work zone 4 along the selected axis X C VARIABLES ASSOCIATED WITH FEEDRATES Section 11 2 6 Variable FREAL Real feedrate of the CNC in mm min or inch min Variables associated with function G94 Active feedrate at the CNC in mm min or inch min Feedrate selected via DNC Feedrate selected via PLC Feedrate selected by program AAAD Variables associated with function G95 FPREV Active feedrate at CNC in m rev or inch rev DNCFPR Feedrate selected via DNC PLCFPR Feedrate selected via PLC PRGFPR Feedrate selected by program Variables associated with function G32 PRGFIN R R R Feedrate selected by program In 1 min Variables associated with Feedrate Override Feedrate Override active at the CNC Feedrate Override selected by program Feedrate Override selected by DNC Feedrate Override selected by PLC Feedrate Override selected from the front panel knob Feedrate Override of the PLC execution channel VARIABLES ASSOCIATED WITH POSITION VALUES Section 11 2 7 Variable PPOS X C Theoretical programmed position value coordinate POS X C Real position value of th
389. ling canned cycle 9 16 Pattern repeat canned cycle 9 1 Stock removal canned cycle along X axis G69 Stock removal canned cycle along Z axis G70 Programming in inches G71 2 programming in millimeters G72 General and specific scaling factor G74 Machine reference search G75 Probing until touching G76 Probing while touching G77 Slaved axis GTTS Spindle synchronism in speed G78 Slaved axis cancellation G78S Spindle synchronism cancellation X X X X X X G81 G82 G83 G84 G85 G86 G87 Turning canned cycle with straight sections Facing canned cycle with straight sections Drilling canned cycle Turning canned cycle with circular sections Facing canned cycle with circular sections Longitudinal threadcutting canned cycle Face threadcutting canned cycle G88 Grooving canned cycle along X axis G89 Grooving canned cycle along Z axis G90 Programming in absolute G91 2 Programming incremental G92 Coordinate preset spindle speed limit G93 Polar origin G94 Feedrate in millimeters inches per minute G95 Feedrate in millimeters inches per revolution G96 Constant Surface Speed G97 Spindle speed in r p m X X X X X X X X X M means MODAL i e that once programmed the G function remains active as long as another incompatible G function is not programmed M02 M30 EMERGENCY RESET are not programmed or the CNC is not turned on or off Letter D means BY DEFAULT i e
390. locks which are working with compensation undesired profiles may be obtained Example The following program blocks are performed in a section with G41 compensation N10 X80 Z50 N15 P100 POSX Assigns the value of the real coordinate in X to parameter P100 N20 X50 Z50 N30 X50 Z80 Page Chapter 11 Section 4 PROGRAMMINGINHIGH LEVELLANGUAGE VARIABLES Block N15 interrupts block preparation and the execution of block N10 will finish at point A Once the execution of block N15 has ended the CNC will continue block preparation from block N20 on As the next point corresponding to the compensated pathis point the CNC will move the tool to this point executing path As can be observed the resulting path is not the desired one and therefore it is recommended to avoid the use of this type of variable in sections requiring tool compensation Chapter 11 Section Page PROGRAMMINGINHIGH LEVELLANGUAGE VARIABLES 5 11 2 1 GENERAL PURPOSE PARAMETERS OR VARIABLES The CNC has two types of general purpose variables local parameters PO P25 and global parameters P100 P299 Programmers may use general purpose variables when editing their own programs Later and during execution the CNC will replace these variables with the values assigned to it atthat time Example GPO XP1 Y100 X 12 5 100 IK P100 P101 EQ P102 GOTO N100 IF 2 5 EQ 12 GOTO N100 Th
391. long X It is given in radius and if not programmed a value of 0 will be assumed Defines the finishing pass along Z If either L or is negative the finishing pass will be carried out in round corner G05 When they are both positive the finishing pass will be performed in square corner 07 If M is not programmed the X and Z residual value will be the one indicated by parameter L and the roughing passes will be the same maintaining the C distance between two consecutive passes XA 11 Z X Defines the penetration feedrate for the valleys If not programmed or programmed with a value of 0 it assumes the machining feedrate that was programmed before calling the cycle Defines the feedrate for the final roughing pass If not programmed or programmed with a value of 0 it means that there is no final roughing pass Mn Z X TPO9B12 Page 10 Chapter 9 Section CANNEDCYCLES STOCKREMOVAL CYCLE ALONG X AXIS G68 H5 5 Definesthefeedrateforthe finishing pass If not programmed or programmed with a value of 0 it is considered that no finishing pass is desired S4 Defines the label number of the first block describing the geometry of the profile 4 Defines the label number of last block describing the geometry of the profile Q6 Defines the number of the program containing the geometry description of the profile
392. lor and the outside rectangle indicates the selected background color To select the main color follow these steps Use the right and left arrow keys to select the desired color among the 16 shown TheCNC will show the main color being selected by placing a white inside rectangle It will also display the rectangle containing both the selected background color and the main color being selected here 2 Press ENTER to validate the selected color or ESC to quit this mode leaving the previous selection intact When editing a new page or symbol the CNC assumes white as the main color by default GRID This softkey superimposes a grid over the screen in order to facilitate the lay out of the different components of the page or symbol being created or modified This grid is formed by white or black points depending on the background color separated 16 pixels from each other The grid points will be white when the selected background color corresponds to one of the 8 upper colorrectangles and they will be black when the selected background color corresponds to one of the 8 lower color rectangles Press this softkey again to get rid of the grid Every time the grid is displayed CNC will reset the cursor advance step to 16 pixels Therefore the cursor will move from grid point to grid point every time the arrow keys are pressed to position it on the screen However the cursor advance may be modified afterwards by selecting it
393. lso PCALL 10 A30 B 15 G90 G01 X200 7115 PCALL 10 P0230 P1 15 oralso PCALL 10 A30 B 15 M30 SUB 10 G91 601 7 1 7 1 7 1 MCALL expression assignment statement assignment statement By means of the mnemonic MCALL any user defined subroutine SUB integer acquires the category of canned cycle The execution of this mnemonic is the same as the mnemonic PCALL but the call is modal i e if another block with axis movement is programmed at the end of this block after this movement the subroutine indicated will be executed and with the same call parameters If when a modal subroutine is selected a movement block with a number of repetitions is executed for example X10 N3 the CNC will execute the movement only once X10 and after the modal subroutine as many times as the number of repetitions indicates Should block repetitions be chosen the first execution of the modal subroutine will be made with updated call parameters but not forthe remaining times which will be executed with the values which these parameters have at that time If when a subroutine is selected as modal a block containing the MCALL mnemonic isexecuted the present subroutine willloseits modal quality and the new subroutine selected will be changed to modal Chapter 12 Section Page PROGRAMCONTROLSTATEMENTS SUBROUTINE 9 STATEMENTS 124 100 40 MDOFF The mnemonic M
394. lutions min and Override values for the second spindle are given in integers from 0 to 255 Read only variables SSREAL SSPEED SDNCS SPLCS SPRGS SCSS SDNCCS SPLCCS SPRGCS Returns the real spindle turning speed in revolutions per minute P100 SSREAL assigns to P100 the real turning speed of the spindle If this variable is accessed block preparation is interrupted and the CNC waits for this command to be executed to resume block preparation Returns the spindle speed in revolutions per minute selected at the CNC This turning speed can be indicated by program by the PLC or DNC and the CNC selects one of these the one with the highest priority being that indicated by DNC and the one with the lowest priority that indicated by program Returns the turning speed in revolutions per minute selected by DNC If this has a value of 0 it means that it is not selected Returns the turning speed in revolutions per minute selected by PLC If this has a value of 0 it means that it is not selected Returns the turning speed in revolutions per minute selected by program Returns the Constant Surface Speed selected at the CNC Its value is given in the active units m min or feet min This C S S may be indicated by the PLC or via DNC The CNC will select one of them being the DNC the one with highest priority and the program the one with the lowest priority Returns the Constant Surface Speed s
395. m CX s 5 2 gt m n Ses cO e Suse en Cu 2525 x hh ECCE Lo SIND m ae Ex co tite Se gt Page Section TOOLCALIBRATION JOG Chapter 5 Tool calibration without a probe The tool calibration is performed axis by axis X Z Follow these steps Press the softkey corresponding to the axis X Z The CNC will request the position value of the known part at the touch point Once this value has been keyed in press ENTER for this value to be assumed by the CNC Jog the tool with the jog keys X X Z Z 3 3 44 4 until touching the part Press the LOAD softkey corresponding to this axis The CNC will perform the necessary calculations and it will assign the new value to the tool length Repeat these operation to calibrate the tool along the other axis Tool calibration with a probe When using a probe for tool calibration the following machine parameters must be properly set PRBXMIN PRBXMAX PRBYMIN PRBYMAX PRBZMIN and PRBZMAX The tool calibration is performed axis by axis X Z in either one of these modes without a probe as described above and as follows Follow these steps Position the tool in front of the probe Pressthe softkey which indicates the direction of the tool calibration PROBE X PROBE X PROBE Z PROBE Z TheCNC will move the tool at the feed
396. merical format if it has zero value or a symbol if it is positive Thenumericalformat ofa word can be replaced by an arithmetic parameter in programming Later and during basic execution the control will replace the arithmetic parameter by its value for example If XP3 has been programmed during execution the CNC will replace P3 by its numerical value obtaining results such as X20 X20 567 X 0 003 etc CREATING A PROGRAM IN THE CNC All the blocks which make up the program have the following structure Block header program block end of block Chapter 2 Section Page CREATINGA PROGRAM 1 2 1 1 BLOCK HEADER The block header is optional and may consist of one or more block skip conditions and by the block number or label Both can be programmed in this order CONDITION FOR BLOCK SKIP 1 2 3 These three block skip conditions given that and 1 is the same are governed by the marks BLKSKIP1 BLKSKIP2 and BLKSKIP3 of the PLC If any of these marks is active the CNC will not execute the block or blocks in which it has been programmed The execution takes place in the following block Up to 3 skip conditions can be programmed in one block These will be evaluated one by one respecting the order in which they have been programmed The control reads 20 blocks ahead of the one being executed in order to calculate in advance the path to be run The condition for block skip will be
397. meters 2998 Ineomoet GxpressIDI uiuit om irte d3 Incorrect message urea Incorrect number of bits wee Incorrect operation 219 Incorrect order Of 6 9 Incorrect parametric programming sod Incorrect range change Incorrect variable Valid 4 n me e ee cis 34 Insufficient accelerations for the programmed threadcutting p rn 40 Insufficient memory 22 Invalid cutter geometry angle 34 vald Gutter WAGE 1e ees 34 Invalid G function after first point of profile wer Invalid G function when selecting a profile weed Invalid parameter value in canned cycle 33 Invalid programming after first point of profile 228 Invalid tool for programmed 93 J Jump Te ar andatined erret 36 L Label cannot Do SEACE ekusi tlt 36 Label not defined 008 Leadscrew Position Error 2 189 Local parameters not 95 No more information allowed in the block 2 No more M functions allowed in the block ved No negative radius allowed with absolute coordinates 403
398. mmed in radius and in the units established by general machine parameter INCHES being its format X 5 5 Nominal tool length along Z axis It will be programmed in radius and in the units established by general machine parameter INCHES being its format Z 5 5 The type of tool indicates the shape of the tool and how it has been calibrated It is defined according to location codes FO through F10 Location codes F0 and F9 mustonly be used when calibrating the tool tip center and not the sides of the cutter When using an end mill or drill F10 must be selected The following pages show how to use these location codes FO through F10 Nominal tool radius It will be programmed in radius and in the units established by general machine parameter INCHES being its format R 5 5 Tool length wear along X axis in the units established by general machine parameter INCHES and in I 5 5 format The CNC adds this value to the nominal tool length along X axis to calculate the real radius Tool length wear along Z axis in the units established by general machine parameter INCHES and in K 5 5 format The CNC adds this value to the nominal tool length along X axis to calculate the real radius Z K When tool radius compensation is required G41 or G42 the CNC takes into account the tool location code and it applies the R value of the selected tool offset as the compensation value Ifno tool offset has been programmed the CNC
399. mply with the formats established for these tables The zero offsets which are possible in addition to the additive offset indicated by the PLC are G54 G55 G56 G57 G58 and G59 The values for each axis are given in the active units If G70 in inches Max 3937 00787 If G71 in millimeters Max 99999 9999 If rotary in degrees Max 99999 9999 Although there are variables which refer to each axis the CNC only allows those referring to the selected axes in the CNC Thus if the CNC controls axes X Y Z U and B it only allows the variables ORGX ORGY ORGZ ORGU and ORGB in the case of ORG X C Read only variables ORG X C Returns the value of the active zero offset in the selected axis The value of the additive offset indicated by the PLC is not included in this value P100 ORGX assigns to P100 the X value of the part zero active for the X axis This value could have been set either by means of function G92 or by the variable ORG X C n PORGF Returns the abscissa value of the polar origin with respect to the cartesian origin This coordinate value will be given in radius or diameter according to the setting of axis machine parameter DFORMAT PORGS Returns the ordinate value of the polar origin with respect to the cartesian origin This coordinate value will be given in radius or diameter according to the setting of axis machine parameter DFORMAT Page Chapter 11 Section 10 PROGRAMMINGINHIG
400. munication is with a peripheral device PROTOCOL 1 if the communication is via DNC 1 1 PART PROGRAMS Editing To create a part program access the Edit mode See chapter 5 in this manual The new part program edited is stored in the CNC s RAM memory A copy of the part programs may be stored in the MemKey Card at a PC connected through serial line 1 or 2 or in the hard disk HD module See chapter 7 in this manual When using a PC through serial line 1 or 2 proceed as follows Execute the Fagor50 exe applications program at the PC Activate DNC communications at the CNC See chapter 8 in this manual e Select the work directory as shown in chapter 7 of this manual Option Utilities Directory Serial L Change directory Chapter 1 Section Page OVERVIEW 1 With the Edit mode of operation part programs residing in the CNC s RAM memory may be modified To modify a program stored in the MemKey Card in a PC or in the hard disk it must be previously copied into RAM memory Execution Part programs stored anywhere may be executed or simulated See chapter 3 in this manual The user customizing programs must be in RAM memory so the CNC can execute them The GOTO and RPT instructions cannot be used in programs executed from a PC connected through the serial lines See chapter 14 of the programming manual The subroutines can only be executed if they reside in the CNC s RAM memory Therefore to ex
401. n This C S S may beindicated by the PLC or via DNC The CNC will select one of them being the DNC the one with highest priority and the program the one with the lowest priority Returns the Constant Surface Speed selected via DNC Its value is given in m min or feet min A value of 0 means that no speed is selected Returns the Constant Surface Speed selected via PLC Its value is given in m min or feet min A value of 0 means that no speed is selected Returns the Constant Surface Speed selected by program Its value is given in m min or feet min Chapter 11 Section Page PROGRAMMINGINHIGH LEVELLANGUAGE VARIABLESFOR 19 THEMAINSPINDLE SSO DNCSSO PLCSSO CNCSSO SLIMIT DNCSL PLCSL PRGSL POSS RPOSS TPOSS Returns the Override of the spindle speed selected at the CNC This will be given by an integer between 0 and MAXSOVR maximum 255 This spindle speed percentage may be indicated by the PLC by DNC or from the front panel and the CNC will select one of them the order of priority from highest to lowest being by program by DNC by PLC and from the front panel Returns the spindle speed percentage selected by DNC If this has a value of 0 it means that it is not selected Returns the spindle speed percentage selected by PLC If this has a value of 0 it means that it is not selected Returns spindle speed percentage selected from the front panel Retur
402. n REFERENCESYSTEMS 43 PROGRAMMING WITH RESPECT TO MACHINE ZERO 653 Function G53 can be added to any block which has path control functions Itis only used when the programming of block coordinates relating to machine zero is required These coordinates should be expressed in millimeters or inches depending on how the general machine parameter INCHES is defined When programming function G53 without movementinformation it cancels the currently active zero offset regardless of whether it was programmed via G54 G59 or by preset G92 The description of the zero offset preset follows Function G53 is not modal so it should be programmed every time you wish to indicate the coordinates referred to machine zero This function temporarily cancels radius and tool length compensation Example when the X axis is programmed in radius A Vp exeo mao p um G1 X40 Z30 10 f G90 G53 G1 X140 Z100 1 1 1 10 30 M Machine Reference home W Part Zero Chapter 4 Section Page REFERENCESYSTEMS 3 44 PRESETTING OF COORDINATES AND ZERO OFFSETS The CNC allows you to carry out zero offsets with the aim of using coordinates related to the plane of the part without having to modify the coordinates of the different points of the part at the time of programming The zero offset is defined as the distance between the part zero point of origi
403. n a set of profiles there one that intersects itself SOLUTION Check the definition of the profiles A profile cannot intersect itself 1045 Invalid cutter geometry angle DETECTED While executing CAUSE An invalid value has been assigned to the angles of the cutter geometry SOLUTION Correct the tool geometry data 1046 Wrong tool position prior to canned cycle DETECTED While executing CAUSE The canned cycle calling point has been defined wrong SOLUTION canned cycle calling point must be located outside the part at a distance greater than the one defined as the finishing stock on both axes In cycles not having finishing stock the safety distance must be used 1047 Location code not allowed in canned cycle DETECTED While executing CAUSE The location code tool shape is not the right one to execute the machining operation SOLUTION Choose a tool with the right location code to carry out the machining operation 1048 Invalid cutter width DETECTED While executing CAUSE A grooving operation has been defined with a cutter width value of zero SOLUTION Check the definition of the cutter dimensions NOSEW The cutter width must be other than zero 1049 Incompatible tool position and tool code in profile cycle DETECTED While executing CAUSE The canned cycle calling point is defined wrong or the tool shape or location code is not the right one to carry out the machining operati
404. n and execution errors BERR RRR 29 0 12 38 Hardware errors ccc cc cccccccccccccccecccccceccccccecocesnds 45 errors 48 Alphabetical index 2222 4222 4 65 Figon 3 8055T CNC PROGRAMMING ERRORS 0001 Empty line DETECTED While editing at the CNC or while executing a program transmitted via DNC CAUSE S The various causes might be 1 When trying to enter into a program or execute an empty block or containing the label block number 2 In the Pattern repeat canned cycle G66 Roughing canned cycle along the X axis G68 or Roughing canned cycle along the Z axis G69 Parameter S beginning of the profile is greater than parameter E end of profile SOLUTION The solution for each cause is 1 The CNC cannot enter into the program or execute an empty line To do that use the symbol at the beginning of that block The CNC will ignore the rest of the block 2 The value of parameter S block where the profile definition begins must be lower than the value of parameter E block where the profile definition ends 0002 Improper data DETECTED While editing at the CNC or while executing a program transmitted via DNC CAUSE S The various causes might be 1 When editing an axis coordinat
405. n deactivating the graphics DEACTIVATE GRAPHICS softkey When redefining a new display area DISPLAY AREA softkey When selecting another type of solid graphics solid XZ solid XC solid ZC Xo Xo X xXx Page Chapter 3 Section 20 EXECUTE SIMULATE GRAPHICS SOLID GRAPHICS This type of graphics shows the part secured at the spindle and the tool in use The types of solid graphics available are XZ solid XC solid and ZC solid Depending on whether the program is being executed or simulated the programmed tool movement will be shown as well as the shape of the part after that operation If during the execution or simulation of a program no tool is selected the CNC will NOT show the tool and the shape of the part will be shown intact In XZ SOLID when S spindle speed is assigned the resulting part will be shown machined turned both sides On the other hand if no S is programmed the resulting part will only be shown machined on the tool side The generated graphic will be lost in the following cases When deleting the screen CLEAR SCREEN softkey When deactivating the graphics DEACTIVATE GRAPHICS softkey When redefining the new display area DISPLAY AREA softkey When selecting another type of line graphics XZ XC ZC Chapter 3 EXECUTE SIMULATE Section GRAPHICS Page 21 3 5 2 DISPLAY AREA In order to u
406. n of the part and the machine zero point of origin of the machine M Machine zero W Part zero This zero offset can be carried out in one of two ways Via Function G92 coordinate preset The CNC accepts the coordinates of the programmed axes after G92 as new axis values Via the use of zero offsets G54 G55 G56 G57 G58 G59 The CNC accepts as a new part zero the point located relative to machine zero at the distance indicated by the selected table s Both functions are modal and incompatible so if one is selected the other is disabled There is moreover another zero offset which is governed by the PLC This offset is always added to the zero offset selected and is used among other things to correct deviations produced as a result of expansion etc Page Chapter 4 Section 4 REFERENCESYSTEMS ORG 54 ORG 55 ORG 56 n ORG x Zero offset PLCOF Offset from the PLC C66 ORG 57 G57 ORG 58 G58 ORG 59 G59 Chapter 4 REFERENCESYSTEMS Section Page 4 4 1 Cop E PRESET AND LIMITATION OF THE S VALUE G92 Via Function G92 one can select any value in the axes of the CNC in addition to limiting the spindle speed COORDINATE PRESET Whencarrying out a zero offset via Function G92 the CNC assumes the coordinates of the axes programmed after G92 as new axis values No other function can be programmed in the block
407. n the cursor over the last block to be moved and press the FINAL BLOCK softkey If the last block to be moved is also the last one of the program it can also be selected by pressing the TO THE END softkey Tomove only one block the initial block and the final block will be the same one Once the first and last blocks are selected the CNC will highlight the selected blocks requesting confirmation to move them Then indicate the block after which this group of blocks must be placed Press the START OPERATION softkey to carry out the move Page Chapter 9 Section PLC EDIT COPY BLOCK With this option itis possible to copy ablock or group of blocks by previously indicating the first and last blocks to be copied To do so follow these steps Position the cursor over the first block to be copied and press the INITIAL BLOCK softkey Position the cursor over the last block to be copied and press the FINAL BLOCK softkey If the last block to be copied is also the last one of the program it can also be selected by pressing the THE END softkey Tocopy only one block the initial block and the final block will be the same one Once the first and last blocks are selected the CNC will highlight the selected blocks requesting confirmation to copy them Then indicate the block after which this group of blocks must be placed Press the ST
408. nction G04 can be programmed as G4 Every time G04 is programmed active radius and length compensation are cancelled For this reason care needs to be taken when using this function because if itis introduced between machining blocks which work with compensation unwanted profiles may be produced Chapter 7 Section Page ADDITIONALPREPARATORY FUNCTIONS G04 AND GO04K 1 Example The following program blocks are executed in a section with G41 compensation N10 X80 Z50 N15 G04 1 N17 MIO N20 X50 Z50 N30 X50 Z80 Block N15 holds back the preparation of blocks so that the execution of block N10 ends up at point A Once the execution of block N15 has been carried out the CNC continues preparing blocks starting from block N17 Page Chapter 7 Section ADDITIONALPREPARATORY FUNCTIONS G04 ANDG04K 7 2 Given that the next point corresponding to the compensated path is point CNC moves the tool to this point executing path As you can see the resulting path is not the required one so we recommend avoiding the use of function G04 in sections which work with compensation DWELL G04 K Timing can be programmed via function G04 K The timing value is programmed in hundredths of a second via format K5 0 99999 Example G04 K50 Timing of 50 hundredths of a second 0 5 seconds G04 K200 Timing of 200 hundredths of a second 2 seconds Function G04
409. ndicated by axis machine parameter MAXFEED P42 1137 1145 Incorrect axis feedrate parameter DETECTED During execution CAUSE G00 has been programmed with axis parameter GOOFEED P38 0 or G1 F00 has been programmed with axis machine parameter MAXFEED P42 0 1146 1154 axis locked DETECTED During execution CAUSE The CNC tries to output the velocity command to the drive while the spindle input SERVO n ON is still low The error may come up due to an error in the PLC program where this signal is treated wrong or maybe the value of the spindle parameter DWELL P17 is too low 42 ERROR TROUBLESHOOTING MANUAL Hicon 3 8055T CNC 1155 1163 axis soft limit overrun DETECTED During execution CAUSE A coordinate has been programmed which is beyond the limits defined by axis machine parameters LIMIT P5 and LIMIT P6 1164 1172 axis work zone 1 overrun DETECTED During execution CAUSE An attempt has been made to move an axis to a point located inside the work zone 1 which has been defined as no exit zone SOLUTION In the history of the program work zone 1 defined with G20 G21 has been defined as no exit zone G22 K1 S2 To disable it program G22 K1 SO 1173 1181 axis work zone 2 overrun DETECTED During execution CAUSE An attempt has been made to move an axis to a point located inside the work zone 2 which has been defined as no exit zone
410. ne G01 Preset P5 as polar origin Point P2 in an arc 03 Point P3 in a straight line G01 Preset P6 as new polar origin Point P4 in an arc G02 arc as the new polar origin On power up or after executing M02 M30 or after an EMERGENCY or RESET the CNC assumes the currently active part zero as polar origin When selecting a new work plane G16 G17 G18 G19 the CNC assumes as polar origin the part zero of that plane Chapter 4 REFERENCESYSTEMS Section Page 9 5 e PROGRAMMING BY ISO CODE A programmed block in ISO language can consist of Preparatory functions G Axis coordinates X C Feedrate F Spindle speed S Tool number T Tool offset number D Auxiliary functions M This order should be maintained within each block although itis not necessary for every block to contain the information The CNC allows you to program figures from 0 00001 to 99999 9999 with or without sign working in millimeters G71 called format 5 4 or either from 0 00001 to 3937 00787 with or without sign if the programming is done in inches G70 called format 44 5 Nevertheless and in order to simplify explanations we can say that the CNC admits Format 5 5 meaning that it admits 5 4 in millimeters and 44 5 in inches Any function with parameters can also be programmed in a block apart from the number ofthelabelorblock Thus when the block is executed the CNC substitutes the arithmeti
411. ne axis parameter DECINPUT and in the direction indicated by the axis machine parameter REFDIREC This movement is carried out at the feedrate indicated by the axis machine parameter REFEED1 for each axis until the home switch is hit Next the home search marker pulse or home will be carried out in the programmed order This second movement will becarried out one axis ata time at the feedrate indicated in the axis machine parameter REFEED until the machine reference point is reached i e the marker pulse is found MACHINE REFERENCE SEARCH USING THE ASSOCIATED SUBROUTINE The G74 function will be programmed alone in the block and the CNC will automatically execute the subroutine whose number appears in the general machine parameter REFPSUB In this subroutine it is possible to program the machine reference searches required and also in the required order Inablock in which G74 has been programmed no other preparatory function may appear If the machine reference search is done in JOG mode the part zero selected is lost The coordinates of the reference point indicated in the machine axis parameter REFV ALUE is displayed In all other cases the part zero selected is maintained so the displayed coordinates refer to this part zero Ifthe G74 command is executed in MDI the display of coordinates depends on the mode in which it is executed Jog Execution or Simulation Page Chapter 4 Sectio
412. nes must be defined after the main program or in a separate program They cannot be defined before or inside the main program 0066 Expecting a message DETECTED While editing at the CNC or while executing a program transmitted via DNC CAUSE While programming in high level the MSG or ERROR instruction has been edited but without the message to be displayed SOLUTION Remember that the programming format of these instructions is MSG ERROR integer error message Although it can also be programmed like ERROR integer ERROR error message 0067 OPEN is missing DETECTED execution or while executing programs transmitted via DNC CAUSE While programming in high level a WRITE instruction has been edited but the OPEN instruction has not been written previously to tell it where that instruction has to be executed SOLUTION OPEN instruction must be edited before the WRITE instruction to tell the CNC where in which program it must execute the WRITE instruction ERROR TROUBLESHOOTING MANUAL 11 8055T CNC FAGOR 0069 Program does not exist DETECTED execution or while executing programs transmitted via DNC CAUSE In the Pattern repeat canned cycle G66 Roughing canned cycle along the X axis G68 or Roughing canned cycle along the Z axis G69 the profiles have been programmed to be located in anothe
413. ng text found LINE NUMBER After pressing this key the CNC will request the number of the line to be found Key in the desired line number and press ENTER The cursor will then be positioned at the desired line Once the desired starting block has been selected press ENTER to validate it Page Chapter 3 Section EXECUTE SIMULATE BLOCKSELECTION STOP CONDITION With this option itis possible to indicate the final execution or simulation block of the selected program This cannot be used when the CNC is already executing or simulating the selected program When selecting this option the CNC will show the following softkey functions PROGRAM SELECTION This option will be used when the final execution or simulation block belongs to another program or to a subroutine resident in another program The CNC shows the part program directory of the RAM memory Use the cursor to select the desired program and press ENTER Then carry out the BLOCK SELECTION as described next BLOCK SELECTION Use the cursor to select the last program block to be executed Use the up and down arrow keys or page by page with the page up and page down keys The find softkey options are also available BEGINNING By pressing this key the cursor will position at the first line of the program END By pressing this key the cursor will position at the last line of the program LINE NUMBER After pressing this key the CNC w
414. ng how to program the CNC Is directed to people using the optional DNC communications software Is directed to people wishing to design their own DNC communications software to communicate with the CNC Is directed to people using the Fagor Floppy Disk Unit and it shows how to use it MANUAL CONTENTS The Programming Manual for the Lathe model CNC contains the following chapters Index New Features and Modifications for the Lathe Model Introduction Summary of safety conditions Shipping terms Fagor documentation for the CNC Manual contents Chapter 1 Overview Itshows how to enter part programs from the keyboard or via DNC Location of part programs how to edit and execute them It indicates the protocol to be used in DNC communications Chapter2 Creating a program It indicates the structure for a part program and all its blocks It shows the languages that could be used to program the parts ISO coded and High Level languages Chapter 3 Axes and coordinate systems Itindicates the nomenclature of the axes and how to select them It shows how to select the working planes work units type of programming system absolute incremental Itdescribes the coordinates systems that could be used for programming Cartesian polar cylindric angle plus Cartesian coordinate It shows how to operate with rotary axes and how to define and use work zones Chapter 4 Reference systems It indicates the machine reference home and datum points
415. nication lines It also lets activate and deactivate the communication with a PC through DNC DNC Allows communication with a computer via DNC to be activated or deactivated PLC Allows operation with the PLC edit the program monitor change the status of its variables access to the active messages errors pages etc Chapter 2 Section Page OPERATINGMODE 1 GRAPHIC EDITOR Allows by means of asimple graphics editor the creation of user defined screens pages which can later be activated from the PLC used in customized programs or presented when the unit is powered on page 0 MACHINEPARAMETERS Allowsthe machine parameters to be setto adaptthe CNC to the machine DIAGNOSIS Makes a test of the CNC While the CNC is executing or simulating a part program it allows any other type of operating mode to be accessed without stopping the execution of the program In this way it is possible to edit a program while another is being executed or simulated Itis not possible to edit the program which is being executed or simulated nor execute or simulate two part programs at the same time Page Chapter 2 Section 2 OPERATINGMODES 2 1 HELP SYSTEMS The CNC allows access to the help system main menu operating mode editing of commands etc at any time To do this you must press the HELP key and the corresponding help page will be shown in the main window of the screen Ifthe help consi
416. not modify the active tool or the next DETECTED During execution CAUSE In the tool magazine table an attempt has been made to change the active tool or the next one SOLUTION During execution neither the active tool nor the next one may be changed 0126 Tool not defined DETECTED While editing tables CAUSE In the tool magazine table an attempt has been made to assign to the magazine position a tool that is not defined in the tool table SOLUTION Define the tool in the tool table ERROR TROUBLESHOOTING MANUAL 1 9 8055T CNC FAGOR 3 0127 Magazine is not RANDOM DETECTED CAUSE SOLUTION While editing tables There is no RANDOM magazine and in the tool magazine table the tool number does not match the tool magazine position When the tool magazine is not RANDOM the tool number must be the same as the magazine position pocket number 0128 The position of a special tool is set DETECTED CAUSE SOLUTION While editing tables In the tool magazine table an attempt has been made to place a tool in a magazine position reserved for a special tool When a special tool occupies more than one position in the magazine it has a reserved position in the magazine No other tool can be placed in this position 0129 Next tool only possible in machining centers DETECTED CAUSE SOLUTION During execution tool change has been programmed with 06 and the machine is n
417. ns the value established for the spindle speed limit in revolutions per minute selected at the CNC This limit can be indicated by program by the PLC or DNC and the CNC selects one of these the one with the highest priority being that indicated by DNC and the one with the lowest priority that indicated by program Returns the spindle speed limit in revolutions per minute selected by DNC If this has a value of 0 it means that it is not selected Returns the spindle speed limit in revolutions per minute selected by PLC If this has a value of 0 it means that it is not selected Returns the spindle speed limit in revolutions per minute selected by program Returns in degrees max 99999 9999 the real spindle position coordinate Whenaccessing this variable the CNC interrupts block preparation and it waits for this command to be executed before resuming block preparation Returns in degrees between 0 and 360 the real spindle position coordinate Whenaccessing this variable the CNC interrupts block preparation and it waits for this command to be executed before resuming block preparation Returns in degrees max 99999 9999 the theoretical spindle position coordinate real following error When accessing this variable the CNC interrupts block preparation and it waits for this command to be executed before resuming block preparation Page 20 PROGRAMMINGINHIGH LEVELLANGUAGE VARIABLESFOR Chap
418. nstallation manual Programming manual Operating manual TC operating manual Chap 11 Chap 4 Chap 10 Appendix Chap 11 Chap 4 9 10 Appendix Chap 3 9 10 Appendix Chap 5 11 Appendix Chap 9 Chap 4 Chap 3 4 9 Appendix Chap 3 Chap 10 Chap 7 Chap 3 TC option Coolant icon in all cycles TC operating manual Chap 4 TC option Background editing TC option Key codes for user cycles TC operating manual TC operating manual Chap 4 Appendix Version history T 1 INTRODUCTION SAFETY CONDITIONS Readthe following safety measures in orderto prevent damage to personnel tothis product and to those products connected to it This unit must only be repaired by personnel authorized by Fagor Automation Fagor Automation shall not be held responsible for any physical or material damage derived from the violation of these basic safety regulations Precautions against personal damage Before powering the unit up make sure that it is connected to ground In order to avoid electrical discharges make sure that all the grounding connections are properly made Do not work in humid environments In order to avoid electrical discharges always work under 90 of relative humidity non condensing and 45 C 113 F Do not work in explosive environments In order to avoid risks damage do no work in explosive environments Precautions against product damage Working env
419. nt following a chamfer G39 is a circular path SOLUTION movement following a chamfer G39 must be a straight line 1006 Chamfer value too large DETECTED During execution CAUSE In the Chamfer G39 function a chamfer has been programmed larger than the paths where it has been defined SOLUTION chamfer must be smaller than the paths defining it ERROR TROUBLESHOOTING MANUAL 29 8055T CNC neon 3 1007 G8 defined incorrectly DETECTED During execution CAUSE S The probable causes might be 1 When programming a full circle with the Arc tangent to previous path G08 function 2 When the tangent path ends at one point of the previous path or on its extension In straight line 3 While operating with an irregular pocket with islands when programming a 208 function in the block following the definition of the beginning of the profile SOLUTION The solution for each cause is 1 Full circles cannot be programmed using function G08 2 The tangent path cannot end at one point of the previous path or on its extension In straight line 3 The CNC does not have information about the previous path and it cannot execute a tangent arc 1008 There is no information on previous path DETECTED During execution CAUSE An arc tangent to the previous path has been programmed with G08 but there isn t enough information about the previous path SOLUTI
420. ntrol mnemonics etc are as follows ANAIn CNCERR DEFLEY DNCF DPOS X C ESBLK FLWES FZLO X C GGSD IB LUP a b MPGn NBTOOL OPMODB ORGROB ORGROR PAGE PLCF PLCOF X C PLCTn PRBST PRGS ROTPF SCALE X C SK SPOSS SRTPOS STPOSS SZUP X C TLFRn TOLn TPOSS WBUF ANAOn CNCFRO DEFLEZ DNCFPR DSBLK ESTOP FOZLO X C FZONE BLKN CNCSSO DFHOLD DNCFRO DSTOP EXEC FOZONE FZUP X C GOTO INPUT MDOFF MPSn NXTOOL OPMODE ORGROI ORGROT PCALL PLCFRO PLCRn PORGS PRGFIN PRGSSO RPOSS SDNCS SPEED SPRGSL SSO SYMBOL TIMER TMZTn TOOROF TZLO X C WRITE CALL CYTIME DIGIT DNCS DW FEED FOZUP X C GGSA GSn KEY MIRROR MPSSn ODW ORG X C ORGROJ ORGROX PLANE PLCIn PLCS POS X C PRGFPR PROBE RPT SDNCSL SPLCS SPRGSO SSPEED SYSTEM TLFDn TOD TOOROS TZONE CALLP DATE DIST X C DNCSL EFHOLD FIRST FPREV GGSB GTRATY KEYSRC MP X C n MSG OPEN ORG X C n ORGROK ORGROY PLCCn PLCMn PLCSL POSS PRGFRO REPOS RTPOSS SDNCSO SPLCSL SREAL SSREAL SZLO X C TLFFn TOIn TORn TZUP X C CLOCK DEFLEX DNCERR DNCSSO ERROR FLWE X C FRO GGSC GUPn LONGAX MPASn MSn OPMODA ORGROA ORGROQ ORGROZ PLCERR PLCMSG PLCSSO PPOS X C PRGN RET SCALE SFLWES SPLCSO SRPOSS SSSO SZONE TLFNn TOKn TPOS X C WBUF Words ending in X C indicate a set of 9 elements formed by the corresponding root followed by X Y Z U V W A B and ORG X C gt ORGX ORGY ORGZ ORGU ORGV ORGW
421. nu the ESC key must be pressed REPOSITIONING Positions the axes at the point where tool inspection started To do this one of the following softkeys must be selected PLANE It moves the X and Z axes at the same time X Z It moves first the X axis and then the Z axis Z X It moves first the Z axis and then the X axis Then press for the CNC to reposition the axes Chapter 3 Section Page EXECUTE SIMULATE TOOLINSPECTION 17 3 5 GRAPHICS With this function it is possible to select the type of graphic to be used as well as to define all the parameters for the corresponding graphic display Todoso the CNC must NOT be executing or simulating a part program otherwise it must beinterrupted Once the type of graphics has been selected and its parameters defined this function can be accessed even during the execution or simulation of a part program should the type of graphic or any graphic parameters be changed After selecting this function the CNC will display the following softkey options Type of graphic Display area Zoom Graphic parameters Clear Screen Deactivate graphics Page Chapter 3 Section 18 EXECUTE SIMULATE GRAPHICS 3 5 1 TYPE OF GRAPHICS The CNC has two types of graphics line graphics and solid graphics Both type options will be shown by means of softkeys in order to select one of them The selected type will remain active until a different
422. o a magazine position To change the active tool or the next one use the T function The active tool or the next one cannot be moved to the magazine using the TMZT variable 1021 The canned cycle is missing a tool offset DETECTED CAUSE SOLUTION During execution A probing canned cycle PROBE has been programmed for tool calibration but no tool offset has been selected To execute the Tool calibration canned cycle PROBE the tool offset that is supposed to store the data of the probing cycle must be previously selected 1028 Do not switch axes over or back while G15 G23 G48 or G49 are active DETECTED CAUSE SOLUTION During execution An attempt has been made to switch an axis or switch it back G28 G29 while the G15 G23 G48 or G49 function was active The axes cannot be switched while the G15 G23 G48 G49 are active 1029 Do not switch axes already switched over DETECTED CAUSE SOLUTION During execution An attempt has been made to switch an axis G28 which is already switched with another one An axis switched with another one cannot be directly switched with a third one It must be switched back first G29 axis ERROR TROUBLESHOOTING MANUAL 31 8055T CNC neon 3 1030 Not enough room for the automatic range change M code DETECTED During execution CAUSE While using an automatic gear
423. o include or merge the contents of another program into the one currently selected Once this option is selected the CNC will request the number of the source program to be merged After keying in that number press ENTER Next indicate with the cursor the block after which the source program will be included Finally press the START OPERATION softkey to execute the command Page Chapter 9 Section PLC EDIT 9 2 COMPILE With this option it is possible to compile the PLC source program PLC PRG The PLC program must be stopped in order to compile it otherwise the CNC will ask if itis desired to stop it Once the source program compiled the CNC will generate the executable PLC program object program If while compiling some errors are detected the CNC will not create the object program and the detected errors up to 15 will appear on the screen Iftheerrors do notaffectthe proper program execution such as non referenced labels etc the CNC will display the corresponding warning messages but it will generate the object program After a successful compilation the CNC will ask whether the PLC program must be started or not Chapter 9 PLC Section COMPILE Page 9 3 MONITORING With this option it is possible to display the PLC program and analyze the status of the different PLC resources and variables Once this option has been selected the
424. o move the cursor to the corresponding end To quit this command and return to the graphics menu press ESC Also if is pressed the CNC exits this work mode and returns to the graphics menu Chapter 3 Section Page EXECUTE SIMULATE GRAPHICS 24 3 6 SINGLE BLOCK Every time this option is selected the CNC will toggle the active mode of operation it being possible to do it at any time even during the part program execution or simulation Ifthesingle block mode is selected the CNC will only execute one line ofthe program every time the is pressed The upper window of the screen will show the selected mode of operation If continuous execution no message will appear and if SINGLE BLOCK it will display the message SINGLE BLOCK Page Chapter 3 Section 28 EXECUTE SIMULATE SINGLEBLOCK 4 EDIT This operating mode will be used to edit modify or look at a part program stored in the CNC s RAM memory To edit a part program stored in the Memkey Card CARD A or in the hard disk HD it must be previously copied into RAM memory To edita part program enter the program number up to 6 digits from the keyboard or by selecting it with the cursor from the CNC s part program directory and then pressing ENTER Move the cursor on the screen line by line with the up and down arrow keys or page by page with the page up and page down keys Once the program number has been entered the C
425. o the CNC Do not open this unit Only personnel authorized by Fagor Automation may open this mo dule Do not handle the connectors with the unit connected to main AC power Before handling these connectors make sure that the unit is not connected to main AC power Note Fagor Automation shall not be held responsible for any material or physical damage derived from the violation of these basic safety requirements List of materials parts that could be replaced Code C digo Central Unit 3 modules 83060100 Operator panel Mill 80300010 6 modules 83060101 no handwheel Lathe 80300011 CPU modul Mill 83090122 Operator panel Mill 80300014 mogug Lathe 83090123 with handwheel Lathe 80300015 Sercos board 83160110 MC 83540020 Operator panel Axes module 83150100 TC 83540002 VO module 83210100 switcher board 83900000 VO Tracing module 83220100 Sercos module 83160100 25 Cover empty module 83300100 Video cables 83630022 CPU Turbo 80500077 83630023 83630024 9 Amber monitor 83630010 no keyboard 83390002 83630004 9 Amber monitor 83390000 Kevboard cables 83630005 with keyboard 83390001 d 83630006 83630008 10 Color monitor no keyboard 83390004 83630026 10 Color monitor 83420001 83120150 hk 83420003 wit eyboard Configuration card 83120160 11 LCD monitor 83480100 MemKey Card 83120161 no keyboard 83120162 83480101 11 LCD Monitor
426. o the one programmed B This way the penetrations along X axis are B 2B 3B 4B nB Tfa value of 0 is programmed the CNC will display the corresponding error message It is related to parameter B Itindicates the minimum value to be reached the penetration pitch when parameter B has been programmed with a positive value If not programmed a value of 0 will be assumed Defines the safety distance along X and it indicates at what distance from the initial point must the tool be positioned in the approach move It is programmed in radius The return to the initial point after each pass will be carried out maintaining this distance D from the programmed section If the programmed value is positive this withdrawal will be performed in round corner G05 and if negative in square corner G07 If not programmed a value of 0 will be assumed Defines the finishing pass and it is programmed in radius Tfa positive value is programmed the finishing pass will be performed maintaining the same penetration angle A as for the other passes fanegative value is programmed the finishing pass will be carried out with radial penetration Tfa value of 0 is programmed the previous pass is repeated CANNEDCYCLES LONGITUDINAL 45 Chapter 9 Section Page THREADCUTTING G86 C5 5 Definesthethread spitch 7 With a positivesign ifthe pitch is programmed along th
427. o work in the DNC mode or to communicate with the FAGOR Floppy Disk Unit When accessing this mode the CNC shows the following screen 000110 N0010 11 25 35 1 Z DNC 2 Status Active Status Active Operation Operation A Error in last transmission Error in last transmission Retries in last transmission Retries in last transmission Error in last transmission Error in last transmission Operation Operation CAP INS DNC1 ON prc OFF DNC2 ON F4 5 F6 Theleft hand side of the screen corresponds to serial line 1 and the right hand side to serial line 2 In the example of the figure above serial line 1 is used to communicate with a Fagor Floppy Disk Unit and serial line 2 to communicate via DNC The upper area 1 indicates The status of the serial line Active Inactive The type of operation in progress Sending program Receiving program Sending directory Receiving directory etc The lower area 2 indicates the last operation and the type of error occurred if any Page Chapter 8 Section 2 STATUS 9 PLC In this mode of operation itis possible to access the PLC to check its operation or the status ofthe various PLC variables It also allows editing and analyzing the PLC program as well as the PLC message file and error file The accessible programs associated wi
428. oard without voltage Motor overtemperature 108 ierit 49 N Negative base with decimal exponent 15 Negative radius in polar 38 Nesting exeseded ettari rre 35 Next tool only possible in machining centers 20 Power bus overvoltage 304 306 Power bus undervollage 307 JY isses trarre I O board without voltage 145 lt TOOTIBU acero mon umm br em 2 data B deli saccum ette n EHE UR 1 Dou dala t M 1 Inch programming limit exceeded wee 49 TUUS mie ri e ee 2 Incompatible tool position and tool code in profile cycle 34 Ircormplete Coordinates iscritti t iom eet 8 Incomplete operation Incorrect axis feedrate parameter 42 Incorrect axis leadscrew table Press key Mr Incorrect access to PLC variables 34 BXIS 219 Incorrect cross compensation table 1 se Incorrect cross compensation table 2 cri Incorrect cross compensation table 3 5 92 Incorrect cross compensation table para
429. of the block to be found After keying in the desired number and pressing ENTER the cursor will position over that block which will then be selected quitting the search mode Page Chapter 9 Section PLC EDIT REPLACE With this function it is possible to replace a character sequence with another throughout the selected program When selecting this option the CNC requests the character sequence to be replaced Once the text to be replaced is indicated press the WITH softkey and the CNC will request the character sequence which will replace the previous one Once this text is keyed in press the END OF TEXT softkey and the cursor will be positioned over the first occurrence of the searched text The search will begin at the current block The found text will be highlighted and the following softkey options will appear REPLACE Will replace the highlighted text and will continue the search from this point to the end of the program If no more occurrences of the text to be replaced are found the CNC will quit this mode If another occurrence of the text is found it will be highlighted showing the same replacing or not replacing options DO NOT REPLACE Will not replace the highlighted text and will continue the search from this point to the end of the program If no more occurrences of the text to be replaced are found the CNC will quit this mode If another occurrence of the tex
430. of the source program to be merged After keying in that number press ENTER Next indicate with the cursor the block after which the source program will be included Finally press the START OPERATION softkey to execute the command Chapter 4 EDIT Section INCLUDEPROGRAM Page 23 4 10 EDITOR PARAMETERS With this option itis possible to select the editing parameters used in this operating mode The options or parameters available are described here and they are selected by softkeys 4 10 1 AUTONUMBERING Withthis optionitis possibleto have the CNC automatically number label the blocks after the one being edited Once this option is selected the CNC will display the ON and OFF softkeys to either activate or deactivate this function Once this function is activated the following options will appear on the CRT STEP After pressing this softkey Enter the desired numbering step between two consecutive blocks and press ENTER The default value is 10 STARTING After pressing this softkey Enter the starting block number to be used on the next block to be edited The default value is 0 When setting both parameters select the STEP first and then the STARTING block number Example STEP 12 STARTING 56 generated blocks N56 N68 N80 Warning This function will not number the already existing blocks Page 24 Chapter 4 Section EDIT EDI
431. oftkey Indicate the destination of the copy RAM memory CARD A HD or DNC Key in the program number Press ENTER Example to copy program 200103 from the CNC s RAM memory out to the Memkey Card with the number 14 COPY MEMORY 200103 IN CARD A P14 ENTER Ifaprogram withthe same number already exists the CNC will display a warning message Onthe otherhand ifthat programis in execution the CNC will display a message indicating that it is not possible Two subroutines may not have the same name in RAM memory To make a copy and change the name of the copied subroutine write the subroutine defining block as acomment before making the copy 7 3 DELETE A program may be deleted from the CNC RAM memory from the Memkey Card CARD A from the Hard Disk HD or from the external devices through the serial lines 1 and 2 To delete a program proceed as follows Press the DELETE softkey Indicate the location of the program to be deleted RAM CARD A HD or DNC Key in the number of the program to be deleted or place the cursor over it Press ENTER Example to delete program 200103 from the Memkey Card DELETE CARD A P200103 ENTER Only programs that can be modified M attribute can be deleted Page Chapter 7 Section 4 UTILITIES COPY DELETE 7 4 RENAME To rename or assign a new comment to a program stored in the CNC s RAM memory Memkey Card CARD A or in the Hard Disk HD To ren
432. ol offset number D was selected the CNC will alter its T value as long as the measured error is equal to or greater than the allowed tolerance Chapter 10 Section Page PROBING TOOLOFFSET 15 CORRECTION X AXIS 10 6 PART MEASURING AND TOOL OFFSET CORRECTION CANNED CYCLE ALONG Z AXIS A previously calibrated probe with the cycle described before placedin the spindle tool holder will be used With this cycle besides being possible to measure the part along the Z axis it is also possible to correct the offset of the tool used to machine this surface This correction will only take place when the measured error is greater than a pre established value The programming format for this cycle is PROBE 4 X Z B F L D X 5 5 Theoretical X coordinate of the point to be measured This value will be given in the active units radius or diameter Z 5 5 Theoretical Z coordinate of the point to be measured B5 5 Defines the safety distance with a positive radius value If a value of 0 is programmed the CNC will display the corresponding error message F5 5 Defines the probing feedrate in mm min or inches min L5 5 Defines the tolerance amount to be applied to the measured error It will be programmed in radius and the correction will only take place if the erroris equal to or greater than this value If not programmed the CNC will assume a value of 0 for this parameter D4 Defines the number of the
433. ompress It compresses the hard disk by defragmenting it It also includes a hard disk surface check The duration of this test depends on the number of files it contains and on how defragmented the hard disk is Chapter 12 Section Page DIAGNOSIS TEST 5 12 7 INTERESTING NOTES The CNC carries out a series of sequential tests Ifthe resultobtained is not correct it may stop axes feed and spindle rotation by cancelling their analog voltages and Enables as well as stopping the execution of the PLC program or activating the external EMERGENCY output 01 When is it Stops the axes and Stops Activates carried out the spindle the PLC Emergency output YES CARD es ow ES ES ES ES ES 5 Page Chapter 12 Section 6 DIAGNOSIS CNC 8055 T Programming Manual Ref 0001 in ii Please note that some of the features described in this manual might not be implemented in the software version that you just obtained Probing canned cycles Option Tool life monitoring Option DNC Option Software for 4 axes Option Software for 7 axes Option Profile editor Option C axis Lathe Option Tangential control Option Conversational software TC and TCO Option The information described in this manual may be subject to variations due to technical modifications FAGOR AUTOMATION S Coop Ltda reser
434. on PLC STATISTICS 9 10 LOGIC ANALYZER The logic analyzer is especially indicated to perform the machine setup and to determine errors and critical situations in the behavior of the various signals With this option it is possible to analyze the behavior of the logic signals of the PLC according to a time base and some trigger conditions established by the user Up to 8 signals can be monitored simultaneously The results are displayed using a graphic interface to simplify the interpretation of the obtained data 9 10 1 DESCRIPTION OF THE WORK SCREEN The screen for the logic analyzer can be divided into the following display windows or areas T1 M 2011 C 10 TRIGGER NOT ALARM Cursor Offset Time base 300 ms Trigger type Trace Status COMPLETE CAP INS VARIABLE TRIGGER TIME BASE EXECUTE ANALYZE SELECTION CONDITION TRACE TRACE 0094 1 Status window It displays the graphic representation of the status of each one of the selected signals The variable area shows the names or symbols of the logic signals to be analyzed Chapter 9 Section Page PLC LOGICANALYZER 42 The status area shows the status of each variable in the shape of square waves The line corresponding to logic level 0 is shown with a thicker line Ese al es este 095 Also a vertical red line is displayed to indicate the TRIGGER point and a vertical green line indicating the cursor position
435. on SOLUTION canned cycle calling point must be located outside the part at a distance greater than the one defined as the finishing stock on both axes On the other hand the tool location code must allow making the profile without running into the part 1050 Incorrect variable value DETECTED During execution CAUSE Too high a value has been assigned to a variable by means of parameters SOLUTION Check the program history and make sure that that parameter does not reach the assignment block with that value 1051 Incorrect access to PLC variables DETECTED During execution CAUSE An attempt has been made to read a PLC variable from the CNC but it was not defined in the PLC program 34 ERROR TROUBLESHOOTING MANUAL Hicon 3 8055T CNC 1052 Access to a variable with non permitted index DETECTED While editing CAUSE While programming in high level language an operation is carried out with either a local parameter greater than 25 or with a global parameter greater than 299 SOLUTION CNC uses the following parameters Local 0 25 Global 100 299 No other parameters can be used in the operations 1053 Local parameters not accessible DETECTED During execution in the user channel CAUSE An attempt has been made to execute a block containing an operation with local parameters SOLUTION program executed in the user channel cannot carry out operations with local
436. on in the table of M functions in such a way that it is executed at the end of the block in which it is programmed 5 7 4 M30 END OF PROGRAM WITH RETURN TO FIRST BLOCK Identical to M02 except that the CNC returns to the first block of the program 5 75 M03 CLOCKWISE SPINDLE ROTATION This code represents clockwise spindle start Itis recommended to set this function in the table of M functions so that it is executed at the beginning of the block in which it is programmed 5 7 6 M04 COUNTERCLOCKWISE SPINDLE ROTATION This code represents counter clockwise spindle start We recommend that you set this function in the table of M functions so that it is executed at the beginning of the block in which it is programmed 5 7 7 M05 SPINDLE STOP Itis recommended to set this function in the table of M functions so that it is executed at the end of the block in which it is programmed Chapter 5 Section Page PROGRAMMING BYISO CODE AUXILIARY FUNCTION 13 5 7 8 M06 TOOL CHANGE If the general machine parameter TOFFMOG6 indicating that itis a machining center is active the CNC sends instructions to the tool changer and updates the table corresponding to the tool magazine Itis recommended to set this function in the table of M functions so that the subroutine corresponding to the tool changer installed in the machine is executed 5 7 9 M19 SPINDLE ORIENTATION With this CNC it is possible to work with th
437. on will appear superimposed on the trace The cursor position vertical green line can be slid along the trace by means of the following keys Left arrow Right arrow Previous page Next page Moves the cursor one pixel to the left While keeping this key pressed the cursor will advance automatically one pixel at a time and increasing its speed Ifthe cursor is positioned at the left end the trace will be shifted to the right while the cursor stays in the same position Moves the cursor one pixel to the right While keeping this key pressed the cursor will advance automatically one pixel at a time and increasing its speed If the cursor is positioned at the right end the trace will be shifted to the left while the cursor stays in the same position Moves the cursor one screen to the left Moves the cursor one screen to the right The CNC will show at all times in the information window the cursor position vertical green line with respect to the trigger position vertical red line This information will appear as Cursor Offset and it will be given in milliseconds Page 34 Chapter 9 Section PLC LOGICANALYZER 9 10 4 ANALYZE TRACE Once the data capture is done the CNC besides displaying the status window will enable the ANALYZE TRACE softkey With this option it is possible to position the cursor vertical green line at the beginning of the trace at the end of it or at
438. only admits values between 0 and 32767 0144 Values 0 thru 65535 DETECTED While editing machine parameters CAUSE An attempt has been made to assign the wrong value to a parameter SOLUTION parameter only admits values between 0 and 65535 ERROR TROUBLESHOOTING MANUAL 21 8055T CNC FAGOR 0145 Format 5 5 DETECTED While editing machine parameters CAUSE An attempt has been made to assign the wrong value to a parameter SOLUTION parameter only admits values with the format 5 5 0147 Numerical format exceeded DETECTED While editing at the CNC or while executing a program transmitted via DNC CAUSE A data or parameter has been assigned a value greater than the established format SOLUTION Correct the syntax of the block Most of the time the numeric format will be 5 4 5 integers and 4 decimals 0148 Text too long DETECTED While editing at the CNC or while executing a program transmitted via DNC CAUSE While programming in high level language the ERROR or MSG instruction has been assigned a text with more than 59 characters SOLUTION Correct the syntax of the block The ERROR and MSG instructions cannot be assigned texts longer than 59 characters 0149 Incorrect message DETECTED While editing at the CNC or while executing a program transmitted via DNC CAUSE While programming in high level language the text associated with the ERROR or
439. oordinates I J amp K of the center Only the coordinates of the endpoint of the arc are defined either in polar coordinates or in cartesian coordinates according to the axes of the work plane Example with X axis programmed in radius XA 60 50 G90 1 0 7270 X50 Z250 G08 X60 Z180 arctangential to previous path G08 X50 Z130 arctangential to previous path G08 X60 Z100 arctangential to previous path G01 X60 740 Function G08 is not modal so it should always be programmed if you wish to execute an arc tangential to the previous path Function G08 can be programmed as G8 Function G08 enables the previous path to be a straight line or an arc and does not alter its history The same function G01 G02 or G03 stays active after the block is finished Warning When using function G08 it is not possible to execute a complete circle as an infinite range of solutions exists The CNC displays the corresponding error code Page Chapter 6 Section 10 PATHCONTROL TANGENT TOTHE PREVIOUS PATH G08 6 6 ARC DEFINED BY THREE POINTS G09 Through function G09 you can define an arc by programming the endpoint and an intermediate point the starting point ofthe arc is the starting point of the movement In other words instead of programming the coordinates of the center you program any intermediate point The endpoint of the arc is defined in cartesian or polar coordinates and
440. ord PLCPSW Itis requested in the following cases e Whenediting the PLC program the PLC message program and the PLC error program Whencompiling the PLC program Whentryingtochangethe status ofaresource or execute a programexecution controlling command Customizing password CUSTOMPSW Itis requested when trying to access the Customizing mode or when attempting to erase an OEM screen Machine parameter access password SETUPPSW Itis requested when trying to access the options to modify the table values Edit Modify Initialize Delete and Load except fortables of the serial lines which are not protected To change or delete the passwords use the following softkeys Change password Select the desired password and enter the new one Delete password Lels delete eliminate one of several codes from the table To delete a password indicate its number and press ENTER e delete several passwords they must be in a row indicate the number of the first one to be delete press the UPTO softkey indicate the number of the last one to be deleted and press ENTER e To delete a password indicate its number and press ENTER Clear all Lets delete all the passwords The CNC will request confirmation of the command and it will delete them after pressing ENTER 7 6 CHANGE DATE Lets change the system date and time First the date will be shown as day month year 12 04 1998 After changing it press ENTER
441. ordinate of the move The axis will move towards the programmed target coordinate until running into something If the axis reaches the programmed target coordinate without running into the hardstop it will stop Function G52 is not modal therefore it must be programmed every time this operation is to be carried out Also it assumes functions G01 and G40 modifying the program history It is incompatible with functions G00 G02 G03 G41 G42 G75 and G76 Page Chapter 6 Section MOVEMENTUNTIL 26 MAKING CONTACT G52 6 15 FEEDRATE F AS AN INVERTED FUNCTION OF TIME G32 There are instances when it is easier to define the time required by the various axes of the machine to reach the target point instead of defining a common feedrate for all of them A typical case may be when a linear axis X Y Z has to move together interpolated with a rotary axis programmed in degrees Function G32 indicates that the F functions programmed next set the time it takes to reach the target point In order for a greater value of F to indicate a greater feedrate the value assigned to F is defined as Inverted function of time and it is assumed as the activation of this feature F units 1 min Example G32 X22 F4 indicates that the movement must be executed in 4 minute That is in 0 25 minutes Function G32 is modal and incompatible with G94 and G95 On power up after executing M02 M30 or after
442. ormation contained in block text as a new program block If parametric programming is used within the block text and it has been edited in ISO code when executing the block all the parameters global and local are replaced with the value they have at time Blocks edited in high level language are NOT replaced In the customizing programs edited by the operator the IB instruction may be used so the blocks edited in high level assume the parameter value Examples for P100 10 P101 20 and P102 55 WRITE G1 XP100 YP101 F100 gt G1 X10 Y20 F100 WRITE IF P100 EQ P101 CALL 3 gt IF P100 EQ P101 CALL 3 WRITE SUB P102 gt SUB P102 IB1 P102 WRITE SUB IB1 gt SUB 55 If the mnemonic WRITE is programmed without having programmed the mnemonic OPEN previously the CNC will display the corresponding error except when editing auser customized program in which case anew block is added to the program being edited Chapter 12 Section Page PROGRAMCONTROLSTATEMENTS STATEMENTSFOR 13 GENERATINGPROGRAMS Example ofthe creation of a program which contains several points of a parabolic path whose formula is Z K X The X axis is programmed in diameter and subroutine 2 is used whose parameters mean the following Call parameters A or PO Value of constant K B or P1 Xcoordinate of initial point C or P2 X coordinate of final point D or P3 incremental step along X Calculated
443. osition where itis required to place the symbol In this move only the cursor will move and not the symbol 3 Press the ENTER key to validate it or the ESC key if you wish to quit Once the symbol has been validated the CNC will show it in the place indicated 4 To include more symbols repeat the above operations 5 Press the ESC key to quit and go back to the previous menu Ifasymbolis being edited this symbol cannot be included in itself Therefore if symbol 4 is being edited any symbol can be included except symbol 4 Warning Ifasymbolisdeleted the CNC will update all the pages or symbols that contain it because all the calls to it will remain active When displaying a page or symbol which has a call to a nonexistent symbol deleted or not defined that area of the page will appear blank If this symbol is edited again later the new representation assigned to the symbol will appear in all the pages and symbols which contain a call to it Chapter 10 Section Page SCREENEDITOR GRAPHICELEMENTS 13 POLYGON A polygon is a closed polyline whose beginning and end points coincide After pressing the softkey the following steps will be taken 1 Place the cursor on one of the vertices of the polygon and press the ENTER key to validate it 2 Move thecursorto the following vertex ofthe polygon the CNC will show the line you are trying to draw Press the ENTER key to validate the line o
444. ot a machining center it is not expecting the next tool When the machining is not a machining center the tool change is done automatically when programming the tool number T 0130 Write 0 1 DETECTED CAUSE SOLUTION While editing machine parameters An attempt has been made to assign the wrong value to a parameter The parameter only admits values of 0 or 1 0131 Write DETECTED CAUSE SOLUTION While editing machine parameters An attempt has been made to assign the wrong value to a parameter The parameter only admits values of or 0132 Write YES NO DETECTED CAUSE SOLUTION While editing machine parameters An attempt has been made to assign the wrong value to a parameter The parameter only admits values of YES or NO 0133 Write ON OFF DETECTED CAUSE SOLUTION While editing machine parameters An attempt has been made to assign the wrong value to a parameter The parameter only admits values of ON or OFF 0134 Values 0 thru 2 DETECTED CAUSE SOLUTION While editing machine parameters An attempt has been made to assign the wrong value to a parameter The parameter only admits values between 0 and 2 20 ERROR TROUBLESHOOTING MANUAL Hicon 3 8055T CNC 0135 Values 0 thru 3 DETECTED While editing machine parameters CAUSE An attempt has been made to assign the wrong value to a parameter SOLUTION parameter only admits values between
445. otselectit butit will select another one of the same family instead If while machining a part the PLC asks the CNC to reject the current tool by activating the logic input the CNC will display the message rejected in the STATUS field and it will replace it with the next tool of the same family that appear in the tool table This change will take place the next time that tool is selected Page Chapter 6 Section TABLES TOOLTABLE Nominal tool life Itindicates the machining time in minutes or the number of operations that that tool is calculated to last Real tool life Itindicates the machining time in minutes or the number of operations already carried out by that tool Tool status Itindicates the size of the tool and its status Thetoolsize depends on the numberof pockets it takes in the magazine and itis defined as follows Normal family 0 199 S Special family 200 255 The tool status is defined as follows A Available E Expired real life greater than nominal life Rejected by the PLC GEOMETRY This softkey is available whenthe machine manufacturer has associated the tool geometry with the tool When selecting this option the CNC lets access the tool geometry table See section 6 5 Chapter 6 Section Page TABLES TOOLTABLE 5 6 4 TOOL OFFSET TABLE This table stores the dimensions of each tool TOOL OFFSET TAB
446. oughing If T 0 there is no roughing and for finishing If T 0 there is no finishing ROUGHING Value of A 0 DETECTED While executing CAUSE The cutting depth pass has not been defined A SOLUTION Program a pass greater than zero ROUGHING Value of Fz0 DETECTED While executing CAUSE The roughing feedrate F has not been defined SOLUTION Program a positive feedrate other than zero ROUGHING Value of Sz0 DETECTED While executing CAUSE The spindle speed S has not been defined for roughing SOLUTION Program a positive spindle speed S other than zero FINISHING Value of F 0 DETECTED While executing CAUSE No feedrate F has been defined for finishing SOLUTION Program a positive feedrate other than zero FINISHING Value of S 0 DETECTED While executing CAUSE The spindle speed S has not been defined for finishing SOLUTION Program a positive spindle speed S other than zero No negative safety distance permitted in this cycle DETECTED While executing CAUSE A negative safety distance has been defined SOLUTION The profile canned cycles require a positive safety distance Errors in the profile cycles of the C axis PROFILE CYCLE C AXIS Value of T 0 DETECTED While executing CAUSE No tool number has been defined SOLUTION The tool number must be other than zero ERROR TROUBLESHOOTING MANUAL 59 8055T CNC PROFILE CYCLE C AXIS Value of A
447. oughing and for finishing If T 0 there is no finishing ROUGHING Value of A 0 DETECTED While executing CAUSE The cutting depth pass has not been defined A SOLUTION Program a pass greater than zero ROUGHING Value of F 0 DETECTED While executing CAUSE The roughing feedrate F has not been defined SOLUTION Program a positive feedrate other than zero ROUGHING Value of Sz0 DETECTED While executing CAUSE The spindle speed S has not been defined for roughing SOLUTION Program a positive spindle speed S other than zero FINISHING Value of F 0 DETECTED While executing CAUSE No feedrate F has been defined for finishing SOLUTION Program a positive feedrate other than zero FINISHING Value of S 0 DETECTED While executing CAUSE The spindle speed S has not been defined for finishing SOLUTION Program a positive spindle speed S other than zero GEOMETRY Value of Zi Zf DETECTED While executing CAUSE The Z coordinates of the starting and end points are the same SOLUTION The Z coordinates of the starting and end points must be different GEOMETRY Value of X Q DETECTED While executing CAUSE The coordinates of the starting and end diameters are the same SOLUTION The X coordinates of the starting and end points must be different from the end diameter FINISHING Wrong stock DETECTED While executing CAUSE The finishing stock is greater than the total ma
448. oup of keys which due to their characteristics and importance are detailed below Page Chapter 1 Section 6 OVERVIEW KEYBOARD LAYOUT ENTER HELP RESET ESC Used to validate CNC and PLC commands generated in the edition Window Allows access to the help system in any operating mode Used for initializing the history of the program in execution by assigning itthe values defined by machine parameters Itis necessary for the program to be stopped for the CNC to accept this key Allows going back to the previous operating option shown on the monitor MAIN MENU When this key is pressed we can access the main CNC menu directly 4 SOFTKEYS orfunction keys whichallow different operating options to be selected and which are shown on the monitor In addition there are the following special keyboard sequences SHIFT RESET The result of this keystroke sequence is the same as ifthe CNC is turned SHIFT CL SHIFT off and turned back on This option must be used after modifying the machine parameters of the CNC for these to be effective Withthis keystroke sequence the display on the CRT screen disappears To restore the normal state just press any key If when the screen is off an error is produced or a message from the PLC or CNC is received the normal status ofthe screen will be restored This allows the position of the axes to be displayed on the right hand side of the screen as well as the status of th
449. outines CAP INS MM PROGRAMS SUBROUTINES Itlists all the subroutines defined in the part programs ofthe CNC ordered from the smallest one to the largest one Also next to the subroutines it displays the number of the program where it has been defined If the program containing the subroutine has the hidden attribute assigned to it that 7 1 1 DIRECTORY OF THE EXTERNAL DEVICES When accessing the directory of an external device through the serial lines that directory is shown in DOS format The CHANGE DIR softkey lets the user select the work directory of the PC to operate with from the CNC This operation does not change the work directory that was selected to operate with from the PC In other words when working via DNC it is possible to select a work directory at the PC and another PC directory at the CNC This new feature is available from DNC50 version 5 1 on Chapter 7 Section Page UTILITIES DIRECTORY 3 7 2 COPY To copy programs in the same directory or between directories of different devices The copies may be made between The CNC s RAM memory Memkey Card CARD A hard disk HD and external devices serial lines To make a copy proceed as follows Press the COPY softkey Indicate the location of the program to be copied RAM memory CARD A HD or DNC key in the program number to be copied Press the IN s
450. owing groups of machine parameters General machine parameters Axis parameters one table per axis Spindle parameters RS 422 and RS 232 C serial port configurations Ethernet configuration parameters PLC parameters M miscellaneous functions Leadscrew error compensation one table per axis Cross Compensations between two axes for example Beam sag Xo 0X 0X X X X X X X First the general machine parameters must be set as by means of these the machine axes are defined and therefore the Axis Parameter tables It must also be defined whether the machine has cross compensation and between which axes and the CNC will generate the corresponding cross compensation parameters By means of the general machine parameters the table lengths for the Tool Magazine Tools Tool Offsets and the miscellaneous M functions are defined By means of the Axis Parameters it is defined whether the axis has Leadscrew error Compensation or not and the length of the corresponding table Once the general machine parameters are defined press SHIFT RESET for the CNC to enable the required tables It is recommended to save the tables in the Memkey or out to a peripheral device or PC When accessing this operating mode the CNC will show the tables that are saved in the Memkey Card CARD A Chapter 11 Section Page MACHINE PARAMETERS 1 11 1 MACHINE PARAMETER TABLES The General Axis Spindle Serial ports and P
451. p G1 move to the next incremental depth 4 Dwell in hundredths of a second at the bottom of the hole if programmed 5 Withdrawal in rapid 600 to the approach point Tapping Basic operation 1 Rapid move in GOO to the approach point located at a distance D from the the tapping point 2 Tapping the longitudinal axis moves in 1 to the programmed depth 0 1 3 The spindle reverses turning direction If K has been programmed the spindle stops and after the programmed dwell has elapsed the spindle starts turning in the other way 4 Withdrawl in GO1 to the approach point Considerations The machining conditions feedrate spindle speed etc must be programmed before calling the cycle Once the canned cycle has ended the program will continue with the same feedrate F and G functions active previous to calling the cycle Only the tool radius compensation will be cancelled G40 if it was active Chapter 9 Section Page CANNEDCYCLES DRILLINGCANNED 35 CYCLE G83 9 7 G84 TURNING CANNED CYCLE WITH ARCS This cycle turns the programmed section maintaining the indicated pass between the successive turning passes It allows to select whether or not the canned cycle will perform a finishing pass after completing the programmed turning operation The basic structure of the block is G84 X ZQ RCDLM FHIK X TPO9GO1 TE 2 X 5 5 Defines the X coo
452. parameters E or P4 X coordinate F or P5 Z coordinate One way of using this example could be ZO PCALL 2 A0 01 BO C100 D1 M30 Program generating subroutine SUB 2 OPEN P12345 Starts the generation of program P12345 P4 P1 X initial X N100 IF P4 P3 GE P2 P4 P2 ELSE P4 P4 P3 P5 P0 P4 P4 WRITE G01 4 ZP5 Movementblock IF NE P2 GOTO 100 WRITE M30 End of program block RET Page Chapter 12 Section 14 PROGRAMCONTROLSTATEMENTS STATEMENTSFOR GENERATINGPROGRAMS 12 7 SCREEN CUSTOMIZING STATEMENTS GRAPHIC EDITOR Customizing statements may be used only when customizing programs made by the user These customizing programs must be stored in CNC RAM memory and may utilize the Programming Statements and they will be executed in the special channel designed for this use The program selected in each case will be indicated in the following general machine parameters In USERDPLY the program required to execute in the Execution Mode will be indicated In USEREDIT the program required to execute in the Editing Mode will be indicated In USERMAN the program required to execute in the Manual JOG Mode will beindicated In USERDIAG the program required to execute in the Diagnosis Mode will be indicated The customizing programs may have up to five nesting levels besides their current one Also the customizing statements do not allow loc
453. passes without exceeding the maximum programmed position a Page Chapter 9 Section CANNEDCYCLES PATTERNREPEAT CANNEDCYCLE G66 Each pass is performed in the following way XA The approach move 1 2 is done in rapid G00 The 2 3 move is done at programmed feedrate F The withdrawal 3 1 is done in rapid GOO Ifthe possibility of collision exists this move will be carried out in two stages and in G00 3 4 and 4 1 as shown in the figure on the next page XA 9 08 The canned cycle will always end at the point from where it was called Chapter 9 Section Page CANNEDCYCLES PATTERNREPEAT 5 CANNEDCYCLE G66 Optimizing the machining process If only the desired profile is defined the CNC assumes that the rough part is cylindrical and it machines it as shown in the drawing on the left XA 7 2 Whenthe profile ofthe rough partis known itis recommended to define both profiles the rough part and the desired final profile The machining is faster since only the stock between both profiles is removed Page Chapter 9 Section CANNEDCYCLES PATTERNREPEAT CANNEDCYCLE G66 Profile programming syntax When defining the profile there is no need to program the initial point since it is already indicated by cycle defining parameters X and Z When defining 2 profiles the
454. peration p lt I 109 1 Approach move Rapid move of the probe G00 from the cycle calling point to the approach point This point is located in front of the point to be measured and at a safety distance B from it The approach movement is carried out in two stages Ist Move along Z axis 2nd Move along X axis 2 Probing Movement of the probe along the X axis at the indicated feedrate F until the probe signal is received The maximum distance to travel in this move is 2B If after travelling this distance the CNC has not yet received the probe signal it will issue the corresponding error message and it will stop the axes Once the probing has ended the CNC will assume as theoretical position the real position at the time when it received the probe signal Page Chapter 10 Section 14 PROBING TOOLOFFSET CORRECTIONXAXIS 3 Withdrawal Rapid movement of the probe G00 from the probed point to the cycle calling point The withdrawal is done in two stages Ist X axis move back to the cycle calling point 2nd Zaxis move back to the cycle calling point Once the cycle has ended the CNC will return the real values obtained from the measurements in the global arithmetic parameters P298 Real X value of the measured point in active units radius or diameter P299 Detected error Difference between the real coordinate and the programmed theoretical one This value is given in radius If a to
455. peration with the profile editoi inienn eraa HE ARES RES MV PEEL 6 Poste S T E ooo UP E 7 of SPAT BTC SEOBOUE 8 secon ecient nine 20 9 COMETS qu 10 SOME MD RE RR E S EM 11 loin cpm M 13 Examples prorile 14 linn m 16 Tl E PEE UK NARRA EA EUR M PEN I 18 Delete gno eU 19 oio n 20 wen M o Tm 21 CODY mem 22 Include a protai ME 0 1 23 Pati i RE 24 UTOR OCDE as carn ces eiue BPO ERO MMC 24 Axes selection for teachin Gedinne hb epa Re VE pas E 25 FORGING h BG Pe 10 peer 108 cm em 10 DE sac oH RADAR R NR NODI RPM 11 with electromoeo band wee REPERI 12 General hand D M 14 Individual Taine a 14 PATH
456. point arc G36 Controlled corner rounding G39 Chamfer G53 Programming with respect to home G70 G71 Inch metric programming G90 G91 Programming in absolute incremental coordinates G93 Polar origin preset 0024 High level blocks not allowed when defining a profile DETECTED While editing at the CNC or while executing a program transmitted via DNC CAUSE In the set of blocks defining a profile a high level block has been programmed SOLUTION profile must be defined ISO code No high level instructions are allowed GOTO MSG RPT 0025 Program G77 axes 2 thru 6 DETECTED While editing at the CNC or while executing a program transmitted via DNC CAUSE In the Axis slaving G77 function the parameters for the axes have not been programmed SOLUTION programming of G77 function requires at least two axes 0026 Program G93 I J DETECTED While editing at the CNC or while executing a program transmitted via DNC CAUSE In the Polar origin preset G93 function some of the parameters for the new polar origin have not been programmed SOLUTION Remember that the programming format for this function is G93 I J The I J values are optional but if programmed both must be programmed and they indicate the new polar origin 0028 G2 or G3 not allowed when programming a canned cycle DETECTED While editing at the CNC or while executing a program transmitted v
457. pted 1 TPO9BO7 From this pointon it will follow the programmed contour maintaining the finishing stock until the selected pass is reached Section 1 2 The new roughing pass is performed as follows Move 2 3 in 01 at programmed feedrate F If D has been programmed the 3 4 move is done in rapid G00 but if D has not been programmed the 3 4 move is done following the profile in GO1 at the programmed feedrate F Withdrawal 4 5 in rapid If when machining a channel other channels inside it are detected the same procedure explained above will be followed ze CIIM es amt Se eee eae i tm eee ge E ne ae oe ae Bo A as Py eg ee a ON Why Chapter 9 Section Page CANNEDCYCLES STOCKREMOVALCYCLE 13 ALONG X AXIS G68 fafinal roughing pass has been programmed the CNC will run a pass parallel to the profile maintaining an L stock at the set feedrate This final roughing pass will eliminate the ridges that were leftin the roughing stage X TPO9B12 A Oncethe profile roughing operation has ended the tool will return to the point from where the cycle was called fafinishing pass has been defined it will be carried out with tool radius compensation and at the indicated feedrate H This profile will coincide or not
458. pter 9 Section CANNEDCYCLES STOCKREMOVALCANNED CYCLEALONG Z AXIS G69 Considerations The machining conditions feedrate spindle speed etc mustbe programmed before calling the canned cycle Thecannedcycle calling position must be offthe partto be machined andat a distance greater than that defined as finishing stock L M along the X and Z axes SNA S NS S5 YY YQ AQ SHE QMS QQ YA NS YA HY QOH QQ Yd NS NN YS N NSS HAY NY SS SS NN NS WAS QA 5 NS SS KSNNEN WSS Ss NS A ILS LL e NSANS NN S S N Ls TPO9C10 If the tool position is not correct to execute the cycle the CNC will display the corresponding error message Once the canned cycle has ended the active feedrate will be the last one programmed i e the one corresponding to the roughing operation F or the finishing operation The CNC will assume functions GOO G40 and G90 Chapter 9 Section Page CANNEDCYCLES STOCKREMOVALCANNED 25 CYCLE ALONG Z AXIS G69 94 681 TURNING CANNED CYCLE WITH STRAIGHT SECTIONS This cycle turns the programmed section maintaining the indicated pass between the successive turning passes It allows to select whether or not the canned cycle will perform a finishing pass after completing the programmed turning op
459. r after its associated parameters which must go alone in the block or which only admits its own associated data 3 When assigning a numeric value to a parameter that does not need it SOLUTION The solution for each cause is 1 Remember that the programming order is 1 Block skip conditional block 1 2 or 3 2 Label N 3 G functions 4 Axes coordinates X Y Z 5 Machining conditions F S T D 6 M functions All the data need not be programmed 2 There are some G functions which carry associated data in the block Maybe this type of functions do not let program other type of information after their associated parameters On the other hand neither machining conditions F S tool data T D nor M functions may be programmed 3 There are some G functions having certain parameters associated to them which do not need to be defined with values 0005 Repeated information DETECTED While editing at the CNC or while executing a program transmitted via DNC CAUSE The same data has been entered twice in a block SOLUTION Correct the syntax of the block The same data cannot be defined twice in a block 0006 Improper data format DETECTED While editing at the CNC or while executing a program transmitted via DNC CAUSE While defining the parameters of a machining canned cycle a negative value has been assigned to a parameter which only admits positive values SOLUTION Verify
460. r program parameter Q but the program does not exist SOLUTION Parameter defines the program containing the definition of the cycle profiles If this parameter is programmed that program number must exist and it must contain the labels defined in parameters S and 0070 Program already exists DETECTED execution or while executing programs transmitted via DNC CAUSE This error comes up during execution when using the OPEN instruction While programming in high level language to create an already existing program SOLUTION Change the program number or use parameters A D in the OPEN instruction OPEN P Where A Appends new blocks after the existing ones D Deletes the existing program and it opens it as a new one 0071 Expecting a parameter DETECTED While editing tables CAUSE The wrong parameter number has been entered possibly missing the P character or an attempt has been made to carry out another action move around in the table before quitting the table editing mode SOLUTION Enter the number of the parameter to be edited or press ESC to quit this mode 0072 Parameter does not exist DETECTED While editing at the CNC or while executing a program transmitted via DNC CAUSE While programming in high level language the ERROR instruction has been edited but the error number to be displayed has been defined either with a local parameter gre
461. r the ESC key if you wish to abandon 3 Repeat step 2 for the remaining vertices Once all vertices are defined press the ENTER key and the CNC will complete the polygon or the ESC key if you wish to quit The maximum number of sides on the polygon is limited to 127 FILLED POLYGON After pressing this softkey follow the steps as in the POLYGON option but in this case after completing the definition of the polygon it will be filled with the color used for its definition FILLED CIRCLE After pressing this softkey follow the steps as inthe CIRCLE option but in this case after completing the definition of the circle it will be filled with the color used for its definition FILLED RECTANGLE After pressing this softkey follow the steps as in the RECTANGLE option but in this case after completing the definition of the rectangle it will be filled with the color used for its definition Page Chapter 10 Section 14 SCREENEDITOR GRAPHICELEMENTS 10 4 TEXTS Before accessing this option it is necessary to select the page or symbol to be edited or modified by means of the EDIT option of the UTILITIES mode of operation With this option it is possible to include texts in the selected page or symbol The CNC displays ascreen 80columns wide 640 pixels for X coordinate by 21 rows high 336 pixels for Y coordinate When editing a new page the CNC will position the cursor in the center of the screen and when editing a ne
462. rameter DFORMAT Each axis has the following fields or windows COMMAND Indicates the programmed coordinate or position which the axis must reach ACTUAL Indicates the actual current position of the axis TO GO Indicates the distance which is left to run to the programmed coordinate Chapter 3 Section Page EXECUTE SIMULATE DISPLAYSELECTION 11 3 2 5 FOLLOWING ERROR DISPLAY MODE This display mode shows the following error difference between the theoretical value and the real value of their position of the axes and the spindle EXECUTION P000662 N FOLLOWING ERROR X 00000 002 Z 00000 003 S 00000 000 00000 002 F00000 0000 100 S00000 0000 100 T0000 D000 S 0000 RPM 0000 M MIN G00 G17 G54 PARTC 000000 00 00 00 00 TIMER 000000 00 00 CAP INS BLOCK STOP DISPLAY MDI TOOL GRAPHICS SINGLE SELECTION CONDITION SELECTION INSPECTIO BLOCK Note that the display format is determined by the axis machine parameter DFORMAT 3 2 6 USER DISPLAY MODE This option will execute the program which is selected by means of the general machine parameter USERDPLY in the user channel To quit this mode and return to the previous menu press ESC Page Chapter 3 Section 12 EXECUTE SIMULATE DISPLAYSELECTION 3 2 7 EXECUTION TIME DISPLAY MODE This option is available while simulating a part program and it will display the following fields or windows E
463. rameter A 5 4 WBUF 1 IB2 INPUT Parameter B 5 4 WBUF B IB2 Adds PCALL 25 to the block being edited Request of Parameter A Adds Az value entered to the block being edited Request of Parameter B Adds B value entered to the block being edited WBUF Adds to the block being edited WBUF Enters the edited block into memory After executing this program the block being edited contains PCALL 25 A 23 5 B 2 25 SYSTEM The mnemonic SYSTEM stops execution ofthe user customized program and returns to the corresponding standard menu of the CNC Chapter 12 PROGRAM CONTROLSTATEMENTS Section SCREENCUSTOMIZING STATEMENTS Page 19 Customizing program example The following customizing program must be selected as user program associated to the Editing Mode After selecting the Editing Mode and pressing the USER softkey this program starts executing and it allows assisted editing of 2 usercycles This editing process is carried out a cycle at a time and as often as desired Displays the initial editing page screen NO 10 Sets the softkeys to access the various modes and requests a choice SK1 CICLO 1 SK2 CICLO2 SK7 SALIR N10 WKEY Request a key IF KEY EQ FC00 GOTO N10 Cycle 1 IF KEY EQ FC01 GOTO N20 Cycle 2 IF KEY EQ FC06 SYSTEM ELSE GOTO N10 Quit or request a key CYCL
464. ramming in high level language It shows all the variables symbols operators etc to be used when programming in high level language Chapter 12 Program control statements It shows the control sequences that can be used in high level language The available instructions are for assignment display enable disable flow control subroutines and for generating programs and screens Appendix ISO code programming B Internal CNC variables C High level programming D Key codes E Programming assistance system pages Introduction 8 1 OVERVIEW The CNC can be programmed both at the machine from the front panel or from external peripheral devices tape reader cassette recorder computer etc Memory available to the user for carrying out the part programs is 1 Mbyte The part programs and the values in the tables which the CNC has can beenteredas follows From the front panel Once the editing mode or table required has been selected the CNC allows you to enter data from the keyboard From a Computer DNC or Peripheral Device The CNC allows data to be interchanged with a computer or peripheral device using RS232C and RS422 cables If this is controlled from the CNC it is necessary to preset the corresponding table or part program directory utilities you want to communicate with Depending on the type of communication required the serial port machine parameter PROTOCOL should be selected PROTOCOL 0 if the com
465. rate indicated by the machine parameter for that axis PRBFEED until touching the probe The maximum distance the tool can move is set by machine parameter PRBMOVE When the tool touches the probe the CNC stops the axis and after making the pertinent calculations it will assign the new tool length value to its corresponding tool offset Repeat these operation to calibrate the tool along the other axis Page Chapter 5 Section JOG TOOL CALIBRATION MDI With this function itis possible to edit and execute a block ISO or high level providing the necessary information by means of softkeys Once the block has been edited press to execute it without leaving this operation mode Warning offset active at the time When searching home G74 the CNC will maintain the part zero or zero USER When selecting this option the CNC will execute in the user channel the program whose number is indicated in the general machine parameter USERMAN To quit its execution and return to the previous menu press ESC Chapter 5 Section Page JOG MDI USER 5 DISPLAY SELECTION With this function it is possible to monitor the PLC by pressing the corresponding softkey Once in that mode operate as described in the chapter regarding the monitoring of the PLC Itis also possible to select with the corresponding softkey one of the following position value coordinate
466. rdinate of the initial point of the profile It must be programmed in absolute values and in the active units radius or diameter Z 5 5 Defines the Z coordinate of the initial point of the profile It must be programmed in absolute values Q 5 5 Defines the X coordinate of the final point of the profile It must be programmed in absolute values and in the active units radius or diameter R 5 5 Defines the Z coordinate of the final point of the profile It must be programmed in absolute values C5 5 Defines the turning pass It is given by a positive radius value The whole turning operation is carried out with the same pass value which will be equal to or smaller than the one programmed C Ifprogrammed with a0 value the CNC will display the corresponding error message D 5 5 Defines the safety distance to withdraw the tool after each pass Xa TP09G02 Page Chapter 9 Section 36 CANNEDCYCLES TURNING WITHARCS G84 L5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 1 5 5 5 5 When programming D with a value other than 0 the cutter withdraws at a 45 angle up to the safety distance left drawing When programming D with a 0 value the exit path is the same as the entry path This may be interesting for grooving complex profiles to use these cycles on cylindrical grinders etc When not programming D the tool withdrawalis carried out following the profile up to the last pass C dis
467. rdinates G90 R430 QO Point PO G03 Q33 7 Point P1 in an arc 01 R340 045 G01 R290 Q33 7 G01 R230 045 G01 R360 Q63 4 G03 Q90 Point P2 in a straight line G01 Point P3 in a straight line G01 Point P4 in a straight line G01 Point P5 in a straight line G01 Point P6 in an arc G03 oot oe t os Incremental coordinates G90 R430 QO Point PO G91 G03 Q33 7 Point P1 in an arc G01 R 90 QII 3 Point P2 ina straight line G01 G01 50 Q 11 3 Point P3 ina straight line G01 G01 60 QII 3 Point P4 ina straight line G01 G01 R130 Q18 4 Point P5 ina straight line G01 G03 Q26 6 Point P6 in an arc G03 Chapter 3 Section Page AXES ANDCOORDINATESYSTEMS PROGRAMMINGOF 9 COORDINATES The polarorigin apart from being able to be preset using function G93 described later can be modified in the following cases On power up after executing M02 M30 EMERGENCY or RESET the CNC will assume as the polarorigin the coordinate origin ofthe work plane defined by the general machine parameter IPLANE Every time the work plane is changed G16 G17 G18 or G19 CNC assumes the coordinate origin of the new work plane selected as the polar origin Whenexecuting acircular interpolation G02 or G03 and if the general machine parameter has a value of 1 the center of the arc will become the new polar origin Page Chapter 3
468. re C 26 Program G36 G39 with 5 5 4 Programi INPUT 16 Program inputs 0 thru 25 mL Program inside R 28 Program label N 0 9999 sti Program maximum Z 28 Program nesting not allowed wee Program numerical format 17 Program outside 28 Program value 18 Program pages 0 thru 255 216 Program pitch 9 Program Q between 359 9999 28 Program row number wto Program rows 0 thru 20 16 Program softkeys 1 thru 7 to T Table limits exceeded Tangential exit programmed incorrectly Text 10G VOM The axis cannot be programmed after first point of profile 28 The canned cycle is missing a tool offset 31 The main program cannot have a subroutine The position of a special tool is set The program cannot be executed The program is not accessible The window must be previously defined There is no C ss There is no empty pocket in the tool magazine There is no information on previous path There is no live 1001
469. ready before starting the transmission To interrupt the transmission press the ABORT softkey Ifthe length of the table received does not coincide with the length of the current table the CNC will acts as follows If the table received is shorter than the current one the received lines are modified and the rest keep their previous values If the table received is longer than the current one the CNC updates all the lines of the current table and when detecting that there is no more room the CNC issues the corresponding error message SAVE The tables may be saved in the Memkey Card CARD A or in a peripheral device or PC through the two serial lines RS232C or RS422 Thetransmission begins after pressing the corresponding softkey When using aserial line the receptor must be ready before starting the transmission To interrupt the transmission press the ABORT softkey MM INCHES Every time this softkey is pressed the CNC will change the display format of those parameters affected by these units from millimeters to inches and vice versa The lower right hand window will show the units currently selected Note that this change does not affect the general machine parameter INCHES which indicates the measuring units by default Page Chapter 11 Section MACHINE PARAMETERS OPERATION WITH PARAMETERTABLES 1 2 e DIAGNOSIS In this operating mode itis possible to know the configuration ofthe C
470. res the datainputby the userinthe entry variable indicated by means of anumber or by means of any expression which results in a number The wait for data entry will only occur when programming the format of the requested data This format may have a sign integer part and decimal part If it bears the minus sign it will allow positive and negative values and if it does not have a sign it will only allow positive values Theinteger part indicates the maximum number of digits 0 6 desired to the left of the decimal point The decimal part indicates the maximum number of digits 0 5 desired to the right of the decimal point If the numerical format is not programmed for example IB1 INPUT text the mnemonic will only display the indicated text without waiting for the data to be entered ODW expression 1 expression 2 expression 3 The mnemonic ODW defines and draws a white window on the screen with fixed dimensions 1 row and 14 columns Each mnemonic has an associated number which is indicated by the value of expression 1 once this has been evaluated Likewise its position on screen is defined by expression 2 row and by expression 3 column Expression 1 expression 2 and expression 3 may contain anumber or any expression which results in a number The CNC allows 26 windows 0 25 to be defined and their positioning within the display area providing 21 rows 0 20 and 80 columns 0 79 Page 16
471. ression INPUT text format Where format must be a signed number with 6 entire digits and 5 decimals at the most If the character is entered after the text the CNC expects the format 0107 Do not program formats greater than 6 5 DETECTED While executing in the user channel CAUSE While programming in high level language an IB instruction has been edited in a format with more than 6 entire digits or more than 5 decimals SOLUTION Remember that the programming format for this instruction is IB expression 2 INPUT text format Where format must be a signed number with 6 entire digits and 5 decimals at the most 0108 This command can only be executed in the user channel DETECTED During execution CAUSE An attempt has been made to execute a block containing information that can only be executed through the user channel SOLUTION There are specific expressions for customizing programs that can only be executed inside the user program 0109 User channel Do not program geometric aides comp or cycles DETECTED While executing in the user channel CAUSE An attempt has been made to execute a block containing geometric aide tool radius length compensation or machining canned cycles SOLUTION Inside a customizing program the following cannot be programmed Neither geometric assistance nor movements Neither tool radius nor length compensation Canned cycles 0110 Local parameters not
472. riable allows the timer count to be read or modified starting from the one indicated n PLCCn This variable allows the counter count to be read or modified starting from the one indicated n Page Chapter 11 Section 26 PROGRAMMINGINHIGH LEVELLANGUAGE VARIABLESASSOCIATED WITHTHEPLC 11 2 13 VARIABLES ASSOCIATED WITH LOCAL PARAMETERS The CNC allows 26 local parameters PO P25 to be assigned to a subroutine by using mnemonics PCALL and MCALL In addition to performing the required subroutine these mnemonics allow local parameters to beinitialized Read only variables CALLP Example Allows us to know which local parameters have been defined and which have not in the call to the subroutine by means ofthe PCALL or MCALL mnemonic The information will be given in the 26 least significant bits bits 0 25 each of these corresponding to the local parameter of the same number as well as bit 12 corresponding to P12 Each bit will indicate if the corresponding local parameter has been defined 21 or not 20 31 30 29 2827 26 25 2423 22 2120 6543210 o o ojo o o PCALL 20 P0220 P223 P325 Callto subroutine 20 SUB 20 Beginning of subroutine 20 P100 CALLP In parameter P100 the following will be obtained 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 1101 LSB Chapter 11 Section Page
473. rogrammed On power up after executing M02 M30 or following EMERGENCY or RESET the CNC assumes function G97 Chapter 5 Section Page PROGRAMMING BYISO CODE SPINDLESPEED S 7 5 4 SPINDLE SELECTION G28 G29 The lathe model may have 2 spindle the main and the second one Both spindle may be turning at the same time but the CNC will only control one at a time This selection is made by means of functions G28 and G29 G28 Selects the second spindle G29 Selects the main spindle Once the desired spindle has been selected it may be manipulated from the CNC keyboard or by the following functions M3 M4 M5 M19 Seek G33 G94 G95 G96 G97 Both spindle can work either in open or closed loop but only the main spindle can work as a C axis Functions G28 and G29 are modal and incompatible with each other G28 and G29 must be programmed alone in the block That is the only information this block may contain On power up after executing an M02 M30 or after an EMERGENCY or RESET the CNC assumes function G29 main spindle selected Dual spindle operating example On power up the CNC always selects the main spindle All the keyboard actions and by spindle related functions affect the main spindle Example 1000 M3 Main spindle clockwise at 1000 rpm To select the second spindle execute function G28 From then on All the keyboard actions and spindle related functions affect the second spindl
474. rom the outputs of the axes board The fuse might be blown SOLUTION Supply the outputs of the axes board with 24V If the fuse is blown replace it 2013 I O 1 board without voltage 2014 I O 2 board without voltage 2015 I O 3 board without voltage DETECTED During execution CAUSE The 24V are missing from the outputs of the corresponding I O board The fuse might be blown SOLUTION Supply the outputs of the corresponding I O board with 24V If the fuse is blown replace it ERROR TROUBLESHOOTING MANUAL 45 8055T CNC ERGO 3 2016 PLC not ready DETECTED During execution CAUSE The PLC program is not running The probable causes might be There is no PLC program WATCHDOG error The program has been stopped from the monitoring mode SOLUTION Restart the PLC program by restarting the PLC 2017 CNC RAM memory error DETECTED While starting the CNC up or during diagnosis CAUSE A RAM memory problem has been detected at the CNC SOLUTION Change the CPU board Contact the Service Department 2018 CNC EPROM memory error DETECTED While starting the CNC up or during diagnosis CAUSE An EPROM memory problem has been detected at the CNC SOLUTION Change the EPROM Contact the Service Department 2019 PLC RAM memory error DETECTED While starting the CNC up or during diagnosis CAUSE A RAM memory problem has been detected at the PLC SOLUTION Change the PLC board Contact
475. rom to DNC to from Rename a program in Change the comment of a program in Change protections of a program in Execute a part program in Execute a user program in Execute the PLC program in Execute programs using the GOTO or RPT instructions from Execute subroutines stored in Execute programs stored in RAM CARD A or HD using the EXEC instruction from Execute programs via DNC with the EXEC instruction from Open programs stored in RAM CARD A or HD using the OPEN instruction from Open programs via DNC using the OPEN instruction from Consult from a PC and through Ethernet the program directory in Consult from a PC and through Ethernet the subroutine directory in Create from a PC and through Ethernet a directory in fitis not in RAM memory it generates an executable code in RAM and it executes it Chapter 1 Section Page OVERVIEW 3 1 1 1 CONSIDERATIONS FOR THE ETHERNET CONNECTION When configuring the CNC as another node in the computer network the programs stored in the hard disk module HD may be edited and modified from any PC Instructions for seting up a user PC to access CNC directories Recommended configuration Open the Windows Explorer Onthe Tools menu select the Connect to Network Drives option Select the Drive For example D Indicate the path CNC name followed by th
476. rror message Chapter 9 Section Page CANNEDCYCLES TURNING WITHSTRAIGHT 29 SECTIONS G81 9 5 G62 FACING CANNED CYCLE WITH STRAIGHT SECTIONS This cycle faces the programmed section maintaining the indicated pass between the successive facing passes It allows to select whether or not the canned cycle will perform a finishing pass after completing the programmed turning operation The basic structure of the block is GB2X ZQRCDLMFH X 5 5 Z 5 5 0 5 5 5 5 5 5 D 5 5 TPO9EO2 M C D 15 Wo Wo Wo Wo ME Wo 1 bg IE bg 2 d 11 Ve gt 7 Defines the X coordinate of the initial point of the profile It must be programmed in absolute values and in the active units radius or diameter Defines the Z coordinate of the initial point of the profile It must be programmed in absolute values Defines the X coordinate of the final point of the profile It must be programmed in absolute values and in the active units radius or diameter Defines the Z coordinate of the final point of the profile It must be programmed in absolute values Defines the facing pass The whole facing operation is carried out with the same pass which is the same or smaller than the one programmed C If programmed as 0 the CNC will display the corresponding error Defines the safety distance to withdraw the tool after each pass Pag
477. ruction has been programmed 3 While programming in high level language an operation has been assigned either to a local parameter greater than 25 or to a global parameter greater 299 SOLUTION The solution for each cause is 1 Enter the symbol in the right place 2 A block cannot contain high level language instructions and ISO coded instructions at the same time 3 The parameters used by the CNC are Local 0 25 Global 100 299 Other parameters out of this range cannot be used in operations 0089 Logarithm of zero or negative number DETECTED While editing at the CNC or while executing a program transmitted via DNC CAUSE An operation has been programmed which involves the calculation of a negative number or a zero SOLUTION Only logarithms of numbers greater than zero can be calculated When working with parameters that parameter may have already acquired a negative value or zero Check that the parameter does not reach the operation with that value 0090 Square root of a negative number DETECTED While editing at the CNC or while executing a program transmitted via DNC CAUSE An operation has been programmed which involves the calculation of the square root of a negative number SOLUTION Only the square root of numbers greater than zero can be calculated When working with parameters that parameter may have already acquired a negative value or zero Check that the parameter does not reach the operation w
478. s ENTER TANGENTIAL EXIT Select corner 7 8 and press ENTER Press ESC to quit the Modify option End of editing mode Set Radius 5 Set Radius 10 Set Radius 5 Set Radius 5 Set Radius 5 Press the FINISH softkey The CNC quits the profile editing mode and shows the generated program in ISO code Chapter 4 EDIT PROFILEEDITOR Section Page 15 4 2 MODIFY This option permits modifying the contents of a selected program block Before pressing this softkey select with the cursor the block to be modified Once this option is selected the softkeys will change their color showing their type of modifying option over a white background Also it is possible to get more editing assistance by pressing HELP Press HELP again to exit the editing assistance mode By pressing ESC the information corresponding to that block and which was shownin the editing area will be cleared It will then be possible to modify its contents again To quit the block modifying mode press CL or ESC to clear the editing window and then press ESC again This way the selected block will not be modified Once the block contents have been modified press ENTER so the new contents replace the old ones Page Chapter 4 Section 16 EDIT MODIFY 43 FIND This option is used to find a specific text within the selected program When selecting this option the softkeys will show the
479. s executed before 20 or after 21 the movement of the block in which it is programmed Indicates whether the execution of the M function interrupts 21 or not 20 the preparation of the blocks Indicates whether the M function is executed after calling the associated subroutine 20 or only the associated subroutine is executed 1 When bit 2 is set to 1 it indicates whether block preparation is to be interrupted until the M function starts executing 0 or until its execution is finished 1 The rest of the bits are not being used at this time Chapter 11 Section Page MACHINE PARAMETERS MISCELLANEOUSFUNCTION 3 TABLES 11 3 LEADSCREW ERROR COMPENSATION TABLES The tables for leadscrew error compensation have the following structure X AXIS COMPENSATION 11 50 14 POINT NUMBER POSITION P001 0 0000 0 0000 0 0000 0 0000 0 0000 0 0000 0 0000 0 0000 0 0000 0 0000 0 0000 0 0000 0 0000 0 0000 0 0000 0 0000 0 0000 0 0000 0 0000 0 0000 X 00020 000 I lt P lt PA PAPA PA PAPA P lt PA PAPA P lt P lt PA PA PA PA PA PA CAP INS MM MODIFY INITIALIZE MM INCH The number of points of each of these is defined by means of the axis machine parameter NPOINTS The following is defined for each of line Position of the axis to be compensated Error of this axis in this position Also the current position
480. s of the type of units currently selected Example 51000 Spindle in open loop M19S100 The spindle switches to closed loop Home search and positioning orientation at 100 M19 S 30 spindle orients to 30 passing through 0 M19 5400 The spindle turns a whole revolution and positions at 40 Page Chapter 5 Section 14 PROGRAMMINGBY ISOCODE AUXILIARY FUNCTION M 5 7 10 M41 M42 M43 M44 SPINDLE SPEED RANGE CHANGE The CNC offers 4 spindle speed ranges M41 M42 M43 and M44 with maximum speed limits set by the spindle machine parameters MAXGEARI MAXGEAR2 MAXGEAR and If machine parameter AUTOGEAR is set so the CNC executes the range change automatically M41 thru M44 will be sent out automatically by the CNC without having to be programmed Ifthis machine parameter is set for non automatic gear change M41 thru M44 will have to be programmed every time a gear change is required Bear in mind that the maximum voltage value assigned to machine parameter MAX VOLT corresponds to the maximum speed indicated for each one of the speed ranges machine parameters MAXGEARI thru 4 5 7 11 M45 AUXILIARY SPINDLE LIVE TOOL In order to use this miscellaneous function it is necessary to set one of the axes of the machine as auxiliary spindle or live tool general machine parameter PO thru P7 To use the auxiliary spindle or live tool
481. s this softkey to display the next active page PREVIOUS PAGE Press this softkey to display the previous active page CLEAR PAGE Press this softkey to deactivate the page being displayed Note that the CNC dynamically updates the active pages 9 6 SAVE PROGRAM Press this softkey to save the PLC PRG program into the user Memkey Card CARD A The PLC program must be stopped before attempting to save it If itis running the CNC will ask whether it is desired to stop it or not The PLC program must be compiled otherwise the CNC will issue an warning message If the PLC program is running the CNC requests it to be stopped Chapter 9 Section Page PLC OPTIONS 19 9 7 RESTORE PROGRAM Press this softkey to restore recover the PLC program PLC PRG from the user Memkey Card CARD A The PLC program must not be running any PLC program otherwise the CNC will ask whether it is desired to stop it or not Afterexecuting this instruction the new source program recovered will replace the one that the PLC previously had This new one must be compiled and started in order for the PLC to execute it 9 8 RESOURCES IN USE When selecting this option the CNC will offer the softkeys to selectthe table of resources used in the PLC program The following resource tables are available INPUTS 1 OUTPUTS 0 MARKS M REGISTERS R TIMERS T COUNTERS C Page Chapter 9 Section 20 PLC OPTIONS
482. se this function no part program may be in execution or simulation If this is the case it must be interrupted With this option it is possible to re define the size of the display area by assigning new maximum and minimum values for the Z axis and forthe part radius X axis These position values are referred to part zero Inorderto re define the display area the CNC will show to the right of the screen several windows indicating the current display area dimensions Use the up and down arrow keys to select the window whose value is to be changed and key in the new value Once all the desired windows have been assigned new values press ENTER to validate them To quit this mode without making any changes press ESC Inline graphics XZ XC ZC thereisasoftkey optimum area which redefines the display area that contains in all planes all the tool paths already executed Page Chapter 3 Section 22 EXECUTE SIMULATE GRAPHICS 3 5 3 ZOOM In order to use this option the CNC must not be executing or simulating a part program If so it must be interrupted With this option it is possible to enlarge or reduce the graphics display area When selecting this option the CNC will show a window superimposed on the current graphics and another one overthe drawing atthe lowerright hand side of the screen These new windows indicate the new display area being selected Use the zoom and zoom keys to either enl
483. sion are shown even when it has more than 8 The cursor will position at the next variable which will be shown in the editing window thus being possible to continue editing new variables To quit this option the editing area must be empty If itis not empty delete its contents by pressing ESC and then press ESC again DELETE Use this option to delete a variable Before pressing this softkey use the cursor to select the variable to be deleted To delete more variables repeat these steps for each one of them CLEAR ALL This option deletes all variables from the status window Chapter 9 Section Page PLC LOGICANALYZER 27 9 10 2 2 SELECTION OF TRIGGER CONDITION Thetriggerconditionas definedis that around which the data capture takes place This data capture can be done before after or both before and after having met the selected trigger condition With this option itis possible to select the trigger type and condition of the logic analyzer To do this the following softkey options appear EDIT With this option it is possible to edit the trigger condition around which the data capture will take place Once this optionis selected the softkeys will change their background color to white and they will show the information corresponding to the editing type possible Itis possible to analyze logic expressions formed with one or more consultations which must follow the syntax and rules used to write the PL
484. ssigned to parameter A is half the tool angle the penetration will be done rubbing the thread s flank If A is programmed with a negative value the penetration will be done alternating the flanks of the thread Optional Its meaning depends on parameter If parameter K has not been defined it indicates the angular position of the spindle corresponding to the thread s starting point With this it is possible to make multiple entry threads The following example shows how to make a3 entry point thread To do that 3 threading canned cycles will be programmed with the same values except for W G86 XZORKIBEDLCJA WO G86 XZORKIBEDLCJAWI20 G86 XZORKIBEDLCJA W240 If K has been defined itis a thread repair cycle It indicates the angular spindle position corresponding to the thread measuring point Note To do a thread repair proceed as follows 1 Home reference the spindle 2 Measure the angle of the root of the thread K W parameters 3 Define the G87 cycle for thread repair 4 Execute the canned cycle Page 52 Chapter 9 Section CANNEDCYCLES ud D Basic operation D 5 2 25 de 4 ZA A 7 4 Rapid move G00 to the approach point located at a safety distance D from the initial point Z X TP09J07 Threading loop The following steps will be repeated until the finishing coordinate is reached programmed depth m
485. st be indicated in destination directory CARDA in the Memkey CARD HD on the hard disk DNCI at a PC connected through serial line 1 DNC2 at a PC connected through serial line 2 Parameter A D is used when the program to be edited already exists A The CNC appends the new blocks after the ones already existing D TheCNC deletes the existing program and starts editing a new one A program comment may also be associated with it This comment will later be displayed next to it on the program directory The OPEN statement is very useful when digitizing parts because it allows generating a program from a program already in execution That generated program will depend on the values assumed by the program being executed To edit blocks the WRITE statement must be used as described next Notes If the program to be edited already exists and the A D parameters are not defined the CNC will display an error message when executing the block The program opened with the OPEN statement is closed when executing an M20 or another OPEN statement and after an Emergency or Reset Froma PC only programs stored in the CNC S RAM memory in the CARD A or in the Hard Disk module can be opened Page Chapter 12 Section PROGRAM CONTROLSTATEMENTS STATEMENTSFOR GENERATINGPROGRAMS WRITE block text gt The mnemonic WRITE adds after the last block of the program which began to be edited by means of the mnemonic OPEN P the inf
486. start STOP CONDITION Itallows selecting the block in which the execution or the simulation of the program will stop DISPLAY SELECTION Itallows the display mode to be selected MDI It allows any type of block ISO or high level to be edited with programming assistance by means of softkeys Once a block has been edited and after pressing the key cycle start the CNC will execute this block without leaving this operating mode TOOL INSPECTION Once the execution of the program has been interrupted this option allows the toolto be inspected and changed should this be necessary GRAPHICS This option carries out a graphic representation of the part during the execution or simulation of the selected part program Italso allows selecting the type of graphic the area to be displayed the viewpoint and graphic parameters SINGLE BLOCK Allows the part program to be executed one block at a time or continuously Chapter 3 Section Page EXECUTE SIMULATE 3 3 1 BLOCK SELECTION AND STOP CONDITION The CNC will start to execute the required block from the first line of the program and will finish it when one of the program end functions M02 or M30 is executed If it is required to modify one of these conditions the BLOCK SELECTION and STOP CONDITION functions must be used BLOCK SELECTION With this option itis possible to indicate the beginning block of the selected program execution or simulation This c
487. stead of redefining machine parameters PRBXMIN PRBXMAX PRBZMAX and PRBZMIN every time the probe is calibrated these coordinates may be indicated in the X U Z and W variables respectively The CNC does not change the machine parameters but considers the coordinates indicated in X U Z W only during this calibration If any of the X U Z W fields is left out the CNC assumes the value assigned to the corresponding machine parameter Page Chapter 10 Section PROBING TOOL CALIBRATION Basic operation Code 1 Code 7 Approach move Rapid move G00 from the cycle calling point to the approach corner This pointis located in front ofthe corresponding probe s corner at a safety distance B from both sides The approach is made in two stages Ist Move along Z axis 2nd Move along X axis Probing move Depending on the location code assigned to the selected tool one or two probings will be carried out for its calibration Each probing operation will follow these steps a Approach move Rapid move 00 up to the approach point located in front of the side to be probed and at a distance B from it b Probing move Probe movement at indicated feedrate F until probe signal is received The maximum distance to travel in each probing move is 2B If after travelling this distance the CNC has not yet received the probe signal it will display the corresponding error message and it will stop
488. sts of more than one page of information the symbol indicating that this key can be pressed to access the following page or the indicating that it is possible to press this key to access the previous page The following help is available OPERATING HELP This is accessed from the operating mode menu or when one of these has been selected but none ofthe options shown have been selected In all these cases the softkeys have a blue background color Itoffers information on the operating mode or corresponding option While this information is available on screen itis not possible to continue operating the CNC via the softkeys it being necessary to press the HELP key again to recover the information which was on the main screen before requesting help and continuing with the operation of the CNC The help system can also be abandoned by pressing the ESC key or the MAIN MENU key EDITING HELP This is accessed once one of the editing options has been selected part programs PLC program tables machine parameters etc In all these cases the softkeys have a white background It offers information on the corresponding option While this information is available it is possible to continue operating with the CNC If the HELP key is pressed again the CNC analyzes if the present editing status corresponds to the same help page or not If another page corresponds to it it displays this instead of the previous one and if th
489. t G33 X C L Q X C 5 5 End point of the thread L5 5 Thread pitch 3 5 Optional It indicates the spindle angular position 359 9999 corresponding to the thread s starting point With this it is possible to make multiple entry threads If not programmed a value of 0 is assumed Considerations When executing function G33 and before carrying out the electronic threading the CNC performs a home search on the spindle and orients it to the angular position set by parameter Q Parameter is available when spindle machine parameter M19TYPE 1 When working in round corner G05 several threads may be joined seamless on the same part When joining several threads only the first one can have an entry angle Q Neither the programmed feedrate F nor the spindle speed can be changed while function G33 is active They both set at 100 Function G33 is modal and incompatible with G00 G01 602 603 and G75 On power up after executing M02 M30 or after an EMERGENCY or RESET the CNC assumes 01 depending on the setting of general machine parameter IMOVE Page 20 Chapter 6 Section PATHCONTROL THREADCUTTING G33 Example when programming the X axis in diameter a Longitudinal threading We want to make in a single pass a 5 mm pitch thread 2 mm deep 58 7 1 7 40 180 190 G90 G00 X200 Z190 X116 Z180 G33 740 15 Threa
490. t Modify any profile element even the type of element straight line clockwise or counterclockwise arc Insert anew element straight line or arc in any position of the profile Delete any profile element Add a new additional text to any section of the profile Modify the display area To edit a new profile It must be pressed when all the sections of the profile have been defined It must be indicated whether the edited profile or profiles must be saved or not The CNC quits the profile editor and adds to the program the ISO code corresponding to the profile just edited Chapter 4 EDIT Section Page PROFILEEDITOR 4 1 43 DEFINITION OF A STRAIGHT SECTION When pressing the STRAIGHT LINE softkey the CNC displays DISPLAY AREA the data shown on the right margin of this page X 300 300 Coordinates of starting point of the line Y 200 200 They cannot be modified because they correspond to the last point of the previous section STRAIGHT LINE X2 Y2 Coordinates of the end point of the section e 2 Angle of the line referred to the abscissa axis SN Q TANGENCY Indicates whether the line to be drawn is tangent to the previous section or not TANGENCY NO All these parameters need not be defined but all the known ones should be defined Et 0 Er 0 To define a parameter press the corresponding softkey key in the Ni 2 desired value an
491. t affect the rapid moves G00 which will be made in mm min or inch min By the same token it will not be applied to moves made in the JOG mode during tool inspection etc Function G95 is modal i e once programmed it stays active until G94 is programmed On power up after executing M02 M30 or following EMERGENCY or RESET the CNC assumes function G94 or G95 according to the general machine parameter TFEED Chapter 5 Section Page PROGRAMMING BYISO CODE FEEDRATE F 5 5 3 SPINDLE SPEED AND SPINDLE ORIENTATION S The turning speed of the spindle is programmed directly in rpm via code S5 4 if in G97 or in m min feet min when working in inches if in G96 The maximum value is limited by spindle machine parameters MAXGEARI MAXGEAR2 MAXGEAR 3 and MAXGEAR4 in each case depending on the spindle range selected Itisalso possible to limit this maximum value from the program by using function G92 55 4 The programmed turning speed S may be varied from the PLC DNC or by the SPINDLE keys and on the Operator Panel of the CNC This speed variation is made between maximum and minimum values established by spindle machine parameters MINSOVR and MAXSOVR The incremental pitch associated with the SPINDLE keys and on the CNC Operator Panel in order to vary the programmed S value is fixed by the spindle machine parameter SOVRSTEP When functions G33 electronic threadin
492. t be more than 48 consecutive blocks without the path to be followed 1001 Plane change during rounding or chamfering DETECTED During execution CAUSE A plane change has been programmed on the path following a Controlled corner rounding G36 or a Chamfer G39 SOLUTION The plane cannot be changed while executing a rounding or a chamfer The path following the definition of a corner rounding or chamfer must be in the same plane as the rounding or chamfer 1002 Rounding radius too large DETECTED During execution CAUSE In the Controlled corner rounding G36 function a rounding radius has been programmed larger than one of the paths where it is defined SOLUTION The rounding radius must be smaller than the paths defining it 1003 Rounding in last block DETECTED During execution CAUSE A Controlled corner rounding G36 or a Chamfer G39 has been defined on the last path of the program or when the CNC cannot find information about the path following the definition of the corner rounding or chamfer SOLUTION corner rounding or chamfer must be defined between two paths 1004 Tangential exit programmed incorrectly DETECTED During execution CAUSE The movement following a tangential exit G38 is a circular path SOLUTION The movement following a tangential exit G38 must be straight line 1005 Chamfer programmed incorrectly DETECTED During execution CAUSE The moveme
493. t has been programmed The axes are moved at maximum feedrate allowed FO regardless of the programmed F value and it can be varied using the Feedrate Override Switch RAPID S 0 It takes into account tool radius compensation functions G41 G42 thus showing the graphic representation of the path for the theoretical tool nose It does not start the spindle It does not output the M functions associated with the spindle when operating in open loop rpm M3 M4 M5 M41 M42 M43 and M44 It does output to the PLC the M function associated with spindle orientation M19 when operating in closed loop It outputs to the PLC the rest of the functions M S T The axes C axis included are moved at maximum feedrate FO regardless of the programmed F value and it can be varied using the Feedrate Override Switch Page Chapter 3 Section EXECUTE SIMULATE Outputs Graphics Axis movement is p Mee T M345 M41 42 43 44 Theoretical Path Programmed No No No No G functions Theoretical tip No No No No G M S T functions Theoretical tip No No Yes Yes Rapid Theoretical tip Yes Yes Yes Yes Rapid S 0 Theoretical tip Yes No Yes No The executing or simulating conditions initial block type of graphics etc that may be set before or while executing or simulating a part program are BLOCK SELECTION Itallows selecting the block in which the execution or the simulation of the program will
494. t is found it will be highlighted showing the same replacing or not replacing options TO THE END This function will automatically replace all the matching text from the current block to the end of the program without offering the option of not replacing it ABORT This function will notreplace the highlighted text and it will quit the find and replace mode Chapter 9 Section Page PLC EDIT 5 DELETE BLOCK With this function it is possible to delete a block or group of blocks To delete only one block just position the cursor over it and press ENTER To delete a group of blocks indicate the first and last blocks to be deleted To do so follow these steps Position the cursor over the first block to be deleted and press the INITIAL BLOCK softkey Position the cursor over the last block to be deleted and press the FINAL BLOCK softkey If the last block to be deleted is also the last one of the program it can also be selected by pressing the TO THE END softkey Once the first and last blocks are selected the CNC will highlight the selected blocks requesting confirmation to delete them MOVE BLOCK With this option itis possible to move a block or group of blocks by previously indicating the first and last blocks to be moved To do so follow these steps Position the cursor over the first block to be moved and press the INITIAL BLOCK softkey Positio
495. t of the symbol Therefore when inserting a symbol into a page the symbol will take the background of that page If the desired background color is WHITE it is recommended to use a different color while creating the page since the cursor the drawing cursor is always white and will become invisible with this background color Once the complete page screen is created the background color can be changed to the desired one One of the color rectangles shown has another rectangle in it The inside rectangle indicates the selected main color and the outside rectangle indicates the selected background color To select the background color follow these steps 1 Use the right and left arrow keys to select the desired color among the 16 shown The CNC will show the background color being selected by placing the main color rectangle inside the rectangle corresponding to the background color being selected 2 Press ENTER to validate the selected color or ESC to quit this mode leaving the previous selection intact When editing a new page or symbol the CNC assumes a blue background color by default Page Chapter 10 Section 8 SCREENEDITOR EDITING CUSTOMSCREENS PAGES ANDSYMBOLS MAIN COLOR With this option itis possible to select the color used to draw and write texts on the page screen or symbol One of the color rectangles shown has another rectangle in it The inside rectangle indicates the selected main co
496. tance right drawing It must be borne in mind that when D is not programmed the cycle execution time is greater but the amount of stock to be removed on the finishing pass is less Defines the finishing pass along X It is given in radius and if not programmed a value of 0 will be assumed Defines the finishing pass along Z It is given in radius and if not programmed a value of 0 will be assumed Defines the feedrate for the final roughing pass If not programmed or programmed with a value of 0 it means that there is no final roughing ass P X Defines the feedrate for the finishing pass If not programmed or programmed with a value of 0 it is considered that no finishing pass is desired Defines the distance in radius from the initial point X Z to the arc s center along the X axis Itis programmed in incremental values with respect to the initial point like the I for circular interpolations G02 G03 Defines the distance from the initial point X Z to the arc s center along the Z axis Itis programmed in incremental values with respect to the initial point like the for circular interpolations G02 G03 CANNEDCYCLES TURNING WITHARCS G84 37 Chapter 9 Section Page Basic operation The canned cycle will analyze the programmed profile performing if necessary a horizontal turning operation until the defined profile is reached The whole turning operation is carried out
497. te ioter Errors in the rounding cycles In The tapping BV GIG sssrinin re toot irte Errors in the threading cycle Errors in the turning cycle X 14 T 14 Expecting icu cr 13 IEXDOCINT aumenti eben un HE Ee 11 Expecting a parameter External SMergency activated usua imde 45 F Feedback eror 600 506 V iussi petro et pem em tc First point programmed wrong when selecting profile For G28 or G29 a second spindle is required 27 lue B6 adi 22 Function mor possible from PEG uiia netta ia innate 25 ERROR TROUBLESHOOTING MANUAL 65 8055T CNC G Local parameters not 35 Local parameters not 17 Location code not allowed in canned 34 Logarithm of zero or negative 14 M function MA S4 BRS EB mirisnim 18 Magazine iS nor RANDON 20 Magazine P 1 255 0 98001 0 19 Maximum probe travel
498. te tools Its approximate position must be indicated in the following general machine parameters in absolute coordinate values referred to Machine Reference Zero PRBXMIN indicates the minimum X coordinate of the probe PRBXMAX indicates the maximum X coordinate of the probe PRBZMIN indicates the minimum Z coordinate of the probe PRBZMAX indicates the maximum Z coordinate of the probe PRBXMAX PRBXMIN 105 PRBZMIN PRBZMAX To execute this cycle it is required to use a reference tool of known dimensions whose corresponding values have already been entered in the tool offset table Since the probe must be calibrated along both X and Z axis the location code F of the selected reference tool must be F1 F3 F5 or F7 The programming format for this cycle is PROBE 2 B F X U Z W B5 5 Defines the safety distance with a positive radius value If programmed with a value of 0 the CNC will display its corresponding error message F5 5 Defines the probing feedrate in mm min or inches min X U Z W are optional parameters which usually need not be defined On some machines due to the lack of probe positioning repeatability the probe must be calibrated before each calibration Instead of redefining machine parameters PRBXMIN PRBXMAX PRBZMAX and PRBZMIN every time the probe is calibrated these coordinates may be indicated in the X U Z and W variables respectively Chapter 10 Section Page PROBING
499. ted counter For example CEN 12 0 sets the enable input of counter 12 to 0 Alters the status 0 1 of the preset input of the indicated counter 1 thru 256 The counter will be preset with the value if an up flank is produced with this instruction For example CPR 10 1000 1 sets the preset input of counter C10to 1 andalso if an up flank has occurred being previously set to 0 the counter will be preset with a value of 1000 Presets the count of the indicated counter to the value For example C42 1200 sets the count of counter C42 to 1200 Alters the status 0 1 of the indicated bit 0 31 of the indicated register 1 559 For example B5 R200 0 sets Bit 5 of register R200 to 0 Assigns the value to the indicated register For example R 303 1200 assigns the value of 1200 to register R303 Assigns the value to the indicated register group For example R234 236 120 assigns the value of 120 to registers R234 R235 and R236 It must be borne in mind that when referring toa single resource itis possible to do it using its corresponding mnemonic For example STOP 1 is interpreted by the CNC as M5001 1 Chapter 9 PLC Section Page MONITORING H CREATE WINDOW This CNC allows the possibility of creating windows to display the status of the various PLC resources These windows will be shown overlapping the PLC program and the information displayed
500. ted it will be possible to modify the editing parameters any time This way it will be possible to edit texts and shapes of different color and size Press INS to access this menu Once in this mode the CNC will show the softkeys corresponding to the various options to modify these parameters These options are described next Press INS again to quit this mode and return to the previous menu CURSOR ADVANCE With this option it is possible to select the cursor moving step in pixels 1 8 16 24 Follow these steps after pressing this softkey 1 Use the right and left arrow keys to select the desired step The currently selected step will be highlighted 2 Press ENTER to validate the selected step or ESC to quit this mode leaving the previous selection intact When editing a new page or symbol the CNC assumes the default value of 8 Page Chapter 10 Section 6 SCREENEDITOR EDITING CUSTOMSCREENS PAGES ANDSYMBOLS TYPE OF LINE With this option itis possible to select the type of line used to define the graphic elements Follow these steps after pressing this softkey 1 Use the right and left arrow keys to select the desired type of line The currently selected line type will be highlighted 2 Press ENTER to validate the selected step or ESC to quit this mode leaving the previous selection intact When editing a new page or symbol the CNC assumes the fine line by default It is not possible to use t
501. ter 11 Section THEMAINSPINDLE RTPOSS FLWES SYNCER Returns in degrees between 0 and 360 the theoretical spindle position coordinate real following error When accessing this variable the CNC interrupts block preparation andit waits forthis command to be executed before resuming block preparation Returns in degrees max 99999 9999 the amount of following error of the spindle when it is in closed loop M19 When accessing this variable the CNC interrupts block preparation andit waits forthis command to be executed before resuming block preparation Returns in degrees max 99999 9999 the following error of the second spindle with respect to the main spindle when they are synchronized in position Read write variables PRGSSO This variable allows the percentage of the spindle speed selected by program to be read or modified This will be given by an integer between Oand MAXSOVR maximum 255 If this has a value of O it means that it is not selected P110 PRGSSO assigns to P110 the of spindle speed selected by program PRGSSO P111 sets the value indicating spindle speed 96 selected by program to the value of arithmetic parameter P111 Chapter 11 Section Page PROGRAMMINGINHIGH LEVELLANGUAGE VARIABLESFOR 21 THEMAINSPINDLE 11 2 10 VARIABLES ASSOCIATED WITH THE SECOND SPINDLE In these variables associated with the second spindle their values are given in revo
502. ter 11 Section 18 PR HIGH LEVEL UAGE VARIABLESASSOCIATED OGRAMMINGINHIG VELLANG ELS 11 2 9 VARIABLES ASSOCIATED WITH THE MAIN SPINDLE Inthese variables associated with the main spindle their values are given in revolutions min and Override values for the main spindle are given in integers from 0 to 255 Read only variables SREAL SPEED DNCS PLCS PRGS CSS DNCCSS PLCCSS PRGCSS Returns the real spindle turning speed in revolutions per minute P100 SREAL assigns to P100 the real turning speed of the spindle If this variable is accessed block preparation is interrupted and the CNC waits for this command to be executed to resume block preparation Returns the spindle speed in revolutions per minute selected at the CNC This turning speed can be indicated by program by the PLC or DNC and the CNC selects one of these the one with the highest priority being that indicated by DNC and the one with the lowest priority that indicated by program Returns the turning speed in revolutions per minute selected by DNC If this has a value of 0 it means that it is not selected Returns theturning speed inrevolutions per minute selected by PLC If this has a value of 0 it means that it is not selected Returns the turning speed in revolutions per minute selected by program Returns the Constant Surface Speed selected at the CNC Its value is given in the active units m min or feet mi
503. ter value the lower the machining feedrate When operating with Look Ahead itis a good idea to adjust the axes so their following error lag is as small as possible because the contouring error will be at least equal to the minimum following error When calculating the axis feedrate the CNC takes into consideration the following aspects The programmed feedrate The curvature and the corners The maximum feedrates of the axes The maximum accelerations Xo Xo X xXx If any of the circumstances listed below occurs while executing with Look Ahead the CNC slows down to 0 at the previous block and it recovers the machining conditions for Look Ahead in the next motion block Motionless block Execution of auxiliary functions M S T Single block execution mode MDI mode TOOL INSPECTION mode Xo Xx Xx X Ifa Cycle Stop Feed Hold etc occurs while executing in Look Ahead mode the machine may not stop at the current block several additional blocks will be necessary to stop with the permitted deceleration Function G51 is modal and incompatible with G05 G07 and G50 Should any of them be programmed function G51 will be canceled and the new one will be selected On the other hand the CNC will issue Error 7 Incompatible G functions when programming any of the following functions while G51 is active Chapter 7 Section Page ADDITIONALPREPARATORY FUNCTIONS LOOK AHEAD G51 7 G23 G26 G27
504. th INT4 M5027 the one indicated by machine parameter INT4SUB P38 The interruption subroutines are defined like any other subroutine by using the statements SUB integer and RET The interruption subroutines donot change the level of the local arithmetic parameters thus they can only contain global arithmetic parameters Within an interruption subroutine itis possible to use the REPOS X Y Z statement described next Once the execution of the subroutine is over the CNC resumes the execution of the program which was interrupted REPOS X Y Z The REPOS statement must always be used inside an interruption subroutine and facilitates the repositioning of the machine axes to the point of interruption Whenexecuting this statement the CNC moves the axes to the point where the program was interrupted The axes are repositioned one at a time tis not necessary to define all the axes only those to be repositioned The axes forming the main plane move together thus it is not required to program both axes since the CNC moves both of them with the first one The movement is not repeated when defining the second one it is ignored Example Themainplaneisformed by the X and Y axes the Z axis is the longitudinal perpendicular axis and the machine uses the C and W axes as auxiliary axes Itis desired to first move the C axis then the X and Y axes and finally the Z axis This repositioning move may be d
505. th the EXEC instruction from Open programs stored in RAM CARD A or HD using the OPEN instruction from Open programs via DNC using the OPEN instruction from Consult from a PC and through Ethernet the program directory in Consult from a PC and through Ethernet the subroutine directory in Create from a PC and through Ethernet a directory in fitis not in RAM memory it generates an executable code in RAM and it executes it Chapter 1 Section Page OVERVIEW 3 12 MONITOR INFORMATION LAYOUT The monitor is divided into the following areas or display windows 11 50 14 4 Wednesday 27 March 1991 11 50 14 CAP INS EXECUTE SIMULATE JOG TABLES TES 2 F6 1 This window indicates the selected operating mode as well as the program number and the number of active blocks The program status is also indicated in execution or interrupted and if the DNC is 2 This window indicates the time in the hours minutes seconds format 3 This window displays the Messages sentto the operator from the part program or via DNC 4 This window will display messages from the PLC The last message received will be shown regardless of where it has come from If the PLC activates two or more messages the CNC will always display the
506. th the PLC are The PLC program PLC PRG The PLC error file PLC ERR The PLC message file PLC MSG The PLC program PLC PRG may be edited at the front panel or copied from the Memkey Card CARD A or from a peripheral device or PC The PLC program PLC PRG is stored in the internal CNC memory with the part programs and it is displayed in the program directory utilities together with the part programs Before executing the PLC_PRG program it must be compiled Once it is done compiling the CNC requests whether the PLC should be started or not To make the operator life easier and avoid new compilations the source code generated at each compilation is stored in memory After power up the CNC acts as follows Is there a source Runs the executable program stored in memory code No e Ifthere isn t one itcompilesthePLC PRG program 5 already in memory and runs the resulting executable lt 5 gt s program Yes e Ifthereisn tone itlooks foritin the Memkey CARD A Compile amp generate source code e Ifitisn tinthe CARD A either it does nothing Later on when accessing the Jog mode Execution mode etc the CNC will issue the corresponding error message KUN Once the program has been compiled it is not necessary to keep the source program PLC_PRG in memory because the PLC always executes the executable program Once the proper performance of the PLC
507. that these will be assumed by the CNC when turned on after executing M02 M30 or after EMERGENCY or RESET In cases indicated with it must be interpreted that the BY DEFAULT of these G functions depends on the settings of the general CNC machine parameters V means that the G function is displayed next to the machining conditions in the execution and simulation modes n D INTERNAL CNC VARIABLES A 2 R indicates that the variable can be read W indicates that the variable can be modified VARIABLES ASSOCIATED WITH TOOLS Section 11 2 2 Variable TOOL Number of active tool TOD Number of active tool offset NXTOOL Number of the next requested tool waiting for M06 NXTOD Number of the next tool s offset TMZPn n tool s position in the tool magazine TLFDn n tools offset number TLFFn n tool s family code TLENn Nominal life assigned to tool n TLFRn Real life value of tool n TMZTn Contents of tool magazine position n TOXn Tool length offset n along X axis TOZn Tool length offset n along Z axis TOFn Location code F of offset n TORn Tool radius R value of offset n TOIn Tool length wear I of offset n along X axis TOKn Tool length wear K of offset n along Z axis NOSEAn Cutter angle of the selected tool n NOSEWn Cutter width of the selected tool n CUTAn Cutting angle of the selected tool n VARIABLES ASSOCIATED WITH ZERO OFFSETS
508. the CNC s memory not necessarily in the same program making the call 1058 Probing canned cycle not defined DETECTED While executing CAUSE An unavailable probing canned cycle has been defined with the PROBE instruction SOLUTION The probing canned cycles available with the PROBE instruction are 1 through 4 ERROR TROUBLESHOOTING MANUAL 35 8055T CNC 2 1059 Jump to an undefined label DETECTED During execution CAUSE While programming in high level language the N instruction has been programmed but the programmed block number N does not exist SOLUTION When programming the GOTO instruction the block it refers to must be defined in the same program 1060 Label not defined DETECTED During execution CAUSE S The probable causes might be 1 While programming in high level language the RPTN instruction has been programmed but the programmed block number N does not exist 2 While in the Pattern repeat canned cycle G66 Roughing canned cycle along the X axis G68 or Roughing canned cycle along the Z axis G69 a profile has been programmed but one of the data defining the beginning S or end E of the profiles is missing SOLUTION solution for each cause is 1 When programming the RPTN N instruction the block it refers to must be defined in the same program 2 Check the program Edit the label for th
509. the axes Withdrawal Rapid move of the probe G00 from the last touched point back to the approach corner Chapter 10 Section Page PROBING TOOLCALIBRATION 5 3 Withdrawal Rapid move G00 from the approach corner back to the cycle calling point The withdrawal will be carried out in two stages Ist Movement along X axis 2nd Movement along Z axis Once the cycle has ended the CNC will have updated the X and Z values of tool offset table corresponding to the calibrated tool as well as reset its values to zero Page Chapter 10 Section 6 PROBING TOOL CALIBRATION TP104 Chapter 10 PROBING Section TOOLCALIBRATION Page Also the CNC will return the detected errors in the following global arithmetic parameters P298 Error detected along X axis Difference between the real tool length and the value assigned as X tool length in the corresponding tool offset table This value will be given in radius P299 Error detected along Z axis Difference between the real tool length and the value assigned as Z tool length in the corresponding tool offset table Page Chapter 10 Section 8 PROBING TOOL CALIBRATION 10 4 PROBE CALIBRATION CANNED CYCLE Used to calibrate the sides of the table top probe installed in a set position on the machine and with its sides parallel to the X and Z axes This probe will be used later to calibra
510. the coordinates upper or lower with which you wish to limit the axes These coordinates will be given inradius and will be programmed with reference to machine zero home It is not necessary to program all the axes so only defined axes will be limited Example 0310 G20 X20 720 G21 X50 7100 Chapter 3 Section Page AXES ANDCOORDINATESYSTEMS WORK ZONES 13 3 72 USING WORK ZONES Within each work zone the CNC allows you to restrict the movement of the tool either prohibiting its exit from the programmed zone no exit zone or its entry into the programmed zone no entry zone A S 1 No entry zone S 2 No exit zone 0 11 The will take the dimensions ofthe tool into account at all times tool offset table to avoid it exceeding the programmed limits The presetting of work zones is done via Function G22 the programming format being 22 5 In which K Indicates the work zone you wish to define 1 2 3 or 4 S Indicates the enabling disabling of the work zone 8 0 disabled S l enabled as a no entry zone S 2 enabled as a no exit zone On power up the CNC will disable all work zones However upper and lower limits for these zones will not undergo any variation and they can be re enabled through the G22 function Page Chapter 3 Section 14 AXESANDCOORDINATESYSTEMS WORKZONES 4 REFERENCE SYSTEMS 41 REFERENCE POINTS
511. the format defined with the axis machine parameter DFORMAT Each axis has the following fields PART ZERO This field shows the real axis position with respect to part zero MACHINE ZERO This field shows the real axis position with the respect to machine reference zero home Page Chapter 3 Section 8 EXECUTE SIMULATE DISPLAYSELECTION 3 2 3 PART PROGRAM DISPLAY MODE Displays a page of program blocks among which the block being executed is highlighted 3 2 4 SUBROUTINE DISPLAY MODE This display mode shows information regarding the following commands RPT N10 N20 This function executes the program section between blocks N10 thru N20 CALL 25 This function executes subroutine number 25 G87 This function the corresponding canned cycle PCALL 30 This function executes subroutine 30 in a local parameter level When this mode is selected the following must be considered The CNC allows the definition and usage of subroutines which can be called upon from amain program or from another subroutine and this can in turn call upon a second one and so forth up to 15 nesting levels each subroutine call represents a nesting level The machining canned cycles G81 thru G89 use the next nesting level for local parameters when they are active Chapter 3 Section Page EXECUTE SIMULATE DISPLAYSELECTION This display mode shows the following fields or windows PCALL 000002 PCA
512. the format of the canned cycle In some canned cycles there are parameters which only accept positive values 0007 Incompatible G functions DETECTED While editing at the CNC or while executing a program transmitted via DNC CAUSE S The various causes might be 1 When programming in the same block two G functions which are incompatible with each other 2 When trying to define a canned cycle a block containing a nonlinear movement G02 G03 G08 G09 G33 SOLUTION The solution for each cause is 1 There are groups of G functions which cannot go together in the block because they involve actions incompatible with each other For example 901 602 Linear and circular interpolation G41 G42 Left hand or right hand tool radius compensation This type of functions must be programmed in different blocks 2 A canned cycle must be defined in a block containing a linear movement In other words to define a cycle a GOO or a G01 must be active Nonlinear movements G02 G03 G08 and G09 may be defined in the blocks following the profile definition 2 ERROR TROUBLESHOOTING MANUAL FAGOR 3 8055T CNC 0008 Nonexistent G function DETECTED While editing at the CNC or while executing a program transmitted via DNC CAUSE A nonexistent G function has been programmed SOLUTION Check the syntax of the block and verify that a different function is not being edited by mistake 0009 No more
513. the handwheel is connected to the AXES module or to the I O module Returns the multiplying factor set from the PLC foreach handwheel It must be used when having several electronic handwheels or when having a single handwheel but applying different multiplying factors x1 x10 x100 to each axis C B A W V U Z Y X blalcibila cibajc bjaicibia icib alise Once the switch is position at one of the handwheel positions the CNC checks this variable and depending on the values assigned to the cba bits of each axis it applies the multiplying factor selected for each of them cba 000 The one indicated by the switch on the operator panel or keyboard 001 xl Factor 010 x10Factor 100 x100 Factor If there are more than one bit to 1 on an axis the least significant bit is taken into account Thus c b a 111 x1 Factor 110 x10 Factor Note The screen always shows the value selected at the switch It must be used when having a Fagor HBE handwheel Itindicates whether the HBE handwheelis enabled or not the axis to be jogged and the multiplying factor being applied x1 x10 x100 C B A W V U Z Y X c blalc ib a cibiaiciblalcibla jcibjalc b a ciblalcib ais The CNC takes into account the reading of the
514. the number of the program whose attribute is to be changed Press the softkeys F2 tochangethe attribute hidden visible program tochangethe M attribute modifiable program FA tochangethe X attribute executable program Press ENTER OEM PERMISSION Lets see all the programs stored at the CNC whether they are created by the OEM or by the operator and set their attributes To modify the attributes of a program proceed as follows Press the OEM PERMISSION softkey Indicate the location of the program RAM MEMORY CARD A or HD Key in the number of the program whose attribute is to be changed Press the softkeys tochange the O attribute program F2 tochange the H attribute hidden visible program to change the M attribute modifiable program FA to change the X attribute executable program Press ENTER PASSWORDS Lets define each of the passwords that the operator must key in before accessing the various CNC commands General access password MASTERPSW It is requested when trying to access this password option Utilities mode Protections Passwords OEM password OEMPSW It is requested when trying to access OEM permissions Utilities mode Protections OEM permissions User password USERPSW Itis requested when trying to access user permissions Utilities mode Protections User permissions Page Chapter 7 Section 6 UTILITIES PROTECTIONS PLC access passw
515. ther G code while tangential control is active Incline planes The TANGAN variable is read only from the CNC PLC and DNC associated with function G45 It indicates the angular position in degrees referred to the programmed path Also general logic output TANGACT M5558 indicates to the PLC that function G45 is active Function G45 is modal and is canceled when executing G45 alone without defining the Page Chapter 6 Section 30 PATHCONTROL TANGENTIALCONTROL G45 e ADDITIONAL PREPARATORY FUNCTIONS 7 1 INTERRUPTION OF BLOCK PREPARATION G04 The CNC reads up to 20 blocks ahead of the one it is executing with the aim of calculating beforehand the path to be followed Each block is evaluated in its absence at the time it is read but if you wish to evaluate it at the time of execution of the block you use function G04 This function holds up the preparation of blocks and waits for the block in question to be executed in order to start the preparation of blocks once more A case in point is the evaluation of the status of block skip inputs which is defined in the block header Example G04 interrupts block preparation G01 X10 Z20 block skipcondition 1 Function G04 is not modal so it should be programmed whenever you wish to interrupt block preparation It should be programmed on its own and in the block previous to the one in which the evaluation in execution is required Fu
516. there is a high level block that is not an assignment SOLUTION The only high level instructions that can be edited are assignments to local parameters PO thru P25 and global parameters P100 thru P299 0218 The axis cannot be programmed after first point of profile DETECTED While restoring a profile CAUSE Within the selected blocks for restoring the profile and after the starting point of a profile a position has been defined on an axis that does not belong to the active plane A surface coordinate may have been defined after the starting point of the profile SOLUTION The surface coordinate of the profiles is only defined in the starting block of the first profile the one corresponding to the starting point of the outside profile 0219 First point programmed wrong when selecting profile DETECTED While selecting a profile CAUSE The starting point of the profile has been programmed wrong One of the two coordinates defining its position is missing SOLUTION The starting point of a profile must be defined on the two axes forming the active plane 0227 Program between 359 9999 DETECTED While editing at the CNC or while executing a program transmitted via DNC CAUSE In the Electronic threading G33 function the entry angle Q has been programmed with a value out of the 359 9999 range SOLUTION Program an entry angle within the 359 9999 range 0228 Do not program Q with parameter 19
517. tion and then the new axis position may be assigned to the block 5025 See section 4 1 3 Editing mode assisted by the CNC PROFILES c S See section 4 1 4 To edit a new profile After defining the known profile data the CNC generates its corresponding ISO coded program PROFILE SELECTION To modify an existing profile The CNC requests the first and last blocks of the profile Once they are both defined the CNC will show the corresponding graphics Section 4 1 4 describes how to operate with the profile USER When selecting this option the CNC will execute in the user channel the customizing program selected by general machine parameter USEREDIT See section 4 1 1 This is edited in ISO code or high level language 4 1 1 EDITING IN CNC LANGUAGE A program will be edited block by block and each block can be written either in ISO code or high level language or it can be just a program comment Once this option has been selected the softkeys will change colors and they will appear over white background showing the information corresponding to the type of editing possible at that point Also editing help will be available at any time by just pressing the HELP key To quit this help mode press HELP again If ESC is pressed while editing a block the block editing mode is abandoned and the block currently being edited will not be added to the program
518. tion of the PLC program Page Chapter 9 Section 16 PLC MONITORING 9 3 1 MONITORING WITH THE PLC IN OPERATION AND WITH THE PLC STOPPED It must be borne in mind that the CNC initializes all physical outputs and the PLC resources on power up after the key sequence SHIFT RESET and after detecting a WATCHDOG error at the PLC The initialization process sets all resources to 0 except those active low They will be set to ec 1 29 During the monitoring of the PLC program and the various PLC resources the will always show the real values of the resources If the PLC is on note that a program cycle is processed in the following way The PLC updates the real input values after reading the physical inputs from the electrical cabinet Tt updates the values of resources M5000 thru M5957 and R500 thru R559 with the values of the CNC logic outputs internal variables Executes the program cycle Tt updates the CNC logic inputs internal variables with the real values of resources M5000 thru M5957 and R500 thru R559 Tt assigns to the physical outputs electrical cabinet the real values of the corresponding resources Tt copies the real values of resources I M into their own images Chapter 9 Section Page PLC MONITORING PLCIN 17 OPERATIONPLCSTOPPED If the PLC is stopped it will work as follows Physical I Logic Outputs CNC Re
519. to the RAM memory of the CNC If the subroutine is too large to be copied into RAM memory turn the subroutine into a program and use the EXEC statement as described in section 12 6 SUB integer The mnemonic SUB defines the set of program blocks which are programmed after this block as a subroutine by identifying this subroutine with an integer between 0 and 9999 which is specified after it There can not be two subroutines with the same identification number in the CNC memory even when they belong to different programs RET The mnemonic RET indicates that the subroutine which was defined by the mnemonic SUB finishes in this block Example SUB 12 Definition of subroutine 12 G91 G01 F5000 ZP1 X PO 2 1 Endofsubroutine CALL expression The mnemonic CALL makes acall to the subroutine indicated by means of anumber or by means of any expression which results in a number As asubroutine may be called from amain program or a subroutine from this subroutine toasecond one fromthe second to a third etc the CNC limits these calls toamaximum of 15 nesting levels it being possible to repeat each of the levels 9999 times Page Chapter 12 Section 6 PROGRAMCONTROLSTATEMENTS SUBROUTINE STATEMENTS 122 SUB1 SUB2 SUB3 CALL 1 CALL2 CALL3 _ RET RET RED Example 2 2 c cu dx G90 G01 X100 7330 CALL 10
520. to validate it If it is not to be changed press ESC Next the time will be shown as hours minutes seconds 08 30 00 After changing it press ENTER to validate it If it is not to be changed press ESC Chapter 7 Section Page UTILITIES CHANGEDATE 7 8 DNC This operating mode shows the CNC status after a power outage and the status of the DNC communication lines It also lets activate and deactivate DNC communications with a PC 8 1 CNC This screen shows the number of the line that was being executed last time an execution error or a power outage occurred The CNC shows the program number and line number that was executing as well as where the program is stored On the other hand if that program called upon a subroutine and the CNC was executing it it will display The subroutine number the program containing its definition and the line or block of the subroutine being executed Example Device CARD A MEMORY Line number Subroutine 0033 Indicates that the CNC was executing line 7 of program 12 of CARD A That program line called to subroutine 15 and it was executing its line number 33 That subroutine is defined contained in program 1000 which is stored in the CNC s RAM memory Chapter 8 STATUS Section Page 8 2 DNC With this CNC it is possible to access this operating mode when at least one of the serial lines RS232C or RS422 is set t
521. tool on the part Circular interpolation can only be executed on a plane The form of definition of circular interpolation is as follows Page Chapter 6 Section 4 PATHCONTROL CIRCULARINTERPOLATION G02 GO3 a b CARTESIAN COORDINATES The coordinates of the endpoint of the arc and the position of the center with respect to the starting point are defined according to the axes of the work plane The center coordinates which should always be programmed even if they have 0 value are defined in radius by means of the letters I J or K each one of these being associated to the axes as follows X A Axes X U A gt I Axes Y V B gt J Axes Z W C gt Programming format Z X Plane XY G02 G03 5 5 5 5 155 5 J 5 5 25 Plane ZX G02 G03 X 5 5 Zx5 5 155 5 5 5 K Plane YZ G02 G03 5 5 Zx5 5 J 5 5 K 5 5 The programming order of the axes is always maintained regardless ofthe plane selected as are the respective center coordinates Plane AY G02 G03 Y 5 5 5 5 5 5 145 5 Plane XU G02 G03 X 5 5 U 5 5 155 5 145 5 POLAR COORDINATES Itis necessary to define the angle to be travelled Q and the distance from the starting point to the center optional according to the axes of the work plane The center coordinates are defined in radius by means of the letters I J or K each one of these being associated to the axes as follows Axes X U A gt I Axes Y
522. trical elements such as straight and curved lines roundings and chamfers which will be programmed following their own syntax rules 2 Function G00 indicates that the profile definition is done and this block is the beginning of the definition of the rough part profile Program G01 G02 or G03 in the next block because GOO is modal thus preventing the CNC from displaying the corresponding error message 3 The profile description must not contain mirror images scaling factor changes pattern rotation or zero offsets 4 It must not contain high level blocks such as jumps calls to subroutines or parametric programming 5 It must not contain other canned cycles Only the following G functions may be programmed in the profile definition G00 Positioning in rapid G01 Linearinterpolation G02 Clockwise circular interpolation G03 Counter clockwise circular interpolation G06 Circle center in absolute coordinates G08 Arc tangent to previous path G09 Arc defined by three points G36 Automatic radius blend G39 Chamfer G53 Programming with respect to machine zero G70 Programming in inches G71 Programming in millimeters G90 Absolute programming G9 Incremental programming G93 Polar origin preset Itis also possible to program the following functions although they will be ignored by the canned cycle G05 Round corner G07 Square corner G50 Controlled corner rounding The F S T D and M functions Page 24 Cha
523. turns the active tool offset number NXTOOL Returnsthe nexttool number selected butis awaiting the execution of M06 to be active NXTOD Returns the number ofthe tool offset corresponding to the next tool selected but is awaiting the execution of M06 to be active Page Chapter 11 Section 8 PROGRAMMINGINHIGH LEVELLANGUAGE VARIABLESASSOCIATED WITHTOOLS TMZPn Returns the position occupied in the tool magazine by the indicated tool n Read write variables TOXn TOZn TOFn TORn TOIn TOKn TLFDn TLFFn TLENn TLFRn TMZTn NOSEAn NOSEWn CUTAn This variable allows reading or modifying the tool length value along the X axis assigned to the selected tool n in the offset table P100 TOX3 Assignsthe X value of tool offset 3 to Parameter P100 TOR3 P101 Assigns the value of parameter P101 to X of tool offset 3 This variable allows reading or modifying the tool length value along the Z axis assigned to the selected tool n in the offset table This variable allows reading or modifying the value assigned to the location code of the selected tool n in the offset table This variable allows reading or modifying the value assigned to the Radius of the indicated tool offset n in the tool offset table This variable allows reading or modifying the value assigned to the tool length wear along the X axis I of the indicated tool n in the tool offset table
524. type is selected until graphics are deactivated or until the CNC is turned off Every time a type of graphics is selected all the graphic conditions zoom graphic parameters and display area used last will be recovered These conditions remaineven after turning the CNC off The coordinate system used in the graphic display is determined by the general machine parameter GRAPHICS The type of graphic selected will appear to the right of the screen with the following information EXECUTION P000662 N 00172 871 00004 269 00011 755 03000 000 0000 000 0000 000 t CAP INS TYPE OF DISPLAY ZOOM GRAPHIC CLEAR DEACTIVATE GRAPHIC AREA PARAMETERS SCREEN GRAPHICS Chapter 3 EXECUTE SIMULATE Section GRAPHICS Page 19 The theoretical cutter s point coordinates X Z Feedrate and spindle speed currently selected coordinate system used in the graphic display which corresponds to the one set at general machine parameter GRAPHICS clamped part with a superimposed window The part shows the size of the display area and the superimposed window represents the area actually selected for the graphic display LINE GRAPHICS XZ XC ZC This type of graphics draws with colored lines the movement of the tool on the selected planes XZ XC ZC The generated graphic will be lost in the following cases When deleting the screen CLEAR SCREEN softkey Whe
525. ues greater than zero In the Axial drilling tapping canned cycle Parameter I only admits values other than zero Parameter B only admits positive values or zero the Facing canned cycle with arcs or Turning canned cycle with arcs parameter only admits positive values greater than zero e In the Face threading canned cycle or Longitudinal threading canned cycle parameter I B E or C has been defined with zero value In the Grooving canned cycle along the Z axis or Grooving canned cycle along the X axis parameter C only admits positive values greater than zero In the radial drilling tapping or axial drilling tapping canned cycles Parameter 4 only admits values other than zero Parameter B only admits positive values or zero Parameter J only admits positive values greater than zero In the radial slot milling or Axial slot milling canned cycles the dimension of the slot cannot be zero and parameters I and J only take positive values greater than zero 1043 Invalid tool for programmed profile DETECTED While executing CAUSE The selected tool cannot machine any part of the profile SOLUTION Choose another more appropriate tool to machine the profile ERROR TROUBLESHOOTING MANUAL 33 8055T CNC 2 1044 A self intersecting contour has been programmed DETECTED While executing CAUSE Withi
526. uld anyone desire the printout of these predetermined texts feel free to request it from Fagor Automation Chapter 10 Section Page SCREENEDITOR TEXTS 17 10 5 MODIFICATIONS Before accessing this option it is necessary to select the page or symbol to be edited or modified by means of the EDIT option of the UTILITIES mode of operation With this option it is possible to include texts in the selected page or symbol The CNC displays a screen 80 columns wide 640 pixels for X coordinate by 21 rows high 336 pixels for Y coordinate When editing a new page the CNC will position the cursor in the center of the screen and when editing a new symbol it will position it at the upper left hand corner Thecursoris white and can be moved around with the up and down arrow keys and the left and right arrow keys The cursor can also be moved by using the following keystroke combinations SHIFT D Positions the cursor at the last column X638 SHIFT Positions the cursor at the first column X1 SHIFT Positions the cursor at the first row YO SHIFT Positions the cursor at the last row Y334 It is also possible to key in the XY coordinates of the point where the cursor is to be positioned To do this follow these steps Press X or Y The CNC will highlight in the editing parameter display window the cursor position along the selected axis column or row Keyin the position valu
527. umber 0 255 or system page number gt 1000 indicated SYMBOL expression 1 expression 2 expression 3 Displays the symbol 0 255 indicated by expression 1 Its position on the screen is defined by expression 2 row 0 639 and by expression 3 column 0 335 IB expression INPUT text format Displays the text indicated in the data input window and stores the data input by the user in the input variable IBn ODW expression 1 expression 2 expression 3 Defines and draws a white window on screen 1 row x 14 columns Its position on screen is defined by expression 2 row and by expression 3 column DW expression 1 expression 2 DW expression 3 expression 4 Displays the numerical data indicated by expression 2 4 in windows indicated by the value of expression 1 3 SK expression 1 text 1 expression 2 text 2 Defines and displays the new softkey menu indicated WKEY Stops the execution of a program until a key is pressed WBUF text expression Adds the text and the value of the expression once this has been evaluated to the block which is being edited and in the data input window SYSTEM Ends the execution of user customized program and returns to standard CNC menu KEY CODES
528. un a pass parallel to the profile maintaining an L and M stock at the set feedrate F This final roughing pass will eliminate the ridges that were leftin the roughing stage X4 7 Page Chapter 9 Section 42 CANNEDCYCLES FACING WITHARCS G85 Afterthe facing operation with or without finishing pass the canned cycle will always end at the cycle calling point Considerations The machining conditions feedrate spindle speed etc as well as the tool radius compensation G41 G42 must be programmed before calling the cycle Once the canned cycle has ended the program will continue with the same feedrate F and G functions active previous to calling the cycle Only the tool radius compensation will be cancelled G40 if it was active The distance between the starting point and final point Z X along the X axis must be equal to or greater than L The distance between the starting point and the initial point R Q along the Z axis must be equal to or greater than M KX Qs TPOSHOS N gt 7 If the tool position is not correct to execute the cycle will display the corresponding error message Chapter 9 Section Page CANNEDCYCLES FACING WITH ARCS G85 43 9 9 G86 LONGITUDINAL THREADCUTTING CANNED CYCLE With this cycle it is possible to cut outside inside and tapered threads of constant pitch Th
529. upted and the CNC waits for this command to be executed to resume block preparation Page 34 PROGRAMMINGINHIGH LEVELLANGUAGE OTHER VARIABLES Chapter 11 Section 11 3 CONSTANTS Constants are definedas being all those fixed values which cannot be altered by a program The following are considered as constants Numbers expressed in the decimal system Hexadecimal numbers PI f constant Read only tables and variables as their value cannot be altered with a program 11 4 OPERATORS An operator is asymbol which indicates mathematical or logic manipulations which must bemade The CNC has arithmetic relational logic binary trigonometric operators and special operators Arithmetic operators add subtraction also to indicate a negative number multiplication division MOD module remainder of a division EXP exponential Relational operators equal NE different GT greaterthan greater than or equal to LT lessthan LE less than or equal to Logic or binary operators Pl 3 4 P2 5 2 P3 2 3 P4 2 P5 942 P6 7MOD4 P7 2 EXP 3 Pl 7 2 3 P3 6 P4 6 5 4 5 3 7 8 NOT OR AND act as logic operators between conditions and as binary operators between variables and constants IF FIRST AND GS1 EQ 1 GOTO N100 P5 AND NOT P2 OR P3 PROGRAMMINGINHIGH LEVELLANGUAGE Chapter 11 Section
530. urn to the previous menu Itis also possible to insert one of the texts available at the CNC or a text previously keyed in by the user To do this the following softkey options are available Chapter 10 Section Page SCREENEDITOR TEXTS 15 USER DEFINED TEXT Follow these steps to insert the desired text Press ENTER The CNC will display a text editing window The cursor within this window can be moved with right and left arrow keys 2 Type the desired text A rectangle will be displayed which will enlarge as the text is typed in the editing window thus indicating the screen space that this text will occupy Press ESC to cancel this option and the previous menu will be displayed 3 Press ENTER once the text has been correctly typed in The typed text will remain in the editing window and the cursor will be positioned in the main window 4 Position the rectangle by moving the cursor 5 Press ENTER to validate this command and the text will replace the rectangle on the screen Note that once the text has been entered neither its size nor its color can be modified Therefore these options must be selected before pressing ENTER Page Chapter 10 Section 16 SCREENEDITOR TEXTS TEXT NUMBER With this option itis possible to select a text used by the CNC itselfinits various operating modes and insert it into the current page or symbol To insert one of thes
531. us of work zone 1 FZLO X C Returns the value of the lower limit of Zone 1 according to the selected axis X C FZUP X C Returns the value of the upper limit of Zone 1 according to the selected axis X C SZONE Returns the status of work zone 2 SZLO X C Returns the value of the lower limit of Zone 2 according to the selected axis X C SZUP X C Returns the value of the upper limit of Zone 2 according to the selected axis X C TZONE Returns the status of work zone 3 TZLO X C Returns the value of the lower limit of Zone 3 according to the selected axis X C TZUP X C Returns the value of the upper limit of Zone 3 according to the selected axis X C FOZONE Returns the status of work zone 4 FOZLO X C Returns the value of the lower limit of Zone 4 according to the selected axis X C FOZUP X C Returns the value of the upper limit of Zone 4 according to the selected axis X C Chapter 11 Section Page PROGRAMMINGINHIGH LEVELLANGUAGE VARIABLESFOR 13 FEEDRATES 11 2 6 VARIABLES ASSOCIATED WITH FEEDRATES Read only variables associated with real feedrate FREAL Returns the real feedrate of the CNC in mm min or inches min P100 FREAL Assigns the real feedrate value of the CNC to parameter P100 Read only variables associated with function G94 FEED DNCF PLCF PRGF Returns the feedrate selected in the CNC by means of the G94 function This will be in mm minute or inches min
532. user or CNC operator It contains 2 manuals Operating Manual describing how to operate the CNC Programming Manual describing how to program the CNC DNCSoftware Manual Is directed to people using the optional DNC communications software DNC Protocol Manual Is directed to people wishing to design their own DNC communications software to communicate with the CNC FLOPPY DISK Manual Is directed to people using the Fagor Floppy Disk Unit and it shows how to use it Introduction 5 MANUAL CONTENTS The Operating Manual for the Lathe model CNC contains the following chapters Index New Features and Modifications for the Lathe Model Introduction Chapter 1 Chapter 2 Chapter 3 Chapter 4 Chapter 5 Chapter 6 Chapter 7 Chapter 8 Chapter 9 Introduction 6 Summary of safety conditions Shipping terms Fagor documentation for the CNC Manual contents Overview Location of part programs how to edit and execute them Layout of the keyboard operator panel and of the information on the monitor Operating modes Description of the different operating modes of the CNC Execute Simulate Edit JOG Tables It describes how to operate in the Execution and Simulation modes Both operations may be performed in automatic or single block mode Description of the Edit mode of operation The different ways to edit a part program are in CNC language in Teach in mode using the Intera
533. ute This feedrate can be indicated by program by the PLC or DNC and the CNC selects one of these the one with the highest priority being that indicated by DNC and the one with the lowest priority that indicated by program Returns the feedrate in mm minute or inches minute selected by DNC If this has a value of 0 it means that it is not selected Returns the feedrate in mm minute or inches minute selected by PLC If this has a value of 0 it means that it is not selected Returns the feedrate in mm minute or inches minute selected by program Read only variables associated with function G95 FPREV DNCFPR PLCFPR PRGFPR Returns the feedrate selected in the CNC by means of the G95 function This will be in mm rev or inches rev This advance can be indicated by program by the PLC or DNC and the CNC selects one of these the one with the highest priority being that indicated by DNC and the one with the lowest priority that indicated by program Returns the feedrate in mm rev or inches rev selected by DNC If this has a value of 0 it means that it is not selected Returns the feedrate in mm rev or inches rev selected by PLC If this has a value of 0 it means that it is not selected Returns the feedrate in mm rev or inches rev selected by program Read only variables associated with function G32 PRGFIN Returns the feedrate in 1 min selected by program Also the CNC variable FEED associate
534. ution via CNCEXI bit9 Block via CNCEXI interrupted bit 10 CNC ready to accept JOG movements jog handwheel teach in inspection bit 11 CNC ready to receive the CYCLE START command execution simulation and MDI modes bit 12 CNC is not ready to execute anything involving axis or spindle movement OPMODB Indicates the type of simulation currently selected This information is given at the least significant bits with a 1 indicating the currently selected one bitO Theoretical path bit 1 G functions bit2 GMST functions bit3 bit4 Rapid bit5 Rapid S20 Page Chapter 11 Section 30 PROGRAMMING INHIGH LEVELLANGUAGE OTHER VARIABLES OPMODC NBTOOL PRGN BLKN GSn MSn Indicates the axes selected by Handwheel This information is given at the least significant bits indicating with a 1 the one currently selected The axis number corresponds to the order it is programmed Example If the CNC controls the X Y Z U B C axes Axis 1 will be the X axis Axis 2 Y Axis 3 Z Axis 4 U Axis 5 B Axis 6 Indicates the tool number being managed Example There is a manual tool changer Tool T1 is currently selected and the operator requests tool T5 The subroutine associated with the tools may contain the following instructions P103 NBTOOL MSG SELECT T P103 AND PRESS CYCLE START Instruction P103 NBTOOL assigns the number of the tool currently being managed to parameter
535. uts are set to zero Maybe power is missing 2001 2009 axis feedback error DETECTED During execution CAUSE The CNC does not receive feedback signals from the axes SOLUTION Check the feedback connections NOTE This error comes up on differential feedback signals double ended signals DIFFBACK P9 ZYES and sinewave feedback signals SINMAGNI P10 other than zero when parameter FBACKAL P1 1 2ON This error can be avoided by setting parameter FBACKAL P11 OFF although this solution is only temporary 2010 Spindle feedback error DETECTED During execution CAUSE The CNC does not receive the spindle feedback signals SOLUTION Check the feedback connections NOTE This error comes up on differential feedback signals double ended signals DIFFBACK P14 YES when parameter FBACKAL P15 ON This error can be avoided by setting parameter FBACKAL P15 OFF although this solution is only temporary 2011 Maximum temperature exceeded DETECTED Anytime CAUSE The maximum internal CNC temperature exceeded The probable causes might be Poor ventilation of the electrical cabinet enclosure Axis board with some defective component SOLUTION Turn the CNC off and wait until it cools off If the error persists some component of the board may be defective In that case contact the Service Department to replace the board 2012 Axes board without voltage DETECTED During execution CAUSE The 24V are missing f
536. v G95 or making an thread using G33 requires the programming of an S speed 1037 S has not been programmed in G96 DETECTED While executing CAUSE The Constant Surface Speed G96 function has been programmed but a cutting speed has not been programmed or a previous one exists or no spindle gear range has been selected SOLUTION To work at constant surface speed G96 a cutting speed S must be programmed and a spindle range gear must be active 1040 Canned cycle does not exist DETECTED During execution in MDI mode CAUSE An attempt has been made to execute a canned cycle G8x after interrupting a program while executing a canned cycle G8x and then doing a plane change SOLUTION Do not interrupt the program while executing a canned cycle 1042 Invalid parameter value in canned cycle DETECTED While executing CAUSE When defining a canned cycle a parameter has been defined with the wrong value Maybe a negative or zero value has been assigned to a parameter that only admits positive values SOLUTION Correct the parameter definition In the Pattern repeat canned cycle Parameter C only admits positive values greater than zero Parameter A only admits a value of 0 or 1 Parameter J only admits positive values greater than zero the Roughing canned cycle along the Z axis Roughing canned cycle along the X axis parameter C only admits positive val
537. ves the right to modify the contents of the manual without prior notice INDEX VERSION HISTOTY INTRODUCTION 1 OVERVIEW Pon ceu df 1 1 1 1 Considerations Tor the Ethernet connection 2 2 nocet 4 1 2 e obe E ENE ASE A O T 6 1 3 Communication protocol via DNC or peripheral device 6 2 CREATING APROGRAM 2 1 2 2 2 21 2 2152 2 1 3 Creatine a roe an ie DUCI aces e erben bp XEM HIRED CoA Utd 1 pl io all ert uoo bau cub Un iri T 2 eM cd 3 UCU TA OBS T 2 High level language Pr M 3 A E OE E E reer E E N E OE 4 3 AXES AND COORDINATE SYSTEMS 3 1 m 33 34 33 3 3 1 252 3 5 3 3 6 mr 3s Nomenclature eaput a pep Ea ile pv 1 AROS abana Em 2 Plane selection G8 GIOJ 3 Dimensioning part millimeters G71 inches 670 222 222 3 Absolute incremental programming 690 690 6 Programming of coaordamates bI DICE IE 7 Carbon COOPER iieiaei ddenai EE UA HE EA LUPA n Eae 7
538. w symbol it will position it at the upper left hand corner The cursoris white and can be moved around with the up and down arrow keys and the left and right arrow keys The cursor can also be moved by using the following keystroke combinations SHIFT Positions the cursor at the last column X638 SHIFT Positions the cursor at the first column X1 SHIFT Positions the cursor at the first row YO SHIFT Positions The cursor at the last row Y334 It is also possible to key in the XY coordinates of the point where the cursor is to be positioned To do this follow these steps Press X or Y The CNC will highlight in the editing parameter display window the cursor position along the selected axis column or row Keyin the position value corresponding to the point where the cursor is to be placed along this axis The horizontal position is defined as the X value between 1 and 638 and the vertical position as the Y value between 0 and 334 Once these coordinates have been keyed in press ENTER and the CNC will position the cursor at the indicated coordinates Once this option is selected itis possible to modify the editing parameters at any time even while defining the graphic elements This way itis possible to edit texts of different size and color Press INS to access this menu Once in this mode press the corresponding softkey to modify those parameters Press INS again to quit this mode and ret
539. wal G00 to the approach point Depending on the value assigned to J number of holes to be drilled 8 1 The spindle rotates to the new hole position Angular increment A 8 2 Repeats steps 4 5 6 and 7 Stops the live tool Tapping Basic operation 1 2 Rapid move to the approach point located at a D distance from the first hole position The CNC turns on the live tool at the rpm and in the turning direction indicated by parameter S Orients the spindle at the angular position set by Q If the spindle was turning it will stop Tapping Movement of the tapping axis to the bottom ofthe hole I MFO SSO FEED HOLD and CYCLE STOP are disabled The live tool reverses turning direction Chapter 9 Section Page CANNEDCYCLES G61 RADIAL 63 DRILLING TAPPING 6 Withdrawal G01 to the approach point 7 Depending on the value assigned to J number of holes to be tapped 7 The spindle rotates to the new hole position Angular increment A 7 2 Repeats steps 4 5 6 and 7 8 Stops the live tool Considerations The machining conditions feedrate live tool rpm etc must be programmed prior to the calling the cycle Once the cycle has finished the program will resume the feedrate F and the functions which were active before calling the cycle Only the tool radius compensation that was active will be canceled and the program will be resumed in G40 Page
540. wal and the move to the next penetration point are done in rapid G00 After completing the grooving operation the canned cycle will always end at the cycle calling point Considerations The machining conditions feedrate spindle speed etc must be programmed before calling the cycle Once the canned cycle has ended the program will continue with the same feedrate F and G functions active previous to calling the cycle Only the tool radius compensation will be cancelled G40 if it was active The tool must be located at a distance along Z equal to or greater than the one indicated by canned cycle parameter D safety distance with respect to the part If the depth of the groove is 0 the CNC will display the corresponding error message If the width ofthe groove is smaller than the width ofthe cutter NOSEW the CNC will display the corresponding error message Chapter 9 Section Page CANNEDCYCLES GROOVING ALONG 57 Z AXIS G89 9 13 G60 AXIAL DRILLING TAPPING This cycle is available when the machine has a live tool While drilling or tapping the spindle is stopped and the tool is turning This makes it possible to machine anywhere on the workpiece Whether one operation or the other will be performed depends on the format being used For tapping parameter B must be set to 0 and for drilling B must be greater than 0 XA 1 B a B B 55 D
541. wal will be performed in round corner G05 and if negative in square corner G07 If not programmed a value of 0 will be assumed Page 50 Chapter 9 Section CANNEDCYCLES a L 5 5 5 5 J5 5 Defines the finishing pass Tfa positive value is programmed the finishing pass will be performed maintaining the same penetration angle A as for the other passes fanegative valueis programmed the finishing pass will becarried out with radial penetration favalue of 0 15 programmed the previous pass is repeated Defines the thread s pitchx gt 7 With a positivesign ifthe pitch is programmed along the taper With a negative sign ifthe pitch is programmed along the associated axis Ifa value of 0is programmed the CNC will display the corresponding error message The right hand and left hand threads will be programmed by indicating the direction of the spindle rotation M03 or M04 Exit from the thread It defines at what distance from the final point R Q along the X axis starts the withdrawal from the thread If not programmed a value of 0 is assumed Defines the penetration angle of the tool It is referred to the X axis and if not programmed a value of 300 will be taken If A 0 is programmed the thread will be made with radial penetration CANNEDCYCLES FACETHREADCUTTING 51 Chapter 9 Section Page G87 XA Ifthe value a
542. where G92 is defined the programming format being G92X C 5 5 The position values coordinates will be programmed in radius or diameter depending on the settings of axis machine parameter DFORMAT Example TP044 60 100 140 170 200 G90 X50 2200 Positioning in PO G92 70 Preset PO as part zero G91 X30 Z 30 Pl Z 30 P2 X20 P3 X20 7 40 Z 30 5 LIMITATION OF SPINDLE SPEED The spindle speed is limited to the value set by 55 4 by programming G92 55 4 This means that the CNC will not accept from this block onwards the programming of S values higher than the defined maximum Neither is it possible to exceed this maximum value from the keyboard on the front panel Page Chapter 4 Section REFERENCESYSTEMS 4 4 2 ZERO OFFSETS G54 G59 The CNC has a table of zero offsets in which several zero offsets can be selected The aim is to generate certain part zeros independently of the part zero active at the time Access to the table can be obtained from the front panel of the CNC as explained in the Operating Manual or via the program using high level language commands These values are given in radius There are two kinds of zero offsets Absolute zero offsets G54 G55 G56 amp G57 which must be referred to machine zero Additive zero offsets G58 G59 Functions G54 655 G56 G57 658 amp G59 must be programmed alone in the block and work in the
543. with the programmed profile depending on whether there are areas not accessible to the selected tool XA TP09B09 2 Once the finishing pass has ended the tool will return to the point from where cycle was called Page Chapter 9 Section 14 CANNEDCYCLES STOCKREMOVAL CYCLE ALONGXAXIS G68 Optimizing the machining process If only the desired profile is defined CNC assumes that the rough part is cylindrical and it machines it as shown in the drawing on the left XA XA 27 2 X When the profile ofthe rough part is known itis recommended to define both profiles the rough part and the desired final profile The machining is faster since only the stock between both profiles is removed Profile programming syntax When defining the profile there is no need to program the initial point since it is already indicated by cycle defining parameters X and Z When defining 2 profiles the final profile must be defined first and then that of the rough part The first and last profile defining blocks must have a label number These labels will indicate the beginning and end of the profile geometry definition for this canned cycle The profile programming syntax must follow these rules 1 4 5 Itmay be programmed in absolute or incremental coordinat
544. with the same pass this being equal to or smaller than the programmed one C Each turning pass is carried out in the following manner Move 1 2 in rapid G00 Move 2 3 in GOI at programmed feedrate F If D has been programmed the 3 4 move is done in rapid G00 but if D has not been programmed the 3 4 move is done following the profile in 01 at the programmed feedrate F Withdrawal 4 5 in rapid If a final roughing pass has been programmed the CNC will run a pass parallel to the profile maintaining an L and M stock at the set feedrate F This final roughing pass will eliminate the ridges that were leftin the roughing stage Page 38 Chapter 9 Section CANNEDCYCLES TURNING WITHARCS G84 After the turning operation with or without finishing pass the canned cycle will always end at the cycle calling point X4 TPO9GO04 Considerations 4 N N v N The machining conditions feedrate spindle speed etc as well as the tool radius compensation G41 G42 must be programmed before calling the cycle Once the canned cycle has ended the program will continue with the same feedrate F and G functions active previous to calling the cycle Only the tool radius compensation will be cancelled G40 if it was active The distance between the starting point and final point R Q along the X
545. within the forbidden zone 2 DETECTED During execution CAUSE An attempt has been made to move an axis to a point located inside the work zone 2 which has been defined as no entry zone SOLUTION Inthe history of the program work zone 2 defined with G20 G21 has been defined as no entry zone G22 K2 S1 To disable it program G22 K2 SO 1092 Insufficient accelerations for the programmed threadcutting feedrate DETECTED During execution CAUSE A threading operation has been programmed with not enough room to accelerate and decelerate SOLUTION Program a lower feedrate 40 ERROR TROUBLESHOOTING MANUAL 8055T CNC FAGOR 1096 Point within the forbidden zone 3 DETECTED During execution CAUSE An attempt has been made to move an axis to a point located inside the work zone 3 which has been defined as no entry zone SOLUTION Inthe history of the program work zone defined with G20 G21 has been defined as no entry zone G22 K3 S1 To disable it program G22 K3 SO 1097 Point within the forbidden zone 4 DETECTED During execution CAUSE An attempt has been made to move an axis to a point located inside the work zone 4 which has been defined as no entry zone SOLUTION In the history of the program work zone 4 defined with G20 G21 has been defined as no entry zone G22 4 S1 To disable it program G22 K4 50 1098 Wrong work zone boundaries
546. xecute any command of the MODIFY WINDOW option Page 14 Chapter 9 PLC Section MONITORING FIND This option will be executed regardless of which is the active window and it offers the following searching options BEGINNING This softkey positions the cursor over the first program block which is then selected quitting the find option END This softkey positions the cursoroverthe last program block which is then selected quitting the find option TEXT With this functionitis possibleto search atextor character sequence starting from the block indicated by the cursor When this key is selected the CNC requests the character sequence to be found The CNC will consider a text found when itis isolated by blank spaces or separators Thus When looking for I1 it will not find or stop at 112 or 1123 but only at I1 When the text is defined Press the END OF TEXT softkey and the cursor will be positioned over the first occurrence of that text The search will begin at the current block The text found will be highlighted being possible to continue with the search or to quit it Press ENTER to continue the search up to the end of the program It is possible to search as many times as wished and when the end of the program is reached it will start from the first block Press the EXIT softkey or the ESC key to quit the search mode Chapter 9 Section Page PLC MO
547. xecuting CAUSE The number of operations has not been defined SOLUTION The minimum number of machining operations is 1 ERROR TROUBLESHOOTING MANUAL 61 8055T CNC Errors in the multiple slot milling cycle MULTIPLE CYCLE Value of B 0 DETECTED While executing CAUSE The angular step between operations has not been programmed SOLUTION Program an angular step other than zero MULTIPLE CYCLE Value of N 0 DETECTED While executing CAUSE The number of operations has not been defined SOLUTION minimum number of machining operations is 1 MULTIPLE SLOT MILLING CYCLE Value of T 0 DETECTED While executing CAUSE No tool number has been defined SOLUTION tool number must be other than zero MULTIPLE SLOT MILLING CYCLE Value of F 0 DETECTED While executing CAUSE The feedrate F has not been defined SOLUTION Program a positive feedrate other than zero MULTIPLE SLOT MILLING CYCLE Value of S 0 DETECTED While executing CAUSE The spindle speed St of the live tool has not been defined SOLUTION Program a positive spindle speed St other than zero MULTIPLE SLOT MILLING CYCLE Value of I 0 DETECTED While executing CAUSE The depth of the slot has not been defined SOLUTION Program a depth of the slot other than zero MULTIPLE SLOT MILLING CYCLE Value of L 0 DETECTED While executing CAUSE The length of the slot has not been defined SOLUTIO
548. y ofall the devices make copies delete rename and even set the protections for any of them Ethernet When having the Ethernet option and if the CNC is configured as another node within the computer network the following operations are possible from any PC of the network Access the part program directory of the Hard Disk HD Edit modify delete rename etc the programs stored on the hard disk HD Copy programs from the hard disk to the PC and vice versa To configure the CNC as another node within the computer network see section 3 3 4 of theinstallation manual Page Chapter 1 Section OVERVIEW Operations that may be carried out with part programs Consult the program directory in Consult the subroutine directory in Create work directory in Change work directory in Edit a program in Modify a program in Delete a program from Copy from to RAM memory to from Copy from to CARD A to from Copy from to HD to from Copy from to DNC to from Rename a program in Change the comment of a program in Change protections of a program in Execute a part program in Execute a user program in Execute the PLC program in Execute programs using the GOTO or RPT instructions from Execute subroutines stored in Execute programs stored in RAM CARD A or HD using the EXEC instruction from Execute programs via DNC wi
549. ycle G05 Round corner G07 Square corner G50 Controlled corner rounding The F S T D and M functions Considerations The machining conditions feedrate spindle speed etc mustbe programmed before calling the canned cycle The canned cycle calling position must be off the part to be machined and at adistance greater than that defined as finishing stock L M along the X and Z axes X4 gt L TPOOB10 If the tool position is not correct to execute the cycle the CNC will display the corresponding error message Once the canned cycle has ended the active feedrate will be the last one programmed i e the one corresponding to the roughing operation F or the finishing operation The CNC will assume functions 00 G40 and G90 Page Chapter 9 Section 16 CANNEDCYCLES STOCKREMOVAL CYCLE ALONG X AXIS G68 STOCK REMOVAL CANNED CYCLE ALONG Z AXIS 69 This cycle machines the programmed profile maintaining the specified pass between the successive machining passes The basic structure of the block is G68 X ZC DLMKFHSEQ 93 G o N Se 5 22 o H o 4 oo N 5 3 g 3 00 c g 5 g Se 203 gt o l ao s ng 5 A 5 ci 8454 48 Rd 7 89 9 8 t 579 g oH 3 as gt z VLL N MO t4 l 3 Aun 25
550. ycle has finished the program will resume the feedrate F and the G functions which were active before calling the cycle Only the tool radius compensation that was active will be canceled and the program will be resumed in G40 Page 66 Chapter 9 Section ANNED L G62 LONGITUDINAL ae SLOTMILLING 9 16 G63 RADIAL SLOT MILLING CYCLE This cycle is available when the machine has a live tool While performing this operation the spindle is stopped and the tool is turning This makes it possible to machine anywhere on the workpiece Z 05 lt lt P4 The basic block structure is G63XZLIQAJDFS 5 5 Z 5 5 L 5 5 1 5 5 0 5 5 5 5 J4 D5 5 Defines the X coordinate where the cycle is to be run It is programmed in absolute values and in the active units radius or diameter Defines the Z coordinate where the cycle is to berun Itis programmed in absolute coordinates Defines in radius the length of the slot It is referred to the starting point X Z and it will therefore have a positive value when machining in the negative X direction and negatitve when doing it in the opposite direction L in the example above If programmed with a 0 value the CNC will issue the corresponding error Defines the depth of the slot It is referred to the starting point X Z If programmed with a 0 value the CNC will issue the corresponding error

CNC 8055 T

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents